Advertisement
Quick Links
Thank you for choosing Volkswagen
By purchasing this Volkswagen, you have become the owner of a vehicle fitted with the most up-to-date technology and a
multitude of convenience functions for your use and enjoyment.
Before using your vehicle for the first time, please read and observe the information in this owner's manual. It will quickly
help you to become familiar with your vehicle and all of its functions as well as making you aware of dangers to yourself and
others and of how these dangers can be avoided.
If you have any further questions about your vehicle, or if you think that the vehicle wallet has not covered everything, please
get in touch with your Volkswagen dealership. They will always be happy to deal with your questions, suggestions or
problems.
We hope you enjoy driving your new vehicle. Happy motoring.
WARNING
Please observe the important safety instructions for use of child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
seats)
(→ Child
1
Advertisement
Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel
Related Manuals for Volkswagen T-Roc
Summary of Contents for Volkswagen T-Roc
- Page 1 Thank you for choosing Volkswagen By purchasing this Volkswagen, you have become the owner of a vehicle fitted with the most up-to-date technology and a multitude of convenience functions for your use and enjoyment. Before using your vehicle for the first time, please read and observe the information in this owner's manual. It will quickly help you to become familiar with your vehicle and all of its functions as well as making you aware of dangers to yourself and others and of how these dangers can be avoided. If you have any further questions about your vehicle, or if you think that the vehicle wallet has not covered everything, please get in touch with your Volkswagen dealership. They will always be happy to deal with your questions, suggestions or problems. We hope you enjoy driving your new vehicle. Happy motoring. WARNING (→ Child Please observe the important safety instructions for use of child restraint systems on the front passenger seat seats)
- Page 2 About this owner’s manual This owner's manual is valid for all model types and versions of your Volkswagen. The owner's manual describes all equipment and models without indicating whether the equipment is optional or specific to the model type. This means that your vehicle may not have some of the equipment described, or it may only be available in certain markets. The scope of equipment fitted in your vehicle can be found in the sales documentation and you can contact your Volkswagen dealership for further information. A passenger car is described in this owner’s manual. Depending on the market-specific vehicle approval, the model version may also be a light commercial vehicle. All data in this owner's manual correspond to the information available at the time of going to print. Because the vehicle is constantly being developed and further improved, there may be differences between your vehicle and the data in this owner's manual. No discrepancy in data, illustrations or descriptions shall form the basis for any legal claim. Please ensure that the complete vehicle wallet is always in the vehicle if you lend or sell the vehicle to someone else. Volkswagen also recommends restoring the Infotainment system to factory settings in order to delete all personal data. —An alphabetical index is included at the end of this manual. —A list of abbreviations at the end of the manual explains the abbreviations used. —Directions and positions such as left, right, front and rear are normally relative to the vehicle's direction of travel, unless otherwise indicated. —Illustrations help with orientation and should be regarded as a general guide. —This owner's manual was written for left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive vehicles the controls may sometimes differ from those displayed in illustrations or described in the text. —Values given in miles instead of kilometres or mph instead km/h refer to the country-specific instrument clusters or Infotainment systems. —Short definitions appear in a different colour before some sections of this manual. They provide a summary of the function and use of a system or feature. More detailed information about the features, conditions and limitations of systems and equipment can be found in the relevant sections. —Critical safety issues or any technical changes that may be made to the vehicle after publication of this booklet are contained in a supplement that is included with the vehicle wallet. —For better legibility, the male form of address is used. However, this refers to all sexes equally. The shortened linguistic form is used for editorial reasons and does not represent a value judgement. Booklets in the vehicle wallet: —Owner's manual —Supplement (optional) — Other supplements...
- Page 3 Description of symbols Refers to a section within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes that should always be observed. Indicates the end of a section. Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible. The symbol means “Trademark” and identifies an recognised but not (yet) officially registered mark. However, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term. The symbol indicates a registered mark. However, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term. → Symbols like these refer you to warnings within the same section or on a given page. They draw your attention to possible risks of accident or injury and explain how they can be avoided. → → → Cross reference to potential risks of damage to property in the same section or on the page specified. DANGER Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which will lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. WARNING Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. CAUTION Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to slight or medium injuries if you do not observe the warning. NOTICE Texts with this symbol indicate situations which could cause vehicle damage if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol contain additional information on the protection of the environment. Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
- Page 4 Front view Fig. 1 Overview of the front of the vehicle. 1 Windscreen: —with vehicle identification number (→ Wipers) —with windscreen wiper (→ Rain and light sensor) (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —with rain/light sensor positioned near the interior mirror (→ In the engine compartment) 2 Opening lever for bonnet 3 Behind the Volkswagen badge: radar sensor for assist systems (→ Vehicle care, exterior) (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 4 Sensors for assist systems 5 Behind a cover: mounting for towing eye 6 Lights in the bumper...
- Page 5 Side view Fig. 1 Overview of the right side of the vehicle. 1 Tail light clusters , 2 Tank flap 3 Door handles 4 Roof railing (→ Exterior mirrors) 5 Exterior mirrors 6 Headlights , 7 Jacking points...
- Page 6 Rear view Fig. 1 Overview of rear of the vehicle 1 High-level brake light 2 Rear window: —with rear window heating (→ Wipers) —with rear window wiper 3 Volkswagen badge: —for opening the boot lid (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —with camera for parking systems , (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 4 Sensors for assist systems 5 Towing bracket 6 Behind a cover: mounting for towing eye...
- Page 7 Driver door Fig. 1 Driver door (left-hand drive vehicles): controls (mirrored for right-hand drive vehicles). 1 Area: (→ Exterior mirrors) —Rotary knob for exterior mirror adjustment and functions — Buttons for operating the electric windows 2 Door release lever (→ Indicator lamp in the driver door) 3 Central locking button for locking and unlocking the vehicle (→ Indicator lamp in the driver door) 4 Central locking system indicator lamp 5 Stowage compartment: —with bottle holder (→ Emergency equipment) —with stowage facility for high-visibility waistcoat...
- Page 8 Driver side Fig. 1 Overview of the driver side ( left-hand drive vehicles). Fig. 2 Overview of the driver side ( right-hand drive vehicles).
- Page 9 1 Release lever for bonnet (→ In the engine compartment) 2 Lever for adjusting the steering column position 3 Light switch (→ Turn signals) (→ Main beam) 4 Turn signal and main beam lever —With switches and buttons for the driver assist systems 5 Vents 6 Instrument cluster (→ Symbols in the instrument cluster) —with warning and indicator lamps 7 Lever for wipers and washers —With buttons for operating the menus 8 Controls on the multifunction steering wheel: —for driver assist systems —for menu selection —for accepting telephone calls —for audio, navigation —for volume adjustment —for activating voice control (function may not be available depending on vehicle equipment) (→ Digital instrument cluster) —for changing between the current and previous menu 9 Horn 10 Location of the driver front airbag (→ Ignition lock) 11 Ignition lock 12 Pedals (→ Pedals)
- Page 10 Centre console Fig. 1 Overview of the upper section of the centre console. 1 Infotainment system 2 Vent 3 Buttons: —for driving profile selection —for start/stop system —for hazard warning lights —for assist systems for parking and manoeuvring 4 Controls for air conditioning system 5 Controls for air conditioning system...
- Page 11 Fig. 2 Overview of the lower section of the centre console. 1 Stowage compartment: —with USB socket ( → Wireless charging function) —with function for wireless charging in accordance with QI standard (→ Sockets) 2 Cigarette lighter or 12-volt socket 3 Control for driving profile selection 4 Stowage compartment with drink holder 5 Button for Auto Hold function (→ Auto Hold function) 6 Button for electronic parking brake 7 Button for starting and switching off the engine ( Press & Drive) 8 Lever: dual clutch gearbox ® —for DSG (→ Manual gearbox) —for manual gearbox...
- Page 12 Front passenger side Fig. 1 Front passenger side (left-hand drive vehicles): overview of dash panel (mirrored for right-hand drive vehicles). 1 Vents 2 To the side of the dash panel: key-operated switch for disabling the front passenger front airbag 3 Glove box with: —Opening lever —Vent for cooling the glove box ( depending on model) —Mounting for glasses compartment...
- Page 13 Controls in the roof Symbol Meaning Buttons for interior and reading lights . (→ Glass roof) Switch for glass roof (→ Sun blind in the glass roof) Buttons for the sun blind Buttons for emergency call service, information call and breakdown call .
- Page 14 Symbols in the instrument cluster The warning and indicator lamps can light up individually or in combination and indicate warnings, faults or certain functions. Some warning and indicator lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should go out after a while. (→ Dipped beam) For details on indicator lamps that light up in the light switch, see Chapter “Lights” WARNING Failure to observe illuminated warning lamps and text messages can lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and can cause accidents and serious injury. ● Never ignore any illuminated warning lamps or text messages. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. Symbol Meaning Do not drive on! Central warning lamp → and coolant → Priority 1 warning → Buckle-up request and belt status display Fasten seat belt → Operating the electronic parking brake Electronic parking brake Do not drive on! → Brake system fault Brake system fault Do not drive on! → Brake fluid level Low brake fluid level Take over control of the vehicle and be prepared to brake. → Introduction to the topic Do not drive on! → and coolant → Checking the coolant level and refilling coolant Fault in engine coolant system Do not drive on! Fault in steering → Steering fault → Advance warning Collision warning → Fault in the selective catalytic reduction system Fault in the selective catalytic reduction system AdBlue® level too low → AdBlue® level too low...
- Page 15 → Emergency Call Service is restricted Emergency call system operation restricted → Fault in electronic parking brake Electronic parking brake fault Check the brake pads → Brake pad wear indicator → ESC or TCS Flashes: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) or traction control system (TCS) regulating is performing control intervention Lit up: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) fault → ESC fault → ESC switched off manually Electronic Stability Control (ESC) switched off for system reasons → TCS switched off manually Traction control system (TCS) switched off ESC Sport switched on → ESP Sport switched on → Anti-lock brake system failure or fault Anti-lock brake system (ABS) fault → Fuel tank almost empty Fuel tank almost empty Water in the diesel fuel → Water in the diesel fuel → Vehicle lighting fault Vehicle lighting failure → Switching the fog lights on and off Rear fog light switched on Rain/light sensor fault → Fault in rain and light sensor → Fault in rain and light sensor → Fault in wipers Fault in wipers → Washer fluid level too low Washer fluid level too low Fault in steering → Steering fault Do not drive on! → Low tyre pressure Low tyre pressure Do not drive on! Fault in the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System →...
- Page 16 → or Fault in the selective catalytic reduction system AdBlue® level too low → or Fault in the selective catalytic reduction system Selective catalytic reduction system fault Gearbox fault → Clutch is slipping → Gearbox overheated → Fault in the adaptive chassis control (DCC) Adaptive chassis control fault → The engine will not start Depress the brake pedal. The vehicle is held stationary → Auto Hold function → Turn signal indicator lamp Turn signals → Trailer turn signal indicator lamp Trailer turn signal Speed stored, regulation active → Introduction to the topic → Switching the ACC on and off → Introduction to the topic Speed limiter active → Driving with the lane keeping system Lane Assist active Lane Assist active → Driving with the lane keeping system → Switching the ACC on and off The ACC is regulating, no vehicle detected in front → Switching the ACC on and off The ACC is regulating, vehicle in front detected → Switching main beam on and off Main beam or headlight flasher → Displays Outside temperature colder than +4°C (+39°F) → Start/stop system Start/stop system active → Start/stop system Start/stop system not available → Displays Economical mode Service due → Service interval display → and Engine oil level too low...
- Page 17 → or Fault in the selective catalytic reduction system SCR system malfunction → and Alternator fault Fault in the alternator Offroad driving profile → Characteristics of the driving profiles → Characteristics of the driving profiles Eco driving profile → Characteristics of the driving profiles Comfort mode → Characteristics of the driving profiles Normal driving profile → Characteristics of the driving profiles Individual mode Sport mode → Characteristics of the driving profiles → Characteristics of the driving profiles Snow mode → Characteristics of the driving profiles Offroad Individual driving profile. Mobile phone connected via Bluetooth® → Displays → Displays Mobile phone battery charge level → Note about information in the owner's manual Reference to information in the vehicle wallet...
- Page 18 Introduction to the topic When you start the engine after the 12-volt vehicle battery has been totally discharged, replaced or after a jump start, you may find that system settings, such as personal convenience settings and programming, have been changed or deleted. Check and correct the settings as necessary once the 12-volt vehicle battery has been sufficiently charged. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Never operate the instrument cluster while the vehicle is in motion. ● Any settings for the instrument cluster display and displays in the Infotainment system should be made only when the vehicle is stationary in order to reduce the risk of accidents and serious injuries.
- Page 19 Analogue instrument cluster Fig. 1 Analogue instrument cluster in the dash panel. 1 Rev counter (running engine speed in revolutions x 1,000 per minute) (→ Rev counter) (→ Coolant temperature display) 2 Coolant temperature display (→ Displays) 3 Displays 4 Reset, set and display button. 5 Speedometer. (→ Fuel gauge) 6 Fuel gauge...
- Page 20 Digital instrument cluster (digital cockpit) Fig. 1 Digital instrument cluster in the dash panel (illustration). (→ Rev counter) 1 Rev counter (running engine speed in revolutions x 1,000 per minute) 2 Currently selected gear or selector lever position . (→ Displays) 3 Displays 4 Speedometer. 5 Digital speed display. The digital cockpit is a digital instrument cluster with high-resolution TFT colour display. To complement the standard dials such as the rev counter and speedometer, users can choose from various information profiles to view additional data. The term “digital instrument cluster” is used below to refer to the Digital Cockpit. Information profiles Various topical information profiles can be selected via the Digital cockpit menu option in the vehicle settings of the (→ Vehicle settings menu) Infotainment system . Depending on the selected information profile, the digital instrument cluster shows additional information in the centre of the round instruments, or the round instruments are hidden and the additional information is displayed across the whole width of the display. The following information profiles are available: —Selector lever display. Digital display of the current gear or selected position. —Speed. Digital display of the speed. —Consumption. Graphic representation of current consumption and digital display of average consumption. —Range. Digital display of the remaining range. (→ Dynamic Road Sign Display) —Dynamic Road Sign Display. Display of recognised road signs —Distance travelled. Digital display of the distance covered. —Time of arrival information. Digital display of the remaining driving time, distance to the destination and estimated time of arrival. —Acceleration. Graphic representation of longitudinal and lateral acceleration. —Assist systems. Graphic representation of various assist systems. —Height. Digital display of the current height above sea level. —Navigation. Graphic representation of arrow navigation. —Compass. Digital compass display. —Audio. Digital display of current audio playback. The number and scope of the available information profiles may differ depending on the vehicle equipment.
- Page 21 Navigation map in the digital instrument cluster Depending on the vehicle equipment, the digital instrument cluster is able to display a detailed map. To display this map, (→ Menus and information displays) select the Navigation menu item in the instrument cluster The navigation map can be shown in three sizes. With the larger map size, the navigation map is displayed over the entire width of the display. To select the preferred map size: (→ Menus and information 1. Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel to toggle between map sizes displays) 2. Press the arrow button or on the multifunction steering wheel to zoom in and out. 3. To switch to Auto zoom, press the button on the multifunction steering wheel when zooming manually. Depending on the equipment level, navigation is shown on two screens or only one. The navigation map can be displayed in the digital instrument cluster and Infotainment system or only on the Infotainment system display. In the latter case, only navigation arrows are displayed in the digital instrument cluster. Rev counter Rev counter The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed that may be used in each gear when the engine is warm and after it has been run in properly. You should change up a gear or move the selector lever to D /S or lift your foot off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone. NOTICE ● When the engine is cold, avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and overloading the engine. ● The needle on the rev counter should only briefly point into the red area, as engine damage may otherwise be incurred. Changing up a gear early will help to save fuel and reduce engine noise.
- Page 22 Fuel gauge Fig. 1 Fuel gauge in the analogue instrument cluster. Fig. 2 Fuel gauge in the digital instrument cluster. Fuel tank almost empty The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The reserve volume (red marking) is being consumed . —Fill the tank as soon as possible. When the indicator lamp lights up, the auxiliary heater and the fuel-powered supplementary heater switch off automatically. Water in the diesel fuel The indicator lamp lights up yellow. —Switch off the engine and seek expert assistance. WARNING Driving when the fuel level is too low can lead to the vehicle coming to a standstill in traffic, potentially causing accidents and serious injuries. ● When the fuel level is too low, the fuel supply to the engine could be irregular, especially when driving up or down hills and inclines. ● The steering, all driver assist systems and brake support systems will not function if the engine “sputters” or stops completely due to a lack of fuel or irregular fuel supply.
- Page 23 ● Always refuel when the fuel tank is still 1/4 full. This reduces the risk of running out of fuel and breaking down. NOTICE Do not run the fuel tank empty. Irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and allow unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system. The small arrow next to the petrol pump symbol in the fuel gauge shows you the side of the vehicle on which the tank flap is located. Coolant temperature display Fig. 1 Coolant temperature display in the analogue instrument cluster (schematic diagram). Fig. 2 Coolant temperature display in the digital instrument cluster (schematic diagram). A Cold area. The engine has not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high engine revs and heavy engine loads until the engine is warm. B Normal area. C Warning area. The temperature may also rise into the warning range when the engine is working hard, especially at high ambient temperatures. and coolant The red central warning lamp lights up. A text message is also shown on the instrument cluster display. The coolant level is not correct or there is a fault in the coolant system. Do not drive on!
- Page 24 —Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. (→ Coolant) —Check the coolant level —Seek expert assistance if the warning lamp does not go out although the coolant level is adequate. Displays Possible information on the instrument cluster display Depending on the vehicle equipment, various kinds of information can be displayed on the instrument cluster display: —Open doors, bonnet and boot lid. —Warning and information messages. —Mileage displays. (→ Clock) —Time —Multimedia and navigation information. —Telephone information. —Outside temperature. —Compass display. —Selector lever position. (→ Gear-change indicator) —Gear-change indicator (→ Driving data display (multifunction display)) —Driving data display (multifunction display) and menus for various settings (→ Service interval display) —Service interval display (→ Menus and information displays) —Speed warning —Speed warning for winter tyres. —Start/stop system status display . (→ Dynamic Road Sign Display) —Road signs detected by the Dynamic Road Sign Display system —With some equipment levels: status display for Active Cylinder Management (ACT® (→ Driving economically) —Economical mode . —Engine code (EC —Display of driver assist systems. (→ Personalisation) —Personalisation: welcome and user selection Open doors, bonnet and boot lid The instrument cluster display indicates if any doors, the bonnet or boot lid are open once the vehicle has been unlocked, and while the vehicle is in motion. In some cases, a signal tone is also given. Different instrument cluster designs may have different displays.
- Page 25 —When the vehicle is stationary. —When the auxiliary heater is being used. —When travelling at very low speeds. The measuring range is between -45°C (-49°F) and +76°C (+169°F). WARNING Streets and bridges can be iced over at outside temperatures above freezing point. ● The snowflake symbol indicates that there is a risk of black ice. ● There may also be black ice on the road at outside temperatures above +4 °C ( +39 °F) when the snowflake symbol is not displayed. ● You should never rely solely on the outside temperature display! Telephone information If a mobile device is connected via Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® symbol is shown in the instrument cluster display . In addition, the symbol shows the charge level of the mobile device battery Gear-change indicator While the vehicle is in motion, the instrument cluster may show which gear should be selected to reduce fuel consumption (→ Gear-change indicator) Mileage displays The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car. The trip recorder (trip) shows the distance travelled since the trip recorder was last reset. — V ehicles with analogue instrument cluster: Briefly press the button in the instrument cluster to reset the trip recorder to zero (→ Analogue instrument cluster) — V ehicles with digital instrument cluster: Reset the trip recorder via the Infotainment system or via the service menu (→ Service menu) Speed warning for winter tyres (→ Menus and information A display in the instrument cluster indicates when the set maximum speed has been exceeded...
- Page 26 V ehicles with digital instrument cluster: (→ Service menu) 1. Opening the Service menu 2. Select the Engine code menu option. Different instrument clusters are available, which means that the versions and displays may vary. In displays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the indicator lamps. Some displays in the instrument cluster may be overridden by sudden alerts, e.g. incoming telephone calls. Depending on the vehicle equipment level, some settings and displays may also appear in the Infotainment system. If several warnings are present, the symbols will appear for several seconds, one after another. The symbols will continue to appear until the faults are rectified. If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a qualified workshop to have the malfunctions rectified. Driving data display (multifunction display) The driving data display (multifunction display) shows driving and fuel consumption data. Different driving data can be displayed depending on the vehicle equipment level. The displayed driving data depends on the current driving behaviour, the vehicle condition (e.g. particulate filter regeneration) and the current driving situation (e.g. urban or motorway driving). The driving data values are determined as average values over route sections of varying length. This means that the currently displayed value may differ from the actual average value. Switching between displays Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: on the wiper lever . —Press the rocker switch Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: —Press the or button . Switching between recorders Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: button on the wiper lever . —Press the Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: button on the multifunction steering wheel . —Press the Since start recorder The memory will be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
- Page 27 (miles) or 9,999.9 km (miles) distance covered. The memory is deleted if one of these maximum values is exceeded. The maximum values vary depending on the instrument cluster version. Clearing a driving data recorder Select the memory that you wish to delete. Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: button on the wiper lever . —Press the Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: button on the multifunction steering wheel . —Press the Selecting displays (→ Vehicle settings You can select which driving data you want to display in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system menu) Average consumption display The average fuel consumption is displayed after around 300 metres (984 ft.). Range display Approximate distance in km (miles) that can still be covered with the same driving style. SCR range or Range display Approximate calculation of the distance in km (miles) that can still be travelled with the current AdBlue® tank level with the same driving style. This display appears only when the remaining range reaches around 2,400 km (around 1,491 miles) and cannot be cancelled. Average speed display The average speed is displayed after around 100 metres (around 328 ft.). Setting the speed warning Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Warning at --- mph. 2. Press the button on the wiper lever to save the current speed and activate the warning. 3. Within approximately five seconds, set the speed using the rocker switch on the wiper lever. Then press the button or simply wait a few seconds. The speed is now saved and the warning is activated. 4. To deactivate, press the button again. The stored speed will be deleted. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Warning at --- mph.
- Page 28 Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and can therefore change automatically when (→ Personalisation) the user account is changed Warning and information messages The system runs a check on certain components and functions in the vehicle when the ignition is switched on or while the vehicle is in motion. Malfunctions are indicated by red and yellow warning symbols with information messages on the instrument cluster display. An acoustic warning is also given in certain cases. The appearance of the text messages and symbols can vary depending on the version of the instrument cluster. In addition, a list of current malfunctions can be opened manually. To do so, choose Vehicle status or Vehicle in the menu (→ Menus and information displays) Priority 1 warning The red central warning lamp flashes or lights up, in some cases together with acoustic warnings or additional symbols. Do not drive on! Danger. Check the fault. Seek expert assistance if necessary. Priority 2 warning The yellow central warning lamp flashes or lights up, in some cases together with acoustic warnings or additional symbols. Malfunctions and insufficient service fluids can damage the vehicle and cause it to break down. Check the fault as soon as possible. Seek expert assistance if necessary. Note about information in the owner's manual You will find further information on the warning in the owner's manual. Information message Information about various procedures within the vehicle. If several warnings are present, the symbols will appear for several seconds, one after another. The symbols will continue to appear until the faults are rectified. If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a qualified workshop to have the malfunctions rectified.
- Page 29 Driver Alert System (break recommendation) Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: Driver Alert System symbol. The Driver Alert System informs the driver if their driving shows signs of tiredness. Function and operation The Driver Alert System determines the driving behaviour at the beginning of a journey and uses it to evaluate the tiredness of the driver. This is compared to the behaviour of the driver while actually driving. If the system detects driver fatigue, an acoustic warning signal will sound and a symbol will be displayed on the instrument cluster display together with a → Fig. 1 supplementary text message . The message in the instrument cluster display is displayed for about five seconds and may be repeated once. The last displayed message is saved by the system. The message on the instrument cluster display can be hidden as follows: Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel button on the wiper lever. —Press the Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel button on the multifunction steering wheel. —Press the Function conditions The driving behaviour can be evaluated only when the speed is above around 60 km/h ( around 37 mph) up to approximately around 200 km/h (around 125 mph). Switching on and off (→ Vehicle settings The Driver Alert System can be switched on and off in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system menu) Function limitations The Driver Alert System has system-related limitations. The following conditions can limit the function of the Driver Alert System, or prevent it from working altogether: —When travelling at speeds of less than approximately 60 km/h ( around 37 mph). —When travelling at speeds of more than approximately 200 km/h ( around 125 mph). —Twisting roads. —Poor roads. —Adverse weather conditions. —Sporty driving style.
- Page 30 —The ignition is switched off. —The driver seat belt is unfastened and the driver door is open. —The vehicle has been stationary for longer than around 15 minutes. The Driver Alert System is automatically reset in the event of an extended period of slow driving (speed less than around 60 km/h (around 37 mph)). If the speed is increased again, the system evaluates the driving behaviour once more. WARNING The intelligent technology used in the Driver Alert System cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the Driver Alert System tempt you into taking any risks when driving. During a long trip, plan regular and sufficient breaks. ● The driver is responsible at all times for their fitness to drive. ● Never drive a vehicle when you are tired. ● The system cannot always detect the driver's level of alertness. Observe the information in the section “Function limitations”. ● In certain situations, the system may wrongly interpret intentional driving manoeuvres as a lack of alertness from the driver. ● No urgent warning will be given in the event of the phenomenon known as “microsleep”. ● Observe the information in the instrument cluster display and respond according to the commands. The Driver Alert System has been developed for use only while driving on motorways and good roads. If there is a system fault, proceed to a qualified workshop immediately to have the system checked. Dynamic Road Sign Display Dynamic Road Sign Display uses a camera in the base of the interior mirror to monitor standard road signs and informs the driver of any detected speed limits or overtaking restrictions. Within the limits of the system, the system also displays additional signs, e.g. temporary restrictions or restrictions in wet conditions. In some cases, the system can also display the current speed limits on non-signposted routes. Displays In addition to speed limits and overtaking restrictions, Dynamic Road Sign Display also detects the road sign which indicates that all restrictions have been lifted on motorways and main roads in Germany. In all other countries in which the system is operated, the current speed limit is displayed instead. The road signs detected by Dynamic Road Sign Display are displayed on the instrument cluster and in some cases also on the Infotainment system, depending on which system is installed in the vehicle. No road signs available. The system is in the initialisation phase. OR: the camera has not detected any regulatory or warning signs. Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display System fault. Go to a qualified workshop.
- Page 31 Continuous display of road signs in the instrument cluster can be switched on and off in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system. Display of road signs Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: example displays of the Dynamic Road Sign Display function. Fig. 2 On the instrument cluster display: example displays of the Dynamic Road Sign Display function. Fig. 3 On the instrument cluster display: example displays of the Dynamic Road Sign Display function. After validation and evaluation of the information from the camera, the Infotainment system and the current vehicle data, the activated Dynamic Road Sign Display shows up to three valid road signs with the accompanying additional signs → Fig. 1 → Fig. 2 → Fig. 3 1st position: The road sign that currently applies to the driver is shown on the left-hand side of the display, e.g. a speed limit of 130 km/h (80 mph).
- Page 32 2nd position: Road signs that do not always apply (e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) “when wet”) are shown in second place. Additional sign: if the windscreen wiper is active while the vehicle is in motion, a road sign with the additional “when wet” sign that now applies will be moved left to the first position, for example. 3rd position: A further road sign can be displayed in the third position, e.g. “overtaking not permitted at certain times”. Speed warning If the Dynamic Road Sign Display detects that an applicable speed limit has been exceeded, it can issue an acoustic warning signal or display a message on the instrument cluster display. (→ Vehicle settings The speed warning can be set or completely deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system menu) . The settings can be adjusted in increments of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range between 0 km/h (mph) and 15 km/h (9 mph) above the permitted maximum speed. Trailer mode In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket and a trailer with an electrical connection to the vehicle, the display of road signs that may apply to the vehicle when towing a trailer, e.g. applicable speed limits and no-overtaking signs, can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) In trailer mode, the speed warning function display can be adjusted to the type of trailer or to legal requirements. The settings can be adjusted in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a range between 60 km/h (40 mph) and 130 km/h (80 mph). If a higher speed is set than is permitted for driving with a trailer in the country in which you are currently travelling, Dynamic Road Sign Display automatically issues a warning at the usual speed limit, e.g. at 80 km/h (50 mph) in Germany. If the speed warning for the trailer is deactivated, Dynamic Road Sign Display issues warnings as if the vehicle was being driven without a trailer. Function limitations Dynamic Road Sign Display is subject to system-related limitations. The following conditions can restrict the function of Dynamic Road Sign Display, or prevent it from working altogether: —Poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or heavy spray. —Glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic or sunlight. —High speeds. —A covered or dirty camera. —Road signs located outside of the camera's field of view. —Partially or fully hidden road signs, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehicles. —Non-standard road signs. —Damaged or bent road signs. —Variable road signs on gantries (changeable road sign display using LEDs or other light sources). —Out-of-date map material in the Infotainment system. —Vehicles with road sign stickers, e.g. speed restrictions on trucks. WARNING The intelligent road sign recognition system technology cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by Dynamic Road Sign Display tempt you into taking any risks...
- Page 33 when driving. The system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog can cause traffic signs to be not displayed or be incorrectly displayed by the system. ● If the camera's field of view is dirty, covered or damaged, the function of the Dynamic Road Sign Display system may be impaired. WARNING Driving recommendations and traffic symbols displayed by the Dynamic Road Sign Display system may differ from the current traffic situation. ● Not all road signs can be recognised by the system and displayed correctly. ● Road signs on the road and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and displays provided by the Dynamic Road Sign Display system. NOTICE Availability of the Dynamic Road Sign Display function is limited in waypoint mode (waypoint navigation) of the Infotainment system. Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and can therefore change (→ Personalisation) automatically when the user account is changed Time Setting the time on the Infotainment system 1. Depending on the version, press the (→ Infotainment system controls and displays) button or function button and open the Vehicle menu in the Infotainment system. Press the button or function button, depending on version. 2. Depending on the version, open the Settings menu. (→ Vehicle settings menu) 3. To set the time, select the Time and date menu option Setting the time on the analogue instrument cluster 1. To set the time (on all vehicle clocks), press and hold the button in the instrument cluster until the text T ime appears...
- Page 34 Lap timer With the appropriate equipment the lap timer can be shown on the instrument cluster display . The lap timer has the option of timing your own laps manually in the vehicle on a race track, to store the times and to compare them with best times. The following higher-level menus can be displayed: —Lap timer. —Lap (with the current lap number). —Statistics. Switching between the menus —Press the or button on the multifunction steering wheel. The following list shows an example of how the menus in the instrument cluster display are structured. The actual scope of the menus and the names of the individual menu options vary according to the instrument cluster design and the vehicle electronics. Menu displays and functions Lap timer menu: Start Starts the lap timer. Since start Timing starts when the vehicle drives off. If it is already in motion, timing starts when the vehicle has meanwhile come to a standstill. Statistics An overview of the laps driven until now are displayed. Lap menu: Stop! Active timing is interrupted. This will not end the lap. Continue Paused timing resumes. Split time: A split time will be displayed for approximately five seconds. Active timing continues parallel to this. New lap Timing of the current lap will then be interrupted and a new lap will begin. The time of the completed lap will be carried over to the statistics.
- Page 35 Abort lap The timing is ended and disregarded. The current lap is not entered into the statistics. Timing is ended. The lap is entered into the statistics. Statistics menu: Back Return to the previous menu. Reset This resets all stored statistics data. In the menu Statistics, the lap times most recently achieved are shown. If the maximum number of 99 laps or the maximum time of 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds has been reached, new timing can only be started after the statistics have been reset. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Adjust the lap timer settings and access statistics only when the vehicle is stationary. ● When the vehicle is in motion, use the lap timer only in driving situations which are easy to control. Button for driver assist systems Depending on the vehicle equipment, the button for driver assist systems is located on the turn signal and main beam lever or on the multifunction steering wheel. The driver assist systems can be switched on and off using the button in the Assist systems menu. 1. Press the button to open the Assist systems menu. 2. Select the driver assist system and switch it on or off. A tick indicates that a driver assist system is switched on. 3. Confirm your selection by pressing the button on the wiper lever or the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Alternatively, you can also switch the driver assist systems on and off in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu)
- Page 36 Service menu Settings can be made in the Service menu depending on the vehicle equipment. Opening the Service menu To open the Service menu, select the Range information profile in the instrument cluster and press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel for around four seconds. You can now navigate in the menu in the usual way using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Resetting the service interval display Select the Service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument cluster display. Resetting the oil service Select the Reset oil service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument cluster display. Resetting the trip recorder To reset the trip recorder, select the Reset trip menu and follow the instructions on the instrument cluster display. Engine code Select the Engine code menu. The engine codes are now shown on the instrument cluster display. Setting the time Select the Time menu and set the correct time with the arrow buttons and . Copyright Select the Copyright menu to access copyright information.
- Page 37 Press the button or function button, depending on version. 2. Depending on the version, open the S ettings menu. 3. Select the Service menu option to display the service information. V ehicles with analogue instrument cluster: 1. Press and hold the button in the instrument cluster until the text S ervice appears on the display. 2. Release the button. The current scheduled service will be shown in the display. (→ Service menu) V ehicles with digital instrument cluster: You can retrieve the Service date only via the Service menu Resetting the service interval display If the service or the inspection was not performed by a Volkswagen dealership, the display can be reset as follows: V ehicles with analogue instrument cluster: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Press and hold the button in the instrument cluster. 3. Switch on the ignition again. 4. Release the button when one of the following messages appears on the instrument cluster display: Reset oil service?
- Page 38 or Reset inspection?. 5. Press the button on the instrument cluster to confirm. (→ Service menu) V ehicles with digital instrument cluster: The service interval display can only be reset via the Service menu Do not reset the service interval display between service intervals otherwise incorrect data may be shown. If the oil change service was manually reset, the service interval display then also changes to a fixed service interval in vehicles with flexible oil change service. The service message disappears after a few seconds when the engine is running or when the message is confirmed in the instrument cluster. If the 12-volt vehicle battery was disconnected for long periods in vehicles with flexible service, the system cannot calculate the time at which the next service is due. The information shown in the service interval display may therefore be incorrect. In this case, observe the maximum permissible maintenance interval. Introduction to the topic Some menu options can only be opened when the vehicle is stationary. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Never operate the menus on the instrument cluster display while the vehicle is in motion. If the engine is started with a totally discharged or replaced 12-volt vehicle battery, system settings such as time, date, personal convenience settings and programming may have been changed or deleted. Check and correct the settings as necessary once the 12-volt vehicle battery has been sufficiently charged. If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a qualified workshop to have the malfunctions rectified.
- Page 39 Instrument cluster menus The range of content and layout of the menus and information displays depend on the vehicle electronics and the level of vehicle equipment. Qualified workshops can program and modify other functions depending on the vehicle equipment level. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Some menu options can only be opened when the vehicle is stationary. (→ Driving data display (multifunction display)) —Driving data —Assist systems. —Navigation. —Audio. —Telephone. (→ Warning and information messages) —Vehicle status (→ Digital instrument cluster) —Views (→ Personalisation) —Personalisation (user selection)
- Page 40 Operation using the wiper lever Fig. 1 On the right of the steering column: buttons on the wiper lever (illustration). If any priority 1 warning messages are displayed, you will be unable to open any menus. Some warnings can be confirmed and → Fig. 1 switched off with the button. Selecting the menu or Infotainment system display —Switch on the ignition. —Personalisation: select user. → Fig. 1 button, several times if required. —If a message or the vehicle pictogram is displayed, press the → Fig. 1 to display the menus (→ Menus and information displays) or to return to the —Hold down the rocker switch menu selection from a menu or an information display. —To browse through the menus, press the rocker switch up or down. → Fig. 1 or wait until the menu or information display opens —To open the menu or information display shown, press automatically after a few seconds. Changing settings in menus → Fig. 1 on the wiper lever upwards or downwards until the desired —In the menu displayed, press the rocker switch menu option is marked. A frame appears around the selected option. → Fig. 1 button to make the required changes. A tick indicates that the particular system or function is —Press the active. Returning to menu selection In the menu, select the Back menu option to exit the menu. If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a qualified workshop to have the malfunctions rectified.
- Page 41 Operation using the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 1 Right-hand side of the multifunction steering wheel: controls for using the menus and information displays in the instrument cluster. (→ Warning and information messages) If any priority 1 warnings are displayed, you will be unable to open any menus . Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden using the button on the multifunction steering wheel → Fig. 1 Selecting the menu or Infotainment system display —Switch on the ignition. —Personalisation: select user. → Fig. 1 , several times if required. —If a message or the vehicle pictogram is displayed, press the button → Fig. 1 —Press the or button to display a menu or browse through a menu button → Fig. 1 or wait until the menu or information —To open the menu or information display shown, press the display opens automatically after a few seconds. Changing settings in menus → Fig. 1 —Press the arrow buttons or in the displayed menu until the required menu option is marked. A frame appears around the selected option. → Fig. 1 button to make the required changes. —Press the The respective function is switched on if the checkbox in the function button is ticked . Returning to menu selection → Fig. 1 —Press the or button VIEW button on the multifunction steering wheel ...
- Page 42 Classic View without information profile. Automatic The information profiles adapt to the selected driving profile. Only for vehicles with driving profile selection. Memory entry 1 Individual selection of the information profiles. Memory entry 2 Individual selection of the information profiles. Memory entry 3 Only for vehicles with navigation system fitted as standard. If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a qualified workshop to have the malfunctions rectified. Introduction to the topic The Infotainment system combines key vehicle systems in a central operating unit, e.g. menu settings, radio or navigation system. General information on operation The following section contains relevant information on the settings that can be adjusted in the Vehicle settings menu. Systems settings and vehicle information display Depending on version, information can be displayed or settings adjusted by pressing the button and opening the Vehicle menu or after pressing the button, opening the Settings menu and tapping the corresponding function buttons: (→ Vehicle settings menu) —Vehicle settings (setup) (→ Performance monitor) —Depending on equipment: performance monitor (→ Lap timer in the Infotainment system) —Depending on equipment: lap timer (→ Offroad display) —Offroad display —Auxiliary heater settings. —Digital instrument cluster. —Active media. —Driving data. —Vehicle status. —Radio station selection. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Operating the Infotainment system can distract you from the road.
- Page 43 When you start the engine after the 12-volt vehicle battery has been totally discharged or changed, you may find that system settings (time, date, personal convenience settings and programming) and user accounts have been changed or deleted. Check and correct the settings as necessary once the 12-volt vehicle battery has been sufficiently charged. Vehicle settings menu You can switch individual functions and systems on and off and adjust the settings in the vehicle settings of the Infotainment system. Opening the Vehicle settings menu 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Switch on Infotainment system if necessary. 3. Touch the Vehicle function button. 4. Touch the corresponding function buttons from Interior or Exterior to open additional submenus in the Vehicle menu or to adjust settings in the menu options. 5. Open the desired menu and make the desired setting. The activated functions are highlighted in colour.
- Page 44 Performance monitor Fig. 1 On the Infotainment system display: performance monitor. 1 Display areas. 2 Arrow buttons for changing to the lap timer. The performance monitor is a display for sporty driving. The digital instruments display real-time values for engine power, temperature and acceleration that are determined by sensors on the vehicle. This provides the driver with an overview of driving dynamics. Opening the performance monitor button or function button on the Infotainment system. —Press the —Tap the Vehicle function button. —Tap the Selection function button. —Tap the Sport function button. (→ Lap timer in the Infotainment system) If you would like to switch between the performance monitor and the lap timer , tap → Fig. 1 one of the arrow buttons on the left and right above the instruments Selecting instruments and setting units The display can show a maximum of three instruments at the same time. Each instrument can be selected for each display → Fig. 1 area (left, middle, right). To change between instruments, swipe vertically over the display. The currently selected instrument will then disappear and a new instrument will appear. (→ Vehicle settings menu) The units of measurement can be adjusted for some instruments in the Infotainment system The following instruments can be displayed: → Fig. 1 (left) shows the pressure in the charge air system —Charge pressure display: the charge pressure display between the turbocharger and engine (in the unit “bar”). The further to the right the needle on the scale, the higher the engine power output. → Fig. 1 (centre) shows the acceleration value in the centre (in —Accelerometer (G-meter): the accelerometer (G-meter) the unit “g”). The red marking in the grid-type area shows the acceleration level and the direction of the acting force (in the opposite direction according to physical laws). If you drive to the left, for example, the red marking will move in the right...
- Page 45 move up. The level of acceleration is indicated by the position of the red marking which moves outwards. If the acceleration increases, the red marking will move away from the centre area. → Fig. 1 (right) shows the current engine power output as a digital value and on the —Power display: the power display surrounding scale (in kW). —Coolant temperature display: the needle may move further in a clockwise direction under high engine loads and with high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long as the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display does (→ Coolant temperature display) not light up or flash —Oil temperature display: the needle is in the middle area under normal driving conditions. If the needle is in the bottom left area, this means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid excessively high speeds and acceleration when the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. The needle may move further in a clockwise direction under high engine loads and at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long as the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display does not light up or flash. Adapting the display areas to the driving situation Choose the three possible instruments corresponding to your individual driving style and the driving situation. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Operating the Infotainment system can distract you from the road. ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. NOTICE When starting from cold, avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Due to the principle of performance determination used in the vehicle, the physical accuracy of the displayed values is not guaranteed. Lap timer Fig. 1 On the Infotainment system display: lap timer with stopwatch, function button and lap times.
- Page 46 Fig. 2 Function button on the Infotainment system display: time measurement for paused, current and completed lap. 1 Stopwatch. 2 Function button with current lap time. 3 Stored lap times. 4 Start or continue time measurement (possible only when the ignition is switched on). Press Start to start time measurement. Time measurement starts automatically as soon as the vehicle moves forwards. A new first lap can be started when the data in the statistics have been reset. 5 Cancel current lap. The lap time is deleted. --: --:--.-- is displayed in the statistics. 6 End time measurement. 7 Pause time measurement or cancel current lap (when time measurement is running). 8 Start new lap. The last lap time is stored and a new lap starts. The overall time of the laps driven is shown in the statistics. 9 Display split time. The stopwatch stops for a few seconds and the split time is displayed. 10 Display statistics after ending or aborting time measurement (number of laps, overall time, fastest and slowest slaps, average value of all lap times, all lap values). Press Reset to reset the statistics. The lap timer provides you with the option of timing your own laps manually in the vehicle on a race track, storing the times and comparing them with previously measured best times. A maximum of 99 laps and a maximum time of 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds can be recorded. If one of these limits has been reached, the data in the statistics must be deleted before a further time measurement. Opening the lap timer 1. Press the Infotainment system button or function button, depending on the version of the Infotainment system. 2. Tap the Vehicle function button. 3. Tap the Selection function button.
- Page 47 You can change between the lap timer and performance monitor at any time using the arrow buttons. Measuring lap times The stopwatch measures the lap time in two areas: The red needle and the numerical value in the centre show the running time in seconds. The smaller display in the inner area shows minutes and hours. The display on the right side shows the current lap time with an accuracy of 1/100 seconds. There is no difference between the stopwatch and lap times if there are not yet any laps with split times stored in the lap timer. WARNING Avoid operating the lap timer when the vehicle is in motion if possible. ● Adjust the lap timer settings and access statistics only when the vehicle is stationary. ● When the vehicle is in motion, use the lap timer only in driving situations which are easy to control. Personalisation The personalisation function allows personalised vehicle settings, such as air conditioning system, instrument cluster or lighting settings, to be saved in a We Connect user account. User identification takes place when logging on to your We Connect user account in the Infotainment system. Changes to the settings are assigned to the user account active in the vehicle and are automatically saved online in the We Connect user account via an existing Internet connection. Welcome and user account selection After switching on the ignition, the name of the identified user appears in the Infotainment system. If automatic key assignment is activated, the user is identified via the vehicle key. If automatic key assignment is not active, the last user logged in to the vehicle is always displayed. If you are not the identified user, you have the following options: —Select your own user account from the user list if you were already logged in to the vehicle. —Log in to your We Connect user account with your access details in order to add your user account to the user list. —Create a new user account directly from the vehicle if you are not yet registered with W e Connect. If you do not wish to log in to W e Connect or register, a guest user account is available in the Infotainment system. The current vehicle settings are retained when switching to the guest user account. After you have logged in, the vehicle settings saved online are loaded and activated in the vehicle. When you log in to a vehicle with your user account for the first time, the factory settings are applied. If the car has seats with memory function, you can manually cancel transfer of the corresponding setting in the Infotainment system display. User management and settings When the ignition is switched on, you can use the user management menu in the Infotainment system for user management and to select the settings. Here new users can log in or register and you can remove saved user accounts from the Infotainment system’s memory .
- Page 48 Switching user account You can select the user account via the user administration menu. Here you can activate another available user account in the vehicle, log in to an existing We Connect user account, or register with We Connect using a new user account. Automatically assigning vehicle keys to user accounts If you have selected automatic key assignment, the following vehicle key is assigned to the user account upon changing the user account: — V ehicles without Keyless Access: vehicle key used to unlock the vehicle. — V ehicles with Keyless Access: vehicle key that is identified first by the personalisation function when the driver door is opened. If automatic key assignment is deactivated, the key assignment is also deleted. When the Infotainment system is switched on, the last active user in the vehicle is always displayed. Synchronising vehicle settings Vehicle settings changed in the vehicle are automatically assigned to the active user account and are stored online on a cyclical basis. The vehicle settings are also automatically synchronised with the data stored online in the following situations when an Internet connection has been established: —When the ignition and Infotainment system are switched on (synchronises all user accounts stored in the vehicle that have recently been used). —When switching to another user account (synchronises the newly activated user account and the user account that has now been deactivated). —At the end of the journey and when the ignition is switched off ( synchronises the last active user account). You can also start the synchronisation manually in the user administration menu at any time, e.g. if automatic synchronisation fails when logging in. Synchronisation cannot take place automatically if the online status of the vehicle is impaired, e.g. in underground garages, or if you have activated the “maximum privacy settings” mode. If an inactive user account is active in another vehicle and settings are synchronised from there, these settings are also transferred to your vehicle and assigned to the corresponding user account. Personalised vehicle settings The vehicle functions that can be configured depend on the equipment level. Some personalisable functions are not stored online, but are only assigned to the user account locally in the vehicle. The following functions can be personalised: —Opening and closing (single door unlocking, convenience opening, window.). —Wiper settings. —Light and vision (daytime running lights, dipped beam switch-on times, convenience turn signal) . —Air conditioning system settings. —Active assist systems. —Driving profile selection.
- Page 49 WARNING Assuming an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle can increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, in the event of a collision or accident, or if the airbags are triggered. ● All vehicle occupants must assume a correct sitting position before setting off and maintain this position throughout the trip. This also applies to the fastening of seat belts. ● The number of vehicle occupants must never exceed the number of seats with seat belts in the vehicle. ● Never tilt the backrest too far to the rear. ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Never place your feet on the seat or dash panel, for example, and never ride with your feet out of the window. If you sit like this, the airbag and seat belt cannot provide optimal protection and could actually increase the risk of injury during an accident. Correct sitting position Fig. 1 Illustration: correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel, correct seat belt routing and correct head restraint adjustment. The following describes the correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers. If any vehicle occupants cannot assume a correct sitting position due to their physical build, they should contact a qualified workshop to find out about possible special modifications. The seat belts and airbags can only provide a maximum level of protection if a correct sitting position is assumed. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Volkswagen recommends the following seating position for your own safety and to reduce the level of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident: The following applies to all vehicle occupants: —Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, but not lower than eye level. → Fig. 1 Position the back of your head as close to the head restraint as possible at all times —For small people, push the head restraint all the way down, even if the head is then located underneath the top edge of the head restraint. —For tall people, push the head restraint up as far as it will go. —Always keep both feet in the footwell. —Adjust and fasten seat belts properly . Additional points for the driver: —Adjust the seat so that the distance between the steering wheel and your breastbone is at least 25 cm ( around 10 inches) → Fig. 1 and the circumference of the steering wheel can be held at the sides with both hands and your arms slightly bent.
- Page 50 ● Always insert the latch plate only into the buckle of the associated seat, and ensure that it engages properly. Using a buckle that does not belong to the seat that you are occupying reduces the level of protection and can lead to severe injuries. ● Never unfasten the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never allow more than one person to share the same seat belt. ● Never travel when children or babies are being carried on somebody's lap and fastened with the same belt. ● Never travel wearing loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket). This could prevent the seat belts from fitting and functioning properly. WARNING Damaged seat belts increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries. If the belt webbing or any other part of the seat belt becomes damaged, the seat belt may tear during an accident or sudden braking manoeuvre. ● Never damage the belt by trapping it in the door or in the seat mechanism. ● If the belt webbing, belt connections, belt retractor or seat belt buckle become damaged, the seat belt or belt attachment element in question should be replaced immediately by a qualified workshop . The qualified workshop must use correct spare parts that are compatible with the vehicle, equipment level and model year. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. ● Never try to repair, modify or remove the seat belts or belt attachment elements yourself. All repairs to the seat belts, belt retractors and buckles must be carried out by a qualified workshop. ● Seat belts subjected to stress and stretched during an accident must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. Also check the seat belt anchor points. WARNING Using seat belts incorrectly increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries. ● Regularly check to see if the seat belt and its related parts are in perfect condition. ● Always keep the seat belt clean. ● Avoid allowing foreign bodies or liquids to enter the seat belt buckle slots and belt buckles. This could prevent the seat belt buckle slots, belt buckles and seat belts from working properly. ● Do not allow the belt webbing to become jammed, damaged or to rub on any sharp edges.
- Page 51 Buckle-up request and belt status display Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: warning lamp. Buckle-up request for the front seats If the driver or front passenger seat is occupied by an adult, an acoustic warning will be emitted for 126 seconds if the seat belts are not fastened at the start of a journey and the vehicle reaches a speed of more than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The red warning lamp will also flash. The red warning lamp will not go out until all occupants have fastened their seat belts when the ignition is switched on. Belt status display for the rear seats (depending on country and equipment) Once the ignition has been switched on, the driver can see the belt status display in the instrument cluster display and therefore can tell whether or not the rear passengers have fastened their seat belts. The symbol indicates that the passenger on this seat has fastened “their” seat belt. The symbol indicates that this seat is not occupied. If a rear seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is in motion, the and symbols for this seat will flash alternately, depending on the instrument cluster version. The red warning lamp also flashes on the instrument cluster display. If the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) an acoustic signal will also be given for 126 seconds. WARNING The buckle-up request is designed to detect adult persons. If a seat is occupied by lighter persons, in particular children, the detection will not be reliable. The buckle-up request also does not respond or only in a limited way if child seats and seat supports are used. ● Always ensure that all vehicle occupants, especially children, have fastened their seat belts properly.
- Page 52 Fastening and unfastening seat belts Fastening the seat belts Fig. 1 Inserting the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. (→ Sitting position) —Adopt correct sitting position (→ Seat belt —Take hold of the belt and pull it evenly across your chest and pelvis. Do not twist the belt when doing this routing) → Fig. 1 —Insert the latch plate securely into the buckle belonging to the occupied seat —Pull on the seat belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely locked in the buckle. Unfastening the seat belts Fig. 2 Removing the latch plate from the buckle. (→ Seat belt routing) Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is stationary → Fig. 2 . The latch plate is released and springs out. —Press the red button in the buckle —Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily, without twisting the seat belt and without damaging the trim. Twisted seat belt If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the belt guide, the seat belt may have become twisted if it was returned too quickly into the side trim: —Take hold of the latch plate then slowly and carefully pull out the seat belt. —Untwist the seat belt and guide it back slowly by hand. Fasten the seat belt even if you are unable to undo the twist. However, the twist should not be in part of the seat belt that comes into direct contact with the body. The twist should be corrected immediately by a qualified workshop.
- Page 53 Seat belt routing Fig. 1 Correct seat belt routing and head restraint adjustment. Fig. 2 Correct seat belt routing during pregnancy. Seat belts only provide an optimum level of protection during an accident when they are routed correctly. Correct seat belt routing reduces the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Correct seat belt routing also holds the vehicle occupants in position so that an inflating airbag can offer the maximum level of protection. Therefore you must always fasten your seat belt and ensure that the seat belt routing is correct → Fig. 1 Correct seat belt routing —The shoulder belt must always lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck, over or under the arm or behind the back. —The lap belt must always lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. —The seat belt must always lie flat and snugly on the body. Tighten the belt if necessary. For pregnant women, the seat belt must be positioned evenly over the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis. It must lie → Fig. 2 flat so that no pressure is exerted on the lower body – this applies for the entire course of the pregnancy Correct seat belt routing according to height The following equipment can be used to adjust the seat belt routing: (→ Seat belt height adjuster) —Seat belt height adjuster for the front seats (→ Sitting position) —Height-adjustable front seats WARNING Incorrect seat belt routing can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident or a sudden braking or driving manoeuvre. ● The seat belts only offer best protection when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been...
- Page 54 ● The seat belt itself or a loose seat belt can cause serious injuries if the seat belt shifts from harder body parts in the direction of softer body parts such as the stomach. ● The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the chest. ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis and never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis. Tighten the belt if necessary. ● For pregnant women, the seat belt must be positioned evenly over the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis during the entire course of the pregnancy. It must lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the lower body. ● Do not twist the belt webbing while the seat belt is being worn. ● Never hold the seat belt away from the body by hand. ● The belt webbing should not lie over hard or fragile objects, such as glasses, pens or keys. ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar items to alter the seat belt routing. If a person's physical build prevents them from routing the seat belt properly, contact a qualified workshop to find out about any special modifications so that the seat belts and airbags can provide the optimum level of protection. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Seat belt height adjuster Fig. 1 Next to the front seats: belt height adjuster. The seat belt height adjusters for the front seats can be used to adjust the position of the seat belt on the shoulder so that it can be fastened properly: → Fig. 1 —Push the shoulder belt guide together in the direction of the arrows and hold (→ Seat belt —Push the shoulder belt guide up or down so that the seat belt is routed over the middle of the shoulder routing) —Let go of the shoulder belt guide. —Pull sharply on the seat belt to check whether the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely. WARNING Never adjust the seat belt height when the vehicle is in motion.
- Page 55 Belt retractor, belt tensioner, belt tension limiter The seat belts in the vehicle are part of the vehicle safety concept . The vehicle safety concept has the following important functions: Belt retractor The seat belts on the driver seat and front passenger seat, as well as those on the outer rear seats (and on the middle rear seat, depending on the level of vehicle equipment), are fitted with an automatic belt retractor at the shoulder part of the seat belt. Full freedom of movement is ensured when the shoulder belt is pulled slowly or when the vehicle is travelling at normal speeds. However, if the belt is pulled out quickly or during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends and during acceleration, the belt retractor blocks the seat belt. Fastened seat belts on the front seats may be tensioned automatically by the proactive occupant protection system in critical situations, for example during an emergency stop or in the event of oversteering or understeering. Both seat belts are slackened again if the accident does not happen, or when the critical situation has passed. The proactive occupant protection system is ready to be triggered again . Belt tensioner The seat belts for the front seat vehicle occupants, and, depending on the vehicle equipment, those on the outer rear seats, are equipped with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners are activated by sensors during severe frontal, side and rear collisions and also possibly vehicle rollovers. They tighten the seat belts against the direction in which they are pulled. Any slack in the seat belt is tightened. This can reduce the forward movement of the vehicle occupants and their movement in the direction of the impact. The belt tensioner works together with the airbag system. If the vehicle rolls over, the belt tensioner will not be activated if the curtain airbags are not triggered. A fine dust may be produced when the airbags are triggered. This is quite normal and does not mean that there is a fire in the vehicle. Reversible belt tensioning (proactive occupant protection system) Reversible belt tensioning may trigger in certain driving situations . Examples include: —Strong braking. —Oversteer or understeer. —Minor collisions. The reversible belt tensioners may remain continuously tensioned after certain driving situations. In this case, the seat belts must be manually unfastened when the vehicle is stationary and then fastened correctly again in order to release the belt tensioning. Belt tension limiter The belt tension limiter reduces the pressure exerted by the seat belt on the body during an accident. All safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Qualified workshops are familiar with these requirements (→ Belt tensioner)
- Page 56 Service and disposal of belt tensioners Seat belts may become damaged during work on the belt tensioners or while removing or installing vehicle parts in conjunction with other repair work. This damage will not always be noticeable. The consequence may be that the belt tensioners could function incorrectly, or not function at all, in the event of an accident. Regulations must be observed to ensure that the effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution. Qualified workshops are familiar with these requirements. WARNING The risk of severe or fatal injuries may be increased if the seat belts, automatic belt retractors and belt tensioners are not used correctly, or if they are repaired by a non-professional. As a result, the belt tensioners may not be triggered when they should, or they may be triggered unexpectedly. ● Any repairs, adjustments or removal and refitting of parts in the belt tensioners or seat belts should always be carried out by a qualified workshop and never by you yourself . ● Seat belts, belt tensioners and automatic belt retractors cannot be repaired. They must be replaced. The airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Please comply with legislation regarding disposal.
- Page 57 Introduction to the topic The proactive occupant protection system is an assistance system that initiates action to protect vehicle occupants in dangerous situations. However, the system cannot prevent a collision. Speed range The basic function of the proactive occupant protection system is available when driving forwards at speeds from approx. 30 km/h (19 mph). WARNING The intelligent proactive occupant protection system cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Never let the extra convenience afforded by the proactive occupant protection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The system cannot prevent a collision. The system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. ● Adapt your speed and distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● The system cannot detect objects in all situations. ● The proactive occupant protection system does not react to animals or poorly visible objects. ● Reflective objects such as safety barriers, tunnel entrances, heavy rain and ice can impair the performance of the proactive occupant protection system and thus prevent it from detecting a collision risk. ● The system may be falsely triggered.
- Page 58 Functions of the proactive occupant protection system Basic functions The following functions may be triggered individually or together in critical driving situations, e.g. in the event of emergency braking, understeer and oversteer or minor collisions: —Reversible belt tensioning of the fastened driver and front passenger seat belts. —Automatic closing of the glass roof and side windows down to a gap, depending on the vehicle equipment. The belts may be tensioned individually or together depending on the respective critical driving situations. Additional functions for vehicles with Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) For vehicles with Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist), the system limits also include calculation of the probability of a rear-end collision with the vehicle in front. If the system detects that a rear-end collision is likely, or initiates severe braking, it can trigger the proactive occupant protection system. Setting in driving profile selection In vehicles with driving profile selection, the proactive occupant protection system is adapted to the special vehicle setup of the respective driving profile. Settings in the Infotainment system Depending on the vehicle equipment, settings for the proactive occupant protection system with the full range of functions can be made in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system. The proactive occupant protection system will be reactivated every time the ignition is switched on. It may not be possible to operate the setting function if the proactive occupant protection system has already been adapted to the specific vehicle setup.
- Page 59 Limits of the proactive occupant protection system The availability of the proactive occupant protection system depends on country-specific legal regulations and the vehicle equipment. The proactive occupant protection system will not be available, or will only be available to a limited extent, in the following situations: —Malfunction in the ESC, reversible belt tensioners or airbag control unit . —ASR deactivated or ESC restricted . — Offroad driving profile set. —System fault or restriction of Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist). —Reverse gear engaged.
- Page 60 Troubleshooting A message is shown for a short time on the instrument cluster display. —The proactive occupant protection system functions are restricted or the system is not available. Switch off and restart the engine. —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop and have the proactive occupant protection system checked. (→ Infotainment system Depending on the malfunction, additional information may be displayed in the vehicle status controls and displays)
- Page 61 ● Before every trip, each vehicle occupant must adopt the correct sitting position, correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to their seat and keep it fastened properly throughout the trip. This applies to all vehicle occupants and also in urban traffic. WARNING The risk of injury increases if there are any objects between the vehicle occupants and the deployment area of the airbag when it is triggered. This will alter the deployment zone of the airbag, or the objects will be flung against the body. ● Never hold any objects in your hand or on your lap while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never transport any objects on the front passenger seat. The objects could enter the deployment zone of the airbag during sudden braking or driving manoeuvres and then be flung dangerously through the vehicle interior if the airbag is activated. ● There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants sitting on the front seats and rear outer seats and the deployment zones of the airbags. Ensure that children and adults keep to this rule. WARNING The airbag system can only be triggered once. The system will have to be replaced if the airbags have been triggered. ● Airbags that have been triggered, and any affected system parts, must immediately be replaced with new parts that are approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle. ● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle should only be carried out by a qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel. ● Never use recycled airbag components or components that have been taken from end-of-life vehicles in your vehicle. ● Never alter any components of the airbag system. WARNING Fine dust particles or steam may be released when the airbags are triggered. This is normal and does not mean that there is a fire in the vehicle. ● The fine dust can cause irritation to the skin and eye membranes and cause breathing difficulties, particularly for people suffering from asthma or people who have (had) other respiratory problems. To help reduce breathing difficulties, get out of the vehicle or open the windows or doors for more fresh air. ● If you come into contact with the dust, you should wash your hands and face with a mild soap and water before eating. ● Do not let the dust get into your eyes or into open wounds. ● If dust has entered your eyes, rinse them with water.
- Page 62 Type of front passenger front airbag system Volkswagen offers two different front passenger front airbag systems. Depending on the vehicle equipment, an airbag system or an airbag system with front passenger front airbag deactivation may be installed. Airbag system The front passenger front airbag can be deactivated only by a qualified workshop. Characteristics of the airbag system: —Front passenger front airbag in the dash panel. —Yellow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display. Airbag system with front passenger front airbag deactivation The front passenger front airbag can be deactivated manually by means of a key-operated switch (→ Airbag system) Characteristics of the airbag system with front passenger front airbag deactivation: —Front passenger front airbag in the dash panel. —Yellow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display. in the roof console. —Yellow indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG in the roof console. —Yellow indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG —Key-operated switch in the side of the dash panel on the passenger side ( only visible when the front passenger door is open).
- Page 63 Indicator lamp Fig. 1 In the roof console: indicator lamp (schematic diagram) for deactivated front passenger front airbag. Fig. 2 In the roof console: indicator lamp (schematic diagram) for activated front passenger front airbag. The yellow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display lights up briefly as a functional check when the ignition is switched on and goes out after a few seconds. Front passenger front airbag switched off. The yellow indicator lamp in the roof console lights up continuously → Fig. 1 Front passenger front airbag switched on. The yellow indicator lamp in the roof console will go out automatically approximately 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on or after the front passenger front airbag is switched on using the key-operated switch → Fig. 2 If the front passenger front airbag is switched off and the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp in the roof console does not light up continuously or lights up together with the yellow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display, there may be a fault in the airbag system → WARNING If there is a fault in the airbag system, the airbag may not trigger correctly, may not trigger at all or may trigger unexpectedly. This can cause severe or fatal injuries. ● The airbag system should be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible. ● Never fit a child seat on the front passenger seat. Remove a fitted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may trigger during an accident in spite of the fault.
- Page 64 Troubleshooting Fault in airbag or belt tensioner system The yellow indicator lamp lights up continuously. In addition, a message may be displayed in the instrument cluster. A malfunction has been detected in at least one airbag or belt tensioner. —Go to a qualified workshop. —Have the airbag system and belt tensioner system checked. Airbag system or belt tensioner system deactivated with diagnostic tool The yellow indicator lamp lights up for around four seconds when the ignition is switched on and then flashes for around twelve seconds. In addition, a message may be displayed in the instrument cluster. At least one airbag or belt tensioner was deactivated with a diagnostic tool. —Go to a qualified workshop. —Have a check carried out to establish whether the airbag or belt tensioner system must remain switched off. Front passenger front airbag switched off The yellow indicator lamp for the deactivated front passenger front airbag lights up continuously. The front passenger front airbag has been switched off. —Check whether the front passenger front airbag must remain switched off, e.g. when using a child seat on the front passenger seat. Front passenger front airbag switched on The yellow indicator lamp for the activated front passenger front airbag lights up for around 60 seconds after the ignition has been switched on or after switching on the front passenger front airbag with the key-operated switch. The front passenger front airbag has been switched on. —Check whether the front passenger front airbag must remain switched on.
- Page 65 Description and function of the airbags The airbags can protect vehicle occupants during frontal and side collisions by reducing their movement in the direction of the collision. When an airbag is triggered, it is inflated by a gas generator. This causes the airbag covers to break, and the airbags inflate forcefully to cover their deployment zones within milliseconds. Once a vehicle occupant wearing a seat belt starts to sink into the inflated airbag, the gas inside the airbag starts to escape to cushion the occupant and slow down their movement. This can reduce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. A triggered airbag will not always prevent other injuries from occurring, such as swelling, bruising, burning and grazing. The deployment of the airbag can also produce frictional heat. Airbags provide no protection for the arms or lower body. The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact, the vehicle speed and the type of object with which the vehicle collides. Therefore, visible damage to the vehicle does not always mean that the airbag should have been triggered. Whether or not the airbag triggers is determined by the vehicle deceleration rate caused by the collision and registered by the electronic control unit. If this rate is below the reference value programmed into the control unit, the airbags will not be triggered, even though the vehicle may be badly damaged as a result of the collision. Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehicle damage in an accident do not necessarily give an indication of whether an airbag should inflate or not. It is not possible to define a range of vehicle speeds and reference values, since the circumstances will vary considerably between one collision and another. It is therefore impossible to cover every possible kind and angle of impact that would trigger the airbags. Important factors in the triggering of the airbag include the nature (hard or soft) of the object that the vehicle hits, the angle of impact, and the vehicle speed. Airbags only serve as a supplement to the three-point seat belt in some accident situations when the vehicle deceleration is sufficient to trigger the airbags. Airbags can only be triggered once and only in certain situations. The seat belts are always there to provide protection in situations where airbags are not normally triggered or where they have already been triggered, for example if the vehicle collides with another vehicle after the first collision or is hit by another vehicle. The airbag system is part of the vehicle's overall passive safety concept. The airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have assumed a proper sitting position (→ Sitting position) Components of the vehicle safety concept The following vehicle safety equipment makes up the vehicle's safety concept to reduce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. Some of this equipment may not be fitted in your particular vehicle. It may not be available at all in some countries. —Optimised seat belts for all seats. —Belt tensioner for the driver, front passenger and for the rear outer seats. —Belt tensioner limiters for the driver, front passenger and for the rear outer seats. —Belt height adjuster for the front seats. —Red warning lamp and, where applicable, belt status display. —Front airbags for driver and front passenger. —Side airbags for driver and front passenger. —Curtain airbags on the left and right. —Yellow airbag indicator lamp . in the roof console.
- Page 66 —When the ignition is switched off during a collision. —If the level of deceleration measured by the control unit is too low during a collision at the front of the vehicle. —During a slight side collision. —During a rear-end collision. —When the vehicle rolls over. —If the impact speed in a collision is lower than the reference value specified in the control unit. Front airbags Fig. 1 Location and deployment zone of the driver front airbag. Fig. 2 Location and deployment zone of the front passenger front airbag. In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. The curtain airbags on both sides are also triggered in the event of certain types of frontal collision. (→ Sitting position) Always keep as far away from the front airbag as possible . This allows the front airbags to inflate fully when triggered, thus providing maximum protection. → Fig. 1 The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel and the front airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel → Fig. 2 . The airbag locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG”. The areas inside the red lines are covered by the front airbags when deployed ( deployment zone). You must never leave or attach any objects in these areas → . Any factory-fitted accessories will not be struck if the driver and front passenger front airbags are deployed. DANGER...
- Page 67 Once triggered, the airbag inflates in fractions of a second at very high speed. ● Always leave the deployment zones of the front airbags clear. ● Never attach any objects, such as drink or telephone holders, to the covers of the airbags or anywhere in the airbag deployment zone. ● There must be no other people, animals or objects between the occupants of the front seats and the airbag deployment zones. Ensure that children and adults keep to this rule. ● Do not attach any objects, e.g. mobile navigation devices, to the windscreen above the front airbag on the front passenger side. ● Do not stick things to, cover or otherwise alter the airbag unit in the steering wheel and the surface of the dash panel in the deployment zone of the front passenger's airbag. WARNING → Fig. 1 → Fig. 2 The front airbags are deployed in front of the steering wheel and dash panel ● When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm ( approximately 10 inches) between your rib cage and the hub of the steering wheel. Contact a qualified workshop if your physical build makes this impracticable. ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that the distance between the passenger and the dash panel is as large as possible. Switching the front passenger front airbag on and off Fig. 1 On the front passenger side in the dash panel: key- operated switch for deactivating and activating the front airbag The front passenger front airbag must be deactivated if you fit a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. (→ Child seats) Observe the country-specific specifications for use of child seats on the front passenger seat Switch on the front passenger front airbag —Switch off the ignition. —Open the door on the front passenger side.
- Page 68 Switch off the front passenger front airbag —Switch off the ignition. —Open the door on the front passenger side. —Fold the key bit of the vehicle key all the way out. → Fig. 1 —Insert the key bit into the key-operated switch on the dash panel until you feel the second point of resistance → Around three quarters of the key bit should be inserted in the key switch at this point —Turn the vehicle key, without using force, to the position → —Remove the vehicle key from the key-operated switch and fold away the key bit —Close the door on the front passenger side. The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp in the roof console lights up continuously when the ignition is switched (→ Indicator lamp for standard airbag system) Confirmation that the front passenger front airbag has been deactivated A deactivated front passenger front airbag is indicated only by a continuously lit PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp the roof console ( lights up yellow continuously) (→ Indicator lamp for standard airbag system) If the yellow indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG in the roof console does not light up continuously or lights up together with the yellow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display, no child restraint system must be fitted on the front passenger seat for safety reasons. The front passenger front airbag may trigger during an accident. DANGER (→ Child seats) Please observe important safety information about the front passenger front airbag DANGER The front passenger front airbag should only be switched off in exceptional circumstances. ● To prevent damage to the airbag system, only switch the front passenger front airbag on and off when the ignition is switched off. ● It is the driver's responsibility to ensure that the key-operated switch is set to the correct position. ● Only switch off the front passenger front airbag if, in exceptional circumstances, you need to fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat. ● Switch the front passenger front airbag back on again as soon as the rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat is no longer being used.
- Page 69 Fig. 1 In the interior on the left-hand side of the vehicle: side airbag deployment zone. Fig. 2 On the side of the front seat: location and deployment zone of the side airbag. → Fig. 1 Depending on the equipment level, side airbags are installed for the front seats The side airbags for the front seats are located in the outer seat backrest cushions of the driver seat and front passenger seat → Fig. 2 The locations of the side airbags are indicated by the “AIRBAG” label. → Fig. 1 → Fig. 2 The areas outlined in red are inside the deployment area of the side airbags and . You must never leave or attach any objects in these areas → In the event of a side collision, the side airbags will be deployed on the side of the vehicle which is impacted, thus reducing the risk of injury to the areas of the occupants' bodies facing the impact. The curtain airbags on both sides are also triggered. WARNING Once triggered, the airbag inflates in fractions of a second at very high speed. ● Always leave the deployment zones of the side airbags clear. ● There must be no other people, animals or objects between the occupants of the front seats and the airbag deployment zones. Ensure that children and passengers keep to this rule. ● The coat hooks in the vehicle should only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. ● Do not fit any accessories to the doors. ● Do not fit seat covers or protective covers over the seats unless they have been expressly approved for use in the vehicle. Otherwise the side airbag may not be able to inflate once triggered. WARNING...
- Page 70 Incorrect use of the driver and front passenger seat could hinder the proper function of the side airbag and cause serious injury. ● Never remove the front seats from the vehicle or alter any components of these seats. ● If too much pressure is applied to the backrest side bolsters, the side airbags may not be triggered correctly, may not trigger at all, or may trigger accidentally. ● Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop. Curtain airbags Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the vehicle: location and deployment zone of the curtain airbag. Curtain airbags are installed in the vehicle interior above the doors on the driver and front passenger sides → Fig. 1 The locations of the curtain airbags are indicated by the “AIRBAG” label. → Fig. 1 The area in the red frame is covered by the curtain airbag when triggered ( deployment zone) . For this reason, you → must never leave or attach any items in this area The curtain airbags are triggered on both sides in the event of a side collision and certain types of frontal collision. In a side collision and certain types of frontal collision, the curtain airbags reduce the risk of injury for the vehicle occupants on the front seats and rear outer seats. WARNING Once triggered, the airbag inflates in fractions of a second at very high speed. ● Always leave the deployment zones of the curtain airbags clear. ● Never secure any items to the cover or in the deployment zone of the curtain airbag. ● There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants sitting on the front seats and rear outer seats and the deployment zones of the airbags. Ensure that children and passengers keep to this rule. ● The coat hooks in the vehicle should only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. ● Do not fit any accessories to the doors. ●...
- Page 71 Introduction to the topic Using child seats can reduce the risk of injury to the child if there is an accident. Always use child seats when driving with children. Note the following: —Child seats are classified into groups depending on the size, age and weight of child for which they are designed. —Various securing systems are used to secure child seats in the vehicle. (→ Child seats) For safety reasons, child seats must always be fitted to the rear seats Volkswagen recommends child seats from the Volkswagen range of accessories. These child seats have been developed and approved for use in Volkswagen vehicles. For further information on the child seats from the range of accessories, contact a Volkswagen dealership or visit the Volkswagen website. WARNING If children are not secured or are inadequately secured, they are at greater risk of serious or even fatal injury. Please note the following: ● Children who are either under 12 years of age or less than 150 cm ( approximately 59 inches) tall must not be carried in the vehicle unless they are secured in a suitable child seat while the vehicle is in motion. Regulations in some countries may differ and must be complied with. ● Always secure children in the vehicle in a suitable child seat. The seat used must be appropriate to the child's height, weight and age. ● Never fasten more than one child into one child seat. ● Under no circumstances should children or babies be held in a passenger's or drivers lap while driving. ● Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat. ● Never allow a child to be carried in a vehicle without being properly secured, and never allow a child to stand up or to kneel on a seat, or to sit incorrectly while the car is in motion. This is particularly important for children carried on the front passenger seat. In an accident, children may sustain serious injuries to themselves and others. ● The child seat can only provide maximum protection if the seat belt is routed correctly around it. Always ensure that the seat belt is routed as specified in the instructions provided by the child seat manufacturer. If the seat belt is routed incorrectly it may cause injuries even in a minor accident. ● After an accident, it is vital to replace any child seats that were in use during the accident, as they could have sustained non-visible damage.
- Page 72 In the user states, child seats are subject to the regulations ECE → Standards for child seats R 44 or ECE R 129 . Both regulations apply simultaneously. Child seats which have been tested in accordance with these standards carry an orange ECE approval label. This ECE approval label may include the following information on the child seat: —Weight class. —Size class. —Approval category (universal, semi-universal, vehicle-specific or i-Size). —Approval number. On child seats that are approved under regulation ECE R 44, the eight-digit approval number on the ECE approval label must begin with 03 or 04. This shows that the seat is admissible for use. Older child seats with an approval number beginning with 01 or 02 are not admissible. Child seat weight classes Fig. 1 Example illustrations of child seats. Class Child's weight Group 0 up to 10 kg Group 0+ up to 13 kg Group 1 9 to 18 kg Group 2 15 to 25 kg Group 3 22 to 36 kg → Fig. 1 are the best option for the period from birth to —Weight class 0/0+: group 0/0+ or 0/1 rear-facing infant carriers about 18 months. —Weight class 1: group 1 (up to about four years old) and group 1/2 (up to about seven years old) with an integral belt system are best for children over the relevant weight limit. —Weight classes 2/3: groups 2 and 3 include child seats with a backrest, and booster seats with no backrest. Child seats with a backrest have integrated seat routing and side padding, and so provide better protection than booster seats with no backrest. Volkswagen therefore recommends the use of child seats with a backrest. Group 2 child seats are for children up to the age of about seven, group 3 child seats for those older than seven. Not every child will fit in the child seat specified for their weight group. Likewise, not every seat will fit in every vehicle. Therefore it is vital to check that the child fits properly in their child seat and that the child seat can be securely fastened in the vehicle.
- Page 73 Child seat approval categories Child seats can be classified as “universal”, “semi-universal” “or vehicle-specific” (all in accordance with regulation E CE R 44) or “i-Size” (in accordance with regulation ECE R 129). —Universal: child seats with “universal” approval are approved for use in all vehicles. No type list is required. ISOFIX child seats with universal approval must be additionally secured using a strap over the top of the vehicle seat (top tether). —Semi-universal: “semi-universal” approval requires other safety devices for attaching the seat ( that require additional testing) in addition to the standard requirements for universal approval. Child seats with “semi-universal” approval come with a type list. The seats should only be used in vehicles that are included on this list. —Vehicle-specific: child seats with vehicle specific approval must have undergone dynamic testing in each model of vehicle for which it is approved. These child seats also come with a type list. —i-Size: child seats classified as “i-Size” must conform to the installation and safety requirements prescribed in regulation R 129. Contact the child seat manufacturer to find out whether child seats are approved for this vehicle, and if so which ones, in accordance with i-Size. Installing and using child seats Country-specific regulations The standards and regulations governing the use of child seats and child seat securing mechanisms differ from country to country. Not all countries allow you to transport children on the front passenger seat. Regulations and legal requirements take precedence over the information given in this owner's manual. Information on fitting a child seat Observe the following general information when fitting a child seat. This information is relevant whatever child seat securing system is being used. → —Read and follow the instructions provided by the child seat manufacturer —Whenever possible, fit the child seat on the rear bench seat behind the front passenger seat so that children can exit the vehicle on the kerb side. —Set the seat belt height so that the seat belt routing follows a natural line and is adjusted to the child seat without turning back on itself. For rear-facing child seats, use the lowest position of the belt height adjuster. —Deactivate the front passenger front airbag if fitting a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. —When fitting on the front passenger seat, push the front passenger seat back fully and adjust the seat to the highest (→ Sitting position) position. Adjust the backrest to an upright position —Always ensure that there is enough space around the child seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the seat in front. When doing so, ensure that the driver or front passenger can still maintain a correct sitting position (→ Sitting position) —The backrest of the child seat must lay as flat as possible against the vehicle seat backrest. If required, adjust the seat backrest angle so that the child seat lies flush against the backrest. Once it has been installed, if the child seat is touching the head restraint and therefore cannot be positioned flush against the backrest, push the head restraint all the way up, or (→ Sitting position) remove and stow safely in the vehicle...
- Page 74 → Fig. 2 —On the B-pillar on the front passenger side It is essential to observe the warning information shown on these stickers before installing a rear-facing child seat → Risks involved in carrying children on the front passenger seat If you are using a rear-facing child seat, the front passenger front airbag can cause critical or potentially fatal injuries when it inflates → Rear-facing child seats may be used on the front passenger seat only if the front passenger front airbag has been deactivated . A deactivated front passenger front airbag is indicated by means of the continuously lit PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp (→ Indicator lamp for standard airbag system) in the driver's field of vision If using a front-facing child seat, do not deactivate the front passenger front airbag. When fitting the child seat, ensure that it is as far away as possible from the front passenger front airbag. The front passenger front airbag can cause severe injuries → when it inflates Some child seats are not suitable for use on the front passenger seat. The child seat must be specially authorised by the manufacturer for use on the front passenger seat in vehicles with front and side airbags. Volkswagen dealerships keep an up- to-date list of authorised child seats. DANGER (→ Airbag system) Please observe important safety information about the front passenger front airbag DANGER If you use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, the child in it is at increased risk of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. ● Deactivate the front passenger front airbag. If the front passenger front airbag cannot be deactivated no rear-facing child seat may be used. ● Move the front passenger seat as far back and as high as it can be adjusted to create the largest possible distance between the child seat and the front passenger front airbag. ● Move the backrest to the upright position. ● Set the seat belt height so that the seat belt routing follows a natural path adapted to the child seat without excessive deviations. For rear-facing child seats, use the lowest position of the belt height adjuster. ● Only use child seats that have been approved by the child seat manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with front and side airbag.
- Page 75 ● Do not place any objects in the side airbag deployment zones. Securing systems Different countries use different securing systems for safely fitting child seats in the vehicle. Overview of securing systems —ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for fitting child seats in the vehicle quickly and safely. The ISOFIX attachment system creates a rigid connection between the child seat and the car body. The seat has two rigid attachment arms. The attachment arms click into ISOFIX attachment points at the bottom of the (→ Child seat with ISOFIX or i-Size) backrest (on the outer rear seats) . Atop tether or a support bracket may sometimes be used in addition to the ISOFIX anchor points described above. —Three-point automatic seat belt. It is better to secure child seats using the ISOFIX system, if available, rather than with a (→ Child seat with seat belt) three-point automatic seat belt Additional securing points: —Top tether: the strap at the top of the child seat is routed over the rear seat backrest and hooked to an anchor ring on the (→ Child seat with top tether) back of the rear seats . Top tether anchor points are marked with an anchor symbol. —Support foot: some child seats are supported by a support foot resting on the floor of the vehicle. This support foot helps prevent the child seat tipping forward in a crash. Child seats with a support foot can only be used on the front passenger → seat and the outer rear seats Recommended child seat securing systems Volkswagen recommends that child seats are secured as follows: —Infant carrier or rear-facing child seat: ISOFIX and support foot. —Front-facing child seat: ISOFIX and top tether and possibly also support foot. WARNING Incorrect use of the support foot can cause severe or fatal injuries. ● Ensure that the support foot is always correctly and safely installed. Applies only in Australia: WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seatbelts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
- Page 76 Securing a child seat with ISOFIX/i-Size Quick guide to ISOFIX and i-Size installation The identification marking of the ISOFIX or i-Size anchorage points is equipment and country dependent. The following table shows the installation options for ISOFIX or i-Size child seats at the ISOFIX or i-Size anchorage points of the individual vehicle locations. Front passenger seat Orientation Size class Outer seats on Centre seat on Front passenger Front passenger Group of the child /ISOFIX the rear bench the rear bench front airbag front airbag seat class seat seat activated deactivated Rear Group 0: up to 10 kg E/R1 IL-SU IL-SU facing E/R1 Rear Group 0+: up to 13 kg D/R2 IL-SU IL-SU facing C/R3 D/R2 Rear IL-SU IL-SU...
- Page 77 Fig. 1 On the vehicle seat: identification of the i-Size anchor points for child seats. Fig. 2 Illustration: fitting a child seat with the attachment arms. → Fig. 1 The location of the ISOFIX or i-Size anchorage points is indicated by a symbol (→ Child seats) —Observe the instructions —Pull off any protective caps that may be fitted on the ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points. → Fig. 2 . The —Push the attachment arms of the child seat in the direction of the arrow onto the ISOFIX or i-Size anchorages child seat must click and audibly securely into place. —Perform a pull test on both sides of the child seat to check that the child seat is properly engaged. If the child seat is fitted with a support foot, the foot must stand firmly on the floor of the vehicle. Securing child seats with the top tether...
- Page 78 Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: attached top tether. ISOFIX child seats with “universal” approval must be secured with an upper strap (top tether) in addition to the ISOFIX anchor points. Only secure the strap to the top tether anchor rings provided for this purpose. Anchor rings for use with the top tether are marked by a symbol and sometimes also with “TOP TETHER”. (→ Child seats) —Observe the instructions —Push the head restraint on the vehicle seat all the way up or remove it. —Position the child seat in the centre of the seat cushion. (→ Child seat with ISOFIX —Push the attachment arms on the child seat into the ISOFIX anchor points as shown by the arrows or i-Size) . The child seat must click and audibly securely into place. —Remove the luggage compartment cover if necessary. —Guide the top tether of the child seat to the rear into the luggage compartment and hook it into the corresponding top → Fig. 1 tether anchor ring —Tighten the upper strap so that the top of the child seat rests against the rear seat backrest. WARNING Only secure the strap to the top tether anchor rings provided for this purpose. Failure to do this could lead to severe injuries. ● Each anchor ring can hold only one child seat restraining strap. ● Never fasten the strap on a child seat to any other fastening rings. Depending on the market and model, there may be two or three anchor rings in the luggage compartment behind the rear seat backrest.
- Page 79 Securing a child seat using the seat belt If you want to fit a child seat from the “universal” ( u) approval category in your vehicle, you must first ensure that it is approved for the seat position in question. Relevant information is given on the orange ECE approval label of the child seat. Installation options are shown in the table below. Front passenger seat Child's Seats on the rear Group Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag weight bench seat activated deactivated up to 10 Group 0 up to Group 0+ 13 kg Rear 9 to 18 kg facing Group 1 Forward 9 to 18 kg facing 15 to Group 2 25 kg 22 to Group 3 36 kg u: universal; x: seat not suitable for securing a child seat of this group. Securing a child seat using the seat belt (→ Child seats) —Observe the instructions —Set the seat belt height so that the seat belt routing follows a natural line and is adjusted to the child seat without turning back on itself. For rear-facing child seats, use the lowest position of the belt height adjuster. —Fasten the seat belt and guide it through the child seat as described in the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
- Page 80 Making you and your vehicle safe Observe any legislation concerning the safety of a broken-down vehicle. For example, many countries stipulate that you have to switch on the hazard warning lights and wear a high-visibility waistcoat. Checklist To ensure your own safety and that of your passengers, observe the following points in the specified order → → 1. Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from moving traffic and on a suitable surface (→ Centre console) 2. Switch on the hazard warning lights 3. Switch on the electronic parking brake. 4. Select the neutral position or move the selector lever to P position. (→ Switching off the engine) 5. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition 6. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle and go to a safe place away from moving traffic, e.g. behind the safety barrier. Observe the country-specific regulations concerning high-visibility waistcoats. 7. Take all vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. 8. Set up the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle. 9. Allow the engine to cool down and seek expert assistance. When the hazard warning lights are switched on, for example if you are being towed, you can still indicate a change in direction or lane change by operating the turn signal. The hazard warning lights will be interrupted temporarily. Switch on the hazard warning lights, e.g. in the following situations: —When traffic ahead suddenly slows down or you reach the tail end of a traffic jam to warn vehicles behind you. —When there is an emergency. —If the vehicle breaks down. —When tow-starting or towing. Always follow local regulations for the use of the hazard warning lights. If the hazard warning lights are not working, you must use an alternative method of drawing attention to the broken-down vehicle. This method must comply with traffic legislation. WARNING Any broken-down vehicle poses a high accident risk for the vehicle occupants and other road users.
- Page 81 The 12-volt vehicle battery will discharge if the hazard warning lights are left on over a long period of time – even when the ignition is switched off. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the brake lights flash in quick succession if you brake sharply or initiate full braking at a speed of more than 80 km/h (about 50 mph). This provides an especially conspicuous warning for the following traffic. If you then continue to brake, the hazard warning lights will be switched on automatically at speeds under approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). Once the vehicle starts to accelerate, the hazard warning lights will switch off again. Emergency equipment First-aid kit Depending on the vehicle equipment, the first-aid kit may be located in a stowage compartment or a holder in the luggage compartment, under the luggage compartment floor or in the vehicle interior. The first-aid kit must comply with legal requirements. Please observe the use-by date of the contents. After use, renew contents if necessary and stow the first-aid kit safely again. Warning triangle Fig. 1 In the boot lid: holder for the warning triangle. Depending on the equipment, the warning triangle may be located in the boot lid. With the boot lid open, turn the lock of the → Fig. 1 holder by 90° anticlockwise, open the holder and remove the warning triangle. The warning triangle must comply with legal requirements. Return the warning triangle to its holder after use and lock it into place. High-visibility waistcoat Depending on the vehicle equipment, the high-visibility waistcoat may be located in a stowage compartment in the front door trim or in the glove box (→ Driver door) (→ Front passenger side) The high-visibility waistcoat must comply with legal requirements. Fire extinguisher Depending on the vehicle equipment, a fire extinguisher may be located in a holder in the footwell under the front passenger seat. The fire extinguisher must comply with legal regulations, must always be ready for use and must be checked regularly (see inspection seal on the fire extinguisher). WARNING...
- Page 82 In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident, loose objects could be flung though the vehicle and cause severe injuries. ● Always secure the first-aid kit, warning triangle and fire extinguisher safely in the holders in the vehicle. ● Stow the high-visibility waistcoat in a stowage compartment so that it is easily accessible. Information call, breakdown call and Emergency Call Service Fig. 1 In the roof console: control unit for voice services. Information Call. Breakdown Call. Emergency Call Service. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country, voice services can be performed by means of the control in the roof console → Fig. 1 . The required connection is established by a factory-fitted control unit. Also observe the other information on Volkswagen We Connect Indicator lamp for the Emergency Call Service → Fig. 1 The control is equipped with an indicator lamp (arrow). Depending on the operating state in the vehicle, the indicator lamp lights up in different colours and light sequences: Indicator lamp does not light up: Emergency Call Service is deactivated or not available. Indicator lamp flashes red for about 20 seconds after the ignition has been switched on: Emergency Call Service is deactivated. Indicator lamp lights up red continuously: system error. Emergency Call Service is restricted or not available. Indicator lamp lights up green: Emergency Call Service is available, vehicle system ready for operation. Indicator lamp flashes green: active connection to a voice service. Information Call —The Information Call enables you to call the Volkswagen AG hotline. —The Information Call function is available only in some sales regions. —The advisor who takes your call will talk to you in the language with which the vehicle was registered in Car-Net or We Connect. Breakdown Call —The Breakdown Call function allows you to seek professional assistance should your vehicle break down. —Some vehicle data, e.g. the current location, is transmitted parallel to the voice call. —The advisor who takes your call will talk to you in the language with which the vehicle was registered in Car-Net or We...
- Page 83 Connect. Emergency Call Service —When the emergency call service is triggered, a connection to the Volkswagen emergency call centre is established. —If an emergency call is placed manually, or automatically after an accident where an airbag was triggered, data relevant for the emergency call, e.g. the current vehicle location, will be transmitted automatically . —The telephone call centre communicates in the language set up in the vehicle's Infotainment system. English is used if this language is not available at the location of the emergency. —The emergency call service can be deactivated by a qualified workshop. WARNING The following conditions may limit or prevent the execution of a manual or automatic emergency call: ● Your current emergency call location is in an area with no or insufficient mobile communications and GPS reception. ● ● The mobile network of telecommunication providers is not available in areas with sufficient mobile and GPS reception. ● ● No 2G/3G mobile communications network of telecommunication providers is available in areas with sufficient mobile communications and GPS reception. ● ● The Emergency Call Service is prohibited by law in some countries. ● There is no valid license for the use of the emergency call service. ● The components in the vehicle required for the manual or automatic emergency call are damaged or do not have sufficient electrical power. ● The emergency call service function has been deactivated. In this case, no emergency call is made. Also forwarding to the emergency number 112 does not take place. ● The vehicle ignition is not switched on. Initiating an emergency call manually until the indicator lamp flashes green. The emergency call is now initiated and a voice —Press the emergency call button connection is established to the Volkswagen emergency call centre. If you have accidentally pressed the emergency call button, cancel the emergency call immediately.
- Page 84 Data transmission In the event of an emergency call, the available data is transmitted to the Volkswagen emergency call centre to determine the necessary rescue measures. The transmitted data includes the following: —Current position of the vehicle. —Vehicle identification number. —Type of vehicle drive. —Vehicle type. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country, data transmission can be influenced by the privacy settings (→ Privacy settings) . The Emergency Call Service function can be guaranteed only if data transmission is possible. The function of the emergency call service may be restricted if Infotainment systems have been retrofitted. Back-up to 112 emergency number In some situations, the emergency call service may be restricted or unavailable. If possible, an emergency call to the general emergency number 112 is established. In this case, only a voice-based connection is established. No data will be transmitted, e.g. regarding the vehicle or its location. Troubleshooting Emergency Call Service is faulty The indicator lamp in the emergency call button lights up red continuously . In addition, the message Error: Emergency call function. Please visit workshop. may be displayed in the instrument cluster display. There is a system fault in the Emergency Call Service. It is not possible to make an emergency call. —Go to a qualified workshop immediately. —Have the fault rectified. Emergency Call Service is restricted The indicator lamp in the emergency call button lights up red continuously . In addition, the message Emergency call function restricted. Please visit workshop. may be displayed in the instrument cluster display. The availability of the Emergency Call Service function is restricted. It is not possible to establish a voice call to the Volkswagen emergency call centre, for example. —Go to a qualified workshop immediately. —Have the fault rectified.
- Page 85 Functions of the vehicle key Fig. 1 Vehicle key. 1 Unlock the vehicle. All turn signals flash t wice . 2 Unlock only the boot lid. All turn signals flash t wice . 3 Lock the vehicle. All turn signals flash o nce . 4 Fold the key bit in and out. 5 Indicator lamp: flashes when button is pressed. WARNING Careless or unsupervised use of the vehicle key can lead to accidents or injuries. ● Take all vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Children or unauthorised persons could otherwise lock the doors and the boot lid, start the engine or switch on the ignition and thus operate electrical equipment, such as the electric windows. ● Never leave children or people requiring assistance alone in the vehicle. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. For example, locked vehicles may be subjected to very high or very low temperatures depending on the season. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially among small children. NOTICE Protect the key from moisture and excessive vibration.
- Page 86 Changing the button cell (vehicle key with key bit) Fig. 1 Vehicle key: replacing the button cell. → Volkswagen recommends having the button cell changed at a Volkswagen dealership or by a qualified workshop ■ Fold out the key bit. ■ Lever off the cover → Fig. 1 → ■ Lever the button cell out of the battery compartment → Fig. 1 → ■ Press the new button cell into the battery compartment → Fig. 1 ■ Press the cover onto the housing ■ Dispose of discharged batteries in an environmentally responsible way. DANGER If button cell batteries are swallowed or get into the wind pipe, this can lead to serious or even fatal injuries due to suffocation or internal burns within a very short space of time. ● Call for medical help immediately if you suspect that someone has swallowed a button cell battery. ● If the battery cover cannot be closed, do not use the remote control. ● Always keep the remote control and key fob with button cells out of the reach of children. NOTICE ● The vehicle key can be damaged if the button cell is not changed properly. ● Unsuitable batteries can damage the vehicle key. Replace discharged batteries only with new batteries of the same voltage rating, size and specification. ● Pay attention to the correct polarity when inserting the battery. The type of batteries used in the remote control of your vehicle key may contain perchlorate. This may require special handling. Please observe all the legal requirements regarding the handling and disposal of these batteries.
- Page 87 Synchronising the vehicle key (→ Vehicle If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key, synchronise the vehicle key or replace the button cell key) Synchronising the vehicle key: —Unfold key bit or remove spare key. —If necessary, remove the cover of the driver door handle . —Press the button on the vehicle key. —Unlock the vehicle using the key bit. (→ Anti-theft alarm) —Open the driver door. If the vehicle has an anti-theft alarm, this will be triggered immediately —Switch on the ignition. The synchronisation process is complete.
- Page 88 Troubleshooting Vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked The remote control is subject to interference caused by obstacles, adverse weather conditions or other transmitters operating in the same frequency range in the vicinity of the vehicle, e.g. mobile devices, or due to a weak or flat button cell. OR: the central locking system has switched itself off temporarily to protect itself against overloading. —Close the driver door. (→ Vehicle key) —OR: synchronise the vehicle key (→ Vehicle key) —OR: change the button cell in the vehicle key Indicator lamp does not flash If the indicator lamp in the vehicle key does not flash when pressing the button, the button cell in the vehicle key has to be (→ Vehicle key) replaced Additional or replacement vehicle keys can be obtained from a Volkswagen dealership.
- Page 89 Introduction to the topic The Keyless Access function allows the vehicle to be unlocked and locked without actively using the vehicle key. For this purpose, a valid vehicle key must be within close range of the vehicle.
- Page 90 Unlocking or locking the vehicle with Keyless Access Fig. 1 Keyless Access: operating ranges. Fig. 2 In the door handle: sensors. Unlocking and locking the vehicle Unlocking: → Fig. 2 on the inside of the driver or front passenger door handle. —Touch the sensor surface Locking: —Switch off the ignition. —Close driver or front passenger door. → Fig. 2 on the outside of the driver or front passenger door handle. —Touch sensor The vehicle unlocking procedure is confirmed by all the turn signals flashing t wice and the locking procedure by the turn signals flashing once . Locking and unlocking the boot lid When the vehicle is locked, the boot lid will be unlocked automatically if you open it when a vehicle key is located within the → Fig. 1 operating range of the boot lid The boot lid is locked automatically after it is closed. If the vehicle is completely unlocked, the boot lid will not lock automatically when closed. Temporarily deactivating Keyless Access Keyless Access can be deactivated temporarily as described below so that the vehicle cannot be unlocked and started due to misuse by unauthorised third parties. —Lock the vehicle with the button on the vehicle key.
- Page 91 → Fig. 2 once within five seconds. Do not put your hand —Then touch the sensor on the outside of the door handle around the door handle when doing this. —Keyless Access is now temporarily deactivated. —You can check that it is deactivated by waiting for at least ten seconds and then pulling the door handle. It should not be possible to open the door. When the vehicle is next unlocked, it can be unlocked only using the vehicle key. The keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access is reactivated the next time the vehicle is unlocked. Operating the convenience functions The electric windows can be closed automatically. The glass roof is also closed in vehicles with a glass roof. → Fig. 2 for a few seconds. —Place a finger on the sensor of the driver’s or front passenger door handle The sensor functions can be set in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. The unlocking function is deactivated for a few seconds so that you can check that the vehicle has been locked successfully. A vehicle with dual clutch gearbox DSG can only be locked when the parking lock P is ® engaged. The entire vehicle will be unlocked if the sensor is touched twice, even if a single door has already been unlocked. Troubleshooting Keyless Access does not work The function of the door handle sensors may be restricted if they become very dirty. —Clean the sensors. All turn signals flash four times The vehicle key used last is still in the vehicle. —Remove the key and lock the vehicle. Automatic deactivation of the sensors The sensors will be deactivated in the following circumstances: —The vehicle is not unlocked or locked for an extended period. —A sensor has been triggered an excessive number of times. Activating sensors again: —Unlock the vehicle with the button in the vehicle key. NOTICE Please note that the sensors in the handles could be activated by a powerful jet of water or steam if a valid remote control key is within the operating range. If at least one window is open and the sensors in a door handle are continuously activated, all windows will close. All windows could open if the jet of water or steam is moved away from the door handle sensor surfaces briefly and then moved back again...
- Page 92 If the message Keyless system faulty appears on the instrument cluster display, malfunctions may occur in the K eyless Access system. Go to a qualified workshop. Introduction to the topic The doors can be locked manually and, in some cases, also unlocked manually, if the vehicle key or central locking fails, for example. The central locking system enables you to centrally lock and unlock all the doors, the boot lid and the tank flap of the vehicle. The vehicle can be locked if the ignition has been switched off or the driver has switched off the engine before leaving the vehicle. (→ Displays) A symbol in the instrument cluster display indicates if one or more doors are not closed properly . Do not drive on! Open the door in question and then close it again. This symbol is also visible when the ignition is switched off and will go out a few seconds after the vehicle has been locked when all doors are closed. WARNING Any door that is not properly closed could open suddenly while the vehicle is in motion. This could lead to severe injuries. ● Stop as soon as possible and close the door. ● Ensure that the door is closed properly and that the lock has engaged. The closed door must be flush with the surrounding body panels. ● Doors should only be opened or closed when you are sure there is no-one in their path. WARNING Any door being held open by the door arrester could close unexpectedly in strong winds or if the vehicle is on a slope. This could lead to injuries. ● Always keep a good grip on the handle when opening and closing doors. WARNING The opening and closing paths of the doors and boot lid are potential danger areas where injury can occur. ● The doors and the boot lid should therefore only be opened or closed when you are sure that nobody is in their path. WARNING Careless locking of the doors can cause serious injuries. ● If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the doors and electric windows cannot be opened from the inside. ● The central locking system locks all doors. Locking the vehicle from the inside can prevent accidental opening of the doors and unauthorised persons from entering the vehicle. However, locked doors can delay assistance to passengers inside the vehicle in the event of an accident or emergency.
- Page 93 Indicator lamp in the driver door The central locking system indicator lamp is located in the driver door. Vehicle locked: red LED flashes at short intervals for approximately two seconds, and then more slowly. The indicator lamp does not flash if the vehicle was locked with the central locking button in the driver door (→ Central locking button)
- Page 94 Automatic locking and unlocking Automatic locking (Auto Lock) The vehicle locks itself automatically at speeds above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph). The indicator lamp in the central locking button will light up yellow when the vehicle is locked. Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock) All vehicle doors and the boot lid are automatically unlocked if one of the following conditions applies: —The vehicle is at a standstill and the vehicle key has been removed. — On vehicles with automatic gearbox: the parking lock P is engaged and the ignition is switched off. —OR: the door release lever has been operated. This applies at speeds up to 15 km/h ( 9 mph). (→ Doors) —OR: in an accident where the airbags have been triggered Automatic unlocking gives emergency responders access to the vehicle.
- Page 95 Central locking button Fig. 1 In the driver door: central locking button. Fig. 2 In the driver door: button for opening the boot lid electrically. - unlock the vehicle. - lock the vehicle. - open the boot lid. If the button in the driver door is pressed, only the boot lid opens. All doors remain locked. The central locking button functions with the ignition switched on or off only when all doors are closed. If the vehicle has been locked from outside with the vehicle key, the central locking buttons do not work. Please note the following when using the central locking button to lock the vehicle from inside: —The indicator lamp in the button lights up yellow when all doors are closed and locked. (→ Anti-theft alarm) —The anti-theft alarm will not be activated The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the door release handle. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The unopened doors and boot lid remain locked and cannot be opened from the outside.
- Page 96 Opening and closing the driver door manually Fig. 1 Handle on the driver door: levering off the cover. When manual locking takes place, all doors are locked. With manual unlocking, only the driver door is unlocked. Observe the information about the anti-theft alarm (→ Anti-theft alarm) —Place the key bit or spare key on the notch of the driver's door handle from below. —Hold your index finger under the key bit. → Fig. 1 —Lever the cap off with the vehicle key in the direction of the arrow —Insert the key bit into the lock cylinder and lock or unlock the vehicle. —Pull the door handle and fit the cap again. Things to note when unlocking manually (→ Anti-theft alarm) —The alarm is triggered when the driver door is opened —The vehicle must be started manually once unlocked . —Switch on the ignition to switch off the alarm. The electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key. (→ Anti-theft The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key bit alarm)
- Page 97 Manually closing the front passenger door and rear doors Fig. 1 In the front edge of the rear right-hand door: manually locking the vehicle with the vehicle key. (→ Anti- The front passenger door and the rear doors can be locked manually. The anti-theft alarm is not activated in this case theft alarm) —Open the door. —Remove the rubber seal from the end face of the door. → Fig. 1 —Insert the key bit or spare key into the slot and turn —Secure the rubber seal again. —Ensure that the door is locked. A door that has been locked manually will be unlocked again if the vehicle is unlocked or the door in question is opened from the inside. The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by pulling the door release handle.
- Page 98 Childproof lock Fig. 1 Childproof lock: rear left door, rear right door. 1 Childproof lock is switched off. 2 Childproof lock is switched on. The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened from the inside. When the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside. Switching the childproof lock on and off —Unlock the vehicle and open the appropriate rear door. —Move the slot to the corresponding position. WARNING The door cannot be opened from the inside when the childproof lock is activated. ● Never leave children or people requiring assistance alone in the vehicle when the doors are locked. This may mean that these people lock themselves in the vehicle. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. People locked in the vehicle may be subjected to very high or very low temperatures. ● Temperatures inside a locked vehicle may be extremely hot or cold depending on the season. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially among small children.
- Page 99 SAFELOCK Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the vehicle may have a SAFELOCK mechanism. The SAFELOCK deactivates the door release levers if the vehicle has been locked. This makes it more difficult to break into the → vehicle. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside Deactivating SAFELOCK The SAFELOCK can be deactivated in one of the following ways: —Press the button on the vehicle key again w ithin 2 seconds. — In vehicles with keyless locking and starting system, Keyless Access: touch the sensor surface on the outside of the door handle again within 2 seconds . —Switch on the ignition. (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) —OR: deactivate the interior monitor and the anti-tow alarm Depending on the equipment level, temporarily deactivate the interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm in the Vehicle (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) Settings menu in the Infotainment system before locking the vehicle There may be an indication of the activated SAFELOCK in the display of the instrument cluster. The following applies when SAFELOCK is deactivated: —The vehicle can be unlocked and opened from the inside using the door release lever. (→ Anti-theft alarm) —The anti-theft alarm is active (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) —The interior monitoring and anti-tow alarm are deactivated WARNING Always take care when using the SAFELOCK as you could cause serious injuries. ● Never leave anybody in the vehicle if the vehicle has been locked using the vehicle key. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside once the SAFELOCK is activated. If you unlock the driver door mechanically using the vehicle key, only the driver door is unlocked, and not the whole vehicle. The doors are released (but not unlocked) and the central locking button is activated only when you switch on the ignition.
- Page 100 Troubleshooting Indicator lamp lights up continuously The red LED in the vehicle door flashes at short intervals and then lights up continuously. There is a fault in the locking system. —Go to a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Turn signals do not flash If the turn signals do n ot flash as confirmation when you lock the vehicle: —At least one of the doors or the boot lid is not closed or —The bonnet is not closed Vehicle locks itself automatically The vehicle locks again automatically after approximately 45 seconds if one of the following conditions applies: —The vehicle was unlocked but not opened. —The ignition was not switched on. —The boot lid was not opened. Response when locking the vehicle with a second vehicle key Keyless Access: the vehicle key inside the vehicle is disabled for starting the engine as soon as the vehicle is locked from outside with a second vehicle key. However, an emergency start is possible (→ Engine start) . Press the button on the (→ Starting the engine) vehicle key inside the vehicle in order to enable it for a normal engine start Locking the vehicle after airbags have been triggered The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are activated during an accident. Depending on the extent of the damage, the vehicle can be locked as follows after an accident. —Switch off the ignition. —Open the driver's door and close it again. —Lock the vehicle. Automatic deactivation of the sensors The sensors will be deactivated in the following circumstances: —The vehicle is not unlocked or locked for an extended period. —A sensor has been triggered an excessive number of times. Activating sensors again: —Unlock the vehicle with the button in the vehicle key. NOTICE Please note that the sensors in the handles could be activated by a powerful jet of water or steam if a valid remote control key is within the operating range. If at least one window is open and the sensors in a door handle are continuously activated,...
- Page 101 If there is no valid vehicle key in the vehicle or if it is not detected, a corresponding display will be shown on the instrument cluster display. This may occur if the vehicle key is disrupted by another radio signal or is covered by another item such as a metal case . Anti-theft alarm Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the vehicle may have an anti-theft alarm. The anti-theft alarm monitors the doors, bonnet and the boot lid. The anti-theft alarm is automatically activated when the vehicle is locked. If the vehicle is not opened with a valid vehicle key, the anti-theft alarm is triggered and emits acoustic and visual warning signals for up to five minutes. When does the system trigger an alarm? —When a door that was unlocked mechanically with the vehicle key is opened. —When the bonnet is opened. —When the boot lid is opened. —If the ignition is switched on using an invalid key. —If the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected. (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow —If there is movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring) alarm) (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) —If the vehicle is lifted or towed (vehicles with anti-tow alarm) (→ Interior —If the vehicle is transported on a car ferry or by rail ( vehicles with anti-tow alarm or interior monitoring) monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) Switching off the alarm —Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the vehicle key. —OR: switch on the ignition using a valid vehicle key. A short alarm lasting around one second may sound. —On vehicles with Keyless Access: grip the door handle . The anti-theft alarm will not function correctly if the 12-volt vehicle battery is weak or discharged. When the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected, the anti-theft alarm system can be triggered. If the connection to a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm system is interrupted, the anti-theft alarm system may be triggered .
- Page 102 Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm Fig. 1 In the roof console: sensors for the interior monitoring system (arrows). In some markets, the vehicle is equipped with interior monitoring and an anti-tow alarm, depending on the vehicle specification. → Fig. 1 The interior monitoring triggers an alarm if movement is detected in the interior of a locked vehicle The anti-tow alarm will be triggered if the vehicle is lifted. Switching on the interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm Close the stowage compartments in the roof console so that the sensors can function. —Close the windows, tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof, doors and boot lid. —Press the locking button once. —The interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm are activated. Temporarily switching off the interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm With some equipment levels, the interior monitoring system and the tow-away protection can be switched off temporarily in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. —Switch on the ignition. —Deactivate the interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. —Close all doors and the boot lid. —Lock the vehicle using the vehicle key. The interior monitoring and anti-towing alarm are deactivated until the next time the vehicle is locked. We recommend deactivating the interior monitoring system and tow-away protection in the following situations: —If any people or animals are to remain in the vehicle interior for a short period. —If the vehicle is to be loaded onto another vehicle. —If the vehicle is being transported. —If the vehicle is going to be towed with one axle off the ground. —If the vehicle is to be parked in a two-storey garage. —If the vehicle is to be parked in a car wash. Risk of false alarms for the interior monitoring system Interior monitoring can only work properly if the vehicle is completely closed. Observe the legal requirements. A false alarm...
- Page 103 can be triggered in the following situations: —If one or more windows or the glass roof are fully or partially open. —If lightweight items such as loose pieces of paper or items hung from the interior mirror are left in the vehicle. —If the vibration alarm of a mobile telephone is switched on. Permanent deactivation of interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm is not possible. If doors or the boot lid are still open when the anti-theft alarm is activated, only the anti-theft alarm is activated. Interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm are not activated until all doors and the boot lid are closed. SAFELOCK is also deactivated when the interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm are switched off (→ SAFELOCK) Introduction to the topic The boot lid is unlocked and locked together with the doors. In vehicles with Keyless Access, the boot lid is automatically unlocked upon opening . If single door or vehicle side opening is activated in the opening and closing settings in the Infotainment system, the button on the vehicle key must be pressed twice to release the boot lid. On vehicles with Keyless Access, it is necessary to operate the sensor on the inside of the driver or front passenger door handle twice for this. WARNING Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking, opening or closing of the boot lid can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Therefore the boot lid should only be opened or closed when you are sure that nobody is in its path. ● Always check that the boot lid is properly closed after closing it. The closed boot lid must be flush with the surrounding body panels. ● Always keep the boot lid closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never open the boot lid when loads, e.g. bicycles, are secured to it. The boot lid may close under its own weight due to the additional load. Support the boot lid as necessary or remove the load from the surface. ● Close and lock the boot lid and all vehicle doors when the vehicle is not in use. Ensure that no one remains in the vehicle. ● Never leave children playing unattended in or around the vehicle, especially when the boot lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment and shut the boot lid, thereby trapping themselves inside. Temperatures inside a locked vehicle may be extremely hot or cold depending on the season. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially among small children. WARNING Serious injuries can occur if the boot lid is unlocked or opened incorrectly or without due care and attention. ● It may not always be apparent that the boot lid is unlocked, for example when a loaded luggage carrier is attached to it. If unlocked, the boot lid may open suddenly while the vehicle is in motion.
- Page 104 Never use the rear window wiper or the rear spoiler to fix or hold a load. This may result in damage that causes the rear wiper or rear spoiler to be torn off. Opening and closing the boot lid Fig. 1 Open boot lid: handle recesses for closing the boot lid. Opening the boot lid or button on the vehicle key. —To unlock the boot lid, press the —Press on the top of the Volkswagen badge and lift up the boot lid. Closing the boot lid → Fig. 1 with sufficient momentum so that it engages —Pull the boot lid downwards by the handle recess in the interior trim → in the lock The boot lid will also be locked when the doors are locked. A symbol in the instrument cluster display indicates that the boot lid is opened or not properly closed. The boot lid is locked automatically when the vehicle is moving. WARNING Serious injuries can occur if the boot lid is closed incorrectly or without due care and attention. ● When closing the boot lid, please ensure that no one has their hands in the direct path of the boot lid as it moves. If the boot lid is not opened within a few minutes after unlocking, it automatically locks again.
- Page 105 Electrically opening and closing the boot lid Fig. 1 In the driver door: release button for the boot lid. Fig. 2 In the open tailgate: button for closing boot lid electrically. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the boot lid can be electrically opened and closed. Electrically opening the boot lid button on the vehicle key. —To unlock the boot lid, briefly press the button in the driver door upwards → Fig. 1 —OR: pull the —OR: press the top part of the Volkswagen badge. The boot lid will then open. Electrically closing the boot lid → Fig. 2 —Press the button in the open boot lid button in the driver door up until the boot lid is closed. —OR: with the ignition on, pull the —OR: in vehicles with keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access: briefly press and hold the button on the vehicle key. The vehicle key must also be within the operating range. —OR: press the top part of the Volkswagen badge. —OR: close the tailgate by moving it manually until the tailgate closes by itself. The boot lid is closed. Interrupting the opening or closing procedure buttons during the opening or closing procedure. —Press one of the...
- Page 106 —OR: press the top part of the Volkswagen badge during the opening or closing process. The boot lid can not be moved by hand. You will need to use more force than usual. Pressing the button again will move the boot lid back to its starting position. Signal tones If the boot lid is opened or closed from the vehicle interior or with the vehicle key, acoustic signals will sound. Changing and storing the opening angle If the area behind or above the vehicle is smaller than the path of the boot lid, the opening angle of the boot lid can be changed. —Stop the opening procedure at the desired open position ( at least half open). → Fig. 2 button until the hazard warning lights flash —In the boot lid, press and hold the The changed opening angle will be stored. The hazard warning lights flash and an acoustic signal sounds to confirm that the changed opening angle has been stored. Resetting and storing the opening angle The opening angle will have to be reset and stored again in order to fully open the boot lid again. —Press the open boot lid up by hand to the stop. You will need to use more force than usual. → Fig. 2 button until the hazard warning lights flash. —In the boot lid, press and hold the The opening angle will be reset. The hazard warning lights flash and an acoustic signal sounds to confirm that the opening angle has been reset. NOTICE Before opening or closing the boot lid, check whether there is enough clearance to open or close the boot lid, e.g. in garages. Unlocking the boot lid manually Fig. 1 In the tailgate: opening the warning triangle holder.
- Page 107 Fig. 2 In the boot lid: manual release mechanism for the boot lid. Unlocking the boot lid manually → Fig. 1 —Turn the lock of the warning triangle holder 90° anticlockwise —Open the warning triangle holder and remove the warning triangle. → Fig. 2 to unlock the boot —Insert a suitable object into the opening for the release lever and press in the direction of arrow lid.
- Page 108 Troubleshooting Boot lid cannot be opened or closed —Check whether the boot lid is blocked by an obstacle. The boot lid can be moved by hand. You will need to use more force than usual. —The drive switches off automatically in order to prevent overheating if the boot lid is operated too frequently within a short space of time. Until the drive has cooled off, increased effort may be required to open and closed the boot lid by hand. —When towing a trailer, the electric rear lid can o nly be opened and closed at the boot lid (→ Trailer towing) —The boot lid must be closed by hand if the 12-volt vehicle battery or fuse is disconnected or faulty. All turn signals flash four times The vehicle key used last is still in the vehicle. —Remove the key and lock the vehicle. Boot lid is stiff At outside temperatures around freezing point, the opening mechanism cannot always lift the partially opened boot lid automatically. —Guide the boot lid further upwards by hand.
- Page 109 Opening and closing windows (→ Driver door) The buttons are located in the doors Open windows: press the button. Close windows: pull the button. Press to disable the electric window buttons in the rear doors. The windows can still be operated using the buttons several minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided that the driver door and front passenger door are not opened. One-touch opening and closing One-touch opening and closing makes it possible to fully open and close the windows. The individual buttons do not have to be held down to do this. One-touch closing: pull the button for the appropriate window up briefly into the second position. One-touch opening: press the button for the appropriate window down briefly into the second position. Stopping the one-touch function: press or pull the button for the appropriate window again. Convenience opening and closing The windows can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using the vehicle key when the ignition is switched off: —Press and hold the locking or unlocking button on the vehicle key. — In vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access: place your finger on the locking sensor in the door handle for a few seconds until the windows are closed . The vehicle key must also be within the operating range. —To interrupt this function, release the locking or unlocking button OR remove your finger from the sensor. A valid vehicle key must be located within close range. All turn signals will flash o nce as confirmation that all the windows have been closed. The tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof also closes. The windows can also be opened and closed by means of the electric window buttons in the driver door as soon as the driver door has been opened. Set the convenience opening settings in the V ehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. WARNING Careless or unsupervised use of the electric windows can cause serious injuries. ● The electric windows should only be opened or closed when you are sure that nobody is in their operating area. ● Never leave children or people requiring assistance alone in the vehicle when the vehicle is locked. The windows can no longer be opened in an emergency.
- Page 110 Convenience opening and closing works only when one-touch opening and closing is activated for all electric windows. Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change automatically (→ Personalisation) when the user account is changed Electric window roll-back function The roll-back function for the electric windows can reduce the risk of injuries when the windows are closing. → If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will immediately open again —Check to see why the window has not closed. —Try to close the window again. —If the window closing process is interrupted again, the roll-back function will be disabled for a few seconds. —If the window still cannot be closed, the window stops where it is. To close the window without the roll-back function, → press the button again within a few seconds Closing windows without roll-back function —Attempt to close the window again within a few seconds by holding the button. T he roll-back function is deactivated in the process. —If the closing procedure takes longer than several seconds, the roll-back function will be reactivated. If it is still stiff or obstructed, the window will stop and open again automatically. —Please go to a qualified workshop if the window still cannot be closed. WARNING Closing the electric windows without the roll-back function can lead to severe injuries. ● Always close the window carefully. ● Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the window, especially if a window is being closed when the roll-back function is not active. ● The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other body parts from being pressed against the window frame and sustaining injury. The roll-back function is also activated if the convenience closing function on the vehicle key is used to close the windows.
- Page 111 Troubleshooting One-touch opening and closing does not work One-touch opening and closing is deactivated if the 12-volt vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged while the windows were not fully closed. The function will have to be reset. —Switch on the ignition. —Close all windows and doors. —Pull up the button for the window and hold it in this position for a few seconds. —Let go of the button, then pull it up again and hold it in this position. One-touch opening and closing is now ready for operation. The one-touch function can be restored for individual windows or for several windows at the same time. Touch panels do not react as expected Moisture, dirt, grease etc. can restrict functioning of the touch panel. Make sure that the touch panels are always clean and dry.
- Page 112 Opening and closing the glass roof The term glass roof is used as a standard term for the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof. Fig. 1 In the roof: button for the glass roof. The glass roof is a roof opening system featuring two glass elements. The rear glass element is fixed in place and cannot be opened. The button has two positions. First stage: fully or partially tilt, open or close the roof. S econd stage: automatically move the roof to the respective limit position. Press the button again to stop the one-touch function. Tilting, opening and closing the glass roof Tilting the glass roof: → Fig. 1 to the first position. — Manual operation: push button to the second position. —One-touch function: push button Closing the tilted glass roof: to the first position. — Manual operation: push button to the second position. —One-touch function: push button Opening the glass roof: to the first position. —Manual operation: push button to the second position. — One-touch function up to convenience position: push button Closing the glass roof: to the first position. —Manual operation: push button to the second position. — One-touch function: push button Stopping the one-touch function for the opening or closing procedure: or again. — Press button WARNING Careless or unsupervised use of the glass roof can cause serious injuries. ● Open and close the glass roof only when you are sure that nobody is in its operating area. ●...
- Page 113 ● Never leave children or people requiring assistance alone in the car, particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the vehicle key can lock the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition and operate the glass roof. ● The glass roof can still be operated for a short time after the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door or front passenger door are not opened. NOTICE ● To avoid damage during cold weather, clear any ice and snow off the vehicle roof before opening or tilting the glass roof. ● Always close the glass roof when you leave the vehicle or if it starts to rain. Any rain entering the vehicle when the glass roof is open or tilted could cause considerable damage to the electrical system. This can result in subsequent damage to the vehicle. ● When using the roof rack, the glass roof must be kept closed. Remove leaves and other loose items from the glass roof guide rails at regular intervals using a vacuum cleaner, or by hand. The roll-back function will not work properly if there is a fault with the glass roof. Go to a qualified workshop. You can save some settings in the user accounts of the personalisation function (→ Personalisation) Convenience opening or closing of the glass roof Convenience opening and closing The glass roof can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using the vehicle key: —Not applicable for USA or Canada: Press and hold the locking or unlocking button on the vehicle key. The glass roof is tilted or closed. —Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and starting system: P lace your finger on the locking sensor in the door handle for (→ Keyless Access) a few seconds until the glass roof is closed —Release the locking or unlocking button to interrupt this function. Convenience closing closes all windows in the doors and the glass roof. Once all windows and the glass roof have been closed, all turn signals will flash once as confirmation. (→ Vehicle settings menu) Glass roof settings can be made in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user account changes.
- Page 114 Glass roof roll-back function → The roll-back function reduces the risk of crush injuries . If the glass roof is impeded during the closing process, it will open again immediately. —Check to see why the glass roof has not closed. —Try to close the glass roof again. —If the glass roof still cannot be closed, close it without the roll-back function. Closing the glass roof without the roll-back function button to the second position until the glass roof has fully closed . —Press the The glass roof will now close without the roll-back function. —Please go to a qualified workshop if the glass roof still cannot be closed. If you let go of the switch during the closing procedure, the glass roof will open automatically. WARNING Closing the glass roof without the roll-back function can cause serious injuries. ● Always close the glass roof carefully. ● Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the glass roof, especially if the roll-back function is not active. ● The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other body parts from being pressed against the roof frame and sustaining injury. The roll-back function is also activated if you use the convenience closing function on the vehicle key to close the windows and the glass roof.
- Page 115 Troubleshooting The glass roof will not close —The glass roof only works when the ignition is switched on. The glass roof can still be operated for a short time after the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door or front passenger door are not opened. —If it is not possible to close the glass roof electrically, it must be closed manually. The glass roof cannot be closed manually without removing vehicle components. Go to a qualified workshop. Touch panels do not react as expected Moisture, dirt, grease etc. can restrict functioning of the touch panel. Make sure that the touch panels are always clean and dry.
- Page 116 Adjusting the steering wheel position Fig. 1 Below the steering wheel in the steering column trim: lever for mechanical adjustment of the steering wheel position. Fig. 2 On the steering wheel: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Adjust the steering wheel position before setting off and only when the vehicle is stationary → → Fig. 1 —Push down the lever —Adjust the steering wheel so that you can hold it with both hands at its outer edge at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions → Fig. 2 with your arms slightly bent → —Push the lever up firmly until it is flush with the steering column trim WARNING Incorrect use of the steering wheel position adjustment and incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can cause serious or fatal injuries. 1 up firmly. This prevents the steering wheel from → Fig. 1 ● After adjusting the steering wheel, always move the lever moving accidentally while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion. If you determine that adjustment is necessary when driving, stop the vehicle safely and adjust the steering wheel to the correct position. ● The steering wheel must always point towards the chest and not towards the face. This ensures that the driver front airbag provides maximum protection in the event of an accident. ● While driving, always keep both hands on the outside of the steering wheel at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions . → Fig. 2 This reduces the risk of injury if the driver front airbag is triggered. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner, e.g. at the hub of the steering wheel. If the driver front airbag is triggered, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
- Page 117 Introduction to the topic The following section describes the options for adjusting the front seats. Always ensure that your sitting position is correct (→ Sitting position) WARNING Always adjust the front seats to their correct position before any journey and ensure that all passengers have fastened their seat belts. ● Push the front passenger seat as far back as possible. ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the hub of the steering wheel. Adjust the driver seat by moving it forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled and the distance to the dash panel in the knee area is at least 10 cm. If your build makes it impossible to fulfil this requirement then you must contact a qualified workshop so they can make any necessary modifications. ● Never travel with the backrest tilted far back. The further back the backrest is tilted, the greater the risk of injury caused by incorrect seat belt routing or an incorrect sitting position. ● Never travel with the backrest tilted far forwards. When a front airbag is triggered it could force the seat backrest backwards and injure vehicle occupants on the back seats. ● You should always sit upright with your back against the seat backrest with the front seats properly adjusted. Do not position any body part directly against or too close to where the airbags are fitted. WARNING Incorrect adjustment of the seats can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary. The seats could change position unexpectedly if you attempt to reposition them while the vehicle is in motion, leading to a loss of control of the vehicle. Furthermore, an incorrect sitting position is adopted while adjusting the seat. ● Only adjust the height and tilt of the seat or move it forwards and backwards when the area around the seat is clear. ● The adjustment range of the seats must not be restricted by any items. ● Only adjust the angle of the rear seats or move the seats forwards and backwards when there is no-one in the adjustment range of the seats. ● The areas for adjusting and locking the seats must not be soiled. WARNING Any lighters in the vehicle could be damaged or accidentally lit. This could lead to serious burns and other injuries. ● Before adjusting the seats, always ensure that there is no lighter on or near the movable parts of the seat. NOTICE Sharp edges can damage the seats.
- Page 118 Mechanically adjusting the front seat The following section contains a description of all possible controls. The number of controls may vary depending on the version of the seat. The controls are mirrored for the right-hand front seat. Fig. 1 On the left front seat: controls. 1 Operate the lever to adjust the lumbar support. 2 Take your weight off the backrest and turn the handwheel to adjust it. Front passenger seat: take your weight off the backrest and operate the lever to adjust the backrest position (depending on equipment). 3 Move the lever up or down, several times if necessary, to adjust the seat height. 4 Pull the lever to push the front seat forwards or backwards. The front seat must engage after you release the lever!
- Page 119 Folding the front passenger seat backrest forwards Fig. 1 Front passenger seat: folding backrest forwards. The front passenger seat backrest can be folded forwards to a horizontal position. The front passenger front airbag must be switched off if any items are to be transported on the front passenger seat when (→ Airbag system) folded forwards Folding the front passenger seat backrest forwards → —Remove any items from the front passenger seat cushion —Lower the front passenger seat as far as possible. —Push the front passenger seat as far back as possible. —Push the head restraint all the way down. → Fig. 1 —Release the front passenger seat backrest in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 1 until it is horizontal. When it is —Fold the front passenger seat backrest forwards in the direction of the arrow folded down, the front passenger seat backrest must engage securely into place. Folding back the front passenger seat backrest When folding back, make sure that there are no items or body parts in the area of the hinges. → Fig. 1 —To fold back, release the front passenger seat backrest again —Fold back the front passenger seat backrest so that it is upright. When it is folded up, the front passenger seat backrest must engage securely into place. WARNING Serious injuries could be caused if the front passenger seat backrest is folded forwards and backwards in an uncontrolled way and without taking due care. ● Fold the front passenger seat backrest forwards and backwards only when the vehicle is stationary. ● When folding the front passenger seat backrest forwards, always make sure that there are no people, animals or objects in its path. ● The front airbag must be switched off and the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp must light up for as long as the front passenger seat backrest is folded forwards. ● When folding forwards and backwards, keep all hands, fingers, feet and other body parts away from the seat hinges and seat locking mechanism.
- Page 120 ● When being folded back, the front passenger seat backrest must be securely locked in the upright position. If the front passenger seat backrest is not locked properly, it could move suddenly and cause serious injuries. WARNING The open seat anchorages and hinges of the folded front passenger seat backrest can cause serious injuries in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or accident. ● Never transport either adults or children on the front passenger seat if the front passenger seat backrest is folded forwards. ● If the front passenger seat backrest is folded forwards, you must use only the rear seat behind the driver seat. This also applies to children in child seats. WARNING Objects that are not secured, or are secured incorrectly, can cause serious injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident. This applies particularly if objects are struck when the airbag is triggered and then flung through the vehicle interior. To reduce the risk of accidents, please observe the following guidelines: ● Always stow all objects in the vehicle securely. Always observe the legal regulations. ● The front airbag must be switched off and the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp must light up for as long as the front passenger seat backrest is folded forwards. Introduction to the topic The following section describes the options for adjusting the rear seats. Always ensure that your sitting position is correct (→ Sitting position) WARNING Always adjust the rear seats to their correct position or fold to upright position before starting any journey and make sure that all passengers have fastened their seat belts. ● The rear seat should be adjusted or folded down only when the vehicle is stationary as the rear seat could otherwise move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. Furthermore, an incorrect sitting position is adopted while adjusting or folding down the seat. ● The risk of serious injury is increased for passengers on the rear seats if they are not sitting upright because the seat belts are incorrectly positioned. ● The rear seat should be adjusted or folded down only when there is no one in the adjustment area or folding path. WARNING Any lighters in the vehicle could be damaged or accidentally lit. This could lead to serious burns and other injuries. ● Before adjusting or folding down the seats, always ensure that there is no lighter on or near the movable parts of the seat. WARNING The centre armrest must always be folded up while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury.
- Page 121 Folding the backrest of the rear bench seat forwards and backwards The rear seat backrest is split. Each part of the rear seat backrest can be folded down to increase the size of the luggage compartment. Fig. 1 Middle seat: folding down belt buckle. Fig. 2 In the rear seat backrest: release button. Folding the rear seat backrest forwards → Fig. 1 —Fold the belt buckle of the middle seat inwards onto the seat cushion —Push the head restraint all the way down. → Fig. 2 forwards and fold the rear seat backrest forwards at the same time. —Pull the release button → Fig. 2 The respective section of the rear seat backrest is unlocked when you can see the red marking Folding back the rear seat backrest → —Fold back the rear seat backrest and push it firmly into the catch until it engages securely into place → Fig. 2 The red marking should no longer be visible. WARNING Injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is folded forwards and backwards without due care and attention. ● While folding the rear seat backrest forward, always make sure that no people or animals are in its path.
- Page 122 ● Never fold the rear seat backrest forwards or backwards while the vehicle is in motion. ● Ensure that the seat belt is not trapped or damaged when folding back the rear seat backrest. ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet or other body parts away from the swivel area when folding the rear seat backrest forwards and backwards. ● Ensure that each rear seat backrest engages securely, otherwise the seat belts for the rear seats will not offer maximum protection. This applies to the centre seat of the rear bench seat in particular. If a seat is occupied and the corresponding rear seat backrest has not clicked securely into place, the seat occupant and rear seat backrest may move forwards in the event of a sudden braking or driving manoeuvre or during accidents. → Fig. 2 2 ● The rear seat backrest has not engaged properly if you can see a red marking . Always ensure that the red marking is never visible when the rear seat backrest is in the upright position. ● Passengers (adults and children) must not use seats if the rear seat backrest is folded forwards or is not engaged securely into place. NOTICE Damage to the vehicle or to other objects could be caused if the rear seat backrest is folded forwards and backwards in an uncontrolled way or without due care. ● Before folding the rear seat backrest forwards, always adjust the front seats so that the rear head restraints or rear seat cushions do impact the front seats. ● Before folding down the rear seat backrest, always make sure that there are no objects located in its path. Introduction to the topic The following section describes the options for adjusting and removing the head restraints. Always ensure that your sitting (→ Sitting position) position is correct Every seat is fitted with a head restraint. The rear centre head restraint ( depending on vehicle equipment) is designed solely for use with the centre seat on the rear bench seat. Therefore you should not install this head restraint in any of the other positions. There are notches in the rods of the head restraints which enable them to engage in different positions. Only correctly mounted head restraints can engage in the notches in the adjustment area. To prevent accidental removal of the head restraints after installation, stops are fitted at the top and bottom of the adjustment area.
- Page 123 Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the height of the head restraint Fig. 1 Front head restraint: adjusting. Fig. 2 Rear head restraint: adjusting. → Fig. 1 → Fig. 2 or —Push the head restraint up or down in the direction of the arrows while pressing the button necessary. The head restraint must engage securely into position.
- Page 124 Removing and installing the head restraints Fig. 1 Front head restraint: removing. Removing the front head restraints —If necessary, lower the head restraint. —To release the head restraint, feel for the recess in the marked area on the rear side and press it in the direction of the → Fig. 1 arrow → Fig. 1 —Pull the head restraint out in the direction of the arrow Fitting the front head restraints —Position the head restraint correctly over the head restraint guides and then insert into the guides of the corresponding seat backrest. —Push the head restraint down until the guide pins click into place. —Adjust the head restraint so a correct sitting position can be assumed. Fig. 2 Rear head restraint: removing. Removing the rear head restraints —Release the rear bench seat backrest and fold the backrest forwards. —Push the head restraint all the way up.
- Page 125 → Fig. 2 on the head restraint guide. —Press button → Fig. 2 while a second person pulls the head restraint out fully. —At the same time, press button —Fold back the rear seat backrest and allow it to engage securely. Fitting the rear head restraints —Release the rear bench seat backrest and fold the backrest forwards. —Position the head restraint correctly over the head restraint guides and then insert into the guides of the corresponding seat backrest. → Fig. 2 and push down the head restraint. —Press and hold the button —Fold back the rear seat backrest and allow it to engage securely. —Adjust the head restraint so a correct sitting position can be assumed. Centre armrest Front centre armrest Fig. 1 Front centre armrest. —To move it backwards and forwards : push the centre armrest in the direction of the arrow all the way forwards → Fig. 1 all the way backwards. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be a stowage compartment under the centre armrest. WARNING When fully open or not completely closed, the front centre armrest can restrict the freedom of movement of the driver's arms and therefore cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Always keep stowage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never transport an adult or child on the centre armrest. An incorrect sitting position can cause serious injury. Rear centre armrest...
- Page 126 Fig. 2 Rear fold-out centre armrest. There may be a fold-out centre armrest in the backrest of the middle seat of the rear bench seat. —To fold it down : pull the loop in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 2 —To fold it back : fold the centre armrest upwards in the opposite direction of the arrow → Fig. 2 and push it into the backrest as far as it will go. Do not use the middle seat on the rear bench seat to transport passengers when the centre armrest is folded down. WARNING The rear centre armrest must always be folded up while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury. ● The centre seat on the rear bench seat must never be used when the centre armrest is folded down – neither by adults nor children. An incorrect sitting position can cause severe injuries. Switching turn signals on and off Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. —Switch on the ignition. → Fig. 1 —Move the turn signal and main beam lever from the centre position to the following position Right turn signal . — Left turn signal . — —Return the turn signal and main beam lever to the basic position in order to switch off the turn signal. Go to a qualified workshop if the acoustic signal does not sound when a turn signal is switched on and have the vehicle checked.
- Page 127 Convenience turn signal To operate the convenience turn signal, push the turn signal and main beam lever up or down to the point where you meet resistance and then release the lever. The turn signal flashes three times. To cancel the convenience turn signal, immediately move the lever in the opposite direction up to the pressure point and then release it. The convenience turn signal can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) WARNING Incorrect use of turn signals, a failure to use turn signals, or forgetting to switch off a turn signal can confuse other road users. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Always activate the turn signal in good time when changing lanes and performing overtaking or turning manoeuvres. ● Always switch off the turn signal once the lane change or overtaking or turning manoeuvre has been completed. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user account changes (→ Personalisation) Switching lights on and off Fig. 1 Next to the steering wheel: light switch ( one variant). Switching lights on —Switch on the ignition. → Fig. 1 —Turn the light switch to the appropriate position The daytime running lights are switched on. Automatic headlights: dipped beam is switched on or off depending on the brightness level and the weather conditions → (→ Exterior drive lighting) The side lights and daytime running lights are switched on. The symbol in the light switch lights up green. The dipped beam headlights are switched on.
- Page 128 Switching off the lights —Switch off the ignition. —Turn the light switch to the appropriate position: The lights are switched off. (→ Orientation lighting) The orientation lighting can be switched on (→ Parking light) Side lights or continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle switched on . The symbol in the light switch lights up green. Dipped beam is switched off – the side lights will stay on as long as the vehicle key is in the ignition lock or, in vehicles with Keyless Access, the driver door is closed. Daytime running lights The daytime running lights (dependent on equipment level) can increase the visibility of your vehicle in traffic during the day. The daytime running lights are switched on each time the ignition is switched on when the light switch is in position , or (when brightness is detected). The daytime running lights cannot be switched on or off manually. WARNING Accidents and serious injuries can occur if roads are not sufficiently illuminated and other road users have difficulty seeing the vehicle, or cannot see it at all. ● The light assistance systems only provide support; the driver is responsible for making sure the vehicle lights are switched on correctly. ● Always switch the dipped beam headlights on if it is dark, raining or visibility is poor. ● Regularly check that all lights and turn signals are working properly. WARNING The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. ● Always switch the dipped beam headlights on if it is dark, raining or visibility is poor. ● The tail lights will not be switched on with the daytime running lights. If the tail lights are not switched on, the vehicle may not be visible to other road users if it is dark, raining, or if visibility is poor. WARNING The automatic headlights function switches the dipped beam headlights on and off only when there is a change in the level of brightness.
- Page 129 If the automatic headlights function is switched on and the front or rear fog lights are switched on, the dipped beam headlights will also be switched on irrespective of the current ambient light conditions. In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket: the vehicle's rear fog light is not switched on if a trailer with rear fog light is electrically connected to the vehicle. Light functions Side lights When the side lights are switched on, both headlights light up with side lights together with parts of the tail light clusters, the number plate light and the buttons in the centre console and dash panel. The daytime running lights also switch on when the ignition is switched on. If the vehicle is not locked from outside when the ignition is switched off, the continuous parking light on both sides of the (→ Parking light) vehicle switches on automatically after ten minutes to reduce 12-volt vehicle battery discharge Automatic headlights When the automatic headlights function is switched on, the vehicle lighting and the instrument and switch lighting will switch on and off depending on the light conditions. When the lights are switched on, the indicator lamp lights up yellow. The automatic headlights function is merely an aid and will not always be able to detect all driving situations. In vehicles with a corresponding equipment level, the switch-on time of the automatic headlights can be set in the vehicle (→ Vehicle settings menu) settings in the Infotainment system Cornering light A cornering light is switched on when turning off slowly or travelling around very tight bends. Acoustic warnings if lights are not switched off If the vehicle key has been removed from the ignition lock and the driver door opened, acoustic warnings sound under the following conditions: —If the parking light is switched on. —If the side lights or rear fog light are switched on. When the Coming Home function is switched on, no acoustic signal will be given as a reminder that a light is still switched on when leaving the vehicle. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user (→ Personalisation) account changes...
- Page 130 Switching main beam on and off Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. —Switch on the ignition and dipped beam. → Fig. 1 —Move the turn signal and main beam lever from the centre position to the following position Main beam switched on. — Operate the headlight flasher or switch off the main beam. The headlight flasher comes on for as long as the lever is — pulled. When the main beam or headlight flasher are switched on, the blue indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Main-beam control (→ Main-beam control (static)) Depending on the vehicle equipment level, advanced main-beam control may also be available WARNING Incorrect use of the main beam headlights can lead to accidents and serious injuries as the main beam headlights can distract and dazzle other road users.
- Page 131 Main-beam control Main-beam control automatically dips the headlights when oncoming vehicles and vehicles driving in front are detected. Main-beam control normally also recognises illuminated areas such as towns and deactivates main beam while driving through them. Within the limits of the system, main-beam control automatically switches the main beam on or off depending on the environmental and traffic conditions and on the driving speed → Main-beam control Switching on main-beam control —Switch on the ignition and the automatic headlights —Briefly press the turn signal and main beam lever forwards out of the basic position. When main-beam control is switched on, the indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster display. When main-beam control is active, the blue indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Setting the sensitivity of the main-beam control Depending on the country, the sensitivity of the main-beam control can also be set in two levels: — To increase the sensitivity: press the turn signal and main beam lever forward from the initial position and hold it in this position for around 15 seconds. The indicator lamp of the instrument cluster flashes three times to confirm. — To reset the sensitivity to the standard setting: press the turn signal and main beam lever forward from the initial position and hold it in this position for around 15 seconds. The indicator lamp of the instrument cluster flashes three times (briefly) to confirm. OR: switch the ignition off and then on again. Switching off main-beam control —Switch off the automatic headlights —OR: main-beam control switched on and active: pull back the turn signal and main beam lever. —OR: main-beam control switched on and not active: touch the turn signal and main beam lever forwards to switch on manual main beam. Pull back the turn signal and main beam lever to switch off the manual main beam if necessary. —OR: switch off the ignition. System limits The main beam must be manually switched off under the following conditions, as it is not switched off by the main beam control in time or at all: —In poorly lit towns that cannot be recognised as towns by the system. —In poorly lit streets where there are highly reflective signs. —Other road users with insufficient lighting facilities, such as pedestrians, cyclists. —In tight bends, on steep hill crests or in dips in the road or when oncoming traffic is half-hidden. —With oncoming traffic on streets with a central barrier where the driver can see clearly over the central barrier e.g. truck drivers.
- Page 132 not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. ● Always check the lights yourself and adjust them to the prevailing conditions for lights, visibility and road traffic. ● The main-beam control may not be able to recognise all driving situations correctly and may not work properly in certain situations. ● If the camera's field of view is dirty, covered or damaged, the function of the main-beam control may be impaired. This also applies if changes are made to the vehicle's lighting system, for example if additional headlights are fitted. NOTICE Please observe the following points in order to avoid impairing the proper function of the system: ● Regularly clean the camera's field of view, and keep it free from snow and ice. ● Do not cover the camera's field of view. ● Regularly check the area of the windscreen that is in the camera's field of view for damage. Switching parking lights on and off Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. Switching on parking light on one side of the vehicle When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight with side light and parts of the tail light cluster on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. —Switch off the ignition. → Fig. 1 —Move the turn signal and main beam lever from the centre position to the following position Right-hand parking light is switched on. Left-hand parking light is switched on. Continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle Both headlights light up with side lights as well as parts of the tail light clusters if continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle is switched on: —Switch on the parking lights . —Switch off the ignition. —Lock the vehicle from outside. Automatic switch-off of side lights and parking lights The vehicle will detect a weak 12-volt vehicle battery and switch off the side lights or parking lights in good time so that the engine can still be started – however, this will occur after two hours at the earliest. If the capacity of the battery is not sufficient for two hours with the side lights or parking lights, the 12-volt vehicle battery...
- Page 133 could discharge so far that the engine can no longer be started → WARNING Accidents and serious injuries can occur if the vehicle is parked without sufficient illumination, as other road users might have difficulty seeing the vehicle, or may not see it at all. ● Always park the vehicle safely and with sufficient lighting. Observe any applicable local legislation. ● If the vehicle lighting is required for several hours, switch on the right or left parking light if possible. The activation duration of the one-sided parking light is generally double that of the continuous parking light on both sides. Coming Home and Leaving Home function (orientation lighting) The Coming Home and Leaving Home function lights up the area immediately surrounding the vehicle when you get in or out of the vehicle in darkness. The Coming Home function is switched on manually. In contrast, the Leaving Home function is controlled automatically by a rain and light sensor. The switch-off delay can be set and the function activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) Switching on the Coming Home function —Switch off the ignition. —Operate the headlight flasher for approximately one second. The Coming Home lighting is switched on when the driver door is opened. The switch-off delay starts when the last vehicle door or the boot lid has been closed. Switching off the Coming Home function —Automatically after the set switch-off delay has elapsed. —OR: automatically if a vehicle door or the boot lid is opened approximately 30 seconds after switch-on. —OR: switch off the lights. —OR: switch on the ignition. Switching on the Leaving Home function is switched on and the rain/light sensor detects —Unlock the vehicle when the automatic headlight control function darkness . Switching off the Leaving Home function —Automatically after the switch-off delay. —OR: lock the vehicle. —OR: switch off the lights. —OR: switch on the ignition. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user account changes (→ Personalisation)
- Page 134 Headlight range control Fig. 1 In the Infotainment system: touch slider for headlight range control. Headlight range control can be used to adjust the light cone of the dipped beam headlights to the vehicle load level. This gives the driver the best visibility possible and means that oncoming traffic will not be dazzled → → Fig. 1 With some equipment levels, the headlight range can be adjusted with the slider in the Infotainment system Manual headlight range control Adjustment using the touch slider in the Infotainment system: button or function button. —Press the —Touch the Vehicle and function buttons to open the Vehicle settings menu. —Touch the Lights function button to open the Light settings menu. → Fig. 1 —Touch the function button Headlight range control —Move the touch slider to the required position ( example vehicle load level). Settings in the Infotainment system Front seats occupied and luggage compartment empty. All seats occupied and luggage compartment empty. All seats occupied and luggage compartment fully loaded. Towing a trailer with a low drawbar load. Only the driver seat occupied and luggage compartment fully loaded. Towing a trailer with maximum drawbar load. Dynamic headlight range control The headlight range cannot be adjusted manually if the vehicle has dynamic headlight range control. The headlight range is → automatically adapted to suit the vehicle load level as soon as the headlights are switched on WARNING Heavy objects in the vehicle can cause the headlights to dazzle and distract other road users. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● The light cone should always be adjusted to the load level of the vehicle to ensure that other road users are not dazzled. WARNING Failure or malfunction in the dynamic headlight range control can cause the headlights to dazzle or distract other road users.
- Page 135 Switching over headlights for driving abroad (travel mode) If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. The headlights must therefore be switched over when you travel to these countries. With some equipment levels, the headlight alignment can be adjusted in the Infotainment system in the V ehicle settings (→ Vehicle settings menu) menu In vehicles in which the headlights cannot be switched over in the menu, masking stickers should be applied to certain parts of the headlight lenses, or the headlights should be adjusted by a qualified workshop. A qualified workshop can provide you with further information. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Travel mode may only be used for a short period. Please contact a qualified workshop for permanent conversion. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose.
- Page 136 Troubleshooting Turn signal indicator lamp The indicator lamp flashes green. If a turn signal on the vehicle has failed, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice as fast. (→ Exterior lighting) —Check the lighting and change the appropriate bulb as required —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. Trailer turn signal indicator lamp The indicator lamp flashes green. The indicator lamp goes out if a trailer turn signal or all trailer lights stop working. (→ Exterior lighting) —Check the lighting and change the appropriate bulb as required —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. Vehicle lighting fault The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Vehicle lighting not working partially or completely. (→ Exterior lighting) —Check the lighting and change the appropriate bulb as required —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. Fault in rain and light sensor The indicator lamp lights up yellow. In the light switch position , the vehicle lighting is not switched on or off automatically. —Switch the ignition off and on. —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop.
- Page 137 Instrument and switch lighting The brightness of the instrument and switch lighting can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) The brightness setting is automatically adjusted to the changing ambient light conditions in the vehicle. When the automatic headlights function is switched on, a sensor will switch the dipped beam and the lighting in the instruments and switches on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness level. When the lights are switched off and the ignition switched on, the instrument and switch lighting ( needles and scales) is switched on. As the ambient light becomes lower, the lighting of the scales is automatically reduced and may be switched off entirely. This function is intended to remind the driver to switch on the dipped beam in good time, i.e. when driving through tunnels.
- Page 138 Interior and reading lights, background lighting Press the appropriate button or move the switch to the appropriate position: Switch off the interior lights. Switch on the interior lights. The interior lights are switched on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is opened or the vehicle key is removed from the ignition. Switch the reading light on or off. Glove box and luggage compartment lights A light will be switched on or off when the glove box or boot lid is opened or closed. Background lighting Depending on the equipment level, the background lighting provides indirect light in the various areas of the vehicle interior. The front footwell may also be illuminated. (→ Vehicle The brightness of the background lighting can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system settings menu) The lights go out when the vehicle is locked or after a delay of a few minutes when the vehicle key is removed from the ignition lock. This prevents the 12-volt battery from discharging. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user (→ Personalisation) account changes...
- Page 139 Operating the wiper lever Fig. 1 On the right-hand side of the steering column: operating the windscreen wipers. Fig. 2 On the right-hand side of the steering column: operating the rear window wiper. The wipers function only when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet or boot lid are closed. → Move the wiper lever to the desired position Wipers switched off. Interval wipe for the windscreen or rain sensor mode. The interval wipe for the windscreen depends on the speed of the vehicle. The wipers will wipe more frequently as the vehicle moves faster. Slow wiping. Fast wiping. Flick wipe – short wiping. Press and hold the lever for longer to wipe more quickly. Automatic wipe/wash for cleaning the windscreen with the lever pulled. The Climatronic will switch to air recirculation mode for approximately 30 seconds to prevent the smell of the windscreen washer fluid from entering the vehicle interior.
- Page 140 Intermittent wiping for the rear window. The wiper will wipe the window approximately every six seconds. Automatic wipe/wash for cleaning the rear window with the lever pushed. WARNING Without adequate anti-freeze, the washer fluid may freeze onto the windscreen and obscure your view. ● In winter temperatures, the window washer system should only be used when adequate anti-freeze has been added. ● Never use the windscreen washer system at winter temperatures before the windscreen has been heated by the ventilation system. This could lead to the anti-freeze mixture freezing on the windscreen and restrict the driver's vision. WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and severe injuries. ● Always change wiper blades if they are damaged or worn out and when they no longer clean the window sufficiently (→ Wiper blades) NOTICE Before setting off and before switching on the ignition, always check the following to avoid damage to the windows, wiper blades and wiper motor: ● The wiper lever is located in the basic position. ● Snow and ice have been removed from the wiper blades and windows. ● Wiper blades that have become frozen onto the glass have been carefully loosened. Volkswagen recommends using a de- icer spray for this. NOTICE Do not switch on the wipers when the window is dry. Using the wipers when the window is dry can damage the glass. When switched on, the wipers will temporarily be switched to the next setting down when the vehicle is stationary. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change automatically (→ Personalisation) when the user account changes If the vehicle is parked during cold weather, the service position of the windscreen wiper may be helpful in order to be able to release the wiper blades better from the windscreen (→ Wiper blades) Wiper function Automatic activation of the rear window wiper The rear window wiper is switched on automatically if the front windscreen wipers are switched on and reverse gear is engaged. Automatic activation when reverse gear is engaged can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the (→ Vehicle settings menu)
- Page 141 Rain and light sensor Fig. 1 On the right of the steering column: wiper lever. When the rain and light sensor is activated, it automatically controls the frequency of the wiper intervals, depending on the intensity of the rain. Activating and deactivating the rain and light sensor Push the lever to the desired position → Fig. 1 - the rain and light sensor is deactivated. —Position - the rain and light sensor is activated, automatic wipe when necessary. —Position (→ Vehicle The automatic wipe function can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system settings menu) If the automatic wipe function is deactivated in the Infotainment system, the intervals are set at fixed levels. Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain and light sensor → Fig. 1 → The sensitivity of the rain and light sensor can be adjusted manually using the switch in the wiper lever —Switch to the right – high sensitivity. —Switch to the left – low sensitivity. WARNING The rain and light sensor cannot always detect all precipitation sufficiently and activate the wipers. ● If necessary, switch on the windscreen wipers manually if the water on the windscreen restricts the field of vision. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change automatically (→ Personalisation) when the user account changes...
- Page 142 Troubleshooting Washer fluid level too low The indicator lamp lights up yellow. (→ Washer fluid) Fill up the washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible Fault in wipers The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The wipers do not wipe. —Switch the ignition off and on. —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. Fault in rain and light sensor The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The wipers are not switched on automatically if it rains during rain and light sensor operation. —Switch the ignition off and on. —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. Changes in the response of the rain and light sensor Possible causes for faults and misinterpretations relating to the sensitive surface of the rain and light sensor (→ Front view) include: —Damaged wiper blades: a film of water or smears caused by damaged wiper blades can increase the time the wipers are switched on, can shorten the length of the intervals between wipes or cause the wipers to run quickly and continuously. —Insects: insects hitting the windscreen surface can cause the wipers to be activated. —Salt deposits: in winter, salt deposits can cause the wipers to continue to wipe the windscreen when it is almost dry. —Soiling: dry dust, wax, windscreen coatings (lotus effect), or detergent deposits (from an automatic car wash) can cause the rain and light sensor to become less sensitive and react too slowly, or prevent it from reacting at all. Clean the sensitive (→ Vehicle care, exterior) surface of the rain and light sensor at regular intervals and inspect the wiper blades for damage —Crack in the windscreen: a wipe cycle will be triggered if the rain and light sensor is switched on when the windscreen is impacted by a stone. The rain and light sensor will then register the reduction in sensitivity of the surfaces and adjust accordingly. The size of the crack can affect the way in which the rain and light sensor activates the wipers. The wipers will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the window. The wipers will stop moving if the obstacle blocks their path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wipers back on again.
- Page 143 General safety notes The driver can use the exterior mirrors and interior mirror to observe the traffic behind and adjust the driving style accordingly. For safety reasons, it is important that the driver positions the exterior and interior mirrors correctly before starting a journey. Looking in the exterior mirrors and the interior mirror does not allow the driver to see the entire area around the side and rear of the vehicle. The area that cannot be seen is known as the blind spot. There may be objects and other road users in the blind spot. WARNING Adjusting the exterior and interior mirrors while driving may cause the driver to become distracted. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Exterior and interior mirrors should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary. ● When parking, changing lane, or performing an overtaking or turning manoeuvre, always pay careful attention to the area around the vehicle as objects and other road users may be located in the blind spot. ● Always ensure that the mirrors are positioned correctly and that the rear view is not restricted by ice, snow, condensation or any other objects. WARNING If you estimate the distance from traffic behind you incorrectly, you can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Curved mirrors (convex or aspheric) enlarge the field of vision and can make objects in the mirror seem smaller and further away than they actually are. ● Using curved mirrors to estimate the distance from other vehicles behind you when changing lanes can provide inaccurate results and can lead to accidents and severe injuries. ● Whenever possible, use the interior mirror to check the exact distance between your vehicle and following traffic or other objects. ● Ensure that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle. WARNING Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors contain an electrolyte fluid which could leak if the mirror is broken. ● The leaking electrolyte fluid can cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs, especially in people who suffer from asthma or similar illnesses. Immediately ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air and get out of the vehicle. If this is not possible, open all of the windows and doors. ● If the electrolyte fluid gets into the eyes or onto the skin, immediately wash the area with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and consult a doctor. ●...
- Page 144 Interior mirror Fig. 1 On the windscreen: automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror. Fig. 2 On the windscreen: manual anti-dazzle interior mirror. Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror → Fig. 1 When the ignition is switched on, the sensors measure the incident light from the rear and from the front The interior mirror dims automatically depending on the values measured. If the incident light on the sensors is hindered or interrupted, e.g. by a sun blind or other hanging objects, the automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror will not function or will not function correctly. Mobile navigation devices attached to the windscreen or → near the interior automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror can also influence the sensors The automatic anti-dazzle function will be deactivated in some situations, e.g. when reverse gear is engaged. Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror...
- Page 145 —Basic position: the lever on the lower part of the mirror is pointing forwards towards the windscreen. → Fig. 2 —Pull the lever back to select the anti-dazzle function WARNING The illuminated display from a portable navigation device can lead to functional impairment of the interior automatic anti- dazzle mirror and cause accidents or serious injuries. ● You may not be able to precisely determine the distance from vehicles travelling behind you or from other objects if the automatic anti-dazzle function is impaired. Exterior mirrors Fig. 1 In the driver door: rotary knob for the exterior mirrors. The exterior mirror functions for left-hand drive vehicles are described below. Position corresponds to the exterior mirror on the driver side and position to the exterior mirror on the front passenger side. The mirrored procedure must be performed for right-hand drive vehicles. —Switch on the ignition. → Fig. 1 —Turn the rotary knob in the driver door to the desired symbol —Press the rotary knob in the direction of the arrows to the front, rear, right or left in order to adjust the exterior mirror. → Fold exterior mirrors into the body electrically Switch on the exterior mirror heating. The exterior mirror heating heats only at ambient temperatures below +20°C (+68°F) and initially with the highest setting. Heating takes place dependent on the ambient temperature after around two minutes. Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror. Neutral position. The exterior mirror cannot be adjusted and all functions are switched off. Activating the exterior mirror functions (→ Vehicle The following exterior mirror functions must be activated once in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system settings menu) Synchronous mirror adjustment The synchronous mirror adjustment function simultaneously adjusts the right exterior mirror when the left exterior mirror is adjusted.
- Page 146 —Turn the rotary knob to position . —Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right-hand exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronous adjustment). —Correct the adjustment of the right-hand exterior mirror if necessary: turn the rotary knob to position and adjust the right-hand exterior mirror. Folding in the exterior mirrors while parking The exterior mirrors fold in or out automatically when the vehicle is locked or unlocked from the outside. In order for this to happen, the rotary knob must be in position , , or . If the rotary knob for the electrically adjustable exterior mirrors is in the position , the exterior mirrors remain folded in. Storing and activating front passenger exterior mirror settings for reversing —Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key to which the settings should be assigned. —Apply the electronic parking brake. —Switch on the ignition. —Put the gearbox in neutral position. —Select reverse gear. —Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see the kerb area, for example. —Put the gearbox in neutral position. —Switch off the ignition. —The settings for the mirror position will be saved and assigned to the vehicle key. Activating the front passenger exterior mirror setting for reversing: —Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirrors to position . —Select reverse gear while the ignition is switched on. The right exterior mirror will now adjust itself to the stored position. The front passenger exterior mirror will move out of the position saved for reversing when the vehicle is driven forwards faster than approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) or when the rotary knob is moved out of position to another position. WARNING Injuries can be sustained if you do not take care when folding the exterior mirrors in and out. ● Only fold the exterior mirrors in or out when there is no obstruction in the path of the mirror. ● Always ensure that no fingers are caught between the exterior mirror and the mirror base when the exterior mirror is moved. NOTICE ● Always fold in exterior mirrors before using an automatic car wash. ●...
- Page 147 Fig. 1 In the front headliner: sun visor. Adjustment options for the driver and front passenger sun visors: —Folded down over the windscreen. → Fig. 1 —Pulled out of the bracket and swung over towards the door Vanity mirrors There is a vanity mirror in the folded-down sun visor. Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the vanity mirror may have a light. → Fig. 1 → Fig. 1 When you open the cover , the lamp lights up. WARNING Driving with the sun visors folded down and the sun blinds pulled out can reduce your view of the road. ● Sun visors should always be folded away and sun blinds should always be retracted if they are not being used. In certain circumstances, the lamp above the sun visor will go out automatically after a few minutes. This prevents the 12-volt battery from discharging.
- Page 148 Sun blind in the glass roof Fig. 1 In the roof: button for controlling the sun blind. The electric sun blind works when the ignition is switched on. When the glass roof is fully tilted, the sun blind is automatically moved to a ventilation position. The sun blind remains in the ventilation position even when the glass roof is closed. Opening and closing the sun blind → Fig. 1 The buttons and have two positions. In the first position, the sun blind can be completely or partially opened or closed. In the second position, the sun blind automatically moves to the final position when the button is operated briefly. Press the button again to stop the one-touch function. — Opening the sun blind: push button to position 1. One-touch function: push button briefly to position 2. — Closing the sun blind: push button to position 1. One-touch function: push button briefly to position 2. — Stopping one-touch function of the opening or closing procedure: push button or again. The sun blind can be operated several minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided that the driver door and front passenger door are not opened. Roll-back function for the sun blind The roll-back function can reduce the risk of injuries when closing the sun blind → . The glass roof or the sun blind will open again immediately if the sun blind is unable to close because it is stiff or obstructed. —Check to see why the sun blind has not closed. —Try to close the sun blind again. —The sun blind will open again immediately if it is still unable to close because it is stiff or obstructed. After opening, the sun blind can be closed again within a short period of time without the roll-back function. —If the sun blind still cannot be closed, close it without the roll-back function. Closing the sun blind without the roll-back function → Fig. 1 button until the...
- Page 149 ● Always close the sun blind carefully. ● Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the sun blind, especially if the roll-back function is not active when it is closed. ● The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other body parts from being pressed against the roof frame and sustaining injury. When the glass roof is open, the electric sun blind can be closed only up to the front edge of the glass roof. Introduction to the topic The following systems may be installed in the vehicle: The manual air conditioning system heats, cools and dehumidifies the air. The Climatronic is an automatic air conditioning system that heats, cools and dehumidifies the air. Automatic mode enables the Climatronic to control the air temperature, air distribution and air volume automatically. The air conditioning system will work most effectively if the vehicle interior is kept closed. Opening the windows and glass roof to provide fresh air may accelerate cooling down the vehicle if high temperatures have built up in the vehicle interior. Fig. 1 In the upper section of the centre console: air conditioning block for the manual air conditioning system. Fig. 2 In the upper part of the centre console: Climatronic air conditioning block. Display of active functions Lit up LED s in the buttons indicate that the function is switched on. (→ Air conditioning Yellow function buttons display an activated function in the climate settings on the Infotainment system system menu in the Infotainment system) WARNING Poor visibility through the door windows, windscreen and rear window increases the risk of collisions and accidents which can cause serious injuries. ● Keep all door windows, the windscreen and the rear window free from ice, snow and condensation to maintain perfect visibility.
- Page 150 ● Adjust the heating, air conditioning and rear window heating to prevent condensation from forming on the windows. ● Only set off once all windows are clear. ● Use air recirculation mode for a short period only. Condensation could otherwise form very quickly on the windows, greatly reducing visibility. ● Switch off the air recirculation mode when it is no longer required. NOTICE Food, medicine and other items that are sensitive to heat or cold could be either damaged or rendered useless by the air flowing out of the vents. ● Never leave food, medicines or other temperature-sensitive objects in front of the vents. NOTICE If the air conditioning system is not working, switch the air conditioning system off immediately and have it checked by a qualified workshop. This can help to prevent secondary damage. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user (→ Personalisation) account changes Overview of functions Some functions and buttons depend on the vehicle equipment level. Open the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system (→ Air conditioning system menu in the Infotainment system) Switch off the air conditioning system. Adjust the blower speed. Select temperature. Climatronic shows the temperature settings. Depending on the vehicle engine and equipment, the vehicle interior can be ventilated by the blower when the ignition is switched off or the residual heat of the engine used to keep the vehicle interior warm. The function is switched off after 30 minutes and if the 12-volt vehicle battery has a low charge level. Adopt temperature settings of driver side for all seats. The enhanced air filter with activated carbon in the A ir Care Climatronic can reduce the amount of pollutants and (→ Air recirculation mode) also allergens that enter the vehicle interior The set air temperature is kept constant. The volume of air and air distribution are controlled automatically. Automatic mode switches off when the blower speed is adjusted manually. The blower speed in automatic mode can be controlled by means of the air conditioning profiles in the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system (→ Air conditioning system menu in the Infotainment system)
- Page 151 The defrost function of Climatronic clears the windscreen of ice and condensation. The air is dehumidified and the blower is set to a high speed. Switch rear window heating on and off with running engine. The rear window heating switches off automatically after 10 minutes at the latest. (→ Seat heating) Switch the seat heating on and off Switch the steering wheel heating on and off (→ Steering wheel heating) Switch the auxiliary heater on and off . Open the Auxiliary heater menu in the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system . Direct air towards upper body. Direct air into the footwell. Guide air to the upper body and the footwell. Guide air to the windscreen and the footwell. Direct air onto the windscreen. NOTICE Do not apply stickers over the heating elements from the inside to prevent damage to the rear window heating. Air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system The air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system are available for Climatronic. Some functions depend on the vehicle equipment. Opening the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system in the air conditioning block. —Press The upper area of the screen shows the current air conditioning settings. The lower area of the screen shows function buttons for frequently used air conditioning functions. Air conditioning system operating conditions The air conditioning system operating conditions are highlighted in colour: —Blue: cooling. —Red: heating. Submenu for air conditioning settings Switch cooling mode, air distribution and blower on or off. Submenu for general settings Set the following functions: (→ Air recirculation mode) —Automatic air recirculation mode (→ Auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation) —Supplementary heater (→ Steering wheel heating) —Temperature setting of the steering wheel heating...
- Page 152 Presettings submenu Set automatic mode, maximum cooling output, defrost function and manual operation of the cooling system. Air conditioning profiles Adjust the blower speed in automatic mode. Air recirculation mode When air recirculation mode is switched on, no fresh air enters the vehicle interior. Switching manual air recirculation mode on and off in the air conditioning block. —Press Automatic air recirculation mode of Climatronic Automatic air recirculation mode supports you within the system limits by temporarily switching the fresh air supply on or off if the fresh air entering the vehicle is of poor quality. The system cannot detect unpleasant odours. (→ Air conditioning system menu in the Infotainment 1. Open the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system system) 2. Switch automatic air recirculation mode on or off with Automatic air recirculation. – Climatronic with enhanced air filter with activated carbon The enhanced air filter with activated carbon in the A ir Care Climatronic can reduce the amount of pollutants and also allergens that enter the vehicle interior. When Air Care is switched on, the air conditioning system's air recirculation mode is maximised as far as is permitted by the risk of window fogging depending on the interior humidity and outside temperature. The air recirculation mode is automatically regulated and features continuous adjustment in order to prevent the vehicle occupants becoming tired. (→ Air conditioning system menu in the Infotainment 1. Open the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system system) 2. Switch the Air Care function on or off via Active. When does air recirculation mode switch off? Air recirculation mode switches off in the following situations → —When the defrost function is switched on. WARNING Stale air can quickly make the driver tired and negatively affect their concentration which may cause collisions, accidents and serious injuries.
- Page 153 Climatronic: When reversing the vehicle or when the wash and wipe system is being used, the air recirculation mode will switch on to prevent odours from entering the vehicle interior. If the outside temperature is very high, brief activation of manual air recirculation mode helps to cool the vehicle interior more quickly. Seat heating When the engine is running, the front seats can be electrically heated in three settings. Heating levels of the seat heating The seat heating operating conditions are highlighted in colour: —All three LED s light up at the highest temperature setting. Operating the seat heating 1. To switch on the seat heating with the highest heating level, press the or button in the air conditioning block. 2. To set the heating level, press the or button repeatedly. 3. To switch the seat heating off, press the or button repeatedly until the LED s go out. If the engine is started again within approximately 10 minutes, the most recent temperature setting for the driver seat is automatically switched on. When should the seat heating not be switched on? Do not switch on the seat heating if one of the following conditions applies: → —A person with reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature is sitting on the seat —The seat is not occupied. —The seat is fitted with a protective cover. —A child seat is installed on the seat. —The seat cushion is damp or wet. —The temperature in the vehicle interior or the outside temperature is above +25°C ( 77°F). WARNING Anyone with reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature due to medication, paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes) could sustain burns on the back, buttocks and legs when using the seat heating. These burns may take a long time to heal or may never heal fully. Please consult a doctor if you have questions about your own state of health.
- Page 154 ● If the original seat covers are replaced with another material, the seat heating can overheat or the seat heating function may be restricted. To save fuel, switch off the seat heating as soon as possible. Steering wheel heating The steering wheel heating functions only when the engine is running. Switching the steering wheel heating on and off in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) — M anual air conditioning system: Open the Vehicle settings menu —Climatronic: Tap in the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system. Switching the steering wheel heating on or off together with the seat heating (only for Climatronic) (→ Air conditioning system menu in the Infotainment 1. Open the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system system) 2. Link the steering wheel heating with the seat heating via Link steering wheel heating & seat heating. 3. Press the button to switch the steering wheel heating on or off together with the seat heating. Selecting a temperature setting for the steering wheel heating (only for Climatronic) Three temperature settings are available. 1. Open the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system (→ Air conditioning system menu in the Infotainment system) 2. Tap Intensity. 3. Set the required temperature level. The level set is saved when the ignition is switched off. The temperature setting for the steering wheel heating is unrelated to the temperature setting for the seat heating.
- Page 155 Troubleshooting Cooling mode cannot be switched on or its function is restricted Cooling mode works only when the engine is running and at ambient temperatures above +3°C ( +38°F). Cooling mode is switched off when the engine is very hot. 1. Switch on the blower. 2. Check the fuse of the air conditioning system . 3. Replace enhanced air filter with activated carbon . 4. If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. The heating and fresh air system cannot be switched on or its function is restricted The heating and defrost function are more effective when the engine is warm. —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. Condensation on the windows Condensation may form on the windows if they are colder than the ambient temperature and the air is very humid. Cold air can absorb less moisture than warm air, which is why condensation frequently forms on windows in cold weather. —Keep the air intake in front of the windscreen free of ice, snow and leaves in order to improve heating and cooling (→ Vehicle care) performance —Do not cover the air vents in the rear of the luggage compartment. Ensuring they are not covered will allow air to flow through the vehicle from the front to the rear. (→ Heating, ventilation, cooling) —Switch on the defrost function The wrong unit of temperature has been set (→ Infotainment —Change the unit of temperature for all temperature displays in the vehicle using the Infotainment system system controls and displays) Water or water vapour under the vehicle If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak. If the outside humidity is high and the outside temperature low, condensation may evaporate when the auxiliary heater is running. If this is the case, steam may appear underneath the vehicle. This is not a sign that the vehicle is damaged.
- Page 156 Introduction to the topic The auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation systems allow the vehicle interior to be heated in winter and ventilated in summer. The auxiliary heater allows ice, condensation or a thin covering of snow to be cleared from the windscreen. The auxiliary heater is supplied with fuel from the vehicle fuel tank and can be operated when the vehicle is stationary with the ignition switched off. The auxiliary ventilation system is supplied with power by the 12-volt vehicle battery. Exhaust system of the auxiliary heater The emissions generated by the auxiliary heater are removed via an exhaust pipe underneath the vehicle. The exhaust pipe must not be blocked by snow, mud or any objects. WARNING The emissions from the auxiliary heater contain carbon monoxide which is an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death. ● Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave the auxiliary heater running if the vehicle is located in enclosed or unventilated spaces. ● Never program the auxiliary heater so that it is switched on and runs in unventilated or enclosed spaces. WARNING Parts of the auxiliary heater’s exhaust system become very hot. This can cause fires. ● Park the vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come into contact with any inflammable material underneath the vehicle, e.g. dry grass. NOTICE Food, medicine and other items that are sensitive to heat or cold could be either damaged or rendered useless by the air flowing out of the vents. ● Never leave food, medicines or other temperature-sensitive objects in front of the vents.
- Page 157 Switching the auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation on and off The auxiliary heater can be operated when the ignition is switched on and off. Opening the Auxiliary heater menu M anual air conditioning system 1. Press the button in the Infotainment system. 2. Tap the Vehicle and function buttons. Climatronic 1. Open the air conditioning settings in the Infotainment system. 2. Tap the function button. Switching on the auxiliary heater The auxiliary heater can be switched on in the following ways: —Press the immediate heat button in the air conditioning block. OR: in the Auxiliary heater menu, activate the Heat/ventilate now function. (→ Remote control for the auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation) OR: press the button on the remote control OR: program a departure time (→ Auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation) The auxiliary heater will not switch on if the 12-volt vehicle battery has a low charge level or the fuel tank is empty. Switching off the auxiliary heater manually The auxiliary heater can be switched off manually in the following ways: —Press the immediate heat button in the air conditioning block. OR: press the button on the remote control (→ Remote control for the auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation) Auxiliary heater switches off automatically (→ Auxiliary heater and —When the programmed departure time has been reached or when the set running time has expired auxiliary ventilation) (→ Fuel gauge) —When the yellow indicator lamp (fuel gauge) lights up...
- Page 158 Operating noises can be heard if the auxiliary heater is switched The 12-volt vehicle battery will discharge if the auxiliary heater or auxiliary ventilation is run several times over an extended period. Drive the vehicle for an appropriate distance in order to recharge the 12-volt vehicle battery. If you park on a downhill slope with very little fuel in the tank ( just above reserve level), the fuel gauge may be inaccurate and lead to functional restrictions of the auxiliary heater. Programming the auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary heater is programmed in the Infotainment system. Changing operating mode 1. Open the Auxiliary heater menu. 2. To change the operating mode, tap the function buttons H eating or Ventilation. At high outside temperatures, the auxiliary ventilation function supplies fresh air to the vehicle interior and helps prevent a build-up of heat. Setting the running time of the auxiliary heater 1. Open the Auxiliary heater menu. 2. Tap the Adjust function button. 3. To set the duration, tap the R unning time function button. The set running time applies when the auxiliary heater is switched on with the immediate heat button or using the remote control. The maximum running time of the auxiliary heater is 60 minutes. Programming departure time Activation is always for one heating or ventilation period only. The departure time must be activated for every start. (→ Clock) 1. Before programming, check that the date and time set in the vehicle are correct 2. Open the Auxiliary heater menu. 3. Tap the Adjust function button. 4. Choose one of the memory locations for a D eparture time.
- Page 159 Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death. ● Never program the auxiliary heater so that it is switched on and runs in unventilated or enclosed spaces. Remote control Fig. 1 Auxiliary heater: remote control (left) with battery compartment for the button cell (right). Switching the auxiliary heater on and off using the remote control —Switching on: press the button for approximately one second → Fig. 1 button for approximately one second → Fig. 1 —Switching off: Press the LED in the remote control The LED → Fig. 1 indicates various operating states after you press a button 2 . Lit up —Green: auxiliary heater is switched on. —Red: auxiliary heater is switched off. Flashes irregularly —Green: auxiliary heater operation is blocked. The fuel tank is nearly empty, the 12-volt vehicle battery charge level is too low or a malfunction has occurred. Refuel and drive for a sufficiently long time in order to charge the 12-volt vehicle battery or go to a qualified workshop. Flashes regularly —Red or green: switch-on or switch-off signal not received. Reduce your distance from the vehicle. Lights up or flashes —Orange: the button cell in the remote control is weak. Replace the button cell. Range The remote control has a range of several hundred metres when the button cell is fully charged and under ideal conditions. —Keep a distance of at least 2 m (7 ft) between the remote control and the vehicle. —Avoid obstacles between the remote control and vehicle. → Fig. 1 pointing vertically upwards. —Hold the remote control with the chrome trim...
- Page 160 —Do not cover the aerial. Poor weather conditions, nearby buildings or a weak button cell will significantly reduce the range. Replacing the button cell in the remote control The button cell in the remote control must be replaced if the LED no longer lights up. 1. Insert a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver, in the recess on the housing of the remote control in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 1 2. Using the tool, lever off the battery cover in upward direction until the housing catches are released. 3. Push the battery cover slightly in the direction of the arrow. 4. Remove the battery cover. 5. To remove the button cell, carefully insert a screwdriver, for example, in the recess on the button cell. 6. Lever up the button cell with the screwdriver until the button cell is released from the holder. 7. Remove the button cell. 8. Insert a new button cell of the same type so that it engages in the holder. Pay attention to the information on the correct polarity of the button cell located on the inner side of the battery cover. 9. Place the battery cover on the remote control housing and press slightly until the battery cover engages in position. DANGER If button cell batteries are swallowed or get into the wind pipe, this can lead to serious or even fatal injuries due to suffocation or internal burns within a very short space of time. ● Call for medical help immediately if you suspect that someone has swallowed a button cell battery. ● If the battery cover cannot be closed, do not use the remote control. ● Always keep the remote control and key fob with button cells out of the reach of children. NOTICE ● The remote control contains electronic components. Protect the remote control from moisture, strong vibrations and direct sunlight. ● Unsuitable button cells can damage the remote control. Replace a discharged button cell only with a new button cell of the same voltage rating, size and specification.
- Page 161 gearbox. Fig. 2 In the footwell: pedals in vehicles with an automatic gearbox. 1 Accelerator 2 Brake pedal 3 Clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual gearbox The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must never be impaired by objects or floor mats. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area free and can be securely fastened in the footwell. WARNING Objects in the driver footwell can hinder pedal operation. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and increase the risk of serious injury. ● Please ensure that all pedals can always be operated without any hindrance. ● The floor mats must always be properly secured in the footwell. ● No additional floor mats or other floor coverings should be placed over the fitted floor mat. ● Ensure that no objects can enter the driver footwell while the vehicle is in motion. ● If there are any objects in the footwell, remove them when the vehicle is parked. ● Wear shoes that provide good grip for your feet when using the pedals. WARNING Always observe current traffic regulations and speed limits, and think ahead when driving. Correct interpretation of a driving situation can make the difference between reaching your destination safely and having an accident with serious injuries. ● Take regular breaks when travelling long distances – at least every two hours. WARNING Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics can severely impair perception, reaction times and driving safety. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. NOTICE The pedals must be freely operable at all times. For example, a larger brake pedal travel will be necessary in order to stop the vehicle if a brake circuit fails. The brake pedal will have to be depressed further and harder than normal.
- Page 162 Gear-change indicator Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: gear-change indicator. A Currently selected gear. B Recommended gear. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the instrument cluster display may indicate the gear which should be selected to reduce fuel consumption while the vehicle is in motion → Fig. 1 (→ Tiptronic) Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: the gearbox must be in Tiptronic mode for this No recommended gear is indicated if the most suitable gear is already selected. The currently selected gear is displayed. Information on “cleaning” the particulate filter The engine management system recognises when the particulate filter is becoming saturated and supports regeneration of the filter by recommending the most suitable gear when driving. As an exception compared with normal driving, this may (→ Particulate filter) mean driving with an increased engine speed CAUTION The gear-change indicator is designed only to assist the driver and cannot replace the driver's own judgement. ● The driver has full responsibility for selecting the correct gear in all situations, e.g. when overtaking or when driving up and down hills. Driving in the correct gear can help to reduce fuel consumption. The gear-change indicator display goes out when the clutch is depressed in vehicles with a manual gearbox or when the Tiptronic position is deselected in vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
- Page 163 Driving economically Adopting the correct driving style can reduce fuel consumption, pollution and wear-and-tear on the engine, brakes and tyres. The following section lists a few tips for easing the strain on the environment and your bank account. Fig. 1 Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km at two different outside temperatures. Think ahead when driving Repeated acceleration and braking will increase fuel consumption. Keeping a close eye on the traffic can help to avoid frequent acceleration and braking. Keeping your vehicle at a sufficient distance from the vehicle in front can help you to think ahead when driving. Use coasting Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: when the selector lever is in position D and neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is depressed, the vehicle will roll (“coast”) with practically no energy being consumed. Change gear to save energy Changing gear early at engine speeds of 2,000 rpm can save energy. Do not drive gears to the limit and avoid high revs. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: c hange from first to second gear immediately after moving off. Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: accelerate slowly and avoid using the kickdown function. (→ Gear-change indicator) Pay attention to the gear-change indicator (→ Driving profile selection) Use the Eco driving profile if possible Avoid full throttle The rolling and air resistance increase at excessively high speeds. This in turn increases the force needed to move the vehicle. Never drive the vehicle at top speed. Reduce idling Drive off immediately at low engine speeds. If you are stopped for a long period, do not allow the engine to idle but switch it off, e.g. when in a traffic jam or at a railway crossing. In vehicles with an activated start/stop system, the engine can switch (→ Start/stop system) off automatically when the vehicle is stopping and when the vehicle is stationary Do not overfill the fuel tank Filling the fuel tank all the way to the top will increase the vehicle weight. A fuel tank that is half to three quarters full is...
- Page 164 Have your vehicle serviced on a regular basis Regular maintenance is an essential prerequisite for economical driving and increases the service life of the vehicle. Observe the correct tyre pressures An inadequate tyre pressure does not just mean greater wear, but also increases the rolling resistance of the tyres and thus the fuel consumption. Use tyres with optimised rolling resistance. Adjust the tyre pressure according to the vehicle load: (→ Tyre pressure) — Observe the information on the tyre pressure sticker (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) —Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Use low viscosity engine oils Synthetic, low viscosity engine oils decrease frictional resistance in the engine and spread better and more quickly, especially for cold starts. Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the vehicle You can reduce fuel consumption by clearing out the luggage compartment before setting off, for example by removing empty drink crates or unused child seats. In order to keep the drag coefficient of the vehicle as low as possible, remove attachments and add-on parts such as ski, bicycle or roof carriers after use. Save energy The alternator powered by the engine generates electricity for convenience functions, such as the air conditioning system, windscreen heating or ventilation system. Saving electrical energy is easy, for example: —At high ambient temperatures, ventilate the car before starting a journey and drive a short distance with open window. Only then switch on the air conditioning system. —Switch off convenience systems as soon as they have served their purpose. WARNING Adapt your speed and distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. NOTICE Never allow the vehicle to roll down mountains or hills in the neutral position N . The gearbox will not be lubricated and could be damaged. Inform yourself about other ways of protecting the environment. Think Blue. is the global Volkswagen brand for sustainability and environmental friendliness. Your Volkswagen dealership will gladly provide you with further information on correct maintenance and replacement parts that are particularly energy-efficient, e.g. new tyres. In vehicles equipped with active cylinder management (ACT ) depending on the equipment level, engine cylinders can ® be automatically deactivated in driving situations with low power requirements. When a cylinder is deactivated, no fuel is injected into that cylinder, which leads to an overall reduction in fuel consumption.
- Page 165 Think Blue. Trainer. Fig. 1 In the Infotainment system: Think Blue. Trainer. The Think Blue. Trainer. is available depending on the vehicle equipment and is not available in all models. 1 “Blue Score”: The higher the displayed value on a scale from 0 to 100, the more efficient your driving style. A blue border symbolises an efficient and constant driving style. A grey border indicates an inefficient driving style. Tap the display to open the statistics for the last 30 minutes of driving S ince start. 2 Acceleration and braking: At a constant speed, two arcs appear in the central area. The arcs move up and down during acceleration and braking. 3 Progress display: The efficiency of the driving style is indicated by the blue bars. The white bar stores a blue bar approximately every five seconds. The larger the bar, the more efficient the driving style has been. 4 Driving tips: Think ahead when driving. Gear-change indicator. Adapt your speed. Economical driving style. 5 Fuel consumption: The display shows the average fuel consumption Since start in l/100 km or in mpg. A blue border symbolises an efficient and constant driving style. A grey border indicates an inefficient driving style. Tap the display to open the statistics for the last 30 minutes of driving S ince start. 6 Tips for saving energy: Tap the Think Blue. function button to access additional tips. The Think Blue. Trainer analyses and visualises your driving style and helps you to drive more economically. Opening the Think Blue. Trainer. or button or function button on the Infotainment system according to the equipment level. —Press the Think Blue.
- Page 166 . However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. During the run-in period, the braking distance is longer when the brakes are depressed fully or during emergency braking than with brake pads that have been fully run in. In the run-in period, the brakes should not be depressed fully and situations should be avoided that create a heavy load on the brakes, e.g. when driving up close to the vehicle ahead. The wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under which the vehicle is operated and the way in which the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is used for regular urban trips or short journeys and is driven with a sporty driving style, the brake pads must be regularly checked by a qualified workshop. When driving with wet brakes, for example after driving through water, after heavy rainfall or after washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be delayed as the brake discs will be wet, or possibly iced up (in winter). The brakes must be “dried” as quickly as possible by careful braking at higher speed. Please ensure that no following vehicle and no other road user is put at → risk as a result of this action Any salt layer accumulating on the discs and pads will delay the braking effect and increase the braking distance. If the brakes on the vehicle have not been applied for a long time on roads that have been gritted with salt, the layer of salt must be → reduced through careful braking Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt in the brake pads are facilitated through long periods of inactivity, low mileage and low load levels. If the brake pads have been hardly used or if they are corroded, Volkswagen recommends that the brake discs and brake pads be cleaned by braking strongly several times from high speed. Please ensure that no other vehicles and no road → users are put at risk as a result of this action Brake servo The brake servo will only function when the engine is running and reinforces the pressure applied by the driver on the brake pedal. If the brake servo is not functioning or the vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to be depressed more forcefully as → the braking distance will be increased due to the lack of assistance for the brake system WARNING Driving with worn brake pads or with a faulty brake system can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● If the warning lamp lights up either alone or together with a text message in the instrument cluster display, go to a qualified workshop immediately to have the brake pads checked and the worn brake pads replaced. WARNING New brake pads will not have the optimal braking effect when first fitted. ● New brake pads cannot generate the full braking effect during the first 300 km and must first be run in. A reduced braking effect can be increased by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. ● You must drive particularly carefully when driving with new brake pads in order to reduce the risk of accidents, serious injuries and loss of control of the vehicle.
- Page 167 ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. WARNING Wet brakes or brakes coated with ice or road salt react more slowly and require longer braking distances. ● Carefully apply the brakes to test them. ● Always dry brakes and clean off any coating of ice and salt with a few cautious applications of the brakes when visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit. WARNING Driving without the brake servo or with restricted brake servo function can considerably increase the braking distance and cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Never switch the engine or ignition off while the vehicle is in motion. ● If the brake servo does not function or the vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to be depressed more forcefully as the braking distance will be increased due to the lack of assistance for the brake system. ● Always keep the footwell under the pedals clear so that the brake pedal can move freely. If the front brake pads are tested, the rear brake pads should be tested at the same time. Regularly check the thickness of the brake pads through the openings in the rims or from the underside of the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wheels to carry out a comprehensive check. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Driving a loaded vehicle For good vehicle handling when driving a loaded vehicle, please observe the following: —Stow all items of luggage securely . —Accelerate particularly cautiously and carefully. —Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. —Brake earlier than in normal driving. —If applicable, observe the information concerning the roof carrier . —If applicable, observe the information about driving with a trailer . WARNING Shifting loads can severely impair the vehicle’s stability and driving safety, lengthen the braking distance in the event of braking hard, and cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Secure objects properly to prevent them from sliding. ● Use suitable lashing or securing straps when securing heavy objects. ● Securely engage the rear seat backrests.
- Page 168 Driving with an open boot lid Driving with an open boot lid is particularly dangerous. Ensure that the open tailgate and any objects are secured properly, and take appropriate measures to reduce the quantity of toxic exhaust fumes entering the vehicle. WARNING Driving with an unlocked or open boot lid can cause serious injuries. ● Always drive with the boot lid closed. ● Always stow all items in the luggage compartment securely. Loose objects can fall out of the luggage compartment and injure other road users. ● Always drive carefully and ensure that you think ahead. ● Avoid any abrupt or sudden driving and braking manoeuvres as this can cause the open boot lid to move unpredictably. ● Any objects protruding from the luggage compartment must be marked to ensure that they are visible to other road users. Observe the legal requirements. ● Any objects protruding from the luggage compartment must never be held in position by the boot lid. ● If it is necessary to drive with the boot lid open, all luggage racks and cargo stowed on the rack must be removed from the boot lid. WARNING Poisonous exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle interior when the tailgate is open. This could result in loss of consciousness, carbon monoxide poisoning, serious injury and accidents. ● Always drive with the tailgate closed in order to prevent toxic gases from entering the vehicle. ● If exceptional circumstances require you to drive with an open tailgate, you must do the following to reduce the quantity of toxic exhaust fumes that could enter the vehicle: ● Close all windows and the glass roof. ● Switch off the air recirculation mode of the heating and fresh air system or air conditioning system. ● Open all vents in the dash panel. ● Switch the blower for the heating and fresh air system or for the air conditioning system to the highest setting. NOTICE The vehicle height, and possibly the length, are different when the boot lid is open.
- Page 169 Driving through water on roads Please follow these rules to help prevent damage to your vehicle when driving through water, for example if the road is flooded: → — The water level must be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body —Do not drive faster than walking speed. —Never stop the vehicle, reverse or switch off the engine while in water. —Oncoming vehicles will create waves that could increase the water level for your vehicle to such an extent that it is not safe to drive through the water. —Always deactivate the start/stop system manually when driving through water . WARNING After driving through water, mud, slush etc., the brakes may react slowly and the braking distance will be increased as the brake discs and pads will be wet, or possibly iced up in winter. ● You can dry and de-ice the brakes by performing careful braking manoeuvres. Ensure that you do not endanger any other road users or violate any legal requirements when doing so. ● Avoid abrupt and sudden braking manoeuvres directly after driving through water. NOTICE ● If you drive through water, parts of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, running gear and vehicle electrics, could sustain severe damage. ● Never drive through salt water as salt can cause corrosion. Rinse all components that have been exposed to salt water immediately with fresh water.
- Page 170 Running in the engine A new engine has to be run in during the first 1,500 kilometres (1,000 miles). All moving parts have to adapt themselves to each other. During the first few operating hours, the engine has higher internal friction than it does later. Up to 1,000 kilometres (600 miles): —Do not depress the accelerator fully. —Do not drive the vehicle at more than 2/3 of the top engine speed. —Do not drive with a trailer attached . Between 1,000 and 1,500 kilometres (600 to 1,000 miles): — Gradually increase speed and engine speed. The style of driving during the first 1,500 kilometres (1,000 miles) will also affect the engine quality. Even after this time – and especially with a cold engine – drive the vehicle at moderate speeds in order to reduce engine wear and to increase the mileage that the engine can cover. Do not drive at engine speeds that are too low. Always shift down gear if the engine is not running “smoothly”. New tyres and brake pads (→ Information on the brakes) must be run in carefully. If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption reduced.
- Page 171 Using the vehicle in other countries and continents The vehicle has been manufactured specifically for a particular country and complies with the registration regulations that applied in that country at the time of vehicle production. If you want to use the vehicle abroad temporarily or for a short period, all relevant information and instructions should be followed. In some countries, special safety standards and regulations apply that the vehicle may not comply with. Volkswagen recommends that you visit your Volkswagen dealership before travelling abroad to find out about any legal requirements at your destination. If the vehicle is going to be sold in another country or used in another country for an extended period, the legal requirements applicable in that country must be observed. In some cases, certain equipment will have to be fitted or removed and functions deactivated. The scope of servicing and the type of servicing could also be affected. This is particularly important if the vehicle is driven in another climatic region for a long period of time. Because different frequency bands are used in different countries, the factory-fitted Infotainment system may not work in other countries. NOTICE ● Volkswagen is not responsible for any vehicle damage caused by low-quality fuel, inadequate servicing work or lack of availability of Genuine Parts. ● Volkswagen cannot be held responsible if the vehicle does not comply with or only partly complies with the relevant legal requirements in other countries and continents.
- Page 172 Troubleshooting Brake system fault The warning lamp lights up red. A text message may also be displayed. Do not drive on! —Inform a qualified workshop and have the brake system checked. Brake pad wear indicator The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Front brake pads are worn. —Go to a qualified workshop immediately. —All brake pads should be checked and renewed as necessary.
- Page 173 Ignition lock Fig. 1 To the right of the steering wheel: positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock. When there is no vehicle key in the ignition lock, the steering column lock may be activated. → Fig. 1 Vehicle key positions Ignition switched off. The vehicle key can be removed. Ignition switched on. Steering lock can be released. The diesel engine is pre-heated and the indicator lamp lights up yellow. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: Depress the clutch pedal. Start the engine. Release the vehicle key. Once released, the vehicle key moves back to position Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal when the indicator lamp lights up green. Start the engine. Release the vehicle key. Once released, the vehicle key moves back to position Ignition switched on warning A warning message appears in the instrument cluster display if the driver door is opened while the ignition is switched on. An acoustic signal may also be given. The warning is a reminder that the ignition must be switched off before leaving the vehicle. WARNING Careless or unsupervised use of the vehicle key can lead to accidents or injuries. ● Always take all vehicle keys with you every time you leave the vehicle. The engine can be started and electrical equipment such as the window controls can be operated. This can cause serious injury. ● Never leave children or people requiring assistance alone in the vehicle when the vehicle is locked. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. For example, locked vehicles may be subjected to very high or very low temperatures depending on the season. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially among small children.
- Page 174 ● Never remove the vehicle key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering column lock may be activated and you will no longer be able to steer the vehicle. ● The key bit in the vehicle key must be folded out fully and locked in position. ● Only attach light objects weighing less than 100 g to the vehicle key. NOTICE The 12-volt battery may be discharged unintentionally and prevent the engine from restarting if the ignition is switched on while the engine is switched off. ● Always switch off the ignition before you leave the vehicle. D epending on market for vehicles with DSG dual clutch gearbox: I f the vehicle key is removed when a position is engaged, the engine will be switched off and the handbrake activated automatically. Select the selector lever position P if the vehicle key cannot be removed. If necessary, press the lock button in the selector lever and then release it. Starter button The starter button replaces the ignition lock (Press & Drive). Fig. 1 In the lower section of the centre console: starter button for starting the engine. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: The engine is started by pressing the starter button with the clutch pedal depressed. Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: The engine is started by pressing the starter button with the brake pedal depressed. The vehicle can be activated only if there is a valid vehicle key in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, the electronic steering column lock will be activated when the ignition is switched off and the driver door is opened (→ Steering) Switching the ignition on or off → Press the starter button once without depressing the brake or clutch pedal Automatic ignition switch-off Once the vehicle detects that the driver is absent after the combustion engine is switched off, the ignition will be switched off automatically after a certain period of time. Engine restart function If no valid vehicle key is detected in the vehicle interior once the engine has been switched off, the engine can be restarted within approximately five seconds. A corresponding message appears on the instrument cluster display. After this time, the engine cannot be restarted without a valid vehicle key in the vehicle interior.
- Page 175 ● Do not depress the brake or clutch pedal when the ignition is switched on as the engine will start immediately. WARNING Careless or unsupervised use of the vehicle key can lead to accidents or injuries. ● Always take all vehicle keys with you every time you leave the vehicle. Children or unauthorised persons could lock the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition or operate electrical equipment such as the electric windows. Before leaving the vehicle, always switch off the ignition manually and observe any information shown in the instrument cluster display. Leaving the vehicle stationary for long periods with the ignition switched on can discharge the 12-volt vehicle battery so that the engine can no longer be started. Starting the engine (→ Ignition lock) — V ehicles with ignition lock: Switch on the ignition — V ehicles with starter button: Press the starter button once. The ignition is switched on. —Vehicles with a diesel engine: W hen the diesel engine is pre-heated, the indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. —Depress and hold the brake pedal until the electronic parking brake has been switched off. —Vehicles with a manual gearbox: f ully depress the clutch pedal and hold it until the engine has been started. Move the gear lever to neutral position. —Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position N or select parking lock P. — V ehicles with ignition lock: turn the vehicle key further in the ignition lock – do not depress the accelerator. Release the vehicle key once the engine has started. (→ Starter button) — V ehicles with starter button: press the starter button without depressing the accelerator. There must be a valid vehicle key in the vehicle before the engine can be started. Release the starter button once the engine has started.
- Page 176 Do not warm up the engine by running it while the vehicle is stationary. Instead, pull off as soon as there is good visibility through the windows. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions. When the engine is started, electrical consumers with a higher power consumption are temporarily switched off. If there is no vehicle key in the vehicle or if it is not detected, a message will be shown on the instrument cluster display. This may occur if the vehicle key is disrupted by another radio signal or is covered by another item, e.g. an aluminium suitcase or briefcase. The engine cannot, for example, be started with the starter button if the button cell in the vehicle key is weak or flat. In this case, use the emergency start function (→ Engine start) When starting from cold, the engine may run with increased operating noise for a short time. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. At outside temperatures of less than +5°C (+41°F), fumes may be detected under a vehicle with a diesel engine if the fuel-powered supplementary heater is switched on. Switching off the engine → —Bring the vehicle to a standstill (→ Parking) —Park the vehicle — V ehicles with ignition lock: Switch off the ignition. — V ehicles with starter button: briefly press the starter button. If the engine cannot be switched off, carry out the emergency (→ Engine start) switch-off procedure —Follow the instructions in the instrument cluster . Warning before leaving the vehicle In order to indicate that the vehicle is capable of rolling when leaving the vehicle, an acoustic warning signal sounds when the driver door is opened and corresponding warning messages appear on the display of the instrument cluster. Vehicles with DSG dual clutch gearbox: If the selector lever is in position N , an acoustic warning signal will sound when the driver door is opened and the warning message The vehicle is not secured against rolling away! will appear on the instrument cluster display. This warns you that the vehicle could potentially roll away. WARNING Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. This can lead to a loss of vehicle control, accidents and serious injuries. ●...
- Page 177 In vehicles with dual clutch gearbox , the vehicle key can only be removed from the ignition lock if the selector lever is in ® position P. After the engine is switched off, the radiator fan in the engine compartment may run on for some minutes, even if the ignition is switched off or the vehicle key has been removed. The radiator fan will switch itself off automatically. Electronic immobiliser The immobiliser helps to prevent the engine from being started and driven with an unauthorised vehicle key. There is a chip in the vehicle key. The immobiliser is automatically deactivated by this when a valid vehicle key is inserted in the ignition lock. The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle key is removed from the ignition lock. In vehicles with Keyless Access, the vehicle key must be outside the vehicle. The engine can only be started using a genuine Volkswagen vehicle key with the correct code. Coded vehicle keys are available from a Volkswagen dealership. The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine Volkswagen key.
- Page 178 Troubleshooting Fig. 1 On the right-hand side of the steering column: emergency start function in vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access. Fault in engine management system The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Fault in engine management system. —The engine should be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible. Engine speed limited The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The engine speed was limited to prevent the engine from overheating. The engine speed is shown on the instrument cluster display. The engine speed limitation will be cancelled again in the following cases: —Engine is no longer in a critical temperature range. —Foot is taken off the accelerator. together with Engine speed limitation due to fault in the engine management system The indicator lamps light up yellow. Engine speed limitation is activated due to a fault in the engine management system. —Make sure that the displayed engine speed is not exceeded. —The engine should be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible. glow plug system or engine management system Vehicles with a diesel engine: The indicator lamp lights up yellow. When the diesel engine is being pre-heated, the indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster for a few seconds. The indicator lamp flashes yellow. There is a fault in the engine management system. —The engine should be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
- Page 179 Vehicle key cannot be removed from the ignition lock An unauthorised vehicle key has been inserted in the ignition lock. Remove the vehicle key as follows: Vehicles with DSG dual clutch gearbox —Press the lock button in the selector lever and release. —Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. Vehicles with a manual gearbox —Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. No valid vehicle key recognised A corresponding display will appear in the instrument cluster. If the button cell in the vehicle key is weak or discharged, it is possible that the vehicle key will not be recognised. In this case it is necessary to perform an emergency start: —Depress and hold the brake pedal. → Fig. 1 —Hold the vehicle key to the right of the steering column trim directly after pressing the starter button —The ignition is switched on automatically, and in some cases the engine is started. Engine cannot be switched off The engine cannot be switched off by briefly pressing the starter button. In this case it is necessary to perform an emergency switch-off procedure: —Press the starter button twice within a few seconds or press and hold once. (→ Starter button) The motor switches off automatically Engine cannot be started A corresponding message will be displayed in the instrument cluster if an unauthorised vehicle key is used or there is a system fault. —Use an authorised vehicle key. —If the fault persists, seek expert assistance. Engine cannot be started The engine cannot be started with the ignition key or by briefly pressing the starter button while the brake or clutch pedal is depressed. A fault has developed in the starting system. —Turn and hold the vehicle key or press the button until the engine starts. —Seek expert assistance. Start/stop system...
- Page 180 Fig. 1 In the upper part of the centre console: button for the start/stop system. The start/stop system automatically switches the engine off when the vehicle is coming to a stop and when stationary. When required, the engine restarts automatically. Switching on the start/stop system The function is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on. The instrument cluster display will show information about the current status. More information on start/stop operation can be accessed in the Infotainment system using the button or function button and the Vehicle , Selection , Vehicle status function buttons. Always switch off the start/stop system manually when driving through water. Indicator lamps If the indicator lamp lights up, the start/stop system is available and automatic engine stop is active. If the indicator lamp lights up, the start/stop system is not available or the start/stop system has started the engine → automatically The display on the instrument cluster may show the status of the start/stop system. In addition, start/stop information on the current status of the start/stop system can be displayed as required in Infotainment systems with a navigation function. Touch the i in the start/stop information to obtain further information on the status. Vehicles with a manual gearbox —Disengage the gear and release the clutch pedal when the vehicle is coming to a stop, or when it is stationary. The engine stops. —Depress the clutch pedal to restart the engine. Vehicles with DSG dual clutch gearbox ® —To stop, press and hold the brake pedal. The engine switches off shortly before the vehicle reaches a complete standstill or when the vehicle is stationary. —Take your foot off the brake pedal or depress the accelerator to restart the engine. Important preconditions for automatic engine switch-off —The driver is wearing their seat belt. —The driver door is closed. —The bonnet is closed.
- Page 181 level is not too high. —The defrost function of the air conditioning system is not switched on. —The charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is sufficient. —The temperature of the 12-volt vehicle battery is not too low or too high. —The vehicle is not on a steep incline. —Vehicles with DSG dual clutch gearbox: The steering wheel is not turned too sharply. —Reverse gear is not engaged. —Park Assist is not active. The engine can also switch off later if the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled only after the vehicle has come to a stop, e.g. if the defrost function is switched off when stationary. Conditions for an automatic restart The engine can start automatically under the following conditions: —If the temperature inside the vehicle greatly increases or decreases. —If the vehicle starts rolling. —If the electric voltage of the 12-volt vehicle battery drops. —If the steering wheel is moved. As a general rule, the engine always starts again automatically when required by the detected situation and the vehicle. Conditions that require a manual engine start The engine must be started manually in the following conditions: —If the driver door is opened. —If the bonnet is opened. Activating and deactivating the start/stop system manually —Press the button in the centre console to deactivate the system manually. If the start/stop system has been deactivated, → Fig. 1 the indicator lamp in the button lights up. → Fig. 1 —Press the button in the centre console again to activate the system manually once more The instrument cluster shows the status of the start/stop system every time the button is pressed. If the start/stop system has switched the engine off, it will start again as soon as the system has been deactivated manually with the button. Always deactivate the start/stop system manually when driving through water. Start-Stop mode with automatic Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The engine will be switched off after the Adaptive Cruise Control ( ACC) has brought the vehicle to a standstill with an active braking intervention.
- Page 182 ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not function. ● The brake servo does not work. More force is required on the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. ● The power steering does not work. More power is needed to steer. ● When the ignition is switched off, the steering column lock may activate and you will no longer be able to steer the vehicle. ● The start/stop system must be deactivated if work is to be carried out in the engine compartment. NOTICE If the start/stop system is used in very high outside temperatures over a long period, the 12-volt vehicle battery can be damaged. The engine stop function may be deactivated automatically if the temperature is above around 38°C (100°F). In some cases, it may be necessary to restart the engine manually. Follow any corresponding messages on the instrument cluster display. The start/stop function is activated automatically if the Eco driving profile is selected on vehicles with driving profile selection . Always deactivate the start/stop system manually when driving through water. Troubleshooting Engine no longer starts automatically (→ Starting the engine) —Start the engine manually —Deactivate the start/stop system manually. —Go to a qualified workshop immediately.
- Page 183 Manual gearbox: Selecting a gear Fig. 1 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox. Depending on the equipment level, your vehicle may have a 5-speed manual gearbox. Selecting a forward gear The positions of the individual gears are displayed on the gear lever. —Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal. → —Move the gear lever to the required position —Release pedal to engage the clutch. —In some countries, the clutch pedal will have to be depressed fully in order to start the engine. Selecting reverse gear —Reverse gear should be selected only when the vehicle is stationary. → —Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal —Move the gear lever to the neutral position and push down. → Fig. 1 —Push the gear lever fully to the left and then forwards into the reverse gear position —Release pedal to engage the clutch. Shifting down Shifting down while driving should always be done one gear at a time, i.e. to the next lower gear and not with high engine speed → . At high speeds or high engine speeds, damage to the clutch and the gearbox could occur if one or more gears are → skipped when shifting down gear, even if the clutch is not released when doing this WARNING Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction and skidding, particularly on slippery roads. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle, which can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Use fast acceleration only if visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit, and other road users are not put at risk due to the acceleration and driving style. ● Always adjust your driving style in accordance with the flow of traffic. ● When the TCS is switched off, the drive wheels may spin, especially if the road surface is wet, slippery or dirty. This may result in you no longer being able to steer or control the vehicle. WARNING When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch is released. This also...
- Page 184 applies when the electronic parking brake has been switched on. ● Never engage reverse gear while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING Shifting gears incorrectly to gears that are too low can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle, with accidents and serious injuries as a consequence. NOTICE Serious damage to the clutch and gearbox could occur if the gear lever of the manual gearbox is shifted to a gear which is too low when travelling at high speeds or at high engine speeds. This also applies if the clutch remains depressed and the gears do not engage. NOTICE Please note the following points in order to avoid damage and premature wear: ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure from your hand is passed onto the selector forks in the gearbox. ● Ensure that the vehicle has come to a full stop before engaging reverse gear. ● Always fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear. ● Do not hold the vehicle by “riding” the clutch on uphill gradients with the engine running. Changing up a gear early will help to save fuel and minimise engine noise. Troubleshooting Clutch is “slipping” The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Clutch is not transmitting the full engine torque. —If necessary, remove foot from the clutch pedal. Clutch overheated The indicator lamp lights up yellow. (→ Manual gearbox) An acoustic warning may also be given The clutch can overheat, for example if the vehicle pulls off frequently, travels at a “crawl” for long periods, or in stop and go traffic. Overheating is indicated by the warning lamp and in some cases by additional warning lamps and a text message on the instrument cluster display. —You can continue to drive. Clutch defective The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The clutch is faulty. —Drive on carefully! —Seek expert assistance. Failure to do so can cause considerable clutch damage.
- Page 185 Function of the DSG® dual clutch gearbox Description The vehicle is equipped with a DSG dual clutch gearbox. ® The DSG dual clutch gearbox is a gearbox which uses dual-clutch technology to change gear automatically. It uses a dual ® clutch and two gear train halves to enable very fast gear changes with no loss of torque. The DSG dual clutch gearbox thus ® combines the performance and economy of a manual gearbox with the comfort and convenience of a conventional automatic gearbox. Function Engine power is transferred to the drive shaft via the gearbox. In order to change gears, the power transmission between the engine and the gearbox has to be interrupted. This is what the clutch is for. With the DSG dual clutch system with its two gear train halves, the engine power is always connected to one gear train half ® when driving. Before a gear shift, the next-higher or lower gear is already preselected in the load-free second gear train half. The clutch on the non-driven gear is then closed, and the other is opened at the same time. This makes very fast gear changes possible. Thanks to its design, the DSG dual clutch gearbox is more efficient than an automatic gearbox. Whereas in an automatic ® gearbox the torque converter is constantly in use, in the DSG dual clutch gearbox the clutch can be opened at idling speed, ® thus saving fuel. Thanks to its efficiency, low weight and intelligent control system, the DSG dual clutch gearbox usually ® enables fuel consumption that is equal to or lower than a manual gearbox. However, just like the manual gearbox, the clutch in the DSG dual clutch gearbox is subject to wear. Regular maintenance is ® (→ Scope of service) necessary depending on the type of DSG dual clutch gearbox; further information . In the event of a fault ® in one gear train half, the DSG dual clutch gearbox also allows one gear train half to be deactivated and the journey to be ®...
- Page 186 DSG® dual clutch gearbox: selecting a selector lever position Fig. 1 Left-hand drive vehicles: selector lever for dual clutch gearbox DSG with lock button (arrow). Mirrored in right-hand drive vehicles. The selected selector lever position will be shown in the instrument cluster display when the ignition is switched on. – Parking lock The drive wheels are blocked. May only be selected when the vehicle is stationary . To disengage this selector lever position while the ignition is switched on, depress the brake pedal and press the lock button in the selector lever. – Reverse gear Reverse gear is selected. May only be selected when the vehicle is stationary . – Neutral The gearbox is in the neutral position. No force is transmitted to the wheels and the braking effect of the engine is not available. – Standard forward driving position Position : Normal programme. All forward gears are shifted up and down automatically. The timing of the gear shift is determined by the engine load, your individual driving style and the speed of the vehicle. Position : Sports programme. The forward gears are automatically changed up later and down earlier than in selector lever position D . This exploits the engine’s full power reserves. The timing of the gear shift is determined by the engine load, your individual driving style and the speed of the vehicle. → Fig. 1 To change between positions D and S, tap the selector lever to the rear The selector lever will always move back into selector lever position D /S. This also functions in the Tiptronic gate (→ Tiptronic) Selector lever lock The selector lever lock in position P or N prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
- Page 187 To release the selector lever lock, switch on the ignition and depress the brake pedal. Then press the lock button in the → Fig. 1 selector lever handle in the direction of the arrow The selector lever lock is not engaged if the position N is skipped, e.g. when shifting from reverse to D/S. This makes it possible, for instance, to “rock” the vehicle backwards and forwards to free the vehicle if it is stuck in snow or mud. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than approximately one second and the vehicle is travelling no faster than approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). WARNING Selecting the wrong position can cause you to lose control of the vehicle, which can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Never depress the accelerator when selecting a position. ● When the engine is running, the vehicle starts moving as soon as a position is engaged and the brake pedal is released. ● Never select reverse gear R or engage the parking lock P while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING Unintentional vehicle movements can cause serious injury. ● The driver must never leave the driver seat when the engine is running and a position has been selected. If you have to leave the vehicle while the engine is running, always switch on the electronic parking brake and move the selector lever to position P. ● If the engine is running and the selector lever is in position D /S or R, the vehicle must be held by the foot brake. The vehicle will “creep forward” even when the engine is idling, as power transmission is even then not fully interrupted. ● Never select reverse gear R or engage the parking lock P when the vehicle is in motion. ● Never leave the vehicle in selector lever position N . The vehicle can roll downhill, irrespective of whether or not the engine is running. NOTICE If the electronic parking brake is not switched on when the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is released when the parking lock P is engaged, the vehicle may move a few centimetres forwards or backwards. If the selector lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, take your foot off the accelerator. Wait for the engine to reach idling speed in the neutral position before selecting a driving position again. If the selector lever is not left in the parking lock position P for long periods when the engine is switched off, the 12- volt vehicle battery will discharge.
- Page 188 Fig. 2 Steering wheel with paddles for Tiptronic. The gear that is currently selected will be maintained when the Tiptronic mode is selected. This remains the case as long as the system does not automatically carry out a change of gear due to the current driving situation. Operating Tiptronic with the selector lever —Push the selector lever from position D /S to the right into the Tiptronic gate. – → Fig. 1 or back to shift gear up or down —Touch the selector lever forwards When touching the selector lever in the Tiptronic gate, it is not necessary to press the lock button on the selector lever. Operating Tiptronic with the paddles → Fig. 2 —Pull the right paddle towards the steering wheel to change up a gear —Pull the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change down a gear. —To leave the Tiptronic mode, pull the right paddle towards the steering wheel for approximately one second. The Tiptronic mode is automatically exited if the selector paddles are not operated for some time and the selector lever is not in the Tiptronic gate. NOTICE ● When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up to the next gear shortly before the maximum permitted engine speed is reached. ● When shifting down a gear manually, the gearbox will not change gear until the engine can no longer be overrevved.
- Page 189 Driving with DSG® dual clutch gearbox The gearbox changes the forward gears up and down automatically. Driving down hills The steeper the downhill gradient, the lower the gear you will need. Lower gears increase the braking effect of the engine. Never allow the vehicle to roll down mountains or hills in the neutral position N. —Reduce your speed. (→ Tiptronic) —Push the selector lever from position D /S to the right into the Tiptronic gate —Touch the selector lever to the rear to change down gear. (→ Tiptronic) —OR: shift down a gear using the paddles on the steering wheel Stopping and pulling away on uphill gradients The steeper the uphill gradient, the lower the gear you will need. (→ Auto Hold function) If you wish to stop the vehicle or pull away when driving uphill you should use the Auto Hold function When you stop the vehicle on an uphill gradient with a selected position, the vehicle must always be prevented from rolling by depressing the brake pedal or by applying the electronic parking brake. Do not release the brake pedal or switch off the → electronic parking brake until you pull away Coasting with DSG dual clutch gearbox ® In coasting mode, the momentum of the vehicle can be used to save fuel in conjunction with an anticipatory driving style. The engine no longer brakes the vehicle – the vehicle can roll for a longer distance. The function is available only in the selector lever position D/S and at speeds of approximately 40 – 130 km/h (25 mph – 80 mph). Initiating coasting (→ Driving profile selection) —Select the Eco driving profile from the driving profile selection menu —Take your foot off the accelerator. The engine will be disengaged and run at idling speed. The vehicle rolls without the braking effect of the engine. Cancelling coasting mode —Depress the brake pedal forcefully. —OR: depress the accelerator or brake pedal briefly. —OR: pull a paddle towards the steering wheel. —OR: press the selector lever to the Tiptronic position. —OR: change the driving profile from E co. Kickdown function The kickdown function enables maximum acceleration in the selector lever position D /S or in the Tiptronic position.
- Page 190 WARNING Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction and skidding, particularly on slippery roads. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle, which can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Always adjust your driving style in accordance with the flow of traffic. ● Use the kickdown function or fast acceleration only if visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit, and other road users are not put at risk due to the acceleration and the driving style. ● Please note that the driven wheels could start to spin and the vehicle could skid if the TCS is switched off, especially if the road is slippery. ● Switch the TCS back on after acceleration. WARNING Never “ride” the brake pedal. Do not overuse the brake pedal. Constant braking will cause the brakes to overheat. This can considerably reduce the braking effect, increase the braking distance and, in certain circumstances, cause the brake system to fail completely. NOTICE ● If you stop the vehicle on an incline, do not attempt to stop it from rolling back by depressing the accelerator while a position is still selected. The DSG dual clutch gearbox could overheat and be damaged. ® ● Never allow the vehicle to roll in position N , particularly if the ignition is switched off. The DSG dual clutch gearbox will ® not be lubricated and could be damaged. NOTICE Never let the brakes “rub” by applying light pressure to the brake when it is not necessary to brake. This will increase levels of wear. Troubleshooting Fig. 1 Manually release selector lever lock (variant 1)
- Page 191 Fig. 2 Manually release selector lever lock (variant 2) The engine will not start The indicator lamp lights up green. Brake pedal was not depressed, e.g. when trying to engage another position with the selector lever. —To select a position, press the brake pedal. (→ Electronic parking brake) —See also Electronic parking brake Lock button prevents you from driving off The indicator lamp flashes green. The lock button in the selector lever is not engaged. —Check whether the lock button is engaged. —Engage the lock button if necessary. Selector lever lock prevents you from driving off The indicator lamp flashes green. An information text is additionally displayed. In rare cases, the selector lever lock may not engage in vehicles with a DSG dual clutch gearbox. ® The drive is then deactivated to prevent the vehicle from accidentally pulling away. —Depress the foot brake and then release it again. Gearbox overheated The indicator lamp lights up yellow. An acoustic signal may also be given. A text message may also be shown on the instrument cluster display. The DSG dual clutch gearbox can become too hot, for example, if the vehicle pulls off regularly, during long periods at ® “crawling” speed, or in stop-and-go traffic. — Do not drive on! → —Allow the gearbox to cool down with the parking lock P engaged —Do not drive on if the indicator lamp does not go out. —Seek expert assistance. Failure to do so could result in considerable damage to the gearbox. Releasing the selector lever lock manually...
- Page 192 If the power fails in the vehicle, e.g. if the 12-volt battery is flat and the vehicle is to be towed, the selector lever lock must be released manually. Seek professional assistance. The manual release mechanism is located under the cover of the gearshift gate. Removing the cover of the gearshift gate: —Switch on the electronic parking brake. If the electronic parking brake cannot be switched on, the vehicle will have to be prevented from rolling off using other means. —Switch off the ignition. —Carefully pull the cover upwards in the area around the selector lever gaiter with connected electrical wiring. —Pull the cover up and over the selector lever. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are two possible manual release mechanisms for the selector lever lock. → Releasing the selector lever lock manually: —Using the flat blade of the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit, carefully push the release lever in the direction of the → Fig. 1 arrow (magnifying glass) and keep it in this position (variant 1). → Fig. 2 and hold it in this position (variant 2). —OR: push the release lever in the direction of the arrow —Press the lock button on the front of the selector lever and move the selector lever into position N. —After manual unlocking, carefully press the cover into the centre console while ensuring that the electrical wires are positioned correctly. Emergency mode There is a fault in the system if all the displays on the instrument cluster for the selector lever positions have a light background. The DSG dual clutch gearbox is running in an emergency programme. The vehicle can still be driven in the ® emergency programme, but only at reduced speed and not in all gears. In vehicles with a DSG dual clutch gearbox, you may no longer be able to select reverse gear. ® In all cases, you should have the DSG dual clutch gearbox checked by a qualified workshop immediately. ® Vehicle does not move even though position is engaged If the vehicle will not move in the required direction, the system may have selected the position incorrectly. —Depress the brake pedal and reselect the position. —If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system fault. Seek expert assistance and have the system checked.
- Page 193 The downhill speed control system helps when braking and travelling downhill in vehicles with a DSG dual clutch gearbox → ® . The downhill speed control uses the braking power of the engine. The DSG dual clutch gearbox selects the best gear depending on the steepness of the gradient and the current speed. The ® selector lever must be in position D/S. The downhill speed control is not active in Tiptronic mode. As the downhill speed control can shift down only as far as third gear, it may be necessary to activate the Tiptronic mode when driving down particularly steep inclines. When in Tiptronic mode, select second or first gear manually in order to make use of the braking effect of the engine and to relieve the load on the brakes. The start/stop system is automatically deactivated as long as downhill speed control is active. Activating downhill speed control automatically: —If the downhill gradient is greater than approximately 6%. —AND: if the selector lever is in position D /S. —In addition, if Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is switched off: if the vehicle speed is less than approximately 80 km/h (50 mph) or the brake pedal is depressed. —In addition, if Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is active: if the stored speed is exceeded. Deactivating downhill speed control automatically: —If the downhill gradient becomes less steep. —OR: if the gearbox shifts up a gear because the engine speed is higher than approximately 4,500 rpm. —Or in addition if Adaptive Cruise Control ( ACC) is active: if the stored speed can be maintained. WARNING The intelligent downhill speed control technology cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Never allow the extra convenience afforded by pull-away assist systems to tempt you into taking any risks when driving. ● Unintentional vehicle movements can cause serious injury. ● The downhill speed control cannot replace the full concentration of the driver. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● The downhill speed control cannot hold the vehicle on the gradient in all situations or brake it sufficiently on all slopes going downhill (e.g. if the ground is slippery or icy). WARNING Always be prepared to brake the vehicle. Accidents and injuries could occur if this is not ensured.
- Page 194 —The engine is running. —The Offroad driving profile is selected . —The speed is under 30 km/h (19 mph) (the function display is shown on the instrument cluster display). —The downhill gradient is at least 10 %. —You do not brake or accelerate. Hill Descent Control is deactivated if the speed exceeds 30 km/h ( 19 mph), if the driver brakes or accelerates or if the downhill gradient is less than 5%. WARNING The intelligent Hill Descent Control technology cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Never let the extra convenience afforded by Hill Descent Control tempt you into taking any risks when driving. ● Unintentional vehicle movements can cause serious injury. ● The Hill Descent Control cannot replace the full concentration of the driver. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Hill Descent Control may not be able to hold the vehicle on all gradients or brake it sufficiently on all slopes going downhill (e.g. if the ground is slippery or icy). WARNING Always be prepared to brake the vehicle. Accidents and injuries could occur if this is not ensured. ● The Hill Descent Control system is only a support function and may not be able to brake the vehicle sufficiently in all situations when driving downhill. ● The vehicle may accelerate despite the Hill Descent Control system. Information on steering The steering should be locked every time you leave the vehicle to make it more difficult for the vehicle to be stolen. The steering The power steering provided by the electromechanical steering system automatically adjusts to the vehicle speed, steering torque and steering angle of the wheels. The electromechanical steering only functions when the engine is running. The steering also functions when the start/stop system intervenes and switches off the engine. You will need considerably more strength than normal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is reduced or has failed completely. In vehicles with driving profile selection, the selected driving profile can affect the behaviour of the power steering. Electronic steering column lock in vehicles with a starter button The steering column is locked electronically in vehicles with a starter button: —Stop the vehicle. Move the selector lever to position P if necessary.
- Page 195 —Turn the steering wheel slightly to relieve the load on the steering lock mechanism. —Insert the vehicle key into the ignition lock. —Hold the steering wheel in this position and turn the ignition on. Counter steering assistance Counter steering assistance provides the driver with power steering in critical driving situations. Additional steering power helps the driver when counter steering → Progressive steering Depending on the vehicle equipment, progressive steering can adjust the required steering movement to the driving situation. Progressive steering only functions when the engine is running. In urban traffic , less steering input is required when parking, manoeuvring, or turning sharply. When driving on country roads or on the motorway , the progressive steering provides a more sporty, direct steering response, and a dynamic feel. WARNING If the power steering is not working, the steering wheel is difficult to turn, which makes it difficult to steer the vehicle. ● Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the power steering functions only when the engine is running. ● Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is switched off. ● Never remove the vehicle key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering column lock may be activated and it will no longer be possible to steer the vehicle. WARNING In conjunction with the ESC, counter steering assistance provides the driver with assistance when steering in critical driving situations. The driver must steer the vehicle at all times. Counter steering assistance does not steer the vehicle. NOTICE When the vehicle is towed, the ignition must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking, and so that the turn signals, horn, wipers and window washer system can be used. Troubleshooting Steering fault The warning lamp lights up or flashes red. There is a fault in the electromechanical steering or electronic steering column lock. — Do not drive on! Seek expert assistance. —If the warning lamp lights up red, the steering may be stiff because the electromechanical steering has failed.
- Page 196 —Turn the steering wheel to and fro. —Switch the ignition off and then on again. —Observe the messages on the instrument cluster display. —Do not continue your journey if the indicator lamp still flashes after the ignition is switched on. Seek expert assistance. Introduction to the topic By selecting different driving profiles, the driver can adapt the characteristics of the vehicle systems to the current driving situation, the desired ride comfort and an economical driving style. The adaptable vehicle systems include the chassis, steering, drive and the air conditioning system. Different driving profiles are available, depending on the vehicle equipment level. The effect on the vehicle systems in the individual driving profiles depends on the vehicle equipment level. Differentiation by powertrain type Only vehicles with all-wheel drive have a rotary switch for 4MOTION Active Control. Vehicles with adaptive chassis control (DCC) The adaptive chassis control (DCC ) continuously adjusts the chassis damping to the current road surface and driving situation while the vehicle is in motion. DCC incorporates the chassis tuning of the selected driving profile. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user account changes (→ Personalisation)
- Page 197 Selecting a driving profile Fig. 1 In the centre console: MODE button for driving profile selection. Fig. 2 In the centre console: rotary switch for 4MOTION Active Control. 1 MODE button: select onroad driving profiles and open menu in the Infotainment system. 2 Snow driving profile. 3 Onroad driving profile. 4 Offroad driving profile. 5 Offroad Individual driving profile. → You can select the driving profile when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is stationary or when driving If you have selected a driving profile while driving, the vehicle systems will be switched immediately to the new driving profile except for Drive. —To activate the newly selected driving profile for the D rive system also, take your foot off the accelerator as soon as permitted by the traffic situation. Selecting the driving profile via the MODE button 1. Press 2. To select driving profiles, press again or tap the desired driving profile in the Infotainment system. Selecting driving profile by means of rotary switch → Fig. 2 1. Turn the rotary switch until the LED lights up next to the desired driving profile 2. To switch the onroad driving profiles, press the MODE button or tap an onroad driving profile in the Infotainment system.
- Page 198 Displaying information on the driving profile — To display further information on the selected driving profile, tap in the Infotainment system. Selecting the Individual driving profile 1. Press OR: turn the rotary switch until the L ED lights up next to the Onroad driving profile. 2. Select Individual in the Infotainment system. 3. To open the Individual menu, tap Change. Selecting the Offroad Individual driving profile 1. Turn the rotary switch until the LED lights up next to the Offroad Individual driving profile. 2. If the Offroad Individual driving profile is already selected, press the MODE button on the rotary switch. 3. To open the Individual menu, tap Change. WARNING Selecting a driving mode while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road and cause accidents. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. Characteristics of the driving profiles Eco: switches the vehicle into economical mode and helps you to drive the vehicle in a fuel-efficient manner. The system automatically switches to gear position E when the Eco driving profile is selected. Comfort: the driving profile creates a comfort-oriented vehicle setup and is suited to long motorway journeys, for example. The Comfort driving profile is available only for vehicles with DCC Normal: the driving profile corresponds to the basic settings of the vehicle systems and offers a balanced setup, e.g. for everyday use. Sport: this setting gives you a sporty driving feeling. If you select the S port driving profile, position S will be selected on vehicles with an automatic gearbox. Individual: you can adapt individual vehicle systems according to your personal wishes. Additional driving profiles for 4MOTION Active Control Snow: the Snow driving profile can be used to improve grip on icy or snowy roads through more targeted power transmission.
- Page 199 Offroad Individual: an enhanced version of the offroad driving profile that you can adapt to your individual needs. The instrument cluster display indicates when an Offroad driving profile is selected. Standard behaviour of the driving profiles and vehicle systems The Normal driving profile corresponds to the basic settings of the vehicle systems when the ignition is switched on. Behaviour of the driving profiles when the ignition is switched off and on If you switch the ignition off and then back on again, the previously selected driving profile remains selected. If you have previously selected the driving profile S now, Offroad or Offroad Individual and switch the ignition off and then back on again, the last-selected onroad driving profile will be set. The driving profile Sport will be selected if you switch the ignition off and then back on again in sporty special versions of the vehicle. Behaviour of the Drive vehicle system when the ignition is switched off and on The settings of the Drive vehicle system are reset to the settings of the Normal driving profile as soon as you switch the ignition off and on again. The other vehicle systems retain their settings when you switch the ignition off and then back on again. In sporty special versions of the vehicle, the settings of the D rive vehicle system will be reset to the settings of the Sport driving profile as soon as you switch the ignition off and on again. You can switch the Drive vehicle system to the desired driving profile again: —Select the desired driving profile again. OR: to activate the settings in the S port driving profile again, move the selector lever of the automatic gearbox back to the S position.
- Page 200 Troubleshooting Fault in the adaptive chassis control (DCC) The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The message Fault: damper may be displayed on the instrument cluster display. —Go to a qualified workshop and have the system checked. Position S cannot be selected It is not possible to select the position S in the Offroad and Snow driving profiles. When the Offroad driving profile is selected, the instrument cluster display will indicate this. —Select a different driving profile in order to be able to select the position S . The driving profiles or vehicle systems do not behave as expected. (→ Driving profile selection) —Note the standard behaviour of the driving profiles and vehicle systems...
- Page 201 Offroad display Fig. 1 In the Infotainment system: offroad display. The offroad display contains digital instruments that show additional information about the vehicle and its surroundings. This makes it possible to assess the current driving situation more precisely. Opening the offroad display 1. Press the MENU button in the Infotainment system. 2. Tap the Vehicle function button. 3. Tap the Selection function button. 4. Tap the Offroad function button. Selecting instruments and setting units The Infotainment system shows various instruments → Fig. 1 —To change instruments, swipe vertically over the display. The units of measurement can be adjusted for some instruments in the Infotainment system (→ Infotainment system controls and displays) Instruments in the offroad display The options for selecting instruments depend on the vehicle equipment. —Compass: the compass shows the current driving direction. —Steering angle display: the steering angle of the vehicle is displayed. The value is positive for a left steering angle and negative for a right steering angle. —Altimeter: the altimeter shows the current height above sea level. —Coolant temperature display: the display corresponds to the temperature display on the instrument cluster . —Oil temperature display: the display corresponds to the oil temperature display on the instrument cluster. Adapting the display areas to the driving situation The instruments displayed can be selected depending on the driving situation, the environmental conditions and the offroad conditions: —Sandy terrain: oil and coolant temperature display, steering angle display. —Inclines: steering angle display, coolant temperature display, altimeter.
- Page 202 —Alpine terrain: steering angle display, altimeter, compass Introduction to the topic The example stated in this chapter must be understood as general guidelines that are intended to help the driver to drive safely when driving offroad. However, it is not possible to predict whether these guidelines will be valid for all situations that could occur. Before driving in unknown terrain, it is crucial to obtain knowledge about the characteristics of the terrain ahead. This will enable you to assess potential danger in advance. The driver is responsible for deciding whether the vehicle is suitable for the terrain in question and whether it is possible to drive across the terrain. Driving offroad demands different skills and driving styles in comparison to driving on roads. The vehicle is not built for “expedition-type” travel. The driver can use 4MOTION Active Control to activate a variety of vehicle settings in an all-wheel drive vehicle as required (→ Driving profile selection) Switch off the driver assist and parking systems when driving offroad. Checklist Before using the vehicle offroad for the first time, the following steps should be taken in order to be able to drive and control the vehicle away from surfaced roads: Observe the basic safety notes for offroad driving. ✓ (→ Sitting position) ✓ Adjust the seat position so that you have a good view to the front. Fasten seat belts Always wear suitable, well-fitting shoes that provide good grip for your feet when using the pedals. ✓ A responsible driver should respect the environment when driving offroad. Remember that driving through undergrowth and on meadows can destroy animal and plant habitats. Leaking service fluids due to vehicle damage can pollute the environment. Spilt service fluids must be collected and disposed of properly and with respect for the environment. Take suitable accessories and equipment with you when driving offroad.
- Page 203 Safety notes for offroad driving WARNING The intelligent technology of the vehicle cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the system limits. Despite input from the ABS, adverse terrain can cause instability through locked wheels – e.g. if you brake hard when driving on loose gravel. The activated ESC system will have difficulty stabilising the vehicle in these circumstances. WARNING Driving offroad can be dangerous and could cause accidents, serious injury, damage to the vehicle and also a vehicle breakdown far from any assistance. ● Never select a dangerous route and never take risks that could endanger you and your passengers. If you cannot drive further or if you are in any doubt about the safety of a route, turn around and choose another route. ● Even terrain that looks harmless can be difficult and dangerous, and could get you and your passengers into difficulties. It is preferable to walk over the terrain before driving over it. ● You should drive particularly carefully and think ahead when driving offroad. If you drive too fast or if a driving manoeuvre is unsuccessful this could result in serious injuries and vehicle damage. ● Never drive faster than the current terrain, road conditions, traffic and weather allow. ● Never drive too fast along embankments, ramps or slopes. This could cause the vehicle to lose contact with the ground. If this happens, you will be unable to steer and will lose control of the vehicle. ● If the vehicle does lose contact with the ground, always point the front wheels straight ahead. If the wheels are not pointing straight ahead when the vehicle lands, it could roll over. ● The terrain might look harmless, but there could be hidden dangers. Potholes, hollows, ditches, precipices, obstacles, shallows, soft and boggy surfaces are often not recognisable as such and can be covered either fully or partly by snow, water, grass or branches lying on the ground. Inspect terrain on foot if necessary. WARNING Sports utility vehicles are subject to a considerably higher risk of rolling over than normal road passenger vehicles (→ Offroad driving) ● In the event of an accident, vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are subjected to a considerably higher risk of fatal injury than those wearing seat belts. ● The vehicle has a higher centre of gravity and is more prone to rolling over than a “normal” passenger car which is unsuited for offroad driving. ● Never drive too fast, especially when driving through bends, or carry out any extreme driving manoeuvres. ●...
- Page 204 ● Never use the driver assist systems when driving offroad. WARNING Driving the vehicle when the fuel level is too low could lead to your vehicle breaking down offroad, accidents and serious injuries. ● Fill up with sufficient fuel before driving offroad. ● The steering and brake support systems will not function if the engine sputters or stops completely due to a lack of fuel or irregular fuel supply. NOTICE Any rain entering the vehicle when the windows or glass roof are open can soak the interior equipment and cause damage to the vehicle. Always keep the windows and glass roof closed when driving offroad. Explanation of technical terms Fig. 1 Illustration: gradient angle. Fig. 2 Illustration: inclination angle. Centre of gravity The centre of gravity of a vehicle influences its propensity to roll over. The vehicle has a higher ground clearance and therefore a higher centre of gravity than “normal” road vehicles so that it can be driven offroad. The higher centre of gravity means that there is a greater danger of roll-over when driving. Always remember this fact when driving and follow the safety tips and warnings given in this owner's manual. Ground clearance This is the vertical distance between the road surface and the lowest point on the vehicle underbody.
- Page 205 Gradient → Fig. 1 The difference in altitude (ascent) made over a distance of 100 m (330 ft) is given in percent or degrees Indication of gradient that the vehicle can drive up under its own power. The maximum gradient angle that the vehicle can overcome depends among other things on the road surface and engine power. Inclination Maximum angle at which the vehicle may be driven across a slope without the vehicle tipping over ( dependent on the → Fig. 2 centre of gravity) Breakover angle Maximum permitted angle given in degrees that a vehicle driven at low speed can drive over a ramp without the underbody of the vehicle touching the ramp. Ramp angle Transition from the horizontal level surface to a gradient, or from a gradient back to the level surface. Maximum permitted angle given in degrees that a vehicle can clear a ramp without the underbody of the vehicle touching the ramp. Fall line This is the vertical drop route. Articulation The vehicle's torsional flexibility when driving over objects with just one side of the vehicle. Checklist “Before driving offroad” Checklist To ensure your own safety and the safety of your passengers, observe the following points before driving offroad: ✓ Inform yourself sufficiently about the nature of the terrain ahead before you drive into the terrain. ✓ Fill the tank up to the maximum capacity. Fuel consumption is considerably higher offroad. Check whether the tyre tread of all tyres and the tyre type are suitable for the planned offroad trip. ✓ ✓ Check and adjust the tyre pressure for all tyres. Check engine oil level and refill engine oil as necessary. Oil will still reach the engine even when the vehicle is tilted only if ✓ the engine oil level is sufficient. ✓ Completely refill the washer fluid reservoir with water and washer fluid. Stow luggage in the vehicle as evenly and as low as possible. Secure all loose items. ✓...
- Page 206 General rules and driving tips —Volkswagen recommends never driving offroad alone. You should drive offroad with at least two offroad vehicles driving as a team. Unexpected situations can always occur. We recommend that you carry equipment you can use for calling for help. —Stop your vehicle when you reach difficult sections and check the route ahead on foot. —Drive slowly over the crests of hills so the vehicle does not lose contact with the ground, become damaged and possibly leave you unable to manoeuvre. —Drive slowly when the route is difficult. Shift up a gear when on slippery ground and always keep the vehicle in motion. —The ground is predominantly soft when driving offroad meaning the tyres could sink into the ground. This will reduce ground clearance and the wading depth. If possible, always drive on flat and firm ground. —Even when driving at low speeds, always keep your distance from other vehicles. If the first vehicle suddenly gets stuck, the following vehicle can stop without getting stuck. NOTICE ● Always ensure that there is enough ground clearance underneath the vehicle. Serious damage to the underbody could occur if the vehicle bottoms. This damage could cause the vehicle to break down and thus make it impossible to drive on. ● Do not ride the clutch or rest your foot on the clutch when driving offroad. When travelling over uneven ground, you could press the clutch by mistake and lose control of the vehicle. This also prevents power being transferred between the engine and the gearbox. In addition, driving with the clutch partially engaged causes premature wear to the clutch lining.
- Page 207 Changing gear correctly The choice of gear depends on the terrain. Before attempting to drive through difficult terrain it can be helpful to stop and consider which gear you should select. After several trips offroad, you will learn which gear to select in conjunction with the step-down ratio for different types of terrain. —With the correct gear selected, the vehicle will normally not have to be braked so much using the foot brake when driving downhill as the engine braking effect will normally be sufficient. —You should only depress the accelerator as much as is required. If you accelerate too hard, the wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. —Select position D when driving in normal, flat offroad terrain. —Adjust your speed when driving on soft or slippery ground, and select the highest suitable position for the Tiptronic. —On steep downhill or uphill gradients, select position 1 for the Tiptronic. (→ Automatic gearbox) —When driving through mud, sand, water or hilly terrain, drive with the Tiptronic in positions 3 or 2 (→ Offroad display) —Use the offroad display (→ Auto Hold function) — Use the Auto Hold function...
- Page 208 Driving on rough terrain (→ Driving profile selection) 1. Select a suitable driving profile and drive through rocky terrain no faster than walking pace. → 2. If you are not able to drive around a rock, drive carefully onto the rock with one front wheel and drive over it slowly Even obstacles that are smaller than the available ground clearance could come into contact with the vehicle underbody and thus cause damage which could lead to a vehicle breakdown. This applies in particular if there is a ditch or soft ground either in front of or behind the obstacle. This also applies in cases when you drive too quickly over the obstacle causing the vehicle to bounce. NOTICE You should never drive centrally over large obstacles, e.g. boulders or tree stumps, or drive over such obstacles with one side of the vehicle. Obstacles which require more ground clearance than is available could damage vehicle components when driving over them and thus cause the vehicle to break down.
- Page 209 Driving through standing or flowing water Driving through flooded terrain or bodies of water could damage the vehicle. It is possible to carefully drive the vehicle through water levels up to the lower edge of the body. 1. Observe the maximum wading depth of the vehicle. 2. When driving through water, always select a section where the ground is solid and where the depth of the water does not exceed the maximum permitted wading depth of the vehicle. (→ Driving through water on roads) 3. Observe further information on driving through water on roads Before driving through water → Stop the vehicle, get out and assess the situation 1. Measure the depth of the water to the other side. Ensure that the ground is firm enough and also watch out for → underwater hollows and obstacles 2. Make sure that it is possible to drive into and out of the water safely. 3. Check the ramp angle and the firmness of the ground on the banks. (→ Driving profile selection) 4. Select a suitable driving profile Driving through standing or slow-moving water → If the ground is firm enough, your vehicle can be driven through standing and slow-moving water 1. Drive slowly into the water following the direction of flow. Never exceed the ramp and inclination angles. 2. Drive at constant speed to the opposite bank. Driving with a constant speed makes it possible to avoid engine damage due to ingress of water. It also enables an air pocket to form in front of the engine which supplies the necessary oxygen to the engine. You will create a bow wave in front of the vehicle if you drive at speed into or through the water. This bow wave could get into the engine air intake duct and seriously damage the engine. Driving through fast-flowing water → The force, speed and depth of the water can be unpredictable and dangerous . The vehicle can be can be swept away by the water. Even vehicles with greater ground clearance can get stuck if the ground under the vehicle is swept away. Flowing water builds up at one side of the vehicle, making it deeper at that point.
- Page 210 sustain severe damage. ● Never drive over salt, salt flats or through salt water as salt can cause corrosion. Immediately rinse all vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt or salt water using fresh water. NOTICE Objects in the water can enter the openings of the extended washer jets of the headlight washer system. The washer jets cannot then be retracted to their initial position. ● Do not use the headlight washer system when driving through water. Driving in sand and mud ESC and TCS must be switched on . (→ Driving profile selection) 1. Select a suitable driving profile (→ Changing gear correctly) 2. Select a suitable gear and remain in this gear until you have reached more solid ground 3. Always drive at a steady speed through sand or mud, do not make any manual gear changes and do not stop. The tyres can lose their traction when driving through sand or mud. —Do not change speed or direction. —If the vehicle slides, steer in the direction needed to get the vehicle under control. —If the tyres have lost their grip, turn the steering wheel back and forth quickly. This will briefly give the front wheel tyres better grip for these ground conditions. WARNING Driving through sand and mud can be dangerous. The vehicle can slide uncontrollably. This increases the risk of injury. Always drive carefully through sand, mud and slush. ● Never choose an unsafe route or take a risk which could endanger you or your passengers. If you are in any doubt about the safety of the route, turn round and choose another way. WARNING Incorrect tyre pressure can cause severe or even fatal accidents. ● Incorrect tyre pressures will increase the levels of wear on the tyres and will negatively affect the vehicle's driving response. ● An incorrect tyre pressure can cause overheating, sudden tyre damage including tyre bursts and detachment of the tread and thus to a loss of control over the vehicle. ● If the tyre pressure has been nevertheless reduced for driving through sand, the correct tyre pressure must always be restored before driving on. Driving with reduced tyre pressure can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle and increase the risk of serious and fatal injuries.
- Page 211 If your vehicle gets stuck The vehicle is stuck if the wheels have sunk so deep into the ground that the vehicle can no longer drive forward or back under its own power. Rocking a vehicle out of sand or mud requires a great deal of training and feeling for the vehicle. If you make a mistake when rocking the vehicle, it can sink deeper and you will need assistance to get the vehicle out. → If your vehicle gets stuck Never allow the wheels to spin for long periods as this will cause the vehicle to sink deeper Preparations 1. Carefully dig out all the wheels and check that no other parts of the vehicle are stuck in the sand or mud. 2. Select reverse gear. 3. Accelerate gently and reverse over your own tracks. If this does not help, place brushwood, floor mats or sacking directly behind the wheels to increase grip and achieve improved traction → If your vehicle gets stuck Rocking the vehicle free 1. Switch off TCS . 2. Position the steering wheel so that it is facing straight ahead. 3. Reverse until the point where the wheels just start to spin. 4. Immediately select first gear and drive forwards until the wheels start to spin again. 5. Repeat driving to and fro until you have enough momentum to free yourself. 6. Switch the TCS on again after rocking the vehicle free. WARNING No-one must stand either in front or behind the vehicle, particularly if you are attempting to free a stuck vehicle. ● Spinning wheels can propel stones, brushwood, pieces of wood or other objects that are in front or behind the wheels at high speed and cause potentially fatal injuries. ● People standing in front of or behind the vehicle could be run over if the stuck vehicle starts to move suddenly.
- Page 212 Driving in steep terrain Driving up and down hills Get out of the vehicle and assess the situation before you attempt to drive up or down a hill: → —Walk along the section and check the firmness of the ground. Look out for obstacles and other hidden dangers —Check the section beyond the hill. —You should not follow the route if it is too steep, uneven or if the ground surface is too loose. Select another route. —Drive slowly and at constant speed straight up or down a slope. —Never attempt to stop or turn on a slope. —Accelerate only to the speed you need to climb the slope. Too much acceleration can cause the wheels to spin and lead to a loss of control of the vehicle. Too little acceleration increases the probability of stalling the engine. —Vehicles with a manual gearbox Do not change gear or engage the clutch when climbing a slope. —Vehicles with an automatic gearbox Do not change gear during the climbing phase. (→ Offroad display) —Use the offroad display If you cannot continue to drive up a hill —Never turn the vehicle around on an uphill gradient. —If the engine has stalled, depress the foot brake and start the engine again. —Engage reverse gear and slowly move back on a straight path. —Use the foot brake to keep a constant speed until you have reached safe and flat ground. Driving downhill There is an increased risk of rolling over when driving downhill. Concentrate on steering the vehicle, especially when driving downhill. —Drive down steep inclines in first gear. —Use the foot brake sparingly in order not to lose control of the vehicle. —Never exceed the inclination angle of the vehicle. —If it is possible and not dangerous, drive straight down the slope on the maximum gradient (in the fall line). (→ Offroad display) —Use the offroad display and Hill Descent Control on steep downhill stretches WARNING Never attempt to drive up or down an incline if it is too steep for the vehicle. The vehicle could slide away, tip over or roll. ● The gradient or inclination angle must be no greater than the maximum permissible value for the vehicle. ● Always drive up and down hills in the fall line. ● Never turn the vehicle when driving up or down a gradient. The vehicle could tip over or slide away sideways. ● If the engine stops or if you cannot drive on for any reason, stop and press the brake pedal. Start the engine again. Select reverse gear, release the brake pedal and use the engine braking effect to carefully reverse in a straight line along the fall line. Keep the vehicle speed low and constant.
- Page 213 Traversing a slope Fig. 1 Illustration: steering into the fall line. Fig. 2 Illustration: use the doors facing up hill to get out of the vehicle. → Traversing a slope is one of the most dangerous offroad situations Check whether you can use a safer route before driving across a slope. If you have to traverse a slope: —The vehicle’s centre of gravity should be as low as possible. People with a larger or heavier build should sit on the higher side of the vehicle. Remove the roof carrier and secure heavy items. The vehicle could tip over if items were to slide → suddenly —If possible, the ground must be firm. The vehicle is more likely to slip sideways and tip over on slippery or soft ground. Always make sure that the inclination angle does not become too great due to uneven ground. If the inclination angle is too great, the vehicle could tip and roll over. —When driving across a slope at a large tilt angle, the wheels on the lower side of the vehicle must never enter dips or hollows. The wheels on the higher side of the vehicle must never drive over bumps, for example stones, tree trunks or other obstacles. → Fig. 1 . If it is —If the vehicle threatens to tip over, steer immediately into the fall line and depress the accelerator slightly not possible to steer into the fall line, then steer uphill and depress the accelerator slightly. WARNING Never try to drive at an angle on the slope, particularly if it is too steep for the vehicle. A vehicle that is in a sideways position to the slope can slip away in an uncontrolled manner, tip or roll over. Please note the following points in order to reduce the risk of accidents and serious injuries: ● You should never underestimate the difficulty and danger of traversing a slope. Never choose an unsafe route or take a risk which could endanger you or your passengers. If you are in any doubt about the safety of the route, turn round and choose another way.
- Page 214 ● The vehicle can lose its grip and slide away sideways, tip over or roll over and roll down the hill. ● The wheels on the lower side of the vehicle must never enter dips or hollows. The wheels on the higher side of the vehicle must never drive over bumps, for example stones, tree trunks or other obstacles. ● Make sure that you can steer into the fall line before driving across a slope. Choose another route if this is not guaranteed. If the vehicle threatens to tip over, steer immediately into the fall line and depress the accelerator slightly → Fig. 1 ● If the vehicle is stopped with a large side inclination angle when traversing a slope, avoid sudden and uncontrolled movements in the vehicle. The vehicle can lose its grip and slide away sideways, tip over or roll over and roll down the hill. ● Vehicle occupants should never leave the vehicle via the doors facing down the hill if the vehicle is stopped on a slope with a large side inclination angle. This could cause the centre of gravity to move sideways. The vehicle could tip or roll → Fig. 1 over and roll down the hill. To avoid this, always leave the vehicle carefully on the side that is facing uphill ● When getting out the vehicle, make sure that the vehicle door which opens uphill does not close with its own weight or through carelessness thus potentially causing injury. Driving through ditches 1. Check whether the ramp and inclination angles are small enough to drive through the ditch with the vehicle. The inclination angle must not get too large when driving through the ditch → 2. Find a suitable place to cross the ditch. → 3. If possible, cross the ditch at an acute angle WARNING Never drive through a ditch if the ramp and inclination angles are too steep for the vehicle and the ditch is too deep. The vehicle could slide away, tip or roll over. NOTICE If you drive into the ditch at a right angle, the front wheels will fall in. The underbody of your vehicle can bottom on the ground, become stuck and be damaged. It is then almost impossible to get out of the ditch despite having all-wheel drive.
- Page 215 After offroad driving Checklist Clean the vehicle. ✓ ✓ Check the vehicle for damage. ✓ Check the tyres for damage and remove dirt, stones and other foreign bodies from the tyre tread. Inspect the vehicle underbody and remove all items that are jammed in the brake system, in the wheels, in the running gear, ✓ → in the exhaust system and in the engine, such as branches, leaves or pieces of wood . If you see any damage or leaks, take your vehicle to a qualified workshop or seek expert assistance. Check the engine compartment to see if any dirt is affecting engine operation (→ In the engine compartment) ✓ WARNING Objects caught underneath the vehicle underbody are a danger. The vehicle underbody must always be examined for trapped objects after every journey offroad. ● Never drive if objects are trapped in the underbody, brake system, wheels, running gear, exhaust system and engine. ● Inflammable materials such as dry leaves could ignite on hot vehicle components. A fire can cause serious injuries. ● Trapped objects could damage the fuel lines, brake system, seals and other components. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause accidents.
- Page 216 Introduction to the topic The speed limiter helps to prevent the vehicle from exceeding a speed that you have stored. Speed range The speed limiter is available when driving forwards at speeds from around 30 km/h (around 20 mph). Driving with the speed limiter You can interrupt the speed limiter function at any time by fully depressing the accelerator beyond the point of resistance. The green indicator lamp flashes and an acoustic warning may sound when the stored speed is exceeded. The speed remains stored in the memory. The speed limiter function is activated again automatically as soon as the speed drops below the stored speed. Displays When the speed limiter is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the stored speed and the status of the speed limiter. Depending on the situation and the instrument cluster version, one of following indicator lamps lights up: The speed limiter is switched on. Speed limiter switched on, system control active. Speed limiter switched on, system control active. The indicator lamps are displayed small or grey when the speed limiter is not active. Driving downhill Change to a lower gear before you drive downhill for an extended period. In this way you will make use of the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes. WARNING Always switch off the speed limiter after use to avoid unintentional speed regulation. ● The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of his responsibility for the speed of the vehicle. Do not drive at full throttle if it is not required. ● Use of the speed limiter in adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious injury, e.g. through aquaplaning, snow, ice, or leaves. Use the speed limiter only when the road and weather conditions allow it to be used safely.
- Page 217 Operating the speed limiter via the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 1 Left-hand side of the multifunction steering wheel. Switching on button. —Press the The speed last set is stored. The system is not yet active. Starting control button. —While driving, press the The current speed is stored as the maximum speed. Setting the speed You can adjust the stored speed: + 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button. - 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button. + 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next higher ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment. - 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next lower ten (km/h) or fives (mph) increment Press and hold the or button to continuously change the stored speed. Cancelling control or —Press the button The speed remains stored in the memory. Resuming control button. —Press the The speed limiter is activated again as soon as the current speed is lower than the stored speed.
- Page 218 Switching off button. —Press and hold the The speed limiter is switched off and the speed remains stored ( also after the ignition is switched off). Switch to other driver assist systems Depending on the equipment, you can switch to the following driver assist systems: —Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC 1. Press the button. 2. Select the desired system on the instrument cluster display. The speed limiter is switched off. Troubleshooting Control is interrupted automatically —Malfunction. Switch off the speed limiter and go to a qualified workshop. For safety reasons, the speed limiter switches itself off completely only when you release the accelerator once or switch off the system manually. Control cannot be started —The selected driving profile does not allow control to be started. Select a different driving profile and repeat the process.
- Page 219 Introduction to the topic The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a constant speed that you have set. If the vehicle approaches a vehicle in front, the ACC automatically adapts the speed so that a distance you have selected is maintained. Does the vehicle have ACC? The vehicle is equipped with ACC if you can adjust settings for ACC in the Assist systems menu in the Infotainment system. Speed range You can set a speed between around 30 km/h (20 mph) and around 210 km/h (130 mph), or up to around 150 km/h (95 mph) in the USA. This speed range may differ in certain markets. Driving with ACC You can override the active ACC system at any time. Cruise control will be stopped if you brake. If you accelerate, cruise control will be interrupted while you are accelerating and then resumed. The intervention by the ACC system is less dynamic when towing a trailer. Driver intervention prompt If automatic deceleration by the ACC system is not sufficient or the system limits have been reached, the ACC system will request you to also brake by a corresponding message on the instrument cluster. In addition, the red warning lamp lights up and an acoustic warning is given. Take over control of the vehicle and be prepared to brake. Radar sensor detects driving situations using a radar sensor at the front of the vehicle. The range of the radar sensor is up to approximately 120 m (around 400 ft). WARNING The intelligent ACC technology cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Never let the extra convenience tempt you into taking safety risks when driving. Careless or unintentional use of the ACC can cause accidents and lead to serious injury. The system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Never use the ACC in poor visibility, on steep or winding roads, or on slippery road surfaces, e.g. due to snow, ice, wet roads, loose chippings, or on flooded roads. ● Never use the ACC offroad or on non-surfaced roads. The ACC is designed for use on surfaced roads only. ● Take control of the vehicle immediately if requested to do so by a prompt on the instrument cluster display or if the speed reduction by ACC is not sufficient. ● Brake if the vehicle starts moving unintentionally, e.g. after a driver intervention prompt. ●...
- Page 220 Special driving situations Overtaking If you indicate left (left-hand traffic: indicate right) to overtake, ACC will accelerate the vehicle and reduce the distance from the vehicle in front. Your set speed will not be exceeded. If ACC does not detect any vehicle in front after you have changed lane, ACC will accelerate the vehicle up to the set speed. Overtaking assistance is not available in all countries. Stop-and-go traffic can brake vehicles with an automatic gearbox to a standstill and hold them stationary. ACC remains active and the instrument cluster display shows ACC ready to start for a few seconds. As long as ACC remains active, the vehicle will move off again automatically as soon as the vehicle in front moves off (depending on the vehicle equipment level and not available in all countries). Extending or reactivating readiness to drive: button. —Press the Moving off when readiness to drive has ended and the vehicle in front has already moved away: button or briefly depress the accelerator. —Press the remains inactive in the following cases: —The vehicle is stationary for several minutes. —A vehicle door is opened. —The ignition is switched off. WARNING If the message ACC ready to start is shown on the instrument cluster display and the vehicle in front moves off, your vehicle will move off automatically. In some cases the radar sensor may be unable to detect obstacles that are located in the vehicle's path. This can result in serious injury and accidents. ● Always check the road ahead before moving off and brake the vehicle if necessary. Inside Overtaking Prevention System Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: slower vehicle detected in the left-hand lane (illustration). If ACC...
- Page 221 detects a slower vehicle in the left-hand lane (left-hand traffic: in the right-hand lane), ACC will brake the vehicle gently within the system limits and can therefore prevent a prohibited overtaking manoeuvre. The function is active from speeds of around 80 km/h (around 50 mph), but is not available in all countries. Limits of the ACC When not to use the ACC (→ Adaptive Cruise Is not suitable for use in the following driving situations due to the system limitations. Cancel control Control (ACC)) —Driving in heavy rain, snow or heavy spray. —Driving through road works, tunnels or toll stations. —Driving on winding roads, e.g. mountain roads. —Driving offroad. —Driving in multi-storey car parks. —Driving on roads with embedded metal objects, e.g. railway tracks. —Driving on roads with loose chippings. — V ehicles without Inside Overtaking Prevention System: On roads with more than one lane, if other vehicles are driving more slowly in the overtaking lane. WARNING If you use ACC in the above situations, this could result in accidents and serious injuries as well as violations of legal regulations. Delayed response If the radar sensor is exposed to environmental conditions that impair sensor functioning, the system may detect this only after a certain delay. For this reason, any restrictions to functions may be displayed only after a delay at the start of the (→ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) journey and when driving Objects that cannot be detected The radar sensor detects only vehicles that are moving in the same direction. It does not detect: —Persons. —Animals. —Stationary vehicles. —Crossing or oncoming vehicles. —Other stationary obstacles. Fig. 1 Turning and stationary vehicle. If a stationary vehicle is hidden behind a vehicle that has been detected by A CC → Fig. 1 and this vehicle turns off the road or changes lane, ACC will not react to the stationary vehicle Bends...
- Page 222 Fig. 2 Driving through bends. The radar sensor always measures straight ahead. For this reason, vehicles may be incorrectly detected or vehicles driving → Fig. 2 ahead not detected in tight bends Vehicles outside the sensor range Fig. 3 Narrow vehicle. Fig. 4 Vehicle changes lane. may not react or may react with a delay or with an unwanted response in the following driving situations: → Fig. 3 —Vehicles that are driving outside the sensor range in close proximity to your vehicle, e.g. motorbikes → Fig. 4 —Vehicles that change into your lane directly in front of your vehicle —Vehicles with bodies or attachments that project beyond the vehicle. Switching the ACC on and off...
- Page 223 Fig. 1 Left-hand side of the multifunction steering wheel. Switching on button. —Press the is not yet active and the indicator lamp corresponding to the driving situation lights up. Starting control button. —While driving forwards, press the stores the current speed and maintains the set distance. If the current speed is outside the defined speed range, ACC will set the minimum speed (when driving more slowly than the limit) or maximum speed (when driving faster than the limit) . In addition, the traction control system (TCS ) is activated and ESC Sport is deactivated. Depending on the situation and the instrument cluster version, one of following indicator lamps lights up: has taken control. ACC has taken control; no vehicle detected ahead. has taken control; no vehicle detected ahead. has taken control; vehicle detected ahead. has taken control; vehicle detected ahead. When ACC is not active, the indicator lamps are not lit or light up grey. Cancelling control —Briefly press the button or press the brake pedal. The indicator lamp corresponding to the driving situation lights up, and the speed and distance remain stored.
- Page 224 Control is automatically cancelled if the traction control system (TCS ) is deactivated. Resuming control button. —Press the adopts the last set speed and last set distance. The instrument cluster display shows the set speed and the indicator lamp corresponding to the driving situation lights up. Switching off button. —Press and hold the The set speed is deleted. Changing to the speed limiter 1. Press the button. 2. Select the speed limiter on the instrument cluster display. is switched off. Setting the ACC Setting the distance Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: set distance 1 (illustration, the ACC is regulating). You can set the distance in five steps from very small to very large: 1. Press the button. 2. Press the or button. 3. Alternatively, press the button repeatedly until the required distance is selected. → Fig. 1 The instrument cluster display shows the chosen setting . Please observe any country-specific requirements for the minimum distance. In the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system, you can choose whether you want to start control with the distance (→ Vehicle settings menu) set at the end of the journey or a preselected distance...
- Page 225 If the ACC has not taken control, the set distance and vehicle are not highlighted on the instrument cluster display. Setting the speed You can adjust the stored speed within the defined speed range by means of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel: + 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button, only when ACC is active. - 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button, only when ACC is active. + 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next higher ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment. - 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next lower ten (km/h) or fives (mph) increment Press and hold the or button to continuously change the stored speed. WARNING If you do not maintain the minimum distance to the vehicle in front or if the difference in speed between the vehicle in front and your own vehicle is so great that the braking action of ACC is insufficient, you are in danger of colliding with the vehicle in front. The braking distance is also longer in rain and winter road conditions. ● The Adaptive Cruise Control may not be able to detect all driving situations correctly. ● Always be prepared to brake the vehicle yourself. ● Speed and distance control are overridden when you press the accelerator. The ACC does not brake automatically in this case. ● Observe any country-specific regulations relating to the minimum distance. ● Always set a larger distance in wet or snowy conditions or when visibility is poor. Setting the system behaviour You can influence how sportily ACC reacts: —...
- Page 226 —Fault or malfunction. Switch off and restart the engine. —Paint work or structural modifications were carried out on the front of the vehicle. —The genuine Volkswagen badge is not used. —If the problem persists, go to a qualified workshop. The ACC does not function as expected (→ Vehicle care) —The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor (→ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) —The system limits have been exceeded —The brakes have overheated, control was interrupted automatically. Allow the brakes to cool down and check their functionality again. —If the problem persists, go to a qualified workshop. Control cannot be started Make sure that the following conditions are met: —Vehicles with a manual gearbox: A forward gear other than 1st gear has been engaged and the speed is at least 25 km/h (16 mph). —Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: A position has been selected for driving forward. —The brake lights on the vehicle are working. —The brake lights on the trailer are working. —ESC is not active. —The brake pedal is not depressed. Unusual noises during automatic braking —This is normal and is not a fault. Introduction to the topic The Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) can detect imminent frontal collisions and issue corresponding warnings. The system can also assist when braking and initiate automatic braking. Front Assist can help to avoid accidents, but is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. Front Assist functions only within the system limits. The warning times vary depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. Functions Front Assist includes the following additional functions depending on vehicle equipment and country: —Pedestrian Monitoring. The listed functions are automatically active (if present) when Front Assist is switched on. Detectable objects Front Assist can detect the following objects depending on vehicle equipment and country: —Vehicles. —Bicycles and motorcycles. — Pedestrians.
- Page 227 Driving with Front Assist You can cancel the automatic braking interventions by steering or pressing the accelerator. Automatic braking Front Assist can decelerate the vehicle to a standstill. The vehicle will then not be held permanently. Depress the brake pedal! The brake pedal will feel harder during an automatic braking operation. Detection of the driving situation Front Assist detects driving situations by means of the radar sensor at the front of the vehicle. The range of the radar sensor is up to approximately 120 m (400 ft). WARNING The intelligent technology used in Front Assist cannot overcome the physical limits specified, and functions only within the limits of the system. Never let the extra convenience afforded by Front Assist tempt you into taking risks when driving. Front Assist cannot prevent accidents and serious injuries on its own. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Adapt your speed and distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Please note that Front Assist cannot detect all objects throughout the entire speed range (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) ● If Front Assist issues a warning, brake your vehicle immediately depending on the traffic situation or avoid the obstacle. ● Front Assist can intervene unintentionally, for example if its functioning is impaired. You should therefore consider cancelling the automatic interventions by Front Assist if appropriate. ● If you are unsure about what systems your vehicle has, please enquire at a qualified workshop before starting your journey. Warning levels and braking intervention Speed ranges Front Assist provides maximum assistance in the following speed ranges: —Reaction to vehicles: around 5 km/h (around 3 mph) to around 250 km/h (around 155 mph). —Reaction to bicycles and motorcycles: around 5 km/h (around 3 mph) to around 250 km/h (around 155 mph). —Reaction to pedestrians: around 5 km/h (around 3 mph) to around 65 km/h (around 40 mph). The assistance may include an advance warning, an urgent warning and automatic braking or a braking intervention. A distance warning may also be displayed. Influencing factors Whether and in what speed range Front Assist reacts to the specified objects depends on the following factors: —Type of object. —Direction of travel of the object. —Speed of the object. —Speed of the vehicle. The operating range may therefore be restricted if the vehicle approaches an object very quickly and there is therefore little time for a reaction.
- Page 228 Front Assist detects when safety is endangered by driving too close to the vehicle in front. The indicator lamp lights up. Increase the distance. Advance warning Front Assist detects a possible collision and prepares the vehicle for possible emergency braking. An acoustic warning sounds and the red warning lamp lights up. Brake or take avoiding action. Urgent warning If you do not react to the advance warning, the system may initiate a short braking jolt in order to draw attention to the increasing collision risk. Brake or take avoiding action. Automatic braking Front Assist can brake the vehicle automatically in several stages with increasing braking force. The reduced speed means that it is possible to minimise the consequences of an accident. Braking intervention If the system detects that you are braking insufficiently when there is a risk of collision, Front Assist can increase the braking force and help prevent a collision. The braking intervention takes place only for as long as you press the brake pedal hard. Limits of Front Assist Immediately after vehicle start or after a system restart, Front Assist is not available or only partially available. The indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster display during this time. Front Assist has physical and system-related limitations. You should therefore always be prepared to take full control of the vehicle if necessary. Delayed response If the radar sensor is exposed to environmental conditions that impair sensor functioning, the system may detect this only after a certain delay. For this reason, any restrictions to functions may be displayed only after a delay at the start of the journey and when driving (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) Objects that cannot be detected Front Assist cannot react – or will react with a delay – in the case of the following objects: —Vehicles that are driving outside the sensor range in close proximity to your vehicle, e.g. vehicles that are driving offset to your vehicle or motorbikes. —Vehicles that change into your lane directly in front of your vehicle. —Vehicles with bodies or attachments that project beyond the vehicle. —Oncoming vehicles or vehicles crossing your path. —Stationary or oncoming pedestrians; generally no reaction to persons without Pedestrian Monitoring. —Stationary, oncoming or crossing cyclists. —When pedestrians and cyclists are not detected, for example because they are partially or fully hidden.
- Page 229 —Reversing. —If ESC is taking corrective action. — If the Offroad driving profile mode is switched on ( depending on equipment). (→ Brake support systems) —If ESC Sport (depending on equipment) is on —If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. —If several brake lights on the vehicle are faulty. —If there is a fault in several brake lights on a trailer with an electrical connection to the vehicle. —If the vehicle accelerates hard or the accelerator is fully depressed. —In complex driving situations, e.g. at traffic islands. —In unclear traffic situations, e.g. vehicles ahead are braking heavily or turning off. —If there is a fault in Front Assist. Switching off Front Assist → Front Assist is not suitable for use in the following situations due to the limitations of the system and must be switched off —If the vehicle is utilised in a capacity beyond usage on public roads, e.g. off-road or on a race track. —If the vehicle is being towed or is loaded onto another vehicle. —If the radar sensor is covered by any auxiliary equipment, e.g. auxiliary headlights. —If the radar sensor is faulty. —After external force on the radar sensor, e.g. after a rear-end collision. —In the event of multiple unwanted interventions. WARNING Failure to switch off Front Assist in the situations mentioned can result in accidents and serious injuries. Operating Front Assist Front Assist and the advance warning ( in some countries) are automatically switched on when you switch on the ignition. However, Front Assist is not available or only partially available as long as the indicator lamp is on. Volkswagen recommends that Front Assist and also the distance and advance warnings are switched on at all times. Exceptions (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) Switching on and off (→ Vehicle settings menu) —Switch Front Assist on and off in the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system OR: switch Front Assist on and off in the instrument cluster menus (→ Menus and information displays) If you switch off Front Assist, the advance warning and distance warning will also be switched off. The yellow indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster display.
- Page 230 Setting the distance and advance warnings When Front Assist is switched on, you can adjust the distance and advance warnings as follows: (→ Vehicle settings menu) —Switch the desired function on and off in the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can also set the warning time for the advance warning. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change automatically when the user account changes (→ Personalisation) Troubleshooting Front Assist is starting up The indicator lamp lights up white. —Front Assist is temporarily unavailable or limited. After a short drive on a straight, Front Assist is available and the indicator light goes out. When the vehicle is not in motion, the indicator lamp lights up continuously. Front Assist is not available, the radar sensor does not have sufficient visibility (→ Vehicle care) —The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor —The view of the radar sensor is impaired due to the weather conditions, e.g. snow, or due to detergent deposits or coatings. (→ Vehicle care) Clean the radar sensor —The view of the radar sensor is impaired by add-on parts, the trim frames of number plate holders or stickers. Keep the area around the radar sensor free. —The radar sensor has been displaced or damaged, e.g. due to damage to the front of the vehicle. Check whether damage is visible (→ Repairs and technical modifications) —Paint work or structural modifications were carried out on the front of the vehicle. —The genuine Volkswagen badge is not used. —If the problem persists, switch off Front Assist and go to a qualified workshop. Front Assist does not function as expected or is triggered unnecessarily several times (→ Vehicle care) —The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) —The system limits have been exceeded —If the problem persists, switch off Front Assist and go to a qualified workshop.
- Page 231 Introduction to the topic Within the system limits, the lane keeping system ( Lane Assist) helps the driver to stay in lane. The function is not designed to keep the vehicle in lane automatically, nor is it suited to this purpose. Using a camera in the windscreen, the lane keeping system detects road lane markings on the road. If your vehicle moves too close to a recognised road lane marking, the system will warn the driver with a corrective steering intervention. The corrective steering intervention can be overridden by the driver at any time. System limits Use the lane keeping system only on motorways and well-developed country roads. The system is not ready to intervene on both sides under the following conditions (passive system status): —The vehicle speed is under 55 km/h (approximately 32 mph). —The lane keeping system has not detected a road lane marking on either side. —In tight bends. —Temporarily if the driving style is very dynamic. —When the turn signal is switched on before changing lane manually. —If the driver vigorously oversteers a system intervention. —A road lane marking is crossed despite a system intervention. —The driver does not react to a driver intervention prompt. WARNING The intelligent technology used in the lane keeping system cannot overcome physical limitations, and functions only within the limits of the system. Always take care when using the lane keeping system otherwise you could cause accidents or injuries. The system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver and their steering. ● Adapt your speed and distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Your hands should always be on the steering wheel so that you can steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying in the lane. ● The lane keeping system cannot recognise all road lane markings. In certain circumstances, the lane keeping system may detect poor road surfaces, road structures or objects incorrectly as road lane markings. Immediately override any undesired intervention by the system. ● Observe the information on the instrument cluster display and respond according to the prompts, if permitted by the traffic situation. ● In the following situations undesired intervention by the lane keeping system can occur or no control assistance is provided by the lane keeping system. This means that it is crucial that the driver is attentive in these situations. It may be necessary to switch off the lane keeping system temporarily: ● Very sporty driving. ●...
- Page 232 Driving with the lane keeping system Switching on and off Depending on country, the lane keeping system is always switched on when the ignition is switched on. You can also switch the lane keeping system on and off manually. On the display of the instrument cluster (→ Assist systems menu) 1. Press the button. 2. Switch the lane keeping system on or off. (→ Vehicle settings menu) On the Infotainment system 1. Open the Assist systems menu. 2. Switch the lane keeping system on or off in the corresponding submenu. If there is a system fault, the lane keeping system can deactivate itself automatically. Speed range When road lane markings can be detected, the lane keeping system is ready to intervene at speeds above around 60 km/h (35 mph) within the system limits (system status active). Displays Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: lane keeping system displays. 1 Road lane markings detected. The system is ready to intervene on the side shown. 2 Road lane markings detected. System is actively intervening on the indicated side. 3 The system is not ready to intervene on the side shown. Depending on the situation and the instrument cluster version, one of following indicator lamps lights up: System is active and ready to perform control intervention. System is active and ready to perform control intervention. System intervention (corrective steering intervention).
- Page 233 System intervention (corrective steering intervention). If no warning lamp lights up, the system is not ready to intervene on either side ( passive system status) or is switched off. Driver intervention prompt If there is no steering activity, the system prompts you to drive in the middle of your lane by means of acoustic warnings and a display on the instrument cluster. If you do not react, the system will switch to passive state. Independently of steering activity, you will be additionally requested to drive in the middle of the lane again with a display on the instrument cluster display and with acoustic warnings if the corrective steering intervention takes place for an extended time. Steering wheel vibration The following situations can lead to vibration of the steering wheel: —The system can no longer detect a lane during a major steering intervention. You can also select the option Vibration or Steering wheel vibration in the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system. In this case, the steering wheel will vibrate if the vehicle drives over a detected road lane marking when the lane keeping system is active. Troubleshooting Fault message, lane keeping system not available An indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A message will also appear on the instrument cluster display. (→ Vehicle care) —The camera window is dirty. Clean the windscreen —The view of the camera is impaired due to the weather conditions, e.g. snow, or due to detergent deposits or coatings. (→ Vehicle care) Clean the windscreen —The view of the camera is impaired by add-on parts or stickers. Keep the area around the camera window free. —The camera has been displaced or damaged, e.g. due to damage to the windscreen. Check whether damage is visible (→ Repairs and technical modifications) —Fault or malfunction. Switch off and restart the engine. —If the problem persists, go to a qualified workshop. It can take a few seconds before a system fault is detected after the ignition is switched The system is not responding as expected —Do not attach any objects to the steering wheel.
- Page 234 Introduction to the topic The Blind Spot Monitor assists the driver when checking for traffic behind the vehicle. Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehicle. The system measures the distance and difference in speed in relation to other vehicles and uses visual signals in the wing mirrors to inform the driver. System limits Use the Blind Spot Monitor only on surfaced roads. The Blind Spot Monitor may not always interpret the traffic correctly in the following situations: —In tight bends. —When driving in the middle of two lanes. —When road lanes are of varying width. —At crests in the road. —In poor weather conditions. —Where there are special roadside structures, e.g. high or offset crash barriers. WARNING The intelligent technology used in the Blind Spot Monitor cannot overcome the physical limits specified, and functions only within the limits of the system. Never let the extra convenience afforded by the Blind Spot Monitor tempt you into taking any safety risks when driving. Careless or unintentional use of the Blind Spot Monitor can cause accidents and serious injuries. The system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. ● Adapt your speed and distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Your hands should always be on the steering wheel so that you can steer at any time. ● Observe the displays in the mirrors and on the instrument cluster display and act in accordance with the requests. ● Always pay attention to what is happening around the vehicle. ● Never use the Blind Spot Monitor if the radar sensors are dirty, covered or damaged. These circumstances can impair the proper functioning of the system. ● It may be hard to see the indicator lamp in the wing mirror in direct sunlight. Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and can therefore change (→ Personalisation) automatically when the user account is changed...
- Page 235 Driving with the Blind Spot Monitor Fig. 1 In the exterior mirror: Blind Spot Monitor display. Switching on and off —Depending on the vehicle equipment, by means of the button for the driver assist systems . —OR: using the Assist systems menu in the instrument cluster. (→ Vehicle settings —OR: depending on the vehicle equipment, in the D river assistance menu in the Infotainment system menu) When the Blind Spot Monitor is operational the yellow indicator lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up shortly one single time. This most recent system setting is retained even after the ignition has been switched off and on. Function When switched on, the blind spot sensor is active from a speed of approx. 15 km/h ( 9 mph). The faster another vehicle approaches, the earlier there is a corresponding display in the exterior mirror. → Fig. 1 In the following driving situations, the yellow indicator lamp will light up in the corresponding exterior mirror —If your vehicle is being overtaken. —When overtaking another vehicle with a speed difference of up to approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). No display will be shown if the overtaking manoeuvre is much faster. If a vehicle is detected in the blind spot and the turn signal is additionally activated in the direction of the detected vehicle (→ Blind Spot Monitor) , the yellow indicator lamp flashes . Blind Spot Monitor Plus In the case of vehicles with a lane keeping system, the yellow indicator lamp flashes even if you do not activate the turn signal when leaving your lane, provided that the lane keeping system is switched on (Blind Spot Monitor Plus). The driver is warned by a corrective steering intervention when changing lanes during a possible critical situation (information level, warning level). The steering intervention also occurs when the turn signal is activated for the corresponding direction. If the steering intervention is overridden by the driver, the steering wheel vibrates to give an additional warning. Automatic deactivation The radar sensors of the Blind Spot Monitor will switch off automatically if, for example, the system detects that a radar sensor is permanently covered. This can be caused by a layer of ice or snow in front of the radar sensor, for example. A text message will be shown on the instrument cluster display. If the Blind Spot Monitor has been automatically deactivated, the system cannot be activated until the ignition has been switched off and back on again.
- Page 236 The Blind Spot Monitor is automatically deactivated and cannot be activated when the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer or similar. Once a trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle and the driver pulls away, a text message appears in the instrument cluster display to inform the driver that the Blind Spot Monitor has been deactivated. The Blind Spot Monitor will be automatically activated again when the trailer has been unhitched from the vehicle, provided that the function was activated previously. The Blind Spot Monitor must be deactivated manually if you tow a trailer using a towing bracket that was not fitted at the factory. Troubleshooting Blind Spot Monitor is not working The indicator lamp lights up yellow. —Go to a qualified workshop. System fault (→ Vehicle care, —Clean the radar sensors or remove stickers or accessories from the radar sensors, wing mirrors and bumper exterior) —Check for any visible damage. The system is not responding as expected —The radar sensors are dirty. The sensor visibility may be impaired by dirt and snow or also residue from cleaning agents or (→ Vehicle care, exterior) coatings ( → Blind Spot Monitor) —The general conditions for system operation have not been met —The radar sensors are covered by water. —The vehicle is damaged in the area of the radar sensors, e.g. caused by parking collisions. —The detection ranges of the radar sensors are blocked by add-on parts, e.g. bicycle carriers. —Changes have been made to the paintwork in the area of the radar sensors or structural modifications have been made, e.g. on the vehicle front end or the running gear. —Only Volkswagen-approved vehicle paints may be used on the rear bumper. Other vehicle paints can restrict the function of the system or cause faults. —The side windows have been retrofitted with tinted window films.
- Page 237 Parking Parking the vehicle WARNING If the vehicle is not parked properly it can roll away even on a slight gradient. This can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● When parking, observe the specified order. ● Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the electronic parking brake is switched on and that the indicator lamp lights up red on the instrument cluster display when the ignition is switched off. ● Never remove the vehicle key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. This could cause the steering lock to engage suddenly. You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. With a manual gearbox, depress the clutch pedal f ully or disengage the clutch. 3. With an automatic gearbox, engage the parking lock P. 4. Switch on the electronic parking brake . 5. On uphill and downhill slopes, turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle will roll against the kerb if it starts to move. (→ Switching off the engine) 6. Stop the engine and switch off the ignition . The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display lights up red. 7. Take your foot off the brake pedal. 8. Turn the steering wheel slightly if necessary to engage the steering lock mechanism. → 9. Get out of the vehicle . Watch out for other road users. 10. Take all vehicle keys with you and lock the vehicle.
- Page 238 Operating the electronic parking brake Fig. 1 In the centre console: button for the electronic parking brake (illustration). Switching on button. —When the vehicle is stationary, pull and hold the The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up red when the electronic parking brake is switched on. → Fig. 1 The indicator lamp in the button lights up yellow. Switching off —Switch on the ignition. button. —Depress the brake pedal and press the —OR: when the engine is running, gently press the accelerator w ithout pressing the brake pedal. → Fig. 1 button and the red indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display go out. —The indicator lamp in the Automatic switch-on if the driver does not leave the vehicle correctly On vehicles with an automatic gearbox or DSG dual clutch gearbox: the electronic parking brake may switch itself on ® automatically if the system detects that the driver has not left the vehicle correctly. WARNING If not parked properly, the vehicle may roll away. This can cause accidents, serious injuries and damage to property. (→ Parking) ● Always park the vehicle in the specified order ● Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the electronic parking brake is switched on and that the indicator lamp lights up red on the instrument cluster display when the ignition is switched off. Automatic switch-off when driving off The electronic parking brake is released automatically when driving off if one of the following situations occurs when the → driver door is closed —DSG dual clutch gearbox: A position is engaged or changed. —Manual gearbox: The clutch is depressed fully before driving off.
- Page 239 If higher engine power is required to move off, the electronic parking brake will be deactivated only when you release the button. This can make it easier to move off with a high maximum trailer weight. Emergency braking function The emergency braking function should be used only in those situations where the vehicle cannot be stopped using the foot brake → button. The vehicle brakes strongly. An acoustic warning sounds at the same time. —Pull and hold the WARNING Incorrect use of the electronic parking brake can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Never use the electronic parking brake to brake the vehicle, except in emergencies. The braking distance is considerably longer as only the rear wheels are braked in some cases. Always use the foot brake. ● If the vehicle is to be kept stationary, do not press the accelerator when the engine is running and a gear is engaged. The electronic parking brake may become released and the vehicle could start moving. Troubleshooting Holding force is insufficient in the current situation The indicator lamp flashes red. It is not possible to park the vehicle safely. —Park the vehicle in a different place or on a level surface. —Hold the electronic parking brake until the vehicle pulls away. Fault in electronic parking brake The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Go to a Volkswagen dealership or qualified workshop. Electronic parking brake does not switch itself off The prerequisites for switching off are not met. OR: the 12-volt vehicle battery is discharged. (→ Electronic parking brake) —Check whether all requirements for switching off the electronic parking brake are met (→ Jump starting) —Jump-start the vehicle Electronic parking brake makes noises —Noises may be heard when the electronic parking brake is switched on and off. —If the electronic parking brake has not been used for a long period, the system will carry out occasional automatic and audible checks when the vehicle is parked.
- Page 240 Auto Hold function Fig. 1 In the centre console: button for the Auto Hold function (illustration). The Auto Hold function secures the vehicle against rolling away when stationary, without the vehicle having to be held by the foot brake. Prerequisites ✓ The driver door is closed. The engine is switched on. ✓ If position N is selected, the Auto Hold function will not switch on or will switch itself off. As a result, the vehicle will not be → held securely in a stationary position Switching on → Fig. 1 button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up yellow. —Press the → Auto Hold is ready for use, but the car is not necessarily stopped The Auto Hold function remains active when the ignition is switched on again. Keeping the vehicle stationary with the Auto Hold function —Make sure that the Auto Hold function is switched on. (→ Parking) —Bring the vehicle to a standstill using the brake —Manual gearbox: Either keep the clutch fully depressed or shift to neutral. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up green when the Auto Hold function is active. → The vehicle will be kept stationary. You can release the brake The hold function stops if the vehicle is driven off or if the prerequisites for the Auto Hold function are not met. Switching off button → . The indicator lamp in the button → Fig. 1 goes out. —Press the The electronic parking brake switches on automatically to hold the vehicle securely. However, the electronic parking brake will →...
- Page 241 —With the engine switched on, depress the brake pedal. button. The Auto Hold function is switched off. —Press the The Auto Hold function will be reactivated as soon as the brake pedal is depressed when the vehicle has come to a standstill. Settings in the Infotainment system With some equipment levels, additional settings can be adjusted in the Infotainment system, such as switching on the Auto (→ Vehicle settings menu) Hold function automatically when starting a journey WARNING The intelligent Auto Hold function cannot overcome the laws of physics, and operates only within the limits of the system. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the Auto Hold function tempt you into taking any safety risks when driving. ● Make sure that the indicator lamp lights up green or red on the instrument cluster if the vehicle is to be held securely. The vehicle is being held by the Auto Hold function if the green indicator lamp is lit and by the electronic parking brake if the red warning lamp is lit. ● Never leave the vehicle if the engine is running and the Auto Hold function is switched on. ● The Auto Hold function cannot hold the vehicle in all hill start situations or brake it sufficiently on all slopes going downhill, e.g. if the ground is slippery or icy. NOTICE Always switch off the Auto Hold function before driving into a car wash. Damage may otherwise be caused by automatic activation of the electronic parking brake. Safety notes Limits of sensors and cameras There are various sensors and cameras on the vehicle which detect and monitor the area around the vehicle by means of ultrasound, radar waves and optical systems. The various parking systems use different combinations of the sensors. Common → to all sensors is the fact that they are subject to technical and physical limits —Some objects may not be detected under certain circumstances, such as trailer drawbars, thin bars, fences, posts, trees, very → low or high obstacles, as well as open or opening boot lids —The detection ranges of the parking systems have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered. —In some cases, dirt or ice and water on the sensors and cameras could be registered as an obstacle or impair detection of objects. The sensor visibility may be impaired by dirt and snow, as well as residue from cleaning agents or coatings (→ Parking systems) —External sources of sound and certain surfaces on objects and clothing may influence the sensors' signals. In certain circumstances, the systems will be unable to detect or properly detect people and objects. —Certain objects, for example narrow posts or railings, may be difficult or impossible to see on the screen because of its low resolution or poor light conditions.
- Page 242 WARNING Camera lenses enlarge and distort the field of view. The image can be inaccurate for estimating the distance from persons or obstacles and could cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Do not rely on the camera image. NOTICE Observe a distance of 50 cm from walls and buildings in parking spaces without kerbs in order to avoid damage to the vehicle. Prerequisites Basic information The following prerequisites must be met so that the sensors and cameras are best able to detect the surroundings of the vehicle and display this information on the Infotainment system: —The doors and the boot lid are closed. —Exterior mirrors are not folded in. — The sensors or cameras are not covered by add-on parts or trim frames for number plates. —The surrounding area has a flat surface. —The vehicle does not have a heavy load at the rear or on one side. —The engine is running. (→ Brake support systems) —TCS and where applicable ESC are switched on The parking function and the acoustic warnings will be deactivated if other functions are operated on the Infotainment system during a parking operation. Finding a suitable parking space To ensure that a suitable parking space can be displayed and detected correctly, the following prerequisites must be met: —The length and width of the parking space must be larger than the vehicle dimensions and offer sufficient space for manoeuvring. —The distance when driving past the parking space should be around 1 m (3 feet). — V ehicles with Park Assist: the speed when driving past the parking space should not exceed 40 km/h ( 25 mph) for parallel parking spaces or 20 km/h (12 mph) for perpendicular parking spaces.
- Page 243 Displays in the Infotainment system The range of possible settings varies according to the country, the device and the vehicle's equipment specification. With some equipment levels, the vehicle approaching an obstacle is displayed in several segments on the Infotainment system and this is backed up by acoustic signals. The display may vary depending on the situation. The collision area has been reached when the penultimate segment is displayed, if not before. Do not drive on! All equipment and displays are described without indicating whether the equipment is optional or specific to the model type. The systems available depend on the equipment in the vehicle. General displays Mute audio signals. Adjust brightness, contrast and colour. Show display. Hide display. Close current display and end function. The following also applies to vehicles with Park Distance Control Red-coloured image segment: close obstacle. Vehicle is at risk. Brake. Yellow-coloured image segment: obstacle in the vehicle path. V ehicle is at risk. Adjust the steering wheel angle. White-coloured image segment: obstacle outside the path of the vehicle. System fault in the monitored area ( depending on equipment level). The colour may vary. Switch to rear view camera system (→ Rear view camera system) The following also applies to vehicles with rear view camera system Red line: boundary or vehicle safety clearance. Green lateral line: extension of the vehicle. (→ Park Distance Control) Switch to Park Distance Control Signal tones An intermittent signal tone is given if a sufficiently short distance between the vehicle and an obstacle is detected. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals. The signal tone will sound continuously if the obstacle is very close. Do not drive on! NOTICE Visual and acoustic warnings are given only for obstacles in the vehicle path. In the camera image, the guiding lines are shown by the system regardless of the vehicle surroundings. No automatic detection of obstacles by cameras takes place. Drivers must judge for themselves whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.
- Page 244 All of the reversing camera's guiding lines are hidden when the factory-fitted towing bracket is connected electrically to a trailer. All of the reversing camera’s guiding lines are hidden when the boot lid in which the camera is installed is opened. Automatic braking intervention The automatic braking intervention of a parking system is designed to reduce the possible damage due to a collision if an obstacle is detected during the parking manoeuvre. WARNING Do not let the parking systems’ automatic braking intervention tempt you to take any risks while driving. In some situations, the automatic braking intervention can only work in a limited way or not at all. Collisions with obstacles can cause injuries to persons and vehicle damage. The system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the parking systems. ● Always be prepared to brake and steer the vehicle yourself. ● Do not take any safety risks. ● React appropriately to the warnings and driving recommendations of the parking systems. Prerequisites —The vehicle speed does not exceed a maximum of around 10 km/h (6 mph) when manoeuvring. —A parking system was switched on. The automatic braking intervention does not take place if Park Distance Control has been activated automatically when driving forwards (→ Park Distance Control) What happens when an automatic braking intervention takes place? —The vehicle is braked to a standstill and then held for around two seconds if it encounters an obstacle. S tep on the brake! — OR: the vehicle is braked if it is too fast. The parking manoeuvre can then be continued. Switching on —The automatic braking intervention function is active as soon as a parking system has been activated by the driver. function button on the Infotainment system screen to manually switch on manoeuvre braking. —Touch the Switching off —The automatic braking intervention function is deactivated as soon as a parking system is deactivated. function button on the Infotainment system screen to manually switch off the manoeuvre braking —OR: touch the function of Park Distance Control. Manoeuvre braking function of Park Distance Control The automatic braking intervention by the manoeuvre braking function of Park Distance Control can be cancelled by pressing →...
- Page 245 Switch off the parking system if automatic braking intervention occurs too frequently, e.g. when driving off- road. If the vehicle has been braked by the manoeuvre braking function of Park Distance Control, the function is inactive for 5 metres in the same direction of travel or will be ready for use again after the gear or drive position has been changed. The parking manoeuvre will be aborted after emergency braking by Park Assist due to an obstacle. After an emergency braking by the Rear Traffic Alert, 10 seconds must elapse before automatic braking intervention can take place again. Troubleshooting The parking system is not responding as expected This could have various causes: (→ Parking systems) —The prerequisites for system operation are not met (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —The sensors or the camera are dirty or iced-up (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —The camera lens is not clean and the camera image is unclear —The ultrasound signal is subject to interference from external noise sources, e.g. pneumatic drill or cobblestones. —The vehicle is damaged in the area around the sensors or the camera, e.g. caused by parking collisions. —The detection range of the sensors or camera is blocked by add-on parts, e.g. bicycle carriers. —Changes have been made to the paintwork or structural modifications have been made in the area of the sensors or the camera, e.g. on the vehicle front end or the running gear. Please also observe text messages that appear in the display of the instrument cluster and the Infotainment system. No sensor or camera view, or the parking system has been switched off The sensor area is switched off permanently if a sensor fails. The affected sensor area can be displayed by the symbol in the Infotainment system. The parking system is switched off completely if necessary. If there is a fault in the Park Distance Control, a signal tone will sound for several seconds when it is switched on. A text notification may also be shown on the instrument cluster display. —Check whether any of the causes described apply. —You can switch the system back on again once you have rectified the cause of the problem. —If the problem persists, go to a qualified workshop. Park Assist is active and the vehicle brakes (→ Automatic In some countries, Park Assist can assist the driver with an automatic braking intervention in certain situations braking intervention) Depending on the vehicle equipment and certain conditions, e.g. weather, load or inclination of the vehicle, Park Assist can automatically brake the vehicle before an obstacle. Following this intervention, the driver must depress the brake pedal. The parking manoeuvre is ended if an automatic braking intervention occurs. Park Assist is active and the parking manoeuvre is automatically cancelled Park Assist cancels the parking manoeuvre in the following situations: is pressed.
- Page 246 —OR: the time limit or number of manoeuvres for parking are exceeded. —OR: TCS is switched off or is taking corrective action. —OR: there is a system fault. (→ Park Assist parking space search) Start the parking procedure again Park Assist is active and supports steering movements when the vehicle is stationary If Park Assist attempts to turn the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary, the white symbol appears on the instrument cluster display. —Depress the brake pedal. Park Assist parks inaccurately after a wheel change If Park Assist does not park properly after a wheel change ( e.g. vehicle is too far away or too close to the curb), it may be necessary for the system to adopt the new wheel circumferences. —Drive a longer distance with the vehicle, including curves. Park assist automatically learns the new wheel circumferences. Introduction to the topic The Park Distance Control system assists the driver when manoeuvring and parking. Fig. 1 Infotainment system: Park Distance Control with obstacle recognition and steering wheel angle (illustration). Function Park Distance Control detects the distance from an obstacle by means of sensors in the front and rear areas of the vehicle (→ Front view) (→ Rear view) . Park Distance Control warns about an obstacle by means of colour segments on the → Fig. 1 → Infotainment system screen and acoustic signals WARNING The intelligent technology used in the parking systems cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the system limits. If this is not observed, this can result in accidents, serious injuries and also damage to the vehicle. ● The parking system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. (→ Parking systems) Also observe the symbols and displays in the Infotainment system NOTICE The collision area has been reached at the latest when the penultimate segment is displayed on the Infotainment system screen. Do not drive on! Personalisation...
- Page 247 Some Park Distance Control settings, e.g. the volume of the acoustic signals, can be stored in the personalised user accounts. (→ Personalisation) The settings change automatically when the user account is changed Things to note for trailer towing The rear sensors for Park Distance Control are not switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer: —No warnings are given for obstacles. —The manoeuvre braking function is deactivated automatically. Park Distance Control settings Depending on the vehicle equipment, settings for Park Distance Control can be made in the vehicle settings in the (→ Vehicle settings menu) Infotainment system NOTICE With some equipment levels, distances to obstacles in the side areas are also displayed. The vehicle must be moved a few metres forwards or backwards in order to scan the side areas in full. An obstacle entering these areas from the outside will not be displayed. Switching Park Distance Control on and off Fig. 1 In the centre console: button for switching Park Distance Control on and off (schematic diagram). Switching on Park Distance Control is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged or if the vehicle rolls backwards. → Fig. 1 button. —OR: press the Switching off Park Distance Control is switched off automatically when the vehicle is driven forwards at a speed of more than 10–15 km/h (6–9 mph). → Fig. 1 button. —OR: press the —OR: move the selector lever to position P . Automatic activation when driving forwards (with some equipment levels) When driving forwards slowly, Park Distance Control switches itself on automatically if the vehicle approaches an obstacle in front of the vehicle. Automatic activation can be switched on and off in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) Automatic activation takes place only once. Renewed automatic activation is possible under the following conditions:...
- Page 248 → Fig. 1 button. —Press the —Switch the ignition off and then back on again. Introduction to the topic The rear view camera system in the rear of the vehicle makes it easier for the driver to see behind the vehicle and provides support for parking manoeuvres. Function The rear view camera system shows the area behind the vehicle on the Infotainment system screen. Orientation lines help with the view to the rear. WARNING The intelligent technology used in the parking systems cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the system limits. If this is not observed, this can result in accidents, serious injuries and also damage to the vehicle. ● The parking system is not a substitute for the full concentration of the driver. CAUTION Vehicles with a swivelling Volkswagen badge: people can sustain crush injuries when the rear view camera system is extended. ● When engaging reverse gear, make sure that no persons are positioned directly behind the vehicle or can interfere with the function of the Volkswagen badge on the boot lid.
- Page 249 Switching the rear view camera system on and off Switching on Select reverse gear. Switching off The rear view camera system switches off when the reverse gear is disengaged.
- Page 250 Rear view camera system without parking modes: driving into a parking space Fig. 1 Infotainment system: parking using the rear view camera system. Choose parking space. Drive towards the selected parking space. Align the vehicle in the parking space. 1 Road. 2 Selected parking space. 3 Side limits of the selected parking space. 4 Rear limit of the parking space. Parking using the rear view camera system → Fig. 1 —Position the vehicle in front of the parking space —Select reverse gear. —Reverse slowly and steer the vehicle so that the green lateral lines lead into the selected parking space. The green lines → Fig. 1 must correspond to the lateral boundary lines of the parking space → Fig. 1 —Stop when the red horizontal line reaches the rear limit...
- Page 251 Introduction to the topic Park Assist shows parking spaces that are suitable for parking and assists the driver when driving into and out of parking spaces. Park Assist is an extension of Park Distance Control (→ Park Distance Control) → Park Assist steers the vehicle into a parking space, while the driver operates the accelerator and brake and changes gear WARNING The intelligent technology used in the parking systems cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the system limits. If this is not observed, this can result in accidents, serious injuries and also damage to the vehicle. ● Pay careful attention to the parking procedure and the traffic around you. Keep looking in the direction in which you are parking. ● Use the foot brake to slow the vehicle in a hazardous situation. The following functions are supported: —Displaying suitable parking spaces. —Selecting a parking mode —Driving into suitable parallel and bay parking spaces, —Driving out of a parallel parking space. Observe the text message in the instrument cluster display. NOTICE Park Assist uses parked vehicles, the kerb and other objects for orientation. Please ensure that the wheels and tyres are not damaged when parking the vehicle. ● If necessary, abort the parking manoeuvre in good time. Any equipment that has been retrofitted to the vehicle, e.g. bicycle carriers, can prevent Park Assist from functioning properly and may cause damage. During parking manoeuvres, the vehicle may be braked if the driver accelerates too strongly. Things to note for trailer towing Park Assist cannot be activated if the vehicle detects an electrically connected trailer .
- Page 252 Looking for a parking space Fig. 1 In the instrument cluster display: parking modes for parking. Reverse parallel parking. Reverse perpendicular parking. Forward perpendicular parking. Fig. 2 In the centre console: button for switching on the Park Assist system (illustration). → Fig. 2 button. The indicator lamp lights up yellow and the park function is active. —Press the —Drive slowly past a row of parked vehicles, paying attention to the traffic. —Park Assist automatically searches for a suitable parking space on the front passenger side. → Fig. 1 A parking mode is displayed when a parking space is detected → Fig. 2 Press the button to select one of several displayed parking spaces in sequence. If you wish to move forwards into the parking space, select park mode “Forward transverse parking” → Fig. 1 by pressing the button. If you want to search for a parking space on the opposite side of the road, operate the turn signal for the corresponding side. Park Assist can be activated retrospectively. If the vehicle has previously driven past a suitable parking space, it will be displayed.
- Page 253 Driving into a parking space Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: parking perpendicular to the road. Choose parking space. Drive into a parking space. Manoeuvre in the parking space 1 Prompt to drive forward. 2 Your vehicle. 3 Parked vehicle or obstacle. 4 Detected parking space. 5 Prompt to reverse. 6 Prompt to brake. 7 Progress bar (remaining relative distance). —Stop the vehicle in front of or behind the parking space. → Fig. 1 —Observe the prompt to park on the instrument cluster display —Select reverse gear when a reverse arrow appears on the instrument cluster display. —Release the steering wheel. —Text message Steering intervention active!. Observe Monitor vehicle area. on the instrument cluster display. —Accelerate carefully. —Brake when an acoustic signal sounds, the display lights up or a text message appears on the instrument cluster display. —Depending on the parking space, it may be necessary to make several manoeuvres. When the parking procedure is completed, a text message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Wait until Park Assist has completed the turning movements of the steering wheel at the end of each parking procedure in → order to achieve an optimal parking result (→ Parking) Switch off the engine and stop the vehicle WARNING Fast steering wheel movements can cause serious injury.
- Page 254 ● During the manoeuvring operation, do not reach for the steering wheel until prompted to do so by the system. ● If a dangerous situation occurs, intervene and take over the steering. Driving out of a parking space Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: reversing out of a parallel parking space. 1 Parked vehicle. 2 Your vehicle. 3 Progress bar (remaining relative distance). 4 Direction of travel when driving out of a parking space (→ Parking systems) Park Assist can drive out of parallel parking spaces if the prerequisites for this are met button. —Press the —Use the turn signal lever to select the direction (left or right) in which you would like to drive out of the parking space. —Select reverse gear. —Release the steering wheel when the following message is shown: S teering intervention active. Please monitor area around vehicle. —Accelerate carefully. —Brake when an acoustic signal sounds, the display lights up, or until the prompt to drive forward appears on the instrument cluster display. —Depress the brake pedal until Park Assist has finished steering or until the display on the instrument cluster goes out. —Continue the procedure for driving out of the parking space until a text message on the instrument cluster display and possibly an acoustic signal indicate that the procedure has been completed. —Take over steering with the steering angle set by Park Assist. —Drive the vehicle out of the parking space when permitted by the traffic situation.
- Page 255 Rear Traffic Alert Rear Traffic Alert monitors crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking space or manoeuvring. WARNING The intelligent technology used in the parking systems cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the system limits. If this is not observed, this can result in accidents, serious injuries and also damage to the vehicle. ● Pay attention to the traffic situation and the area around the vehicle. ● Rear Traffic Alert may not be able to detect all approaching objects, e.g. pedestrians or very rapidly approaching objects. Also observe the information and warnings that apply to all Park Assist functions (→ Parking systems) Switching on and off (→ Assist systems menu) —Via the Assist systems menu in the instrument cluster (→ Driver side) —OR: press the touch control for parking functions function button in the Infotainment system. —Tap the —Activate function. Function Fig. 1 Illustration of Rear Traffic Alert: monitored area around the vehicle leaving the parking space. Rear Traffic Alert functions using radar sensors in the rear bumper. → Fig. 1 The system detects approaching and moving objects in the rear and side areas around the vehicle and warns the driver about an obstacle → Fig. 2 On the Infotainment system screen: Rear Traffic Alert display.
- Page 256 If an obstacle is detected, a warning signal is issued and the obstacle area is shown in colour in the Infotainment system → Fig. 2 (→ Automatic braking intervention) An automatic braking intervention can take place if the driver does not react If Park Distance Control is deactivated, no feedback can be given to the driver. The Rear Traffic Alert is also temporarily deactivated. Things to note for trailer towing The Rear Traffic Alert is deactivated if the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer. Information on brake support systems These braking support systems can help the driver in critical driving or braking situations. The driver is responsible for driving → safety The brake pedal may move or noises may occur while the brake support systems are performing a control intervention. Continue to brake with the necessary force, and if necessary steer the vehicle. (→ Brake support Depending on the equipment level, adjustments can be made to the vehicle settings for ESC and TCS systems) WARNING The intelligent technology used in brake support systems cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Driving fast on icy, slippery or wet roads can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle and could cause serious injury to the driver and passengers. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Do not take risks where safety is concerned. ● Brake support systems cannot prevent an accident if the vehicle is driven too close to the vehicle in front of it. ● Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability depends on the tyre grip. ● Always keep the footwell under the pedals clear so that the brake pedal can move freely. —The ESC, ABS and TCS can function properly only if all four wheels are fitted with the correct tyres. —If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC, TCS and EDL will also stop working. WARNING The effectiveness of ESC can be reduced considerably if other components and systems which affect driving dynamics are not serviced properly or are not functioning properly. This applies in particular to changes to the suspension and wheel and tyre combinations that have not been approved. ● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle should only be carried out by a qualified workshop. ● Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability depends on the tyre grip. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps to reduce the risk of skidding and to improve driving stability in certain driving situations →...
- Page 257 ● If the brake servo does not function or the vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to be depressed more forcefully as the braking distance will be increased due to the lack of assistance for the brake system. Electronic differential lock (EDL and XDS) brakes a spinning wheel automatically and distributes the drive force to the other drive wheels. uses braking interventions to improve traction and keep the vehicle in lane. Automatic Post-Collision Braking System The multicollision brake automatically triggers braking if the airbag control unit detects a collision in an accident situation. Requirements for automatic braking: —The driver does not depress the accelerator pedal. Switching TCS, ESC or ESC Sport on and off Driving situations → To avoid taking a safety risk, the braking systems should not be switched off under normal conditions WARNING With the ESC switched off, there is a much greater chance of the vehicle breaking away than with the ESC switched on. It can be difficult for untrained drivers to retain control of the vehicle, especially at high speeds. This can result in accidents and severe injuries. ● Volkswagen therefore recommends switching off the ESC only in the following situations: ● ● When driving the vehicle on a closed track or racetrack. ● If you as a driver have experience of a sporty driving style. ● Never take a safety risk and observe the laws of physics. It can help if you switch off the braking system in the following driving situations: —When driving in deep snow or on loose ground or when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it when stuck. → Switch off TCS → (→ Driving profile selection) → . Switch off ESC — When driving offroad, in deep snow or on loose ground ESC Sport This function supports a sporty driving style. The ESC →...
- Page 258 —Switch the function on or off by a “tick” in the checkbox. When the driving situation no longer exists, ESC and TCS should be fully switched back on → Button in the centre console Fig. 1 In the centre console: button for switching TCS, ESC and ESC Sport on and off manually (with some equipment levels). → Fig. 1 Press the button for approximately one second —R model: TCS switched off and ESC Sport switched on. Press the button again to switch TCS back on. Press the button for approximately three seconds —R model: TCS and ESC switched off. Press the button again to switch on TCS and normal ESC. Troubleshooting Anti-lock brake system failure or fault Indicator lamp lights up yellow. —Go to a qualified workshop. The vehicle can be braked without ABS ESC or TCS is performing control intervention Indicator lamp flashes yellow. ESC switched off manually Indicator lamp lights up yellow. TCS switched off manually Indicator lamp lights up yellow. ESP Sport switched on Indicator lamp lights up yellow.
- Page 259 ESC fault Indicator lamp lights up yellow. ESC has been switched off. There is a fault or a malfunction. —Switch the ignition off and on. —Drive a short distance at a speed of 15 – 20 km/h ( 9 – 12 mph) if necessary. —If the indicator lamp continues to light up, seek expert assistance. The brake support systems make noises Noises may be heard when the brake support systems are performing control interventions. WARNING ● If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the indicator lamp , the control function of the ABS may have failed. This can cause the rear wheels to lock relatively quickly when you brake. Locked rear wheels can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle. If possible, reduce your speed and drive carefully at low speed to the nearest qualified workshop in order to have the brake system tested. Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres on the way. ● ● The ABS is not functioning correctly if the indicator lamp does not go out or comes on while the vehicle is in motion. The vehicle can be stopped using the normal brakes only (without the ABS). The protection provided by the ABS is then no longer available. Go to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. ● Introduction to the topic WARNING Loose objects may be flung through the vehicle interior in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. This can cause serious injury and can also lead to loss of control of the vehicle. ● Stow objects only in closed stowage compartments. ● Always keep stowage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● The coat hooks in the vehicle should only be used for lightweight clothing weighing max. 2.5 kg ( approx. 5.5 lbs). Never leave any heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets.
- Page 260 NOTICE ● Do not stow any temperature-sensitive objects, food or medicines inside the vehicle. Hot and cold temperatures could damage them or render them unusable. ● Objects stored in the vehicle that are made from transparent materials, such as transparent suction cups on the windows, can concentrate the sun's rays and thus cause damage to the vehicle. Drawers Fig. 1 Under the right front seat: drawer. — To open : press the button in the drawer grip and open the drawer. — To close : push the drawer under the front seat until it clicks into place. WARNING If the drawer is left open, it can hinder the correct operation of the pedals. This can result in accidents and severe injuries. ● Always keep the drawers closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the drawer or other items could fall into the driver footwell and obstruct the pedals. NOTICE The drawer is designed for a maximum load of 1.5 kg (approx. 3.3 lbs).
- Page 261 Introduction to the topic WARNING Improper use of the cigarette lighter or ashtray could cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. ● Always use the cigarette lighter properly. ● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used when the ignition is switched on. ● Never put paper or any other combustible materials in the ashtray.
- Page 262 Cigarette lighter Fig. 1 In the front centre console: cigarette lighter. —With the ignition switched on, press in the knob on the cigarette lighter. —Wait for the lighter to pop out. (→ Ashtray and cigarette lighter) —Pull out the cigarette lighter and use The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12-volt socket.
- Page 263 Introduction to the topic Electrical equipment can be connected to the sockets in the vehicle. The electrical devices must be in good condition. Do not use faulty devices. The 12-volt socket will work only when the ignition is switched on. WARNING Improper use of the sockets and electrical accessories can cause fires and severe injuries. ● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Sockets and the devices connected to them can be used when the ignition is switched on. ● If the electrical device gets too hot, switch off the device immediately and disconnect it from the socket. NOTICE ● In order to prevent damage to the electrical system, never connect equipment that supplies electric power, such as solar panels or battery chargers for charging the 12-volt battery, to the 12-volt socket. ● Use only electrical devices that have been approved in accordance with current guidelines concerning electromagnetic compatibility. ● In order to avoid damage due to voltage fluctuations, always switch off any electrical devices before switching the ignition on or off and before starting the engine. ● Never connect electrical devices requiring more than the rated power to a 12-volt socket. The vehicle's electrical system can be damaged if the maximum power output is exceeded. ● Observe the operating instructions of the electrical devices. Using electrical consumers with the engine switched off and the ignition switched on will drain the 12-volt battery. With some equipment levels, unshielded devices can cause interference with the Infotainment system and vehicle electronics.
- Page 264 Sockets in the vehicle Fig. 1 In the front part of the centre console and in the rear centre console: fold-open 12-volt socket 1 or 12-volt socket with removable cover 2 . The maximum power of the sockets must not be exceeded. The power rating of each device is stated on its type plate. The continuous power of all 12-volt sockets in the vehicle is 120 watts in total (→ Sockets) The maximum power of a 12-volt socket in the vehicle is a total of 180 watts w hen the engine is running. NOTICE The fuse can blow as a result of extended operation of the 12-volt sockets at maximum power. ● Never use the 12-volt sockets at maximum power for longer than 10 minutes. ● Always use only one 12-volt socket with maximum power.
- Page 265 Cybersecurity What is cybersecurity? Cybersecurity comprises measures to reduce the risk of unauthorised access by malware or an Internet attack on vehicle functions, data and control units. What are connectivity components? Control units for data transmission, interfaces, and media and diagnostic connections are connectivity components, via which information and data can be exchanged between the vehicle and external devices or the Internet. The connectivity components that are not included in all vehicles are, in particular: —Diagnostic port. —Control unit with embedded eSIM card (OCU). —Mobile phone interface. —App-Connect. —WLAN hotspot. —NFC radio technology. —Bluetooth interface. —USB port. —SD card slot. —SIM card slot. Connectivity components are the key elements for cyber security. Connectivity components are also equipped with security mechanisms that minimise the risk of unauthorised access to vehicle systems. Security mechanisms The software and security mechanisms in the vehicle are subject to ongoing development. Like with computers or the operating systems of mobile devices, the software and security mechanisms in the vehicle may also be updated at irregular intervals. Software updates improve the security, stability and running speeds of the vehicle systems in vehicles that have already been produced. WARNING In spite of the security mechanisms installed in the vehicle, it is not possible to fully exclude the risk of unauthorised access by malware or an Internet attack on vehicle functions, data and control units. Malware that has infected the vehicle can influence or deactivate control units and vehicle functions, or can take over control and lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● If the vehicle functions or reacts differently than normal or behaves in an unusual way, reduce your speed ( if possible) immediately and in a controlled manner and go immediately to the nearest qualified workshop or seek expert assistance.
- Page 266 —Install system updates provided by Volkswagen immediately . —Have the vehicle serviced, repaired and maintained only by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. WARNING Computers, data media and mobile devices that are connected to the internet or that are used in public and private networks may be infected by manipulated data or have malware installed on them. ● Protect computers, data media and mobile devices by means of a suitable anti-virus program and by generally known precautionary measures. ● Regularly update the appropriate anti-virus program with the updates or upgrades provided by the provider. Introduction to system update What is a system update? A system update allows the software of control units in the vehicle to be updated by Volkswagen AG without the need to visit a qualified workshop: Every system update takes place in two phases: download and software installation. Before the start of each phase, the driver is requested on the Infotainment system to confirm the start of the respective operation. The system update function is only available in some countries and not in all vehicles. What is the purpose of a system update? A system update is a preventive measure to stop undesirable events and states from occurring. For example protection against malware or to optimise the running of the software. How can I see that a system update is available? The switched-on Infotainment system indicates that a system update is available. If several system updates are available for the vehicle at the same time, one system update must first be installed successfully before the next system update can be executed. WARNING It is possible in very rare cases that a control unit will not function properly after a software installation process. ● Do not use the vehicle and contact Volkswagen Customer Care. WARNING If the digital instrument cluster does not function after software installation, no instruments, warning lamps, symbols or text messages can be displayed. Driving with an instrument cluster that is not working can cause accidents and fatal injuries. ● Do not use the vehicle and contact Volkswagen Customer Care. A measure such as engine tuning to increase performance or efficiency that has not been performed by Volkswagen may be deleted by a system update.
- Page 267 Basic prerequisites for system updates The basic prerequisites must be met so that a system update can be downloaded and in order for you to install the software. General conditions —The system update function is offered in your country. —You have assigned the vehicle to your active W e Connect user account. —Your current privacy settings allow data and information to be transmitted and received . Vehicle conditions —The vehicle must be in an area with sufficient mobile reception. —The electrical system in the vehicle is ready for use. —The 12-volt vehicle battery is appropriately charged.
- Page 268 Download and software installation Download costs System updates are downloaded via the factory-fitted control unit with eSIM card (OCU) and are free of charge. Volkswagen pays the connection costs. Download (→ System update) The ignition must be switched on and the prerequisites must be met for download . The download process can be interrupted at any time and will be resumed again as required when the ignition is switched on. 1. Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment system. 2. Observe the information in the Infotainment system. 3. Start download in the Infotainment system. The duration of a download process depends on the network quality, file size and type of update. Software installation Choose a time for manual software installation when the vehicle does not have to be driven by yourself or other users. WARNING Control units will be deactivated and will not function while software installation is taking place. Driving with deactivated or malfunctioning control units can cause accidents and fatal injuries. ● Carry out software installation in a suitable place where other road users are not impeded. ● Never use the vehicle while software installation is taking place. (→ System update) —Prerequisites must be met —Park the vehicle safely in accordance with legal regulations and local conditions. —Switch off the engine, parking brake is switched on. —Close the bonnet, boot lid, glass roof, all windows and all doors. —Confirm installation of the software in the Infotainment system. —Get out of the vehicle. Take all vehicle keys with you. —Make sure that all vehicle occupants get out and that no animals are left behind in the vehicle. —Lock the vehicle.
- Page 269 Functional restrictions during software installation Control units, functions and displays are not available during software installation. Do not use the vehicle during this time. —Central computer of the Infotainment system: during the software installation, the central computer, the display and control unit and other control devices are not available. —Control unit of the digital instrument cluster: no or only few displays are possible on the digital instrument cluster during software installation. —OCU (control unit for Volkswagen We Connect): the services, emergency call service and automatic accident notification are not available during software installation. —If the ignition is switched on during software installation, this can cause the following error message: E rror: emergency call. Please visit workshop. This is normal in this case. Please wait for a few minutes until the message disappears.
- Page 270 After software installation After the software installation and before starting the engine, read the message in the Infotainment system or instrument cluster about completed installation. The vehicle requires up to a minute to display the status of the system update. —The engine can be started after successful software installation. (→ System update) —If software installation is unsuccessful:...
- Page 271 Troubleshooting Software installation was unsuccessful —If software installation is unsuccessful, a corresponding error message will be displayed on the Infotainment system and/or instrument cluster. Observe the corresponding messages and warnings. —Control units will no longer function or will not function correctly in the event of a critical installation error. Functions and displays are not available until the error is corrected. Do not use the vehicle. In this case, contact Volkswagen Customer Care Should I perform the system update? It is in your own interests to carry out system updates promptly. If the driver repeatedly rejects the system update, it is then necessary to visit a qualified workshop. Can I interrupt software installation? No, this is not possible. What will happen if software installation is interrupted? If software installation is interrupted, for example due to damage to the electrical system in the vehicle, it is possible that control units will be not be updated and may be damaged due to incomplete software installation.
- Page 272 Introduction to the topic To use Volkswagen We Connect, it must first be activated online by concluding a W e Connect contract with Volkswagen AG and is subject to a restricted, country-specific period of validity. Both the We Connect portfolios offered by Volkswagen and individual services may be changed, discontinued, deactivated, reactivated, renamed and expanded without further notice. For more information about creating the user account, the service description, and further information, see www.connect.volkswagen-we.com. The provision and availability of We Connect services and service portfolios can vary from country to country and depend on the vehicle and vehicle equipment. Service description Read and observe the service description before using Volkswagen We Connect services. Service descriptions are updated from time to time and made available online at www.connect.volkswagen-we.com. —Always use the latest edition of the relevant service description. WARNING In areas with insufficient mobile phone and GPS reception, no emergency calls and phone calls can be made and no data can be transmitted. ● If possible, go to another location. NOTICE Vehicle damage may be caused by factors beyond the control of Volkswagen AG. Such factors include in particular: ● Misuse of mobile devices. ● Data loss during transmission. ● Unsuitable and damaging third-party applications. ● Malicious software on data media, computes, tablets and mobile devices.
- Page 273 Services portfolio The initial assignment of services listed here represents the maximum possible scope. The maximum possible scope is available only for a few vehicle models. There may be changes in the assignment shown here during the service life of the vehicle. After activating the “Manage services” function, you can see whether and which services are available in the vehicle in the Infotainment system (→ We Connect) The portfolio of offered services may be different than that specified here in some countries and in the event of contract renewal. The voice or search recognition technology for Volkswagen We Connect does not recognise and return search results for all words. For example, Google Speech Recognition includes a “Safe Search” feature that prevents the display of search results if (even accidentally) vulgar terms are detected. You can find out which services actually belong to W e Connect, We Connect Plus and We Connect Fleet when you conclude or renew your contract at www.connect.volkswagen-we.com or on the Volkswagen homepage. This also applies to possible We Connect individual options. We Connect services and functions available without activation The following services also function without We Connect activation: —Emergency Call Service. —Personalisation Online. —In-Car Apps in the In-Car Shop. The Emergency Call Service is available independently of logging into the Infotainment system. Personalisation and purchase of In-Car Apps require you to log into the Infotainment system, but do not need activation of the vehicle in a We Connect account. We Connect services Maximum possible scope. Not available in all vehicles and countries. —Driving data. —Vehicle status. —Vehicle Health Report. —Information Call. —Mobile key. —Emergency Call Service. —Breakdown Call with Automatic Accident Notification. —Parking Position. —Service Scheduling. —Doors & Lights. —Wi-Fi hotspot. We Connect Plus services Maximum possible scope. Not available in all vehicles and countries.
- Page 274 —Air Conditioning —Apple Music®. —TIDAL. —Area Alert. —Speed Alert. —Horn and Turn Signals. —Charging Stations —Online Anti-Theft Alarm. —Online Map Update —Online Route Calculation —Online Voice Control —Online Auxiliary Heater —Online Traffic Information —Parking Spaces —Filling Stations —Locking and unlocking. —Internet Radio. We Connect Fleet services These services are available only for commercial customers and fleet operators. Additionally to the We Connect services: —Digital Logbook. —Fuel Logbook. —Fleet Driving Efficiency. —GPS Tracking & Route Information. —Consumption Analyser. —Maintenance Management. We Connect individual options —In-Car Apps. These apps may be pre-installed directly in the Infotainment system and activated by the user. If technically implemented, apps can also be purchased and installed in the Infotainment system via the In-Car Shop. —Digital owner's manual (user guide). —We Experience. —We Park. —App-Connect —Data plans. Data plans subject to payment of a fee for use of online functions, e.g. 2 GB per month. —Subsequent purchase of additional mobile keys. We Connect activation, S-PIN, vTAN procedure...
- Page 275 We Connect activation The following steps are required for We Connect activation (including registration): 1. Create a user account at w ww.connect.volkswagen-we.com or directly in the Infotainment system in the U ser administration menu. 2. Order and activate Volkswagen We Connect. 3. Add a vehicle to your user account. 4. Provide proof of ownership. 5. Provide proof of identity. Necessary only if security-related W e Connect services are to be carried out. You can perform activation at www.connect.volkswagen-we.com or directly in the Infotainment system. Proceed as follows for activation via the Infotainment system: 10": Make yourself the primary user under User administration Become primary user. HOME 8" and 9.2": Make yourself the primary user under User administration Become primary user. MENU Follow the other information and instructions in the Infotainment system. During activation, you may be requested to create an S-PIN → S-PIN Activation options 10”, 9.2” and 8” Infotainment system not possible 8.25” Infotainment system not possible 6.5” Infotainment system We Connect portal We Connect app...
- Page 276 Settings Become primary user and follow the instructions. —Press the open button on the first vehicle key. —Press the open button on the second vehicle key. Once the Infotainment system has processed the radio commands, proof of ownership is verified. You can check the current status in the We Connect portal. How is proof of ownership provided? 10”, 9.2” and 8” Infotainment system 8.25” Infotainment system 6.5” Infotainment system not possible We Connect portal We Connect app not possible Proof of ownership can be provided in two ways in the vehicle: a) 2-key method. b) Transmission of the registration codes from the W e Connect portal or We Connect app to the Infotainment system. Proof of identity (Volkswagen Ident) The proof of identity must be provided before security-relevant We Connect services such as “Lock & Unlock” can be used. Proof of identity can be provided in two ways: —Personally, at your Volkswagen dealership. —Via video chat together with identity documents in the W e Connect app. Further information on Volkswagen Ident is available on the We Connect portal at www.connect.volkswagen-we.com. Costs may be incurred due to data exchange during the video chat. The extent of these costs depends on tariffs and contracts that you concluded with third-party providers (telephone or mobile phone providers). Legal requirements When using Volkswagen We Connect services, information about the vehicle is transmitted and processed online. This data can also indirectly provide information about the respective driver, e.g. driving behaviour, location. As the contracting party of the We Connect contract with Volkswagen AG, you must ensure that data protection and privacy rights are guaranteed when your vehicle is used by family members, friends and other drivers. You must inform the respective driver in advance that the vehicle is transmitting and receiving data online and that you can view this data. Failure to observe this obligation to inform can infringe certain rights of vehicle occupants. Tracking services: ask all vehicle occupants Tracking services require geodata and vehicle data to determine whether the vehicle is complying with set speed limits, where the vehicle is parked, or whether the vehicle is being used in a geographically-defined area. This information is displayed in the...
- Page 277 Personal data Volkswagen protects your personal data and uses it only to the extent permitted by law, or if you have consented to its use. Further information on data processing in relation to the Volkswagen We Connect services can be found in the Privacy Policy. The current version of this policy can be accessed on the Volkswagen website. Permanent transfer of the vehicle If the vehicle has been purchased as a used vehicle or handed over to you by another person for permanent use, We Connect may already be activated and the previous user may still have the possibility to view collected data and control certain vehicle functions via We Connect. In the Infotainment system you can see whether a person is assigned to your vehicle as the primary user. In this case, you can register yourself as the primary user of the vehicle and automatically remove the previous primary user. Alternatively, you can permanently delete the previous user as the primary user in the Infotainment system. You can also set the vehicle to offline mode ( ) here and thus restrict communication of your vehicle with the data server of Volkswagen AG and processing of vehicle-related and personal data. Deactivating We Connect services The following functions are available for deactivating and activating the We Connect services: —Central deactivation and activation via the Infotainment system . —Individual deactivation and activation via your user account in the W e Connect portal or in the We Connect app. The respective services can then only be run again after the deactivation is cancelled. Streaming services such as Apple Music and TIDAL can be activated or deactivated only together, even if they are listed separately in the individual menu. Legally required services and their data transmissions cannot be switched off and cannot be deactivated, e.g. “eCall Emergency System”.
- Page 278 Interference Even when the above-mentioned requirements for using the services are met, the functionality of the Volkswagen We Connect services can be impaired or interrupted due to factors that lie outside the control of Volkswagen AG. Such factors include in particular: —Maintenance, repairs, deactivations, software updates and technical changes to your service provider’s telecommunication systems, satellites, servers and databases. —The telecommunications provider has changed the mobile telecommunication standard for transferring mobile data, e.g. from LTE or UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. —An existing mobile telecommunications standard has been shut down by the telecommunications provider. —Disturbance, interference or interruption of mobile and GPS reception, e.g. due to high speeds, weather, landscape, interfering devices or intensive use of the mobile network in the relevant cells. —If your current location is in an area with no or insufficient mobile communications and GPS reception. This can also include tunnels, streets with tall buildings, garages, multi-storey car parks, underpasses, mountains and valleys. —Restricted availability, completeness or correctness of information provided by third parties, e.g. maps. —Countries and regions where Volkswagen We Connect services are not available.
- Page 279 Manage services Open the function for managing services: System Service. The following are possible in the Manage services area of the Infotainment system: —Checking which We Connect services are currently available in the vehicle. —Number of activated and deactivated We Connect services. —Activating or deactivating individual We Connect services. Further information: www.connect.volkswagen-we.com. If you deactivate all We Connect services individually, the can still transmit data. Settings We Connect services can be activated or deactivated individually. To do this, open the drop-down menu for the service and make the corresponding selection. If data transmission is restricted by the “privacy settings” function, it is not possible to activate or deactivate services individually. Function button and its function: Manage services Display services All: overview of services available in the vehicle. Activate: activate one or more services. Deactivate: deactivate one or more services. The setting options are not available in all markets and vehicle models.
- Page 280 Introduction to the topic The privacy function enables the staggered blocking or authorisation of data transmission between the vehicle and the internet. The required mode can be set in the Infotainment system. The “Privacy settings” function applies only to data transmissions via the OCU with embedded eSIM card. The “privacy settings” function cannot prevent the transmission of data from a paired mobile device to the mobile phone interface. The privacy function is not available with all Volkswagen Infotainment systems. Legally required services and their data transmissions cannot be switched off and cannot be deactivated, e.g. “eCall Emergency System”. Please note that every vehicle user can adjust individual privacy function settings. These settings may be different from those preferred by the vehicle owner.
- Page 281 Glossary In order to permit or prevent data transmission, activate one of the following modes on the Infotainment system. Mode: Maximum privacy The following happens in this mode: —All We Connect, We Connect Plus and We Connect Fleet services are deactivated and do not transmit any data. (→ Privacy settings) —All tracking services are deactivated —The eSIM card is deactivated. — All vehicle functions that require an online connection via the e SIM (→ Privacy settings) card are deactivated —It is not possible to update any information and data stored in the control units, e.g. emergency call numbers, certificates. This can restrict functions and services or mean that they are not available. —Legally required services cannot be deactivated and still transmit data. Mode: No position data The following happens in this mode: —The current position of the vehicle is not transmitted. (→ Privacy settings) —All tracking services are deactivated —The eSIM card remains activated. —All vehicle functions that require an online connection via the e SIM (→ Privacy settings) card are activated Mode: Use my position The following happens in this mode: —Information on the current position of the vehicle is n ot provided to other persons. (→ Privacy settings) —All tracking services are deactivated —The eSIM card remains activated. —All vehicle functions that require an online connection via the e SIM card are activated.
- Page 282 Status display The following symbols display the status of the privacy function individually or together in the Infotainment system. grey bullet point (offline): no connection to the Internet. white bullet point (online): connection to the Internet. Flag for maximum privacy settings mode. Flag for no location mode. Flag for use location mode. Flag for share location mode. Example of the maximum privacy settings display:...
- Page 283 Effects on online functions and tracking services If data transfer is restricted, the following online functions and tracking services cannot be executed, for example. Some online vehicle functions and tracking services are available only in certain markets and vehicle models. Online vehicle functions —Emergency Call Service. —Online Anti-Theft Alarm. —Online Voice Control. —Online Map Update. —Online Traffic Information. —Personalisation. —System update. —We Connect registration and activation. Tracking services —Vehicle tracking. —Area Alert. —Speed Alert. —Parking Position. The restrictions also apply to new online vehicle functions and tracking services that are provided for the vehicle in future.
- Page 284 Description of user roles Open user management: tap the main menu Users or Manage users on the start page of the Infotainment system. Primary user or The “primary user” role is intended for the vehicle keeper or a vehicle user with only temporary authorisation to use the vehicle such as a lessee or company car driver. The primary user has unrestricted rights and can assign additional rights to other users of the vehicle by inviting them as secondary users. If a new primary user legitimises themselves for the vehicle, the previous primary user will automatically lose their primary user role. Secondary users or The “Secondary user” user role is intended for users who also use the vehicle regularly. Secondary users derive their role from the primary user and must be invited for the vehicle by the primary user. The primary user can delete secondary users at any time. Guest users The “Guest user” user role is intended for users who use a vehicle occasionally or only once. Guest users can log in themselves in every vehicle with service capability and involvement of the primary user is not necessary. Every vehicle user can delete the guest user in the vehicle at any time. The guest user has only restricted access to certain online services. Anonymous guest The “Anonymous guest” user role is a non person-specific account that exists locally in the vehicle and cannot be synchronised with the server. This account exists only once in vehicles with online personalisation and cannot be deleted. If the “Anonymous guest” role is activated in the vehicle, all users logged into the vehicle will be logged out temporarily. Anonymous users are persons who have access to the vehicle but do not log in.
- Page 285 Creating and deleting user roles Creating a primary user Register with We Connect and add your vehicle to your user account. Creating secondary users New users can log in with your W e Connect account or register as new users in the vehicle. A user profile is automatically created in the Infotainment system. If a new user was not invited as a secondary user by the primary user, the user profiles will be automatically stored as a guest user in the Infotainment system. Deleting the primary user Set privacy settings to “Share my position” mode or “Online mode”. Perform one of the two options: — Restore the factory settings of the Infotainment system. —A new primary user must authenticate themselves in the vehicle. If a different privacy setting is chosen, the primary user may still be present on the server.
- Page 286 Settings Access settings in the Infotainment system: Manage 10": users HOME Manage 8" and 9.2": users MENU These setting options may be available, depending on the vehicle equipment: —Me (primary user). —Others (secondary users). —Key. —Mobile key. —Settings.
- Page 287 Introduction to the topic After delivery, certain functions can be added to the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle model, you can generally activate ( unlock) comfort and Infotainment system functions and also driver assistance systems. The ability to activate functions depends on the build status of the vehicle. Function activation is possible only for some vehicle models and is not possible in all markets. Before using an activated function, read and observe the relevant information and warnings in the owner's manual or in the online instructions that may be available. Inform the user or buyer about activated functions when renting or selling the vehicle. If the required hardware for the respective activatable function is not available in the vehicle, it can be retrofitted in some cases. Volkswagen recommends contacting your Volkswagen dealership to have the hardware retrofitted. If the required software for the respective activatable function is not available in the vehicle, the software can be retrofitted . This may be subject to charge, depending on the type of software.
- Page 288 Description When the function has been correctly activated, it can be used up to the end of the agreed term. Indicates that a function is activated. Function faulty or temporarily not available. A mobile connection is required for: — purchase of the function, — activation of the function and —execution of functions that require continuous connectivity. Activatable functions for the vehicle are described in this owner’s manual and in the Infotainment system, on the Volkswagen website or in your Volkswagen We Connect user account. Some functions do not require a description, such as functions for changing the appearance or colour of the Infotainment system. Activated functions are not linked to the duration of the Volkswagen We Connect contract.
- Page 289 Requirements for activating a function —A suitable Infotainment system is installed in the vehicle. —Compatibility and performance of the hardware available in the vehicle. —You have a valid We Connect contract with Volkswagen. —The vehicle is assigned to your We Connect user account. —Sufficient mobile reception at the current location of the vehicle. —The electrical system in the vehicle is ready for use. —The vehicle battery has a sufficient charge level. —Factory-installed OCU or in some countries the Volkswagen We Connect control unit.
- Page 290 Steps for activation Do not drive the vehicle during an activation process. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Confirm activation in the Infotainment system. 3. Observe the information on the Infotainment system during activation. After activation, it is necessary to switch the ignition off and then back on again for some functions. The function can then be used properly. Before starting the engine again, read the message in the Infotainment system about the completed activation. Observe the instructions if activation was not successful.
- Page 291 Troubleshooting Where can I obtain activatable functions? From an online shop accessible via your Volkswagen We Connect user account. Depending on equipment, functions can also be purchased and activated directly via the Infotainment system in the “In-Car Shop”. Function restrictions during activation The function is not available during activation. After successful activation Successful activation is displayed on the Infotainment system. When will the activated function be available? Depending on the activated function, either immediately or only after the ignition has been switched on again.
- Page 292 Introduction to the topic The WLAN hotspot function is not available in all markets and vehicles. Some Infotainment systems can be used as a W LAN hotspot to provide Internet access for up to eight WLAN devices. Some Infotainment systems can use the W LAN hotspot of an external WLAN device (WLAN client) (→ Wi-Fi) A data connection is required to set up a connection to the internet and to use services such as W e Connect. As default, the WLAN connection is encrypted using WPA2 encryption for security reasons. Volkswagen recommends always using WPA2 encryption. Observe country-specific requirements. The necessary data transfer may be subject to charges. Due to the potentially high volume of data in use, Volkswagen recommends using a mobile device tariff which includes a data flat rate. For more information contact your mobile telephone provider. Depending on your mobile telephone tariff, additional costs ( such as roaming charges) may be charged for loading and using online data packages, especially if you use these services abroad.
- Page 293 Setting up a data connection Wi-Fi (9.2-inch version and 8-inch version) — WLAN in accordance with IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. —Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. —Two WLAN modes simultaneously: —Tethering (2.4 GHz). —2.4 GHz access point. —Up to eight WLAN devices can be connected simultaneously. —Internet connection via WLAN —Tethering via customer telephone. —Hotspot for clients in the vehicle. —Apple CarPlay™ via WLAN —Android Auto™ via WLAN —Simplified pairing process via WPS , NFC or QR Code. eSIM (embedded SIM) The vehicle has an OCU with embedded SIM card (eSIM). In order to use this eSIM you must purchase data plans for use via the I n-Car-Shop. The following must be activated in the Settings menu: —Either Network settings Allow internet connection . —Or Data connection Integrated data connection . SIM card in SIM card reader Suitable SIM card in SIM card reader. Allow internet connection must be activated in the N etwork settings menu. A stable network can be set up only with a compatible SIM card. Car-Stick Suitable Car-Stick in suitable USB (→ Car-Stick)
- Page 294 Configuring a Wi-Fi hotspot The Infotainment system can be used as a WLAN hotspot to provide online access for up to eight WLAN devices. In order to establish a connection to the Internet and be able to use Volkswagen Car-Net, for example, a data connection is additionally required, for example via an internal eSIM card, a CarStick or an external WLAN device. The types of data connections possible depend on the country and the Infotainment system used. Setting up the Wi-Fi connection mobile ■ Tap MENU Settings Wi-Fi hotspot , to open the Hotspot (Wi-Fi) settings menu. Mobile ■ Activate the hotspot checkbox. ■ Tap Hotspot (Wi-Fi) settings . Obtain the name of the hotspot and the network key from the Hotspot (Wi-Fi) settings sub- menu. ■ Enter the displayed network key on the mobile device and confirm. ■ The WLAN connection is set up. It may be necessary to enter further information on the mobile device to complete the connection. ■ Repeat the procedure to connect further mobile devices.
- Page 295 Connecting CarStick to a USB port The suitable CarStick is connected to the USB port of the vehicle and connects the Infotainment system to the Internet via HSDPA/HSUPA, U MTS or EDGE. Commercially available sticks (e.g. UMTS sticks) are not compatible with the Infotainment system. A suitable C arStick is available from Volkswagen dealerships. Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment level, the vehicle may be fitted with one or more U SB ports The location of the USB ports depends on the vehicle. Connecting to the internet via a CarStick is not possible with all Infotainment systems. Connecting To install the CarStick and connect to the Internet, read and observe the manual for the C arStick. It may be necessary to adjust additional settings. The availability of a suitable CarStick depends on the country concerned. Information about availability is available on the Volkswagen website or from your Volkswagen dealership. If the connected CarStick is not recognised, close the connections with all devices and connect the CarStick again.
- Page 296 Quick connection The quick connection function makes it possible to easily and quickly establish a wireless local network with encryption. Alternatively, in some countries the function can be performed using a scanning a code. WPS with Infotainment system as Wi-Fi hotspot ■ MENU Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot (Wi-Fi) , to access the menu Hotspot settings. ■ Tap WPS quick connection (WPS button) ■ Activate WPS on the mobile device to be connected. The WLAN connection is set up. Further inputs may be required on the WLAN device to complete the connection. ■ Repeat the procedure to connect further mobile devices. It is possible to establish only one WPS connection at a time. If several connection attempts are started simultaneously, all connection attempts will fail. WPS with Infotainment system as client ■ Tap MENU Settings Wi-Fi Wi-Fi , to open the Hotspot (Wi-Fi) menu. ■...
- Page 297 Configuring a Wi-Fi client The Infotainment system can use the Wi-Fi hotspot of an external Wi-Fi device, such as a mobile phone, to establish an Internet connection to use online services. Setting up the Wi-Fi connection —Activate the Wi-Fi hotspot on the Wi-Fi device; refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. — Touch MENU Settings Wi-Fi Wi-Fi , to open the Hotspot (Wi-Fi) menu. —Activate Wi-Fi on the Infotainment system. For this, activate the Wi-Fi checkbox. —Touch Find and select the required Wi-Fi hotspot from the list. The search process for available Wi-Fi hotspots may take a few seconds. —If necessary, enter the Wi-Fi hotspot network key on the Infotainment system and confirm with O K . The Wi-Fi connection is set up. Further inputs may be required on the Wi-Fi device to complete the connection. Manual settings : enter the network settings of an external Wi-Fi device manually. The infotainment system cannot be used simultaneously as a hotspot and as a client of a Wi-Fi network. To connect the infotainment system as a client with a Wi-Fi device, the hotspot of the infotainment system must first be switched off. Due to the large number of possible Wi-Fi devices, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions. The availability of the Wi-Fi function is country-specific and may vary.
- Page 298 Adjusting the settings Accessing Wi-Fi settings Tap HOME SETTINGS Wi-Fi: . The following settings are possible: —Set up the Infotainment system as a hotspot. —Connect to the Infotainment system via a fast connection. —Connect to the WLAN Make corresponding entries or tap function buttons. Changes are automatically stored when a menu is closed.
- Page 299 Introduction to the topic App-Connect enables the user to display and operate content and functions from the mobile device on the Infotainment system screen. The mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system using a U SB interface with data transfer function. The following technologies may be available: —Apple CarPlay. —Android Auto™. —MirrorLink®. The availability of the App-Connect technologies is country-specific and may vary according to the mobile device. For more information please visit the Volkswagen website. When you cross the border into countries that have different permitted radio frequencies than in your own country, operation of the wireless function of App-Connect may be restricted or may not be possible at all due to legal requirements. This may be indicated by a message displayed on the Infotainment system. App-Connect operation is not affected by this restriction when connected by cable and App-Connect can still be used in this case. Opening the App-Connect main menu The navigation to the App-Connect main menu depends on the Infotainment system used. ■ MENU OR: press the APP Infotainment button. WARNING Using applications while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road. Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. WARNING Applications which are used unsuitably or incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle, accidents or serious injury. ● Protect the mobile device and the applications on it from misuse. ● Do not make changes to the applications. ● Observe the operating manual for the mobile device. NOTICE Volkswagen is not responsible for damage to the vehicle caused by poor quality or faulty applications, inadequate programming of applications, insufficient network strength or loss of data during transmission or by misuse of the mobile...
- Page 300 Applications (apps) Volkswagen App-Connect allows content from Volkswagen apps and third party apps on mobile devices to be shown on the Infotainment system screen. There may be problems with compatibility with third-party apps. Apps, their use, and the necessary mobile network connection may be subject to charges. A wide range of apps may be available and they may depend on the vehicle and country. The content, scope and providers of apps can vary. Some apps also depend on availability of services offered by third parties. We are unable to guarantee that the available apps can be run on all mobile devices and all operating systems. The apps offered by Volkswagen can be changed, discontinued, deactivated, reactivated and upgraded without prior notice. In order to avoid distracting the driver, only certified apps can be used when driving .
- Page 301 Icons and settings for App-Connect Symbols in the menu App-Connect The actual symbols present depend on the installed Infotainment system and the vehicle model. Show further information. Open the App-Connect settings menu. Open the App-Connect settings menu. Select Apple CarPlay technology. Select Android Auto™ technology. Select MirrorLink® technology. Possible settings in the App-Connect settings menu The setting options depend on the Infotainment system installed. Mobile devices Open Device Manager. Activate data transfer for VW apps : data transfer for Volkswagen apps is activated. Allow MirrorLink information to be shown information is displayed in MirrorLink mode. ®...
- Page 302 Voice control (Siri) must be activated on the iPhone. Apple CarPlay must be activated in the iPhone settings without any restrictions. ✓ The iPhone must be connected to the Infotainment system via a U SB ✓ port. Only USB ports with data transfer capability are suitable for using Apple CarPlay. ✓ The USB cable used must be an original cable from Apple. The availability of the technologies depends on the country and may vary. Information on technical requirements, compatible iPhones, certified apps and availability is available on the homepage of Volkswagen and Apple CarPlay or from your Volkswagen dealership. Connecting Follow the instructions on the Infotainment system screen and the display on the iPhone when establishing a connection for the first time. The prerequisites for using Apple CarPlay must be fulfilled. Start Apple CarPlay: ■ Tap MENU App-Connect to open the App-Connect main menu. OR: press APP to access the App-Connect main menu. ■ Tap Apple CarPlay to set up a connection with the iPhone. Disconnecting ■ In Apple CarPlay mode, tap to go to the App-Connect main menu. ■ Tap to terminate the active connection.
- Page 303 Connecting Follow the instructions on the Infotainment system screen and the display on the smartphone when establishing a connection for the first time. The requirements for using Android Auto must be met. Start Android Auto: ■ Tap MENU App-Connect to open the App-Connect main menu. OR: press APP to access the App-Connect main menu. ■ Tap Android Auto to set up a connection with the smartphone. Disconnecting ■ In Android Auto mode, tap Back to Volkswagen to return to the App-Connect main menu. ■ Tap to terminate the active connection. Points to note The following points apply when an Android Auto connection is active: —An active Android Auto device can also be connected simultaneously to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth ( HFP profile). —Telephone functions are possible via Android Auto. If the Android Auto device is connected to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth at the same time, the telephone function on the Infotainment system can also be used. —An active Android Auto device cannot be used as a media device in the M edia main menu. —It is not possible to use the Android Auto navigation at the same time as the internal navigation. The last route guidance to be started terminates the previous active route guidance.
- Page 304 Voice control briefly to start the voice control function of the Infotainment system. —Tap VOICE or to start the voice control function of the connected smartphone. —Tap and hold MirrorLink® Fig. 1 MirrorLink main menu: function buttons in the overview of compatible apps. Function buttons Function buttons and what they do: Goes back to the App-Connect main menu. Here you can end the MirrorLink connection, connect another mobile device or select another technology. Tap to close any open apps. Then tap apps to be closed or tap the function button Close All to close all open apps. Tap to display the screen of the mobile device on the screen of the Infotainment system. Open the MirrorLink settings. Tap to return to the MirrorLink main menu. Prerequisites for MirrorLink Checklist The following conditions need to be fulfilled in order to use MirrorLink: The mobile device must support MirrorLink. ✓ The mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system via a USB connection with data transfer. ✓ ✓ The USB cable used must be an original cable of the mobile device manufacturer. Depending on the mobile device used, a suitable Car Mode app for using M irrorLink must be installed on the device. ✓ Connecting Follow the instructions on the Infotainment system screen and on the display of the mobile device when connecting a mobile device for the first time.
- Page 305 Disconnecting ■ When MirrorLink is in use, tap APP to return to the App-Connect main menu. OR: tap to go to the MirrorLink main menu. ■ Tap to terminate the active connection. Points to note The following points need to be noted during an active MirrorLink connection: —An active MirrorLink device can also be connected simultaneously to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth. —If the MirrorLink device is connected to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth, the telephone function on the Infotainment system can also be used. —An active MirrorLink device cannot be used as a media device in the M edia main menu. —The instrument cluster display shows information about the telephone mode. —No information about turning off at junctions or media mode displays are shown on the instrument cluster display. —You can accept or reject incoming calls or end a telephone call via the multifunction steering wheel. Information on technical requirements, compatible mobile devices, certified apps and availability is available on the homepage of Volkswagen and MirrorLink or from your Volkswagen dealership. Introduction to the topic Some external devices can be connected to the Infotainment system by cable and wireless connections present in the vehicle (if installed). The type and number of cable and wireless connections differ according to country and vehicle. The connections may also be different within a model series or in special-edition models. In the case of cable connections, use only the original device connecting cables or, if available, the factory-supplied connecting cables for your vehicle. If the plug on the connecting cable cannot be inserted, check the angle of insertion and the connections. NOTICE Use only suitable and undamaged connecting cables for cable connections. ● When inserting the plugs of the connecting cables into the appropriate connection, ensure that they are correctly positioned and apply only light pressure. Applying too much pressure may damage both the unit connection and the plug of the connecting cable. ● Make sure that the connecting cable is not pinched or sharply bent. ● Using unsuitable or damaged connecting cables may damage devices and cause malfunctions.
- Page 306 USB port Fig. 1 Possible USB ports in the vehicle: 1 USB port, Type C. 2 USB port, Type A. USB port types The following USB ports may be available in the vehicle: : suitable for data transfer and the charging function. —Type A : suitable only for the charging function (for charging batteries of external devices). —Type A —Type C : suitable for data transfer and the charging function. : suitable only for the charging function (for charging batteries of external devices). —Type C Each USB port is a cable connection which can be operated only using a suitable connecting cable. The USB port supplies the customary USB voltage of 5 volts. The USB types and also the number and installation locations of the USB ports depend on the vehicle and market. Only supported audio files are displayed. Other files will be ignored. The Infotainment system only supports mass storage and audio sources in “mass storage mode”. Please refer to the description of your audio source on how to activate this mode. Audio files on an external data medium connected to the U SB port can be played and controlled via the Infotainment system. Before connecting an audio source, check which port is installed in your vehicle. Use only suitable USB connecting cables which are appropriate for the respective U SB type. —USB ports “Type A” and “Type C” have different connector shapes. Possible fitting locations of USB ports —On the front of the Infotainment system. —in the storage compartment of the centre armrest in the front.
- Page 307 ■ Connect external data medium to the USB port ■ Start playback on the external audio source. ■ Tap to access the Media menu. ■ Select USB as the media source. iPod-specific list views (Playlists, Artists, Albums etc.) can be displayed under or LIST . Notes and restrictions The number of USB ports and compatibility with Apple devices as well as other media players depend on the equipment level. Due to the large variety of data storage devices and the various iPod, iPad and iPhone generations available, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions described here. Depending on the Infotainment system used, external hard drives with a capacity greater than 32 GB sometimes have to be reformatted for the FAT32 file system. You can find the necessary software and information online, for example. Do not connect or use USB extension cables or USB hubs. Bluetooth® interface The Bluetooth interface is a wireless connection. In Bluetooth audio mode, audio files from a Bluetooth audio source ( e.g. mobile device) that is connected via Bluetooth can be played over the vehicle loudspeakers (Bluetooth audio playback). Bluetooth audio mode is available if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted mobile phone interface that supports this function. Bluetooth profiles The Infotainment system is delivered from the factory with a Bluetooth interface. A maximum of three Bluetooth devices can be connected at the same time. The following Bluetooth profiles may be available in the specified or different version: —HFP 1.7. —Telephony and handsfree mode. —A2DP 1.3.
- Page 308 Prerequisites —The Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth profile. —In the Bluetooth settings menu, the Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be activated. Controlling playback The extent to which the Bluetooth audio source can be controlled via the Infotainment system varies depending on what Bluetooth audio source is connected. With media players that support the AVRCP Bluetooth profile, playback on the Bluetooth audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched to Bluetooth audio mode or to a different audio source. Depending on the Bluetooth audio source, it may also be possible to display the track and change the track using the Infotainment system. Due to the large number of possible Bluetooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all described functions. The Volkswagen website contains a list of compatible mobile devices. Always switch off the warning and service tones on a connected Bluetooth audio source, e.g. key tones on a mobile device, to prevent interference noise and malfunctions. With some units, the Bluetooth audio connection will be disconnected automatically if an external media player is connected to the Infotainment system with Bluetooth and the USB port simultaneously. Connecting an external audio source via Wi-Fi The WLAN connection is a wireless connection. In WLAN audio mode, sources connected via WLAN (e.g. mobile devices) can be used for audio transmission. The availability of the WLAN function varies depending on country and the Infotainment system used. Prerequisites —The connected audio source must have a suitable application (app) or must support media enabling under the U PnP standard. —WLAN connection to the audio source has been established. Starting Wi-Fi audio transmission —Reduce the volume on the Infotainment system. —Tap MENU MEDIA to open the Media main menu.
- Page 309 Controlling playback The extent to which the WLAN audio source can be controlled via the Infotainment system varies depending on what WLAN audio source is connected. Introduction to the topic The functions and settings of the Infotainment system depend on the country and vehicle equipment. Before using for the first time Before using the device for the first time, please observe the following points so you can make full use of the available functions and settings: —Observe the basic safety instructions (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) —Reset the Infotainment system to factory settings. —Find your favourite radio stations and store them to station buttons for quick access . —Use only suitable audio sources and data media . —Use current map data for the navigation system. —Pair a mobile device to make calls using the mobile phone interfaceface . —Register with Volkswagen We Connect to use the corresponding services. Other applicable documents In addition to this manual, please observe the following documents when using this Infotainment system and its components: —Supplements to the vehicle wallet of your vehicle. —The operating instructions for the mobile device or audio sources. —The operating instructions for external data media and playback devices. —Instructions for any Infotainment accessories subsequently installed or additionally used. —Service description when using Volkswagen We Connect services. —Digital instructions in the Infotainment system (where available)
- Page 310 Safety notes —Some functions may contain links to websites that are operated by third parties. Volkswagen AG does not assume ownership of the third-party websites that are reached via links and is not responsible for their content. —Some functions may contain external information supplied by third parties. Volkswagen AG is not responsible for external information being correct, up-to-date and complete, or for any infringement of third-party rights. —The radio stations or owners of the data storage media and audio sources are responsible for the content provided. —Multi-storey car parks, garages, underpasses, tunnels, high buildings, mountains and valleys, and other electrical devices, e.g. battery chargers, can also impair reception of mobile communication, GPS and radio signals. —Films or metal-coated stickers on the aerial and on the windows can interfere with radio reception. —Read and follow the appropriate operating manuals of the respective manufacturer when using mobile devices, data media, external devices, external audio and media sources. WARNING The central computer of the Infotainment system is networked with the control units in the vehicle. For this reason, improper repairs or incorrect removal and installation of the central computer could constitute an increased risk of accident and injury. ● Never replace the central computer with a used central computer taken from an older vehicle or a recycling facility. ● Have the central computer removed, installed or repaired only by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. WARNING The factory-installed radio with integrated hardware is networked with the control units installed in the vehicle. Incorrect repair or incorrect removal and installation of the radio therefore lead to an increase risk of accident and injury. ● Never replace the radio with a used radio from end-of-life vehicles or from recycling. ● Have the radio removed, installed or repaired only by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Reading information from the screen, operating the Infotainment system and connecting, inserting or removing a data medium or audio source while driving can distract you from the traffic situation and cause accidents. ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. WARNING Unfavourable light conditions and a damaged or dirty screen may result in displays and information not being read or not being read correctly from the screen. ● Displays and information on the screen must never cause you to take safety risks. Always drive carefully and responsibly. WARNING If you set the volume at too high a level, this will mean that you will not hear acoustic signals from outside, and it can also damage your hearing. This is the case even if you are only exposed to high volumes for short periods.
- Page 311 ● ● If the components in the vehicle required for emergency calls, telephone calls and data transmission are damaged, not working or do not have sufficient electrical power. ● If the rechargeable battery in the mobile device is flat or has insufficient charge level. WARNING Radio stations can transmit catastrophe and danger warnings. The following conditions can prevent these warnings from being received or issued: ● If your current location is in an area with no or insufficient radio signal reception. ● If the frequency bands of the radio stations are subject to interference or are not available in areas with adequate radio signal reception. ● If the loudspeakers and the components required for radio reception in the vehicle are damaged, not working or do not have a sufficient power supply. WARNING In some countries and mobile networks, a call for assistance or an emergency call can be made only subject to the following prerequisites: ● A mobile device with unlocked SIM card and sufficient call credit is connected to the mobile phone interface of the vehicle. ● ● Sufficient network coverage is available. WARNING The limit values for electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle may be exceeded, and thus the health of the driver and vehicle occupants may be endangered when operating a mobile or wireless device without a connection to an external aerial. This also applies to external aerials which have not been correctly installed. ● Maintain a minimum distance of 20 centimetres between the antenna of a mobile device and an active medical implant, such as a pacemaker, as mobile devices may adversely affect their function. ● Do not carry an operational mobile device close to or directly above an active medical implant, e.g. in a breast pocket. ● Switch off mobile devices immediately if you suspect they may be interfering with an active medical implant or any other medical device. WARNING Mobile devices, external devices and accessories in the vehicle that are not properly secured can be flung though the vehicle interior and cause injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident.
- Page 312 —The Infotainment system needs a few seconds for a complete system start and does not respond to inputs during this time. During system startup, only the rear view camera image can be displayed. —The Infotainment system must start up completely before all displays are available and before it is possible to execute functions. The duration of a system start depends on the functional scope of the Infotainment system and can also take longer than usual particularly at low and high temperatures. —When using the Infotainment system and the corresponding accessories, such as a headset or headphones, please observe the country-specific regulations and legal requirements. —To ensure the Infotainment system works properly, it is important to make sure the system is switched on and that the correct date and time are set in the vehicle. —A missing function button on the screen does not constitute a fault in the unit; it corresponds to the country-specific equipment. —Some of the functions and settings of the Infotainment system are available only when the vehicle is stationary. In some countries, the selector lever must additionally be in parking position P or neutral position N. This is not a malfunction, but simply a legal requirement. —There may be restrictions on the use of Bluetooth® devices in some countries. Information is available from the local authorities. —Switch the ignition on before switching the Infotainment system back on if the 12-volt vehicle battery has been disconnected. —If settings are modified, displays on the screen may vary and the Infotainment system may behave differently from the description in this manual in some cases. —The Infotainment system is automatically switched off when the engine is switched off and when the charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is low. —In certain vehicles with Park Distance Control, the volume of the current audio source is lowered automatically when reverse gear is engaged. It is possible to lower the volume. —Information on the included software and the licence conditions is stored under Settings Copyright. —If you sell your vehicle or loan it to somebody else, make sure that all the stored data, files and settings are deleted and that the SD card, external audio sources and data media are removed where applicable. —Some Infotainment system functions require an active Volkswagen We Connect user account for the vehicle and an Internet connection. The data transfer must not be restricted for the execution of the functions. Overview and controls, 8”...
- Page 313 Fig. 1 Overview: display and operating unit of the 8-inch version (8”). 1 Possible sensor fields for opening main menus: — RADIO . — MEDIA . — PHONE . — VOICE The button has no function in some countries. — NAV . — APP The button has no function in some countries. — SOUND . — CAR . — MENU Open the start page. 2 Rotary/push knob. 3 Function buttons for main menus. 4 Drop-down menu. 5 Screen (touchscreen). 6 Views (current view is highlighted). 7 Gesture control switched on.
- Page 314 Rotary/push button —Press to switch the Infotainment system on or off. —Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the volume. —Turn clockwise to increase the volume. Function buttons for main menus The position of the function buttons can not be configured. —Tap the corresponding function button to open a main menu, e.g. for the mobile phone interface. Screen You can operate the functions of the Infotainment system using the screen. A detailed explanation of the different finger gestures is provided in the digital instructions. — Tap MENU Operation . Menu control —Turn to select from a list. —Press to confirm a selection. Overview and controls, 6.5” Fig. 1 Overview: 6.5-inch version (6.5”) of the radio.
- Page 315 1 Function buttons for the main menu: — RADIO . — MEDIA . — MENU Open the start page. — PHONE . — APP . The button has no function in some countries. — VOICE . The button has no function in some countries. 2 Rotary/push knob. 3 Screen (touchscreen). 4 Views (current view is highlighted). 5 SD card slot. 6 Menu control. Function buttons —Tap the corresponding function button to open a main menu, e.g. PHONE for the mobile phone interface. Rotary/push button —Press to switch the Infotainment system on or off. — Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the volume. —Turn clockwise to increase the volume. Menu control —Turn to select from a list. —Press to confirm a selection.
- Page 316 Media drives SD card slot Depending on equipment, an SD card slot is not available in all Infotainment systems and not in all markets. To use stored media such as audio files or media files in the Infotainment system, insert a compatible S D card into the SD card slot. Supported file formats are displayed in the Infotainment system. Other file formats will be ignored. Dimensions of compatible SD cards: ✓ 32 mm x 24 mm x 2.1 mm (1.26 x 0.94 x 0.083 inches) ✓ 32 mm x 24 mm x 1.4 mm (1.26 x 0.94 x 0.055 inches) Inserting an SD card safely —Insert the SD card into the SD card slot with the cut-off corner first and the contact surfaces facing down until you feel the card click into place. If the SD card cannot be inserted, ensure that the SD card is compatible and that it is positioned correctly. NOTICE The SD card slot, SD card or both may be damaged if you insert SD cards with force, if an SD card has the wrong dimensions or if you use an SD card adapter. If you insert other objects, e.g. S IM cards, in the SD card slot, the object, SD card slot or both may be damaged. ● Do not use force to insert SD cards. ● ● Observe dimensions of compatible SD cards. ● ● Do not use SD card adapters. ● If the Infotainment system cannot read the data of an card, a corresponding message will be displayed on the screen.
- Page 317 Operating the Infotainment system Opening the instructions (if available) You can find further information and tips for operation in the instructions for the Infotainment system. — Tap HOME Guide. Switching the Infotainment system on and off If the Infotainment system was not manually switched off before, the Infotainment system will start up when the ignition is switched on. If the last set volume does not exceed the preset maximum switch-on volume, the Infotainment system will start up at this (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) volume Vehicles with ignition lock: the Infotainment system switches off automatically when the vehicle key is removed from the ignition lock. Vehicles with starter button: the Infotainment system switches off automatically when the driver door is opened with inactive ignition. The Infotainment system switches off automatically when you open the driver door with inactive ignition. If you switch on the Infotainment system manually when the ignition is inactive, it will switch off automatically after around 30 minutes without a user input. Configuring the HOME start screen You can configure the layout of the function buttons and also the views and displays on the start screen of the display and operating unit or have them positioned on the basis of factory layout templates. 1. Tap a function button and hold until the function button is visibly highlighted. 2. Move the function button to the desired position and release. The following main menus may be included as function buttons on the start screen: Background lighting. App-Connect . Apps and services. Auxiliary heater. e-Manager. Driver assistance . (→ Infotainment system controls and displays) Vehicle Help: here you can find further information on the functions and operation of the Infotainment system. Air conditioning .
- Page 318 Navigation . Users, User management. Radio . Legal. Settings (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) Telephone . TV tuner. Scrolling through lists, switching tracks Use the touchscreen or menu control to select the desired function, setting or track. Moving objects, adjusting volume Move objects on the screen to adjust settings, e.g. of sliders, or to move areas of a menu. Personalise function buttons and views (this depends on the vehicle equipment level) (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) Enlarging and reducing images and maps on the screen Recommendation: use thumb and index finger. —Using two fingers at the same time, tap the screen and keep your fingers on the screen. —To enlarge the display of images and maps, slowly move your fingers apart. —To reduce the display of images and maps, slowly move your fingers together. Personalising the Infotainment system Depending on equipment, you can personalise the Infotainment system to permit faster access to favourite or frequently used functions. Configuring tiles Configure tiles and the displayed functions of the tiles in the Infotainment system views to adapt the Infotainment system to your needs. 1. Tap a tile and hold until an additional window opens. 2. Tap the desired function in the additional window. Various functions are available depending on the size of the tile. OR: tap a free area on the screen to return to the view. At least two tiles are always available. These cannot be removed. With some equipment levels, you can add two more tiles. In total, a maximum of four tiles can be displayed. More functions are available for some tiles than are visible at first glance in the additional window. Swipe up or down in the additional window to see all functions. Adapting the drop-down menu Personalise the drop-down menu in the Infotainment system for faster access to favourite or frequently used functions. 1. Tap a function and hold until an additional window opens.
- Page 319 1. Tap a function and hold until an additional window opens. 2. Tap the desired function in the additional window and hold until the function is visibly highlighted. 3. Move the function to the desired position and release. The active function is automatically removed from the drop-down menu and added to the additional window. More functions are available for the drop-down menu than are visible at first glance in the additional window. Swipe to the left or right in the additional window to see all functions. Opening the instructions (if available) You can find further information and tips for personalisation in the instructions for the Infotainment system. —Tap HOME Custom. System and sound settings Changing settings The meanings of the following symbols apply to all system and sound settings. Changes are automatically stored when a menu is closed. or The setting is selected and activated or switched on. or The setting is not selected and is deactivated or switched off. or Open the drop-down list. Increase the setting values. Decrease the setting values. Gradually back. Gradually forwards. Change setting values with the slider control (infinitely variable). System settings The following functions, information and setting options may be available in the system settings: —Screen. —Time and date. —Language. —Additional keyboard languages. —Units. —Voice control. —Wi-Fi. —Data connection. —Manage mobile devices. —Reset to default settings.
- Page 320 OR: tap MENU Settings. Sound settings The sound settings may contain information and setting options for equaliser, position, volume and settings. Opening the sound settings —Tap HOME Sound. OR: tap MENU Settings. Adjusting the volume of external audio sources If you need to increase the output volume of an external audio source, first lower the volume on the Infotainment system. If the sound from the external audio source is too quiet, increase the output volume of the external audio source. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Medium or Loud. If the sound from the connected external audio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Medium or Quiet. Cleaning the screen Observe this checklist when cleaning the screen: The Infotainment system is switched off. ✓ ✓ Use a clean, soft cloth that is moistened with water. OR: use a cleaning cloth available from Volkswagen dealerships. In the case of stubborn dirt : ✓ Moisten dirt with only a little water and allow to soak in. ✓ Carefully remove dirt with a clean, soft cloth. ✓ NOTICE You can damage the screen if you clean the screen with the wrong cleaning agents or when the screen is dry. ● Use only gentle pressure. ● Do not use aggressive or solvent-based cleaning products. These cleaners may damage the device and dull the screen.
- Page 321 Marks, licences, copyright Marks and licences Certain terms in this manual are accompanied by the symbol ® or ™. They indicate trademarks or registered marks. However, the absence of these symbols does not constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term. Other product names are registered marks of the respective legal owners. —Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. —Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. —All SiriusXM services require a subscription. See the SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). All fees, content and features are subject to change. Satellite and steaming lineups may vary. SiriusXM, Pandora and all related logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its respective subsidiaries. All rights reserved. —HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. —Android Auto™ is a certified trademark of Google Inc. —Apple CarPlay™ is a certified trademark of Apple Inc. —Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. —iPod®, iPad® and iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc. —MirrorLink® and the MirrorLink® logo are certified trademarks of Car Connectivity Consortium LLC. —MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. —SD ® and SDHC® are brands or registered trademarks of SD-3C LLC in the USA and other countries. —Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond, USA. —This product is subject to certain intellectual property rights and copyrights owned by the Microsoft Corporation. The use or distribution of this type of technology outside this product requires a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft company. Copyright law Audio and video files saved on data media and audio sources are normally subject to national and international copyright laws. Observe the legal requirements.
- Page 322 Introduction to the topic In radio mode, you can receive available radio stations on different frequency bands and store your favourites to station buttons for quick access. The available reception types and frequency bands depend on the equipment and country. Frequency bands may be discontinued, deactivated or no longer offered in individual countries. Opening the RADIO menu —Tap HOME . OR: tap MENU . OR: tap RADIO . Opening settings —Tap HOME Radio . OR: tap MENU The radio stations are responsible for the content of the information sent. Additional electrical devices connected in the vehicle can interfere with reception of the radio signal and cause noises in the loudspeakers. Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehicles with a window aerial.
- Page 323 Equipment scope and radio symbols Radio The available functions and potential reception modes and frequency band depend on the vehicle equipment and country. —AM tuner. —FM dual tuner (antenna diversity). —Combined station list. —Combination of FM - and DAB stations in one list. —Combined preset list. —Combination of all stations stored to station buttons in one list. —36 station buttons as storage locations for favourites. —Station logos. —Aerial amplifier. —DAB /DAB+. —DAB slide show. —Stationary images are transmitted parallel to the current broadcast. —Internet Radio. General symbols in radio mode AM Select AM reception mode. FM Select FM reception mode. FM/DAB Select FM /DAB reception mode. Internet radio Select Internet Radio reception mode. Select previous station from the station list or station on previous station button. Select next station from the station list or station on next station button. Display station buttons. Display selected station with additional information. Station already stored to a station button in a station list. TP Traffic news monitoring (TP ) is activated.
- Page 324 Tuning to, selecting and storing stations No TP The selected traffic news station is not available. AF off Automatic station tracking is switched off. RDS off Radio Data System (RDS ) is switched off. Symbols in the AM frequency band Display list of AM stations. Update station list manually. Display frequency band for manual selection of AM frequency. Symbols in the FM/DAB frequency band Display station list of FM and DAB stations. Display frequency band for manual selection of FM frequency. Possible only if the combined station list is switched off. No DAB reception possible. station supports slide show. Slide show is not available for the DAB station. Symbols in Internet Radio mode Open full-text search. No Internet Radio reception possible. Display recently listened to internet radio stations. Display 100 most frequently listened to internet radio stations. Display available internet radio podcasts. Display internet radio stations from the desired country. Display internet radio stations that broadcast in the desired language. Display internet radio stations who broadcast programmes from the desired genre.
- Page 325 Display station selection. Symbols in HD Radio™ mode Station supports HD Radio™. Browsing through HD Radio™ subchannels Open the Emergency list of the HD Radio™ Emergency Alerts function. HD Radio™ logo. Selecting a frequency band Before selecting a station, you must first select a frequency band or reception mode. Different stations are available depending on the selected frequency band or reception mode. The available frequency bands and reception modes depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 1. Tap Source to open the list of frequency bands and reception modes. 2. Select frequency band or reception mode: —AM —FM /DAB. —FM (for devices without DAB support). —DAB (for 6.5” inch units). —Internet Radio. —Satellite radio. Searching for and selecting stations You can select radio stations in different ways. The possibilities vary depending on frequency band and reception mode. Selecting via frequency band (AM and FM) 1. Display frequency band. 2. Tap the cursor, move on the frequency band and release at the desired frequency. OR: tap a point on the frequency band. The cursor automatically jumps to the corresponding frequency. The station at the set frequency is set. Selecting from station list (AM and FM/DAB) The station list shows the stations that can currently be received. Depending on equipment, it may be necessary to manually update the station list if you have left the corresponding region since you last opened the station list. In the FM /DAB frequency band, the station list normally updates itself automatically. 1. Open the station list. 2. Tap the desired station. The selected station is set. In the case of FM /DAB, the best reception mode is selected automatically according to availability of the station.
- Page 326 Searching for and filtering stations (Internet Radio) In Internet Radio mode, it is possible to filter stations according to categories or search for stations by means of a full-text search. 1. Open the station selection. 2. Select the category according to which you wish to filter the stations. OR: tap to start the full-text search. The input field is displayed. 3. Enter the name of the desired station. The list of found stations is automatically updated during input. 4. Tap the desired station. The selected station is set. SCAN Searching in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB) In SCAN mode, the stations of the frequency band are automatically set successively and played for around five seconds in each case. 1. Tap SCAN to start the SCAN function. The SCAN function starts and the currently set station is shown on the display. A SCAN function button is displayed next to this. 2. To select a station, tap SCAN. The SCAN function stops and the station is set. The SCAN function button is hidden. Storing stations to station buttons You can store up to 36 stations from different frequency bands and reception modes as favourites on station buttons. 1. Set the desired station. 2. Open the station buttons. 3. Tap and hold the station button until the station is stored. OR: tap and hold a station in the station list. The station buttons are displayed. 4. Tap station button. The station is stored to the selected station button. If a station was already stored on the station button, this station will be removed from the station button and replaced by the new station. Online functions in radio mode With some equipment levels, the Infotainment system has online functions in radio mode.
- Page 327 Special functions in radio mode The special radio mode functions listed below are not available in all Infotainment systems depending on the equipment and country. TP (Traffic Programme) The TP function monitors the reports from a set traffic news station and automatically outputs them in radio mode or during media playback. Reception of a traffic news station must be possible for this. Some stations that do not broadcast their own traffic news support the T P function through a corresponding traffic news station (EON). The system will always automatically tune to a traffic news station in the background if one is available in the A M frequency band or media mode. If no traffic news station can be received, No TP will be shown on the display. The unit automatically searches for a receivable traffic news station. As soon as a new traffic news station can be received, the status in the display changes to TP again. Traffic news stations are not available in all countries. Switching on the TP function ■ In radio or media mode, tap or and activate Traffic Programme (TP). Internet Radio Internet Radio is a reception mode for internet radio stations and podcasts which is independent of A M , FM and DAB. Due to transmission via the internet, reception is not regionally restricted. Internet Radio is available only when the Infotainment system has an Internet connection. Costs may be incurred for data transmission from the internet when using Internet Radio mode. Functioning of Internet Radio depends on the privacy settings in the vehicle. Station logos Station logos may be pre-installed for some frequency bands in the Infotainment system. The station logos will be assigned to the stations automatically if Autoselect station logos is activated in the settings. In Internet Radio mode, the Infotainment system accesses station logos from an online database and automatically assigns them to the stations. Manually assigning station logos Station logos cannot be assigned manually in the AM frequency band.
- Page 328 Introduction to the topic In media mode, you can play media files from data media and streaming services on the Infotainment system. With some equipment levels, the following data media can be used: —USB data medium, e.g. USB stick. —Bluetooth device, e.g. mobile device. —SD map. With some equipment levels, the following types of media files can be played back: —Audio files, e.g. music. —Video files. —Images. Streaming services You can also use streaming services, depending on the equipment and country. Conditions for using streaming services: Volkswagen We Connect or Volkswagen We Connect Plus is available in the vehicle. ✓ ✓ You have an active Volkswagen We Connect user account. ✓ The vehicle is assigned to your user account. You have purchased a corresponding data plan from the I n-Car Shop or you have available data volume on the S IM ✓ card of your mobile device and are connected to your vehicle via WLAN hotspot. ✓ You have a user account for the respective streaming service: Streaming services, such as Apple Music and TIDAL, can only be activated or deactivated as a group, even if they are listed separately in the menu (→ We Connect) Opening the MEDIA menu — Tap MENU . Opening settings —Tap MENU .
- Page 329 Equipment features and media symbols Audio, media, connectivity —Media playback and media control via Bluetooth. —Audio playback in the following formats: —AAC —ALAC —AVI —FLAC —MP3 —MP4 —WMA —Video playback in the following formats: —MPEG -1 and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg). —ISO MPEG4; Xvid (.avi). —ISO MPEG4 H.264 (.mp4, .m4v, .mov). —Windows Media Video 9 (.wmv, .asf). —Cross-device playlists. —Cross-source media database: —The data of all media sources connected to the Infotainment system is stored in a media database. —Media streaming (online). —Media search. Symbols for media sources Select My media as the media source. Connected USB devices can be selected under My media. Select a device connected via Bluetooth as media source. Set up available streaming services. Already set up streaming services will be displayed in the list of media sources with their own logo. General symbols in media operation Start playback. Pause playback. Go to previous track. Go to next track.
- Page 330 Repeat current track. Repeat all tracks. Activate shuffle mode. Search current media source (list view). Close list view. Go back to higher-level folder of the media source. Show favourites list. Symbols for categories and groups of media files Music tracks. Videos. Playlists. Albums. Artists. Genre. Podcasts. Audio books. Symbols for video playback Play video in full-screen mode. Minimise playback. Selecting and playing a media source Selecting a media source 1. Connect an external media source if you require playback from an external media source. 2. Select the connected media source that is to be used for playback. Playing audio and video files Before playing media files you must first connect a media source. You can search for and play media files from an available media source in various ways. Searching in the folder structure All media files of USB devices are filtered according to categories, e.g. album. This category view is always displayed in My media. The classic folder...
- Page 331 structure of the individual USB data media is additionally located under My media. 1. Show folder structure. The folder structure of the selected media source is displayed. If My media is selected, categories, e.g. music, and connected media sources are displayed first. 2. Search through the folder structure for the desired track. OR: tap to start the full-text search. The input field is displayed. 3. Enter the name of the desired track. The list of found tracks is automatically updated during input. 4. Tap the desired track. If the selection is located in a folder on a media source at the start of playback, the media files located in this folder will be added for playback. If a playlist is played, all available tracks in the playlist will be added for playback. 5. Close the selection with . Selecting favourites You can save individual tracks, genres, artists and albums as favourites. 1. Open favourites. 2. Tap the desired favourite. Depending on the selection, all tracks that belong to the favourite are added for playback. Saving favourites You can only store media files that are saved to My Media in the Musicand Video folders as favourites. You can save individual tracks, albums, artists and genres. 1. Start playback. 2. Open favourites. 3. Tap a free favourite location. OR: tap an already assigned favourite location and hold for around three seconds. 4. Choose from the selection list: —Track. —Albums. —Artists.
- Page 332 3. Enter the login data of the desired user account and confirm. The streaming service is added to the list of media sources as a new function button. You may need to log in again to the streaming service if you change the privacy setting, for example. Entertainment playback via the Infotainment system You can play music and videos on the Infotainment system. Video mode (→ Media In video mode, the Infotainment system display can play a video from a data medium or from a streaming service mode) . The video soundtrack is played on the vehicle loudspeakers. A stable Internet connection is required for playback via a streaming service. Costs may be charged by the mobile operator. The video image is displayed only when the vehicle is stationary. When the vehicle is in motion, the Infotainment system display is switched off. The video audio can continue to be heard.
- Page 333 Introduction to the topic The current vehicle position is determined by means of a global satellite system. All measurements and potential traffic reports are compared with the available map material to ensure optimum navigation to the destination. The navigation is operated on the screen. Acoustic navigation announcements and visual guidance direct the driver to the destination. Depending on the country, some Infotainment system functions can no longer be selected when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. This is not a malfunction, but simply a legal requirement. WARNING Configure the settings and enter destinations and changes for the navigation only when the vehicle is stationary. The navigation may recalculate the route if the driver misses a turning. The quality of the navigation recommendations depends on the navigation data available and any reported traffic jams. Traffic announcements will be output in the navigation system only if the available Volkswagen We Connect service has been activated. Navigation announcements Navigation announcements are acoustic driving instructions for the current route. The type and frequency of navigation announcements depends on the driving situation, e.g. start of route guidance, driving on a motorway or in a roundabout. A navigation announcement informing you that you have reached the destination area is given if the exact destination cannot be reached, e.g. because it is located in a non-digitised area. In addition, information on the direction and distance to the destination are displayed on the screen. During dynamic route guidance, you receive information about reported traffic jams on the route. An additional navigation (→ Navigation) announcement is given if the route is recalculated due to a traffic disruption or changed driving style The volume of a navigation announcement can be adjusted or muted during output of the announcement. All other navigation announcements are given with this volume setting or are muted. Navigation announcements are not given if the Infotainment system has been muted. Restrictions during navigation When the Infotainment system cannot receive any data from GPS satellites, e.g. in a tunnel or underground car park, navigation can still continue using the vehicle sensors. In areas that are not or are not completely included in the Infotainment system memory, the Infotainment system will also try to enable route guidance. If navigation data is unavailable or incomplete, the navigation system may be unable to determine the exact vehicle position. As a result, the navigation may not be as exact as usual. Road navigation is subject to continuous changes, e.g. new roads, road works, road closures, changes in the road names and house numbers. In the case of obsolete navigation data, there may be errors or inaccuracies during navigation. Controlling the navigation map For optimal viewing, you can also operate the navigation map with advanced finger movements.
- Page 334 Enlarging the map view Recommendation: use your index finger. —Tap the map twice to zoom in on a particular position. Reducing the map view Recommendation: use your index and middle finger. —Tap the map twice with two fingers to zoom out at a particular position. Enlarging and reducing the map view Recommendation: use your index finger. —Tap the map twice in succession and keep your finger on the screen. —Move your finger upwards to zoom out from the map view. Move your finger downwards to zoom in on the map view. Enlarging and reducing the map view Recommendation: use thumb and index finger. —Using two fingers at the same time, tap the map and keep your fingers on the screen. —Move your fingers together to zoom out from the map view. Move your fingers apart to zoom in on the map view. Tilting the map view Recommendation: use your index and middle finger. —Using two fingers that are horizontal to each other at the same time, tap the map and keep your fingers on the screen. —Move your fingers upwards to tilt the map view forwards. Move your fingers downwards to tilt the map view backwards. Rotating the map view Recommendation: use thumb and index finger. —Using two fingers at the same time, tap the map and keep your fingers on the screen. —Turn your fingers clockwise or anticlockwise to rotate the map view. Stored data The Infotainment system stores certain data, e.g. frequently driven routes and position information, to enable you to enter destinations quickly and to optimise route guidance. Deleting stored data 1. Tap Basic functions Delete usage pattern. 2. Tap confirmation to delete. Navigation equipment and symbols Navigation The navigation functions depend on the equipment level and country. Equipment —Destination input and route calculation. —Simultaneous display of two navigation maps (screen and instrument cluster). —Online map update. —Personal POIs.
- Page 335 Map symbols The function buttons and displays depend on the settings and the current driving situation. The map displays symbols for traffic reports and POIs, e.g. petrol stations, railway stations or interesting stopovers, when navigation data is available. Display current position. Destination search. Destinations and stopovers on the current route. Personal destination suggestions (home address, work address, favourite POIs nearby). Display map menu with settings for navigation and navigation announcements. Display route options. Fully automatic map mode (alignment in direction of travel, position, zoom & tilt). Determine driving orientation and map tilt. Map scale. Display destination memory. Symbols in the additional window —To open the additional window, tap . Display route overview and alternative routes for current route guidance. Repeat the previous navigation announcement. Volume for navigation announcements. Navigation setup. Other symbols Destination search: detailed destination input for an address. Route plan symbols Display current position. Destination of the current route guidance. End the current route guidance. Close the route plan. POI symbols...
- Page 336 POIs are displayed on the map when navigation data is available. Tap the desired POI to start route guidance . E-charging station. Filling station. Car park. Tourist information. Train station. Bank. Restaurant. Setting preferred POI categories The system offers various POIs, e.g. filling stations, as quick selection symbols in destination input, in the route plan and on the map. You can prioritise display of these symbols under Basic function settings Preferred POI categories. The system also independently learns which category you prefer. Traffic announcements Traffic announcements are displayed on the map when navigation data is available. (→ Navigation) Tap a traffic announcement to open an additional window with further details Traffic jam. Accident. Ice. Road closed. Risk of skidding. Danger. Road works. Strong winds. Navigation data The Infotainment system has an internal navigation data memory. Depending on the country, the required navigation data is already pre-installed. In order to carry out route guidance correctly and make full use of the functions offered, the Infotainment system always requires up-to-date navigation data. NOTICE If you use obsolete data, navigation may be impaired. Current routes cannot be determined or route guidance leads to the wrong destination. ● Always keep navigation data up-to-date. Updating navigation data online...
- Page 337 Navigation data for frequently travelled regions is automatically updated in the background with an existing Internet connection and valid privacy settings . —Navigation data is automatically updated while the ignition is switched on. Automatic update of navigation data depends on the privacy settings set. No update is carried out in “Maximum privacy” mode . Updating navigation data manually Current navigation data for larger regions, e.g. Western Europe, can be downloaded from the Internet at “www.volkswagen.com” and stored on a suitable USB data medium available commercially. If you switch off the Infotainment system, installation will be interrupted and will automatically continue once the unit is switched on again. 1. Download the navigation data and save on a USB data medium. 2. Switch on the vehicle ignition. 3. Connect a USB data storage device to the Infotainment system when the vehicle is stationary. The navigation data for regions that are currently frequently travelled is automatically updated in the background. Leave the data storage device connected to the Infotainment system for a few days until the navigation data for travelled regions has been completely downloaded and installed. Installation takes place automatically in the background while driving. Failure to do so will cancel the update. If you remove the data medium and travel through a new region in offline mode, the navigation data will not be updated, as there is neither a USB data storage device nor an Internet connection. —To display the map data version, tap MENU System information. Entering a destination and starting route guidance Depending on country and vehicle equipment, different functions are available for destination input. (→ Navigation) Further information about the symbols on the Infotainment system display is available on You can more precisely limit the search by indicating preferences in the results list, such as “nearby”. The different functions for destination input can be found in the main menu of the navigation system. Opening the main menu of the navigation system —Tap MENU .
- Page 338 Quick start 1. Tap . 2. Enter the address of the destination and tap and hold the desired destination for a few seconds. Enter the destination as accurately as possible. If you make a mistake when entering the destination, route guidance will not be possible or you may be navigated to the wrong destination. Recommended destinations The destination overview uses stored data to suggest possible destinations. Selecting a destination and starting navigation 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired destination. Route guidance starts automatically. Last destinations The navigation system stores up to ten destinations that you have driven to last in order to make them available for route guidance. A new destination automatically overwrites the oldest destination. Selecting a destination and starting navigation 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired destination. 3. Tap Route. Quick start 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired destination and hold for a few seconds. Favourite destinations Save up to 50 destinations as favourites. Saving a destination as a favourite 1. When entering a destination, tap in the additional window.
- Page 339 tap the desired position or location on the map. You can start route guidance if map data is available at this location. Destination input via the navigation map depends on the data status and is not possible for all positions. Use the offroad navigation function to enter a destination point with unknown data. Offroad navigation The offroad navigation function calculates routes to selected destination points with unknown data. If a destination point is not on known roads or there is no positioning data available for this point, the navigation system will calculate the route up to the nearest point on the known roads and then complete the route up to the destination point by a direct connection. To start offroad navigation, tap a free area without positioning data. Starting navigation 1. Tap 2. Move the map view until the desired position can be selected. The navigation map can be operated by extended touch (→ Navigation) gestures 3. Tap the desired destination or any point on the map without positioning data. 4. Tap Route . Using the address data of a contact Start navigation using the stored address data of a contact. Stored contacts without address data cannot be used for route guidance. Starting navigation 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired contact and address data. 3. Tap Route . NOTICE If the address data of a contact is out-of-date, navigation will still be performed to the stored address. Make sure that the address of the contact is up-to-date. Function descriptions Route plan The route plan contains information on relevant events, such as stopovers or destinations, and suggested destinations, if navigation data is available.
- Page 340 Bypassing a traffic disruption The route plan displays reports of current traffic disruptions when navigation data is available. Avoid traffic disruptions by editing the route plan (→ Traffic information) 1. Tap the traffic announcement. 2. Tap Bypass . The route will be recalculated. For each guidance to a destination, only one announced traffic event can be avoided in this way. Additional window If you tap the entries of the route plan, an extra window with additional options can appear. The possible options depend on the entry touched. Closing the additional window —Tap a free area outside the additional window. Functions in the additional window: Show on map Display the selection on the map. Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guidance. Direct route Start direct route guidance. Delete Delete stopover from route guidance. Bypass Avoid a traffic disruption. The route will be recalculated. Stopping route guidance End the current route guidance. Add a destination to favourites. Learning usage patterns While travelling, the navigation saves the routes travelled and destinations arrived at in order to create suggested destinations automatically. Destinations are learned depending on the time of day and the day of the week. The navigation system can suggest learned routes. To display the suggested routes, tap . Route guidance begins when one of the suggested routes is selected. The route guidance follows the selected route until the vehicle deviates from it. The route is recalculated and will guide you back to the selected route via a direct alternative. Major traffic disruptions are taken into account in the route guidance. Major traffic disruptions will be avoided if an alternative route and the navigation data is available.
- Page 341 Traffic information Depending on equipment, reception of traffic information is not available in all Infotainment systems and not in all markets. The Infotainment system automatically receives detailed traffic information when connected to the Internet. This information is indicated by symbols and colouring of the road network on the map. Receipt of traffic information depends on the privacy settings set. No traffic information is received in offline mode. Traffic announcements (→ Navigation) Traffic announcements, e.g. traffic jams or slow-moving traffic are shown as symbols on the navigation map When route guidance is active,traffic reports that are on the current route are displayed in the route plan. You can bypass (→ Navigation) these traffic reports Local warnings, e.g. about severe weather, can be output as a pop-up message via the Infotainment system. Traffic flow display The traffic flow is shown on the navigation map for all traffic reports by colouring of the road network. Orange Slow-moving traffic. Red Traffic jam.
- Page 342 Introduction to the topic You can connect your mobile device to the Infotainment system via the mobile phone interface and then use the Infotainment system to control the telephone functions. Sound is played back using the via the vehicle loudspeakers. You can connect up to two mobile devices to the Infotainment system simultaneously. Only one device is active and can be used to make calls. You can use the second connected device to receive calls via the Infotainment system and for media playback. High speeds, poor weather and poor road conditions, loud noise levels (also outside the vehicle) and also network quality may impair telephone calls in the vehicle. The mobile phone interface may contain an aerial amplifier which improves the reception quality of the mobile device. As a general rule, a device, e.g. mobile device, must only be paired once. The device connection to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth or WLAN can be restored at any time without having to pair the device again. Opening the menu for the mobile phone interface — Tap HOME . OR: tap MENU . OR: press PHONE .
- Page 343 Equipment and symbols of the mobile phone interface The specified equipment features and symbols are not available in all markets and for all Infotainment systems. Equipment features —Hands-free function. —Use up to two mobile devices simultaneously. —Phone book with a maximum of 5,000 contact entries. —SMS functions via Bluetooth: —Read SMS —Write SMS (including templates). —Have SMS read out loud. —Message history. —Email functions via Bluetooth: —Read emails. —Write emails. —Bluetooth and WLAN device pairing via NFC. —Convenience telephony. —Connection to wireless charging function. —Connection to microphone installed in the vehicle. Symbols in the main menu The appearance of the symbols may differ depending on Infotainment system. Contacts. Call lists for incoming and outgoing calls. Dial phone number. Text messages (SMS and email). Change active device. Settings of mobile phone interface. Symbols for phone calls The appearance of the symbols may differ depending on Infotainment system. Start call or bring to foreground. End or reject call. Mute hands-free system.
- Page 344 Hold call. Continue call. Add a participant to a conference or start conference. SOS Make emergency call. Obtain help in the event of breakdown. Voicemail. Obtain information about the Volkswagen brand and selected value-added services relating to traffic and travel. Symbols for call lists —Tap to open the call lists. Incoming call. Outgoing call. Missed call. Frequent calls or favourites from the mobile device (if supported by the mobile device) . Phone number (work). Phone number (private). Mobile number. Fax (business). Fax (private). Symbol for messages The appearance of the symbols may differ depending on Infotainment system. —Tap to open the text messages. Template for text messages. Show SMS as chat. Have messages read out loud. Areas where special regulations apply Switch off the mobile device and mobile phone interface in areas where there is an explosion hazard. These areas are not always clearly signposted. This includes, for example: —Areas immediately around chemical pipelines and tanks. —Lower decks of ships and ferries. —The area around vehicles which run on liquid gas, such as propane or butane. —Places where there are chemicals or particles such as flour, dust and metal powder in the air.
- Page 345 —All other places where the engine or mobile device must be switched off. WARNING Switch off the mobile device and mobile phone interface in areas where there is an explosion hazard. NOTICE Your mobile device must always be switched off in areas where special regulations apply and when the use of mobile devices is forbidden. The radiation produced by the mobile device when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. Types of mobile phone interface Depending on country and vehicle equipment, the following mobile phone interface types may be present in your vehicle: —Basic equipment of the mobile phone interface. —Comfort mobile phone interface. Basic equipment of the mobile phone interface The mobile phone interface uses the HFP Bluetooth profile for transmission. This allows use of telephone functions via the Infotainment system and output via the vehicle speakers. Comfort mobile phone interface The Comfort mobile phone interface uses the HFP Bluetooth profile like the basic version of the mobile phone interface. The Comfort mobile phone interface may be equipped with a wireless charging function (→ Wireless charging function) In order to use the wireless charging function, you must place a suitable mobile device correctly in the stowage compartment. Depending on equipment, the mobile device is paired with the vehicle aerial. This improves the reception and call quality.
- Page 346 Wireless charging function Fig. 1 Illustration: stowage area with mat for wireless charging function. The symbol on the lining mat may look different in some vehicles. The wireless charging function is dependent on the equipment level and is not available in all countries. → Fig. 1 The stowage area with lining mat for the wireless charging function is located either in the centre console or in a stowage compartment in the area between the front seats depending on the vehicle. In some vehicles, the lining mat has a telephone symbol that marks the centre position of the wireless charging function → Fig. 1 The wireless charging function enables wireless energy transmission by electromagnetic induction over a short distance. The maximum charging power is 5 watts. The Qi standard enables wireless charging of suitable Qi-enabled mobile devices. Consult the operating manual for the mobile device to find out if it is compatible with the Qi standard. The manufacturer of the mobile device can provide more information on compatibility. Always place only one Qi-enabled mobile device without a protective case and with maximum dimensions ( width x length) of around 80 mm x 140 mm (3.15 in x 5.512 in) flat on the shelf for the wireless charging function. Qi-capable mobile devices with larger dimensions cannot be charged wirelessly. Before charging, remove any foreign objects with metallic components such as coins from the stowage compartment and observe the operating instructions for the mobile device. To charge a Qi-enabled mobile device, remove the protective cover and place the suitable mobile device flat in the centre of the stowage area with the display facing upwards. The charging process starts automatically. The factory-fitted Infotainment system will provide information about the start of the charging operation and, where applicable, about any foreign objects with metallic components that are detected in the stowage compartment. Remove foreign objects immediately. If the mobile device has not been positioned correctly in the stowage area or is too large, it cannot be detected or cannot be detected correctly. In certain circumstances, the Infotainment system will report that there is a foreign object in the stowage compartment. The fault can be rectified if a suitable mobile device is used and its position is corrected. Stowage compartment cover Depending on equipment and country, the storage compartment for the wireless charging function has a cover for the mobile device’s display. Always place only one mobile device with maximum dimensions (width x length) of 80 mm x 140 mm (3.15 in x 5.512 in) in the stowage compartment with cover in accordance with the specifications. The cover can prevent distractions caused by the mobile device, such as incoming messages. The cover must always remain closed when driving and the mobile device display must be fully covered.
- Page 347 WARNING Notifications on the mobile device display can distract the driver and increase the risk of a serious accident. ● Always place only one suitable mobile device, where applicable Qi-capable, without protective case and with maximum dimensions (width x length) of 80 mm x 140 mm (3.15 in x 5.512 in) in accordance with the specifications on the stowage area in the stowage compartment. ● Remove any objects that impede the cover closing function. ● Always keep the cover closed when driving. WARNING Do not place any objects made of metal or with metallic components on the stowage area of the wireless charging function. Metallic objects may become very hot. This may cause burn injuries to the skin and cause a fire. NOTICE Do not place any ID cards, credit cards etc. with magnetic strips or with a chip on the stowage area with the wireless charger feature. The data saved on the magnetic strip or on the chip may become unusable. Pairing, connecting and managing Prerequisites for pairing: Bluetooth is activated on the mobile device. ✓ Bluetooth is activated in the Infotainment system. ✓ Pair a mobile device with telephone function to the Infotainment system in order to use the functions of the mobile phone interface. The mobile device is automatically paired with the Infotainment system when the first connection is established. A user profile is then automatically stored in the Infotainment system. The pairing process can take a few minutes. The available functions depend on the mobile device used and its operating system. Pairing the mobile device 1. Open the list of available Bluetooth devices on the mobile device and select the device name of the Infotainment system. 2. Observe the messages on the mobile device and Infotainment system and confirm as necessary. If pairing was successful, the data of the mobile device will be stored in the user profile. 3. Optional: confirm message for data transfer on the mobile device. WARNING If you carry out pairing when driving, this can cause accidents or injuries. ● Carry out pairing only when the vehicle is stationary. When some mobile devices are paired, a is shown on the display of the mobile device. To finish the pairing procedure, enter this PIN on the Infotainment system.
- Page 348 2. Unlock the mobile device. 3. Place the mobile device correctly on the shelf for the wireless charging function. 4. Continue and confirm Bluetooth pairing in accordance with the displays on the mobile device and Infotainment system. The mobile device is paired with the Infotainment system. The wireless charging function is deactivated while the Infotainment system is in the K nown mobile phones menu. The wireless charging function will be reactivated when you leave the menu. Active and passive connection At least one mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system in order to use the functions of the mobile phone interface. If several mobile devices are connected to the Infotainment system, you can switch between active and passive connections. Establish an active connection to the Infotainment system in order to operate the mobile phone interface with the desired mobile device. Difference between the connection types Active Mobile device is paired and connected. The functions of the mobile phone interface are performed with the data of this mobile device. Passive Mobile device is paired and connected. Only incoming calls can be accepted via the mobile phone interface. No other functions are available. Paired mobile devices are stored in the Infotainment system even if they are not currently connected. Connecting a mobile device Prerequisite: a mobile device is paired with the Infotainment system. —Activate Bluetooth on the mobile device. Establishing an active connection Prerequisite: several mobile devices are connected to the Infotainment system simultaneously. 1. Tap . OR: tap the name of the active mobile device. 2. Select the name of the desired mobile device. Other mobile devices then automatically have a passive connection. User profiles An individual user profile is automatically created for every paired mobile device. Data from the mobile device are stored in the user profile, e.g. contact details or settings. A maximum of ten user profiles can be stored in the Infotainment system simultaneously. To completely delete the stored data, reset the Infotainment system to the factory settings. Making phone calls and sending messages Opening the mobile phone interface — Tap MENU .
- Page 349 —Tap . Tap the contact in the list to start the call. OR: tap . To search for a contact, enter the name of the contact in the input field. Tap the contact to start the call. OR: tap a favourite in the main menu of the mobile phone interface to start the call. Using the call list The mobile phone interface displays the call list of the mobile device. Start calls via the call list. — Tap All. Tap a number in the list to start the call. OR: tap and filter entries in the call list, e.g. missed calls or dialled numbers. Tap a number in the filtered list to start the call. Entering a phone number manually 1. Tap and enter telephone number. 2. Tap to start the call. While you are entering a phone number, contacts that match the number will be shown on the Infotainment system display. Sending text messages Depending on the mobile device and the Infotainment system used, you can send and receive S MS and email via the mobile phone interface. Sending text messages 1. Tap Text message New message and enter the message on the screen. 2. Enter the desired contact in the search bar. 3. Tap OK to send the message. Sending emails 1. Tap E-mail New message and enter the message on the screen. 2. Enter the desired contact in the search bar.
- Page 350 2. Tap a contact from the telephone book or search for the contact using the search bar. If several phone numbers are stored for a contact, tap a number from the list. Editing a speed dial button 1. Press and hold the speed dial button until the telephone book is opened. 2. Tap a new contact from the telephone book. If several phone numbers are stored for a contact, tap a number from the list. Calling a favourite —Tap the assigned speed dial button. Favourites are not automatically updated. If the phone number of a contact changes, the speed dial button must be assigned again. Favourites can be deleted from a speed dial button in the U ser profile settings menu. Deleting favourites from the speed dial button The appearance of the symbols may differ depending on Infotainment system. 1. Tap Manage favourites. Tap the relevant speed dial button to delete a favourite from that speed dial button. OR: tap . OR: tap Delete all to delete all favourites from all speed dial buttons. 2. Tap confirmation to delete. Introduction to voice control Voice control allows you to perform certain functions by spoken commands. Types of voice control Depending on the Infotainment system and the language set there, one of the following voice control types is available in the vehicle: —Command-based voice control (standard). —Advanced voice control (offline or online).
- Page 351 Differences in voice control systems Command-based voice control (standard) Here, voice commands must follow a defined syntax in order to be recognised correctly, e.g.: “Navigate to [ T own, Street name, House number ]”. You will find further examples in the Infotainment system. Command-based voice control can be performed → Supported languages in every available language Advanced voice control (offline or online) Advanced voice control permits natural language interaction with the system. For example, the statement “I’m cold” will lead to the set temperature in the vehicle being increased. Voice commands can be freely formulated and colloquial. You can find suggested voice commands in the Infotainment system. Advanced voice control works online and offline. In online mode, more functions and data are available to permit improved recognition of voice commands. For online mode, you need a valid We Connect Plus or We Connect Start contract for the vehicle. If advanced voice control is also available in a language in addition to command-based control, the advanced voice control function will always be used when voice control is activated. Supported languages The number of languages available in your country depends on the vehicle equipment and model.
- Page 352 Language Standard Offline Online German English (GB) English (US) Italian French Spanish Czech Dutch — — Polish — — Portuguese — — Norwegian — — Swedish — — Danish — — Finnish — — Bulgarian — — Greek — — Russian — —...
- Page 353 — Ending via multifunction steering wheel : press the voice control button twice in quick succession. — Ending automatically : voice control is ended automatically if you use functions in the Infotainment system, activate the parking system, telephone calls are received or if there are voice outputs and warnings from the navigation system. Activation word The words spoken in the vehicle are checked for the activation word in the Infotainment system circular buffer. Voice control starts if the Infotainment system recognises the activation word. The circular buffer data is overwritten every 15 seconds. The circular buffer is not active if the activation word is deactivated. There is no transmission of data or words spoken in the vehicle. Switching activation word on and off If the activation word is switched off, the voice control cannot be activated via the activation word. — Tap MENU Voice control Voice control start/end sound or Activation word. OR: tap MENU Voice control Voice control start/end sound or Activation word. Speaking activation word and activation word recognition Prerequisite: The Activation word is switched on in the settings. ✓ Здравей Volkswagen. Olá Volkswagen. Ahoj Volkswagen. Hallo Volkswagen. Hej Volkswagen. Hola Volkswagen. Bonjour Volkswagen. Hei Volkswagen. Hello Volkswagen.
- Page 354 Γεια σου Volkswagen. Ciao Volkswagen. ハロー Volkswagen. Hola Volkswagen. Hallo Volkswagen. Hallo Volkswagen. Olá Volkswagen. Cześć Volkswagen. 안녕 Volkswagen. Привет Volkswagen. Hej Volkswagen. Merhaba Volkswagen. Hello Volkswagen. Troubleshooting Voice control does not react —Voice control is not available in your language. —Set the correct language in the Infotainment system. —Start the voice control function. —System fault. Go to a qualified workshop. Voice control provides inappropriate answers —The voice control system has interpreted the question incorrectly. —Speak the voice command again clearly. Voice control does not perform function —The function cannot be performed by voice control. —Settings in the function prevent it from being switched on or performed. —The voice control system has not understood the voice command. —Insufficient data is available.
- Page 355 Stowing luggage and loads Stowing luggage safely in the vehicle —Always distribute any loads in the vehicle as evenly as possible. Do not cover any ventilation openings. → and place them as far forwards as possible. —Always stow luggage and heavy objects in the luggage compartment —Observe gross axle weight ratings and the gross vehicle weight rating . —Secure luggage to the fastening rings in the luggage compartment using suitable lashing, fixing and securing straps (→ Luggage compartment equipment) —Also stow small objects safely. —If necessary, fold back the rear seat backrest and engage it securely. (→ Headlight range control) . Vehicles with dynamic headlight range control adapt —If necessary, adjust the headlight range automatically to the load. (→ Tyre pressure) —Adjust the tyre pressure according to the vehicle load. Observe the tyre pressure sticker WARNING Objects or animals that are not secured, or are secured incorrectly, can cause serious injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident. This applies particularly if objects are struck when the airbag is triggered and then flung through the vehicle interior. To reduce the risk of accidents, please observe the following guidelines: ● Always stow all objects in the vehicle securely. Always observe the legal regulations. ● Objects should be stowed in the vehicle interior in such a way that they can never enter the airbag deployment zones while the vehicle is in motion. ● Secure animals in the vehicle using a system that is suitable for their weight and size. ● Always keep stowage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● Stowed objects must never cause passengers to assume an incorrect sitting position. ● If an item is being stowed on a seat, this seat must not be used by any passengers. ● Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects loose in any of the vehicle's open stowage areas, on the surface behind the rear seat backrest or on the dash panel. ● Remove any hard, heavy or sharp objects from items of clothing and bags in the vehicle interior and stow them securely. WARNING Transporting heavy objects changes the vehicle's handling due to the change in the centre of gravity and increases the braking distance. Heavy loads that are not properly stowed or secured in the vehicle can lead to a loss of vehicle control and can cause serious injury.
- Page 356 Luggage compartment cover Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: removing and installing the luggage compartment cover. When the boot lid is opened and closed, the luggage compartment cover is also raised and lowered if the retaining straps are attached. Removing the luggage compartment cover → Fig. 1 (upper arrows). —Unhook the retaining straps from the boot lid → Fig. 1 (lower arrows). —Pull the luggage compartment cover out of the side retainers Depending on the equipment, the luggage compartment cover can be stowed under the variable luggage compartment floor. Fitting the luggage compartment cover → Fig. 1 (lower arrows). —Push the luggage compartment cover into the side holders → Fig. 1 (upper arrows). —Hook the supporting straps onto the tailgate WARNING Objects that are not secured or are secured incorrectly, or animals on the luggage compartment cover, may damage the luggage compartment cover and could cause serious injuries in any sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident. ● Never transport any objects on the luggage compartment cover. ● Never transport animals on the luggage compartment cover. NOTICE To prevent damage to the luggage compartment cover, do not load it to such a height that the load will press against the luggage compartment cover when the tailgate is closed.
- Page 357 Luggage compartment floor – Functions Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: opening the variable luggage compartment floor. Fig. 2 In the luggage compartment: locking the variable luggage compartment floor in position. Opening the variable luggage compartment floor → Fig. 1 and lift it upwards. —Grip the recessed handle in the variable luggage compartment floor → Fig. 2 —To lock in position, lift up the variable luggage compartment floor until it is held in position by the side restraints (close-up). Closing the variable luggage compartment floor → —Lower the variable luggage compartment floor onto the side supports Lowering the variable luggage compartment floor → Fig. 1 (small arrows). —Lift back the variable luggage compartment floor and push it under the guides —Place the variable luggage compartment floor on the floor covering. NOTICE Do not allow the variable luggage compartment floor to fall when closing it. Always guide it downwards. The trims or the luggage compartment floor could otherwise be damaged. NOTICE The maximum weight rating of the variable luggage compartment floor is 50 kg in the upper position. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be compartments for stowing small items under the variable luggage compartment floor.
- Page 358 The variable luggage compartment floor cannot be lowered in vehicles that are equipped with a subwoofer in the luggage compartment. Fastening rings Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: fixed and folding fastening rings. There are fastening rings in the luggage compartment which can be used to secure loose items and luggage with the help of → Fig. 1 lashing, retaining or securing straps WARNING Unsuitable or damaged lashing, retaining or securing straps could tear in the event of a braking manoeuvre or accident. This could cause objects to be flung through the vehicle interior and lead to severe or fatal injuries. ● Always use suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. ● Pull lashing, retaining and securing straps taut crosswise over the cargo on the luggage compartment floor and attach securely to the fastening rings. ● Make sure that the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings, particularly when stowing flat objects. ● Depending on the vehicle equipment, observe the signs about stowing loads that are attached in the luggage compartment. ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings. WARNING Elastic tensioning straps must be stretched to attach to the fastening rings. The hooks attached to them can cause serious injuries. ● Always protect eyes and face from injury when attaching elastic tensioning straps. ● Always hold elastic tensioning straps securely when fastening so that they cannot slip off and rebound. ● Always fasten the elastic tensioning straps first to the fastening rings in the front area of the luggage compartment, then pull them towards the loading sill and fasten them to the fastening rings there. If the tension straps slip off, they will snap away from the body. Suitable lashing, retaining or securing straps and luggage securing systems are available from qualified workshops. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose.
- Page 359 Bag hook Fig. 1 On the left and right in the luggage compartment: bag hooks. In the luggage compartment, there may be bag hooks for hanging light shopping bags. WARNING Never use the bag hooks for lashing down items of luggage or other objects. The bag hooks could break off during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident. NOTICE Do not load each bag hook with more than 2.5 kg (5 lb).
- Page 360 Load-through hatch Fig. 1 In the rear seat backrest: opening the load-through hatch. Fig. 2 In the luggage compartment: opening the load-through hatch. Depending on the vehicle equipment, a load-through hatch may be located behind the centre armrest on the rear seat backrest. This can be used to transport long objects in the vehicle interior, such as skis. Opening the load-through hatch (→ Centre armrest) —Fold the centre armrest forwards → Fig. 1 and —Opening the load-through hatch from the vehicle interior: pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow fold the cover of the load-through hatch fully forward → Load-through hatch —Open the boot lid. —OR: opening the load-through hatch from the luggage compartment: push the release lever down in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 2 and push the cover of the load-through hatch forward. —Push long objects through the load-through hatch from the luggage compartment. —Secure the objects with the seat belt as required. —Close the boot lid. Closing the load-through hatch —Fold back the cover of the load-through hatch until it engages in position. The red marking on the luggage compartment...
- Page 361 If you are unsure whether a roof carrier can be fitted on your vehicle, please contact a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Only roof carriers that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle must be used. If the vehicle is not approved for use with a roof carrier, do n ot use or retrofit a roof carrier. WARNING When transporting heavy or bulky objects on the roof carrier, the vehicle's handling will change due to a shift in the centre of gravity and an increased susceptibility to crosswinds. ● Always secure loads properly using suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. ● Cargo that is large, heavy, bulky, long or flat will have a negative effect on the vehicle aerodynamics, centre of gravity and overall handling. ● Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking manoeuvres. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. WARNING A roof carrier that has not been approved for the vehicle or a roof carrier that is fitted to a vehicle that is n ot approved for use with a roof carrier may cause accidents or injuries. ● Use only roof carriers that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle. ● Never use a roof carrier on a vehicle that has not been approved for use with a roof carrier. ● A roof carrier that is fitted nevertheless may become loose whilst the vehicle is in motion and fall from the vehicle roof. NOTICE Securing a roof carrier of any kind to a vehicle that is not approved for use with a roof carrier may lead to severe damage to the vehicle.
- Page 362 Securing roof carriers → Special roof carriers must be used to transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surfboards or boats safely . Suitable accessories are available from your Volkswagen dealership. Securing the roof bars and load carrier Mount roof bars on the roof railings according to the installation instructions provided. Once you have fitted the roof bars, you can then secure the respective carrier system on them. WARNING Incorrectly securing and using the roof bars and load carrier could cause the whole roof carrier system to fall off the roof. This could cause accidents and injuries. ● Only use roof bars and load carrier systems when they are undamaged and fitted correctly. ● Always fit roof bars and load carriers correctly. Always observe the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. ● Attach the roof bars only at the specified mounting points. ● Special roof carriers for items such as bicycles, skis, surfboards, etc. should always be properly installed. Always observe the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. ● Check that the roof carrier is secured before starting your journey and tighten as necessary after driving a short distance. During a long trip, check all bolts and fasteners at each stop. ● Do not carry out any changes or repairs to the roof bars or the load carrier system.
- Page 363 Loading roof carriers Maximum permissible roof load The maximum permitted roof load is 75 kg (165 lbs) → The roof load limit refers to the combined weight of the roof carrier and the load carried on the roof Make sure you are aware of the weight of the roof carrier and the load to be transported. Weigh the load if necessary. However, you will not be able to carry the maximum permitted roof load if you are using a roof carrier with a lower load rating. In this case, do not exceed the maximum weight limit for the roof carrier which is specified in the manufacturer's installation instructions. Distributing the load → Distribute the load evenly and secure it correctly WARNING Accidents and vehicle damage can occur if the maximum permitted roof load is exceeded. ● Never exceed the specified roof load, the maximum permissible axle loads, and the permissible gross vehicle weight for the vehicle. ● Do not exceed the load rating of the roof carrier, even if the maximum roof load has not been reached. WARNING Loose and incorrectly secured loads can fall off the roof carrier and cause accidents and injuries. ● Always use suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. NOTICE When opening the boot lid, take care not to let it hit the roof load.
- Page 364 Notes on use Remove the roof carrier in the following situations —The roof carrier is no longer needed. —Before entering a car wash. —When the vehicle height exceeds the required clearance height, e.g. in a garage. NOTICE ● The height of the vehicle is changed by the installation of a roof carrier and the load secured to it. Check and compare the height of the vehicle with clearance heights, e.g. for underpasses and garage doors. ● The roof carrier and its load must not interfere with the roof aerial, the glass roof and the boot lid. Fitting a roof carrier increases air resistance and therefore reduces the vehicle’s range.
- Page 365 Introduction to the topic The vehicle can be used to tow a trailer if it has the required technical equipment for this. The additional trailer load will affect the amount of wear, fuel consumption and performance of the vehicle and, in certain circumstances, could shorten the service intervals. Driving with a trailer not only places an extra load on the vehicle, but also requires increased concentration on the part of the driver. Vehicles with start/stop system When using towing brackets that were not retrofitted by Volkswagen, the start/stop system must be deactivated manually before towing a trailer, and it must remain deactivated for as long as a trailer is being towed (→ Start/stop system) DANGER It is dangerous to transport people in a trailer and it may also be illegal. WARNING Improper use of the towing bracket can lead to a loss of vehicle control, accidents and serious injuries. ● Only use the towing bracket if it is fitted properly and is not damaged. ● Do not carry out any alterations or repairs to the towing bracket. ● Wherever possible, swivel in or remove the ball coupling when a trailer is not being used in order to reduce the risk of injury in rear-end collisions, and the risk of injury to pedestrians and cyclists when the vehicle is parked. ● Never install a “weight-distributing” or “load-balancing” towing bracket to the vehicle. The vehicle was not constructed for these kinds of towing brackets. The towing bracket can fail, causing the trailer to tear loose from the vehicle. WARNING Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or bulky items can change the vehicle handling, increase the braking distance and lead to accidents. ● Always secure loads properly using suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Reduce your speed, particularly when going downhill. ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are more likely to tip over than trailers with a low centre of gravity. ● Always drive carefully and think ahead. Accelerate carefully and gently. Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking manoeuvres. ● Take special care when overtaking. Reduce your speed immediately if the trailer shows even the slightest sign of snaking. ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer; also 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cases. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are permitted. Keep to country-specific speed limits which may be lower for...
- Page 366 Some retrofitted towing brackets may cover the opening for fitting the towing eye. If so, the towing eye cannot be used for towing or tow-starting other vehicles. For this reason, the removed ball coupling of a retrofitted towing bracket should be stored in the vehicle at all times. Technical prerequisites Cooling system There is an increased load on the engine and the cooling system when towing a trailer. The cooling system must contain sufficient coolant and be designed to cope with the extra load added by the trailer. Trailer brake If the trailer is equipped with its own brake system, comply with the legal regulations. Exterior mirrors If you are unable to see the traffic behind the trailer in the vehicle's standard exterior mirrors, additional exterior mirrors should be fitted in accordance with any country-specific regulations. Before setting off, adjust the exterior mirrors so that you have a sufficient view of the rear. Retrofitting a towing bracket Only use a towing bracket which has been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Always check and follow the data provided by the towing bracket manufacturer. Trailer tail light clusters The trailer tail light clusters must work correctly and meet legal requirements. Do not exceed the maximum power consumption for the trailer tail light clusters. Using a trailer in hot or cold countries Due to the climatic conditions in some countries, trailers may not be permitted for all engine/gearbox combinations. If you want to retrofit a towing bracket, contact a qualified workshop in advance to find out whether the vehicle is suitable for this purpose. WARNING If the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrectly fitted, the trailer could become detached from the towing vehicle. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to its mountings. The towing bracket must not prevent the bumpers from functioning correctly. ● Do not carry out any alterations to the exhaust or brake systems. NOTICE ● The vehicle electronics may be damaged if the trailer's power consumption is too high. ● Never connect the trailer's electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the tail light clusters or to other sources of electricity. Only use suitable connectors to provide power to the trailer. Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. Volkswagen recommends additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
- Page 367 Fig. 1 Key to 1 Protective cap 2 Ball coupling 3 Retaining balls 4 Shank 5 Centring device 6 Locking lever 7 Key 8 Lock cap 9 Release pin with coloured marking The removable ball coupling is located with the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment. NOTICE If you fit an unsuitable ball coupling, this may damage the vehicle and invalidate the type approval of the vehicle. ● Always use only the factory-supplied ball coupling or a ball coupling that has been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle model and its model year. Step 1: preparations —Remove the sealing plug from the ball coupling mounting under the rear bumper and stow in the vehicle. —Starting from the bottom right side, swivel the trailer socket as far as possible to the top left. This gives you access to the ball coupling mounting. → Fig. 1 , shank and the retaining balls of the ball coupling are —Check to ensure that the mounting, locking lever → all clean and not damaged . Clean if necessary. Step 2: check whether the ball coupling is pre-tensioned...
- Page 368 The ball coupling cannot be fitted properly unless it is pre-tensioned. The following conditions must be fulfilled: → Fig. 1 is open and the key is inserted —The lock cover → Fig. 1 can be moved. —The release pin → Fig. 1 is in the bottom position. —The locking lever → Fig. 1 can be pressed fully into the shank —All retaining balls If all these conditions are met, continue with Step 4. If conditions are not met, continue with Step 3. Step 3: pre-tensioning the ball coupling If the ball coupling is not pre-tensioned, pre-tension the coupling head as follows: → Fig. 1 from the lock and insert the key into the lock. —Remove the lock cap → Fig. 1 anti-clockwise until the part of the key with the hole is at the top. —Turn the key → Fig. 1 → and at the same time press the locking lever down as far as it will go . The —Press the release pin locking lever remains locked in this position. Step 4: attaching the pre-tensioned ball coupling to the vehicle Do not touch the locking lever once the ball coupling has been pre-tensioned. When the ball coupling is engaged, the locking lever will spring back to its original position and could cause injury → —Guide the pre-tensioned removable ball coupling into the mounting tube from below. → Fig. 1 must engage in the mounting —Push the ball coupling firmly upwards until it engages. The centring devices points on the vehicle.
- Page 369 ● The ball coupling is heavy. When checking whether it is secure, the ball coupling could fall off and cause injuries. ● Do not touch the locking lever once the ball coupling has been pre-tensioned. When the ball coupling is pressed into the mounting, the locking lever will spring back to its original position. ● If the ball coupling will not fit properly, the towing bracket should be checked by a qualified workshop. ● Do not use the towing bracket if the ball coupling does not engage properly or if you are unable to pre-tension it. ● Do not use the towing bracket if you are unable to remove the key from the locking lever once the ball coupling has been mounted. This means that ball coupling is not locked properly. ● Always fasten the ball coupling securely in the luggage compartment once it has been removed. NOTICE ● The mounting on the vehicle, locking lever, shank and ball coupling retaining balls must all be clean and undamaged. Otherwise you may not be able to lock the ball coupling securely. ● Do not aim a high-pressure hose or steam cleaner directly at the ball coupling mounting. This could wash the grease required for lubrication out of the mounting. Removing the ball coupling Fig. 1 Overview: removable ball coupling. (→ Parking) —Park the vehicle —Unhitch the trailer and disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. If fitted, remove the adapters from the trailer socket. → Fig. 1 from the lock in the locking lever and insert the key into the lock. —Remove the lock cap → Fig. 1 anti-clockwise until the part of the key with the hole is at the top. —Turn the key → Fig. 1 with your hand. —Hold the neck of the ball coupling below the ball coupling → Fig. 1 and at the same time press the locking lever down as far as it will go →...
- Page 370 WARNING The removable ball coupling is heavy. The ball coupling could fall while it is being removed. This could cause injuries. ● Unlock the ball coupling only once the trailer has been unhitched. Fitting a bicycle carrier on the ball coupling on the towing bracket Only bicycle carriers that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle must be used. Mount the bicycle carrier in accordance with the manufacturer's assembly instructions. → A maximum of three bicycles may be mounted on the bicycle carrier . Position heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle (ball coupling) as possible. Maximum load The maximum load (carrier system including load) of the bicycle carrier fitted on the ball coupling is 7 5 kg. However, the (→ Trailer towing) model-specific maximum drawbar load of the towing bracket must not be exceeded. WARNING Incorrect use of a bicycle carrier mounted on the ball coupling of the towing bracket can cause accidents and injuries. ● Read and always observe the assembly instructions provided by the bicycle carrier manufacturer. ● Never exceed the specified load and overhang. ● Never secure a bicycle carrier on the ball neck below the ball head. The bicycle carrier could slip due to the shape of the ball neck. NOTICE Considerable vehicle damage could occur if the maximum permitted load specified in the manufacturer's assembly instructions or the overhang is exceeded. ● Never exceed the values specified in the assembly instructions. Volkswagen recommends that you remove all add-on parts from the bicycles before setting off. This includes bicycle bags and baskets, child seats or batteries. This helps improve the carrier system's wind load and centre of gravity.
- Page 371 Notes on towing a trailer Trailer socket The electrical connection between the towing vehicle and the trailer requires a 13-pin trailer socket. The pin assignment corresponds to DIN ISO 11446. If the trailer has a 7 -pin plug you will need to use a suitable adapter. If you are uncertain whether the electrical connection of the trailer with the vehicle is correct, please contact a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Connection to the anti-theft alarm The trailer is integrated in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are fulfilled: —When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti-theft alarm and a factory-fitted towing bracket. —When the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer socket. —When the vehicle and trailer electric systems are functional, fault-free and undamaged. —When the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti-theft alarm is active. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be triggered as soon as the electrical connection to the trailer is interrupted. Connection to the anti-theft alarm (trailer with LED tail light clusters) For technical reasons, trailers with LED tail light clusters cannot be integrated into the anti-theft alarm system. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is not triggered as soon as the electrical connection to the trailer with LED tail light clusters is interrupted. WARNING Any electrical cables which are not connected properly or are connected incorrectly could cause a power surge to the trailer. This could lead to faults in the entire vehicle electronics system and could also cause accidents and serious injuries. ● All work on the electrical system should only be carried out by a qualified workshop. ● Never connect the trailer's electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the towing vehicle's tail light clusters or to other power sources. WARNING Contact between the pins in the trailer socket can lead to short circuits, overloading of the electrical system and failure of the lighting system, thereby causing accidents and serious injuries. ● Never connect the pins in the trailer socket to one another. ● Have bent pins repaired by a qualified workshop. NOTICE If you park the trailer using the support wheel or other trailer supports, disconnect the trailer from the vehicle. The vehicle could move up and down if the load changes or if there is damage to the tyres, for example. If this happens, a great deal of force will be exerted on the towing bracket and trailer, which could lead to damage to the vehicle and trailer.
- Page 372 Loading a trailer Maximum trailer weight and drawbar load The maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can pull. The drawbar load is the weight that is exerted vertically from above on the towing bracket's ball coupling. The figures for maximum trailer weight and drawbar load that are given on the type plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct values for your specific model, which are often lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle registration documents. All data in the official vehicle documents always take precedence. In the interest of driving safety, Volkswagen recommends that you always use the maximum drawbar load. The handling of the vehicle and trailer will be impaired if the drawbar load is too small. The drawbar load increases the weight on the rear axle and reduces the maximum load of the vehicle as a result. Maximum permitted drawbar load The maximum permitted drawbar load exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling of the towing bracket must not exceed 80 kg. Gross combination weight The gross combination weight is made up of the actual weight of the loaded vehicle and loaded trailer. In some countries, trailers are divided into different classes. Volkswagen recommends that you contact a qualified workshop to find out about suitable trailers. Loading a trailer The vehicle and trailer should be balanced. For this purpose, the maximum permitted drawbar load should be utilised. Do not place the load only at the front or the rear of the trailer: —Distribute the load in the trailer so that heavy objects are either over or as near to the axle as possible. —Secure all loads on the trailer properly. Tyre pressure Follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations concerning the tyre pressure for the trailer tyres. (→ Tyre pressure) When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres on the towing vehicle with the maximum permitted tyre pressure WARNING Accidents and serious injuries can occur if you exceed the vehicle's maximum permitted gross axle weight rating, drawbar load, gross vehicle weight rating or gross combination weight rating. ● Never exceed the specified values. ● Never let the actual weights at the front and rear axles exceed the gross axle weight ratings. Never exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight for the vehicle with weight at the front and rear of the vehicle. WARNING Loads that may slide can severely impair stability and driving safety, which can cause accidents and severe injuries.
- Page 373 Driving with a trailer Headlight adjustment Towing a trailer can raise the front end of the vehicle so that the dipped beam dazzles other road users. Use the headlight range control to lower the light cone as required. Vehicles with dynamic headlight range control are adjusted automatically. Things to note when driving with a trailer —If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by the trailer wheels locking. —The combination weight causes the braking distance to increase. —On downhill stretches, use the engine as an additional brake. The brake system could otherwise overheat and fail. —On vehicles with a manual gearbox, change to a lower gear before driving on downhill stretches. —In automatic gearbox Tiptronic mode, select a lower gear. —The vehicle's centre of gravity and in turn the vehicle handling will change because of the trailer load and the increased gross weight of the vehicle and trailer. —The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen towing vehicle is very unfavourable. When driving in this situation, drive particularly carefully and slowly. Pulling off on uphill gradients when towing a trailer A vehicle towing a trailer is liable to roll back a short distance when moving off on an uphill slope depending on the gradient and the gross weight of the trailer and vehicle. When towing a trailer, pull off on uphill gradient as follows: —Depress and hold the brake pedal. button once to switch off the electronic parking brake . —Press the —On vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the clutch pedal fully. —Select first gear or selector lever position D. button and hold it in this position to hold the vehicle and trailer with the electronic parking brake. —Pull the —Release the brake pedal. —Pull away slowly. —To do this, slowly release the clutch pedal in the case of a manual gearbox. button only when the engine has sufficient power to move off. —Release the WARNING Incorrect trailer towing can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injuries. ● Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or bulky items can change the way the vehicle handles and increase the braking distance. ● Always drive carefully and think ahead. Brake earlier than in normal driving. ●...
- Page 374 Trailer stabilisation The trailer stabilisation function can detect if an attached trailer is starting to snake from side to side and can provide countersteer. Trailer stabilisation is an extension of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). If trailer snaking is detected, the trailer stabilisation function automatically helps to reduce the trailer's motion using counter steering assistance. Prerequisites for trailer stabilisation —The vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or a compatible towing bracket has been retrofitted. —Electronic Stability Control and traction control system (TCS) are active. The indicator lamp or in the instrument cluster is not lit up. —The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer socket. —The vehicle speed is higher than approximately 60 km/h (37 mph). —The maximum drawbar load is being used. —The trailer must have a rigid drawbar. —Trailers with brakes must have a mechanical overrun system. WARNING Do not let the extra safety afforded by the trailer stabilisation function tempt you into taking any risks when driving. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Accelerate carefully on slippery surfaces. ● Take your foot off the accelerator if one of the systems is active. WARNING The trailer stabilisation function may not be able to detect all driving situations correctly. ● Trailer stabilisation is switched off when ESC is deactivated. ● Light trailers that are snaking will not be recognised by the trailer stabilisation function and stabilised accordingly in all cases. ● A trailer can still jack-knife on slippery roads with little grip, even if the towing vehicle is equipped with the trailer stabilisation system. ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity might tip over before snaking starts. ● Sudden braking procedures could occur automatically in extreme driving situations if the trailer socket is being used without a trailer (e.g. for a bicycle carrier with lighting).
- Page 375 Retrofitting a towing bracket Fig. 1 Dimensions and mounting points for retrofitting a towing bracket. → Fig. 1 The dimensions must be adhered to when retrofitting a towing bracket. Always observe the minimum distance given from the middle of the ball coupling to the surface of the road. This also applies when the vehicle is fully laden, including maximum drawbar load. A Mounting points B 879 mm C At least 65 mm D 350 – 420 mm E 334 mm F 554 mm G 1017 mm H 1051 mm Volkswagen recommends having the towing bracket retrofitted by a qualified workshop. The cooling system may need to be...
- Page 376 ● Never connect the trailer's electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the tail light clusters or to other unsuitable power sources. Only suitable connectors may be used to connect the trailer. ● A towing bracket should be retrofitted to the vehicle by a qualified workshop. WARNING The trailer can become detached from the towing vehicle if the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrectly fitted. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. Only use towing brackets which have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Safety information on using fuel WARNING Incorrect handling of fuel can cause explosions, fire, serious burns and other injuries. ● Before refuelling switch off the engine, ignition, your mobile telephone and other radio equipment. (→ Auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation) ● Before refuelling, switch off the auxiliary heater ● Avoid electrostatic discharges by not entering the vehicle during refuelling. ● Make sure that the tank cap is closed properly and no fuel can escape. ● Observe the applicable safety instructions and local regulations on handling fuel. WARNING Incorrect refuelling can lead to fire, serious injuries and vehicle damage. ● Use only fuels that have been approved for the vehicle. ● Do not use fuels that contain metals and use only Volkswagen-approved service additives in the approved quantity. ● Immediately remove any fuel that is spilled from all vehicle components. CAUTION Fuel may run out of the fuel canister. This could cause fire and injuries. ● Do not carry a fuel canister in the vehicle. Fuels can pollute the environment. Collect any service fluids that escape or are spilled and dispose of them correctly. The tank flap cannot be opened manually. Seek expert assistance in an emergency.
- Page 377 Introduction to the topic The tank flap is located at the rear right-hand side of the vehicle.
- Page 378 Identification of fuels and fuels standards Fig. 1 On the inside of the tank flap: fuel information label (illustration). Fuel information label Different engines require different fuels. There is a factory-fitted fuel information sticker in the tank flap that indicates the required fuel type for the vehicle → Fig. 1 The designation and frame indicate the fuels that are suitable for the vehicle. This is the minimum requirement. The vehicle must not be refuelled with other fuels → Fuel standards The fuel that is used for refuelling must comply with one of the following standards. The vehicle must not be refuelled with other fuels → Where fuel complying with the specified standards is not available, your Volkswagen dealership or a qualified workshop will have information on which available fuels are suitable for the vehicle. Petrol Fig. 2 Petrol fuels containing ethanol. Petrol fuels containing Ethanol. The number specifies the maximum ethanol content in the petrol, e.g. E5 for a maximum of 5% ethanol.
- Page 379 Fuel standard —EN 228 —Resolucao ANP N° 40 (Brazil) —Resolucion 576/2019 (Argentina) —NOM-016-CRE-2016 (Mexico) Diesel Fig. 3 Diesel fuels containing biodiesel. Diesel fuels containing Biodiesel. The figure indicates the maximum biodiesel content in the diesel, e.g. B7 for a maximum of 7% biodiesel. Fuel standard —EN 590 —DIN EN 590 NOTICE Using fuel that does not comply with the applicable standards and are not approved may reduce performance and cause damage to the engine and fuel system. ● Before refuelling, check whether the fuel designations on the pump meet the vehicle's requirements. ● Use only fuels that meet the required standard and have the correct designation in order to prevent damage to the fuel system and engine failure. Petrol Petrol grades Petrol grades differ with respect to their Research Octane Number (RON). The vehicle may be refuelled with petrol that has a higher RON than required by the engine. However, this does not provide any advantage in terms of fuel consumption or engine output. The fuel information label may show several types of petrol, e.g. 95/92 / 97/93 RON. The highlighted petrol grades, 95/92 in the example, are the preferred petrol grades for the vehicle. If these are not available, one of the other listed petrol grades can be used for refuelling. The petrol grade with the higher RON value should be used for refuelling in this case, e.g. 97 instead of 93 RON.
- Page 380 Fill vehicles with a petrol engine only with unleaded petrol or petrol with a maximum ethanol content of 10 % ( E10) → The fuel quality affects the running properties, performance and service life of the engine. Refuel with fuel that already contains suitable service additives → NOTICE Incorrect refuelling or unsuitable fuel additives may cause damage to the vehicle. ● Before refuelling, check whether the fuel standard specified on the pump meets the vehicle's requirements. ● Use only Volkswagen-approved service additives in the approved quantity. ● Refuel only with petrol that has the specified Research Octane Number ( RON) or a higher one. If, in an emergency, you have to use petrol with an octane number lower than the recommended number, drive at medium engine speeds and avoid high engine loading. Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads. Refuel with petrol with the correct octane number as soon as possible. Diesel → Fill vehicles with a diesel engine only with diesel or diesel with a maximum RME fuel content of 7 % If you use diesel with a high sulphur content, the service intervals are shorter. Information on countries where the diesel has a high sulphur content is available from your Volkswagen dealership or a qualified workshop. The fuel quality affects the running properties, performance and service life of the engine. Refuel with fuel that already → contains suitable service additives Winter-grade diesel fuel and filter preheater system Diesel fuel with improved cold flow properties (winter-grade diesel fuel) must be used during the winter months. Refuelling with winter-grade diesel fuel can prevent malfunctions in vehicle operation. Winter-grade diesel fuel is available at filling stations during the winter months. (→ Fuel types and Different climate- and time-dependent cold classes may be defined in country-specific fuel standards refuelling) Diesel vehicles are equipped with a filter preheater system. The filter preheater system guarantees the cold flow properties of the diesel fuel when driving. Information on the cold properties of diesel is available from filling stations in the respective country. In order to ensure that the vehicle can also be started at low outside temperatures, Volkswagen recommends parking the vehicle in a location that is protected from the weather, e.g. in a garage.
- Page 381 At cold temperatures, louder noises may occur in the diesel engine and the exhaust gas may be tinged blue. Refuelling Fig. 1 Behind the tank flap: tank cap (illustration). Refuelling process 1. Unlock the tank flap with the vehicle key or the button in the driver door. 2. Open the tank flap. 3. Unscrew the tank cap and place it in the opening provided in the tank flap → Fig. 1 4. Hold the filler nozzle so that the handle is facing down in order to ensure optimum filling. → 5. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off for the first time 6. Screw the tank cap onto the tank filler neck. 7. Close the tank flap. WARNING Overfilling the fuel tank may cause the fuel to splash out and overflow. This can cause fires, explosions and serious injuries. ● Do not continue refuelling when the filler nozzle switches off for the first time. NOTICE If possible, every six months, drive the fuel tank empty until the indicator lamp lights up and then refuel. This is necessary to maintain the required system function for petrol mode and fuel quality. Fuels can pollute the environment. Collect any service fluids that escape or are spilled and dispose of them correctly.
- Page 382 Introduction to the topic The components relevant to emission control reduce harmful emissions: (→ AdBlue) ® —AdBlue (→ Catalytic converter) —Catalytic converter (→ Particulate filter) —Particulate filter (with some equipment levels) WARNING Engine emissions contain carbon monoxide that can cause people to lose consciousness and can also cause death. ● Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed spaces. ● Never start the engine in enclosed spaces. ● Do not leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. WARNING The components of the exhaust system become very hot. This can cause fires. ● Park the vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come into contact with any inflammable material underneath the vehicle, e.g. dry grass. ● Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, particulate filter or the heat shields.
- Page 383 AdBlue® The SCR catalytic converter uses AdBlue urea solution to convert nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and water. AdBlue is a ® ® registered trademark and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid). Legal information No technical modifications should be made to the emission control system that could influence emission control by AdBlue ® The vehicle no longer complies with the certificate of conformity issued for this vehicle type if the AdBlue® in accordance with ISO-22241-1 approved by Volkswagen is not exclusively used or replenished. It may be a criminal offence to use the vehicle without the AdBlue specified by Volkswagen. ® The emission values may be negatively affected if the emission control system is not operated as intended. Information on AdBlue ® The AdBlue consumption figures depend on the driving style, the operating temperature and the ambient temperature. The ® remaining range and refill quantity can be checked on the instrument cluster display . As AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (+13 °F), refuelling may be restricted at very low temperatures. During vehicle operation, the ® system is heated to ensure emission control even at very low temperatures. AdBlue must be refilled independently of the service events. This may be necessary more frequently and between the service ® intervals. The AdBlue tank must never run empty . ® Warning and driver inducement system for low tank level Always refill AdBlue when requested to do so by a corresponding message on the instrument cluster display (→ AdBlue) ® ® AdBlue in the normal operating range. Remaining range over 2,000 km or 2,400 km (depending on equipment). It is...
- Page 384 ● If AdBlue is swallowed, immediately rinse the mouth out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce ® vomiting unless instructed to do so by a doctor. Seek medical assistance immediately. NOTICE If the AdBlue level is too low, the vehicle cannot be restarted after the ignition has been switched off. Starting with jump ® leads is also not possible. ● Refill a sufficient quantity of AdBlue at the latest when the remaining distance reaches approximately 1,000 km. ® ● Never allow the AdBlue tank to run empty. ® NOTICE Improper use of AdBlue may cause damage to the vehicle that is not covered by the warranty. ® ● Use only AdBlue that complies with the standard ISO 22241-1. ® ● Never add water, fuel or additives to the AdBlue ® ● Never fill AdBlue in the diesel fuel tank. ® ● Do not permanently carry the refill bottle in the vehicle. The bottle may develop a leak following changes in temperature and damage and the AdBlue may damage the vehicle interior. ® Refilling AdBlue® Fig. 1 Behind the tank flap: tank cap for AdBlue (illustration). Fig. 2 Behind the tank flap: refilling AdBlue using the refill bottle (illustration).
- Page 385 Fig. 3 Behind the tank flap: refilling AdBlue using the nozzle (illustration). 1 Cap for the AdBlue filler neck. ® 2 Refill bottle. 3 AdBlue filler nozzle. ® Preparing for refilling The AdBlue filler neck is located behind the tank flap next to the tank filler neck for fuel → Fig. 1 ® —Park the vehicle on a level surface and switch off the ignition. —Open the tank flap. filler neck. ® —Unscrew the cap of the AdBlue that complies with the standard ISO 22241-1. ® —Use only AdBlue Refilling with the refill bottle Observe the expiry date and the manufacturer's instructions and information on the refill bottle. —Unscrew the cap of the refill bottle. filler neck and screw the refill bottle tight. ® —Place the refill bottle on the AdBlue —Do not squeeze the refill bottle to prevent it from being damaged. —Press the refill bottle in the direction of the tank filler neck and hold the refill bottle in this position. —Add at least the minimum refill quantity indicated in the instrument cluster. → —Do not squeeze the refill bottle to ensure that the tank is not overfilled —Unscrew the refill bottle. Filling with a filler nozzle The AdBlue tank can be refilled at all AdBlue pumps.
- Page 386 —Screw in the cap on the AdBlue —Close the tank flap. —Switch on only the ignition for at least 30 seconds to allow the system to detect the refill procedure. —Start the engine only after this. NOTICE Overfilling AdBlue may damage the tank system and the vehicle. ® ● Do not fill with more than the maximum refill quantity indicated on the instrument cluster display. ● Remove any spilled AdBlue as quickly as possible with a damp cloth and plenty of cold water. ® ● Remove any crystallised AdBlue with warm water and a sponge. ® Dispose of the refill bottle in an environmentally responsible way. Suitable AdBlue refill bottles are available from a Volkswagen ® dealership. Troubleshooting Fault in the selective catalytic reduction system The red warning lamps light up. Error: AdBlue. Engine start disabled. There is a fault in the selective catalytic reduction system or the system is not filled with standard-compliant AdBlue . It is ® therefore not possible to restart the engine. —Drive immediately to a qualified workshop without switching off the engine. —Have the system checked. or Fault in the selective catalytic reduction system The yellow or white indicator lamp lights up. Error: AdBlue. No engine start in XXX km.
- Page 387 ® or AdBlue level low The yellow or white indicator lamp lights up. Please add AdBlue. No engine start in XXX km. (→ AdBlue) within the displayed remaining range in accordance with ® —Refill AdBlue Catalytic converter To help ensure long-term functionality in the exhaust system and the catalytic converter: —Refuel only with unleaded petrol. (→ Fuel types and refuelling) —Never run the fuel tank completely dry (→ Engine oil) —Do not fill too much engine oil (→ Jump starting) —Never tow the vehicle to start it, but use jump leads instead If you notice misfiring, loss of power or uneven running when driving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle checked by a qualified workshop . Otherwise unburned fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating. The emissions may have a sulphur-like smell even if the emission purification system is working properly.
- Page 388 Particulate filter Function The particulate filter (depending on the vehicle equipment) filters out soot particles in the exhaust gas. Regeneration In normal vehicle operation, the filter cleans itself. If it is not possible for the filter to clean itself, for example if the vehicle is only ever used for short trips, the filter will become saturated with soot. The diesel particulate filter requires cleaning (regeneration). Noises, slight smells and increased engine speeds may occur during regeneration. The radiator fan may run on while the vehicle is moving or when the engine has been switched off. To assist the regeneration of the particulate filter, Volkswagen recommends that you avoid making only short journeys. The soot in the particulate filter is burnt off at high temperatures on a periodic basis. During the periodic regeneration process, the yellow indicator lamp does not light up.
- Page 389 Troubleshooting Irregular engine running and faults Irregular engine running or faults when driving may be a sign of poor fuel quality. —Reduce speed immediately. —Drive to the nearest qualified workshop at medium engine speeds and low loads on the engine. —If these symptoms occur immediately after refuelling, switch off the engine immediately to avoid any subsequent damage. — Seek expert assistance. Particulate filter clogged with soot The yellow indicator lamp lights up. The particulate filter is saturated with soot and requires regeneration. Prerequisite for regeneration trip: the engine is at operating temperature. For petrol engines —Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h. — Remove your foot from the accelerator completely for a few seconds to allow the vehicle to coast with a gear engaged. —Repeat this procedure (accelerate and coast) until the indicator lamp goes out. —This procedure allows the diesel particulate filter to perform its self-cleaning process and may take some time. Go to the nearest qualified workshop if the indicator lamp does not go out. For diesel engines —Drive at a speed of at least 60 km/h with an engine speed of at least 2,000 rpm. The achieved temperature increase can burn the soot off the filter. — End the regeneration drive only when the indicator lamp goes out. —This procedure allows the diesel particulate filter to perform its self-cleaning process and may take around 20 to 40 minutes. Go to a qualified workshop if the indicator lamp continues to light up after driving for approximately 40 minutes. Emissions-relevant fault The yellow indicator lamp lights up. Fault in an emissions-relevant component that can damage the vehicle. —Go to a qualified workshop and have the engine and exhaust system checked. Misfiring The yellow indicator lamp flashes. Misfiring is occurring that can damage the vehicle. —Go to a qualified workshop and have the engine and exhaust system checked. WARNING Any sudden driving manoeuvres that cannot be anticipated by other road users may lead to accidents. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Always observe the applicable country-specific traffic regulations. There may be engine faults and fuel consumption may be higher if the indicator lamps are lit up or flashing.
- Page 390 Introduction to the topic Observe any country-specific legislation when securing your vehicle in the event of a breakdown. WARNING In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident, a loose vehicle toolkit, breakdown set and spare wheel or temporary spare wheel could be flung though the vehicle and cause severe injuries. ● Ensure that the vehicle toolkit, breakdown set and spare wheel or temporary spare wheel are always properly secured in the luggage compartment. WARNING Unsuitable or damaged tools in the vehicle toolkit can lead to accidents and injuries. ● Never work with unsuitable or damaged tools from the vehicle toolkit.
- Page 391 Stowage Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: opening the luggage compartment floor. The vehicle toolkit may be located in various places in the vehicle, e.g. in the side stowage area of the luggage compartment or under the luggage compartment floor → Fig. 1 —Remove the luggage net if necessary. —Grip the recessed handle in the luggage compartment floor and lift it until it is held in position by the side restraints (arrows). NOTICE Never drop the luggage compartment floor; guide it slowly back down. The trims or the luggage compartment floor could otherwise be damaged. After using the jack, crank it back to its original position so that it can be stowed safely.
- Page 392 Contents of the vehicle toolkit Fig. 1 Contents of the toolbox (illustration). The scope of the on-board tool kit depends on the country and equipment. The following section describes the maximum scope: 1 Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle for unscrewing or tightening slackened wheel bolts. The screwdriver blade is reversible. The screwdriver may be stowed under the box spanner. 2 Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolt. Volkswagen recommends that you carry the wheel bolt adapter in the vehicle toolkit at all times. The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the adapter. You will need this number to replace the adapter if it is lost. Make a note of the code number for the anti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place – but not inside the vehicle. 3 Screw-in towing eye. 4 Hook for pulling off the centre covers, wheel covers and the wheel bolt caps. 5 Jack. Before you repack the jack, you must fully wind in the claw. 6 Box spanner for wheel bolts. 7 Crank. In some countries, there may also be a tyre pressure gauge in the vehicle. Jack: maintenance There are no maintenance cycles for the jack. Grease the jack with universal lubricant when necessary.
- Page 393 Service position Fig. 1 Wipers in service position. The wiper arms can be lifted off the windscreen when in the service position. Activating service position (→ In the engine compartment) —The bonnet must be closed —Switch the ignition on and then off again. —Push the wiper lever downwards briefly. Lifting the windscreen wiper arms → —Move the wiper arms to the service position before lifting —When lifting a wiper arm, hold it only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. Place the wiper arms back onto the windscreen before driving away. With the ignition switched on, briefly press the wiper lever down to bring the wiper arms back to the original position. NOTICE ● In order to prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, the windscreen wiper arms should only be lifted when in the service position. ● Always return the wiper arms to the windscreen before starting your journey.
- Page 394 Cleaning and changing wiper blades Fig. 1 Changing the windscreen wiper blades. Fig. 2 Changing the wiper blade for the rear window. The factory-fitted windscreen wiper blades are coated with graphite. The graphite coating ensures that the wiper blade moves quietly over the window. If the graphite coating is damaged, the wiper will become louder. Check the condition of the wiper blades on a regular basis. R ubbing wiper blades should be changed if damaged or cleaned if → Cleaning and changing wiper blades dirty Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. Wiper blades can be obtained from a qualified workshop. Cleaning wiper blades (→ Wiper blades) Note for the windscreen wipers: move the wiper arms to the service position before lifting them —When lifting a wiper arm, hold it only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. → Cleaning and changing wiper blades —Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp sponge —Place the wiper arms carefully back onto the windscreen. Changing the windscreen wiper blades (→ Wiper blades) —Move the wiper arms to the service position before lifting —When lifting a wiper arm, hold it only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. → Fig. 1 —Press and hold the release button and simultaneously pull off the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow —Insert a new wiper blade with the same length and design onto the wiper arm. Push it on until it engages. —Place the wiper arms carefully back onto the windscreen. Changing the wiper blade for the rear window —When lifting a wiper arm, hold it only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. —Lift and fold back the wiper arm.
- Page 395 → Fig. 2 —Press and hold the release button → Fig. 2 (arrow ) and pull it off in the direction of the arrow —Tilt the wiper blade in the direction of the wiper arm the same time. You may need to use some force to do this. —Insert a new wiper blade with the same length and design onto the wiper arm against the direction of the arrow. Push it on → Fig. 2 → Fig. 2 until it engages (arrow ). The wiper blade must be in the folded back position (arrow —Carefully place the wiper arm back onto the rear window. WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and severe injuries. ● Always change wiper blades if they are damaged or worn and no longer clean the window properly. NOTICE Damaged or dirty wipers can scratch the windows. ● Do not use any detergents containing solvents, hard sponges and other sharp objects, as they can damage the graphite coating of the wiper blades during cleaning. ● Do not use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows. Wax deposits on the windscreen and rear window could cause the wiper blades to rub. Remove wax residue using a special cleaning product or cleaning cloths. Introduction to the topic Before changing a bulb, check whether a bulb or LED light unit has failed. You can normally change bulbs yourself. If the exterior lighting is realised using LED technology, depending on model and vehicle equipment, it is not possible for you to change the LED light units or individual LEDs yourself. If individual LEDs fail, this may be an indication that more LEDs are on the point of failure. In this case, have the LED light units checked and renewed if necessary at a qualified workshop. It may be illegal to drive with faulty exterior lights. Additional bulb specifications Some bulbs in headlights or in tail light clusters might have factory specifications that are different to standard bulbs. The designation is inscribed on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base. WARNING Accidents can occur if roads are not sufficiently illuminated and other road users have difficulty seeing the vehicle, or cannot see it at all.
- Page 396 Checklist “Information on changing bulbs” Checklist Always carry out the following actions for changing a bulb in the given order → 1. Park the vehicle on a firm and level surface at a safe distance from the flow of traffic. (→ Electronic parking brake) 2. Switch on the electronic parking brake 3. Switch off the lights (→ Dipped beam) (→ Turn signals) 4. Move the turn signal and main beam lever to neutral position (→ Automatic gearbox) 5. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever to position P (→ Switching off the engine) 6. Stop the engine and remove the vehicle key from the ignition 7. Manual gearbox: select a gear (→ Manual gearbox) (→ Orientation lighting) 8. Allow the orientation lighting to go out 9. Leave the defective bulbs to cool down. (→ Fuses) 10. Check to see if a fuse has visibly blown 11. Follow the instructions to change the affected bulb → . Always replace bulbs with identical bulbs of the same type. The designation is inscribed on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base. 12. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with unprotected fingers. When switched on, the heat of the bulb would cause the remaining fingerprint to evaporate and be deposited on the reflector. This will impair the light output of the headlight.
- Page 397 Changing bulbs in the headlights (halogen bulbs) Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: rear view of the left headlight. The headlight does not need to be removed when changing bulbs. Changing bulb for dipped beam The actions should only be carried out in the specified order: (→ Exterior lighting) 1. Observe and follow the instructions on the checklist 2. Open the bonnet (→ In the engine compartment) → Fig. 1 3. Pull off rubber cover from the back of the headlight. Depending on the version, a hard plastic cover may be fitted here. Turn the cover anti-clockwise and remove it. 4. Turn the bulb holder in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go and carefully pull it out to the rear along with the bulb. 5. Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. 6. Insert the bulb holder into the headlight and turn it in the opposite direction to the arrow as far as it will go. → Fig. 1 7. Fit the rubber cover or hard plastic cover and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. (→ In the engine compartment) 8. Close the bonnet Changing bulb for main beam The actions should only be carried out in the specified order: (→ Exterior lighting) 1. Observe and follow the instructions on the checklist (→ In the engine compartment) 2. Open the bonnet 3. Pull off rubber cover → Fig. 1 from the back of the headlight. Depending on the version, a hard plastic cover may be fitted here. Turn the cover anti-clockwise and remove it.
- Page 398 The illustrations show the left-hand headlight. The right-hand headlight is a mirror image of the one shown. Changing bulbs in the front bumper (fog lights) Fig. 1 In the front bumper on the right: removing the fog light. A suitable screwdriver is needed to change the bulbs. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order: (→ Exterior lighting) 1. Observe and follow the instructions in the checklist 2. Take the puller from the toolkit and insert it in the opening in the cover → Fig. 1 . Pull the cover off forwards in the (→ Vehicle toolkit) direction of the arrow → Fig. 1 (→ Vehicle toolkit) 3. Unscrew the securing screws with the screwdriver 4. Pull the headlight out of the bumper towards the outside of the vehicle. 5. Release the connector and pull it off. 6. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise as far as it will go and pull it out to the rear together with the bulb. 7. Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. 8. Insert the bulb holder into the headlight and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. 9. Connect the connector to the bulb holder. The connector must audibly click into place. 10. Push the headlight from the outside into the openings and insert into the bumper. → Fig. 1 11. Screw tight the securing screws with the screwdriver. →...
- Page 399 Changing bulbs in the front bumper (turn signal) Fig. 1 In the front bumper on the right: changing a turn signal bulb. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order: (→ Exterior lighting) 1. Observe and follow the instructions in the checklist 2. Turn the steering so that the wheel on the affected side of the vehicle is pointing to the middle of the vehicle. If necessary, start the engine to do this. Then stop the engine again and remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. → Fig. 1 3. Turn the cover in the wheel housing liner in the direction of the arrow and remove it → Fig. 1 4. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise as far as it will go (arrow) and pull it out to the rear together with the bulb. 5. Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. → 6. Insert the bulb holder into the headlight and turn it clockwise as far as it will go → Fig. 1 7. Fit the cover in the wheel housing liner and lock it in position. NOTICE Make sure that the electrical connection and the bulb holder are seated properly on the headlight housing in order to prevent damage to the electrical system caused by water entering the system.
- Page 400 Introduction to the topic At the time of publication we are unable to provide an complete overview of the locations of the fuses for the electrical consumers. This is because the vehicle is under constant development, because fuses are assigned differently depending on the vehicle equipment level and because several electrical consumers may use a single fuse. You can obtain further information about the fuse assignment from a Volkswagen dealership. Several electrical consumers can share a single fuse. Conversely, a single consumer could have more than one fuse. Therefore fuses should only be replaced when the cause of the fault has been rectified. If a new fuse blows again shortly after fitting, have the electrical system checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible. WARNING High voltages in the electrical system can cause electric shocks, serious burns and death. ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. ● Avoid causing short circuits in the electrical system. WARNING Using unsuitable or repaired fuses and bridging an electrical circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injuries. ● Never fit fuses that have a higher fuse rating. Fuses must always be replaced by a new fuse with the same amp rating (same colour and markings) and size. ● Never repair a fuse. ● Never use a metal strip, paper clip or similar objects to replace a fuse. NOTICE ● To avoid damage to the electrical system in the vehicle, always switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical consumers and remove the vehicle key from the ignition before changing a fuse. ● You can damage another location in the electrical system by using a fuse with a higher amp rating. ● Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in the fuse boxes can damage the electrical system. ● Remove the covers for the fuse boxes carefully and install them again properly so as to avoid damage to the vehicle. There are other fuses in the vehicle in addition to those described in this chapter. These should be changed only by a qualified workshop.
- Page 401 Fuses in the engine compartment Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: cover 1 of the fuse box including plastic pliers 2 . Opening the fuse box in the engine compartment (→ In the engine compartment) —Open the bonnet → Fig. 1 → Fig. 1 to release the fuse box cover —Press the catches in the direction of the arrow —Lift off the cover. —To install , position the cover on the fuse box and press it down until the cover audibly clicks into place on both sides. → Fig. 1 Plastic pliers may be located on the inside of the fuse box cover to pull out fuses...
- Page 402 Fuse tables for fuses in the engine compartment Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: fuse locations. The table shows the fuse locations of the electrical consumers relevant for the driver. The first column in the table contains the location. The other columns contain the fuse types, the amp rating and the consumer protected by the fuse. Depending on the market and specification of your vehicle, the fuse numbers and locations may differ to those given in the table. If necessary, ask your Volkswagen dealership for the exact fuse assignment. → Fig. 1 Fuse location 7.5 amps, ATO , brake light sensor. ® 40 amps, cartridge fuse, windscreen heating. 15 amps, ATO , horn. ® 30 amps, ATO , front wipers. ® 20 amps, ATO , auxiliary heater. ® Fuses in the dash panel...
- Page 403 Fuses in the dash panel Fig. 1 Dash panel on the driver side: fuse box cover. Fig. 2 Fuse box cover in the dash panel: right-hand drive vehicle, on the front passenger side. Left-hand drive vehicle: opening the fuse box in the dash panel → Fig. 1 —Reach behind the cover and pull off in the direction of the arrow —To install : align the cover on the opposite side and fold it closed in the opposite direction to the arrow until you hear it engage. Right-hand drive vehicle: opening the fuse box in the dash panel —Open the glove box and empty if necessary. → Fig. 2 —Push damper element upwards into the opening of the holder and pull out to the side → Fig. 2 —Push catches upwards in the direction of the arrow at the same time open the stowage compartment further —To install : move the stowage compartment into position. Insert the damper element into the opening in the holder and slide upwards until it engages audibly. Carefully push the stowage compartment forwards beyond the resistance of the catches → Fig. 2...
- Page 404 Fuse table for fuses in the dash panel Fig. 1 In the dash panel: fuse assignment. The table shows the fuse locations of the electrical consumers relevant for the driver. The first column in the table contains the location. The other columns contain the fuse types, the amp rating and the consumer protected by the fuse. Depending on the market and specification of your vehicle, the fuse numbers and locations may differ to those given in the table. If necessary, ask your Volkswagen dealership for the exact fuse assignment. → Fig. 1 Fuse location 7.5 amps, MINI , anti-theft alarm. ® 10 amps, MINI , air conditioning system control panel or heating and fresh air system, rear window heating relay. ® 7.5 amps, MINI , light switch (dipped beam), rain and light sensor, electronic parking brake. ® 7.5 amps, MINI , display, Infotainment system control panel. ® 40 amps, ATO , left exterior lighting. ®...
- Page 405 20 amps, ATO , Infotainment system. ® 40 amps, ATO , blower regulator. ® 7.5 amps, MINI , telephone. ® 20 amps, cartridge fuse electric glass roof. 40 amps, ATO , right exterior lighting. ® 30 amps, ATO , seat heating. ® 30 amps, ATO , interior lighting. ® 20 amps, ATO ® , cigarette lighter, sockets. 40 amps, ATO , central locking. ® 15 amps, ATO , rear window wiper. ® 25 amps, ATO , rear seat heating. ® 30 amps, ATO , rear window heating. ® Fuse locations for vehicles with factory-fitted towing bracket → Fig. 1 15 amps, ATO , trailer charging cable. ®...
- Page 406 25 amps, ATO , left trailer control unit. ® 25 amps, ATO , right trailer control unit. ® 15 amps, ATO , trailer control unit. ® Electric windows and electrically adjustable seats may be protected by circuit breakers which switch on again automatically a few seconds after the overload, e.g. frozen windows, has been rectified. Changing blown fuses Fig. 1 Blown fuse (illustration). Fig. 2 Removing or inserting fuse with plastic pliers (illustration). Fuse types ® —Standard flat blade fuse (ATO ® —Small flat blade fuse (MINI —Cartridge fuse.
- Page 407 Colour coding of fuses Fuses (ATO - MINI - MAXI) Colour Amp rating Black 1 amps Purple 3 amps Orange 5 amps Brown 7.5 amps 10 amps Blue 15 amps Yellow 20 amps White or clear 25 amps Green 30 amps Light green 40 amps Fuses (cartridge) Blue 20 amps...
- Page 408 Pink 30 amps Green 40 amps 50 amps Yellow 60 amps Preparations —Switch off the ignition, the lights and all electrical consumers. (→ Fuses) —Open the appropriate fuse box Detecting a blown fuse —Shine a torch onto the fuse. This will help you to spot the blown fuse more easily. —If a flat blade fuse (ATO , MINI ) has blown, this can be recognised from the top and side through the transparent housing ® ® → Fig. 1 due to the melted metal strip —If a cartridge fuse has blown, the melted metal strip can be recognised from the top through the transparent housing → Fig. 1 Changing fuses —If applicable, take the plastic pliers out of the fuse box cover. → Fig. 2 or → Fig. 2 —Use plastic pliers suitable for the fuse design. Slide them onto the fuse from the side —Remove the fuse. —If the fuse has blown, replace it with a new fuse of the same amp rating (same colour and same markings) and same size → —Once the new fuse is inserted, put the plastic pliers back in the cover. —Insert the cover again or close the fuse box cover.
- Page 409 WARNING Using the jump leads incorrectly or completing the jump start procedure incorrectly can cause the 12-volt vehicle battery to explode, which can lead to severe injuries. Please note the following in order to reduce the risk of the 12-volt vehicle battery exploding: ● All work on the 12-volt vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause serious chemical burns, fire or electric shocks. Always read the warnings and safety information before carrying out any kind of work on the 12-volt vehicle battery (→ 12-volt vehicle battery) ● The vehicle battery providing assistance must have the same voltage ( 12 volts) and approximately the same capacity as the flat 12-volt vehicle battery (see label on battery). ● Never charge a 12-volt vehicle battery which is frozen or has been frozen. Discharged 12-volt vehicle batteries can already freeze at temperatures of around 0°C (+32°F). ● The 12-volt vehicle battery must be replaced if it is frozen or has ever been frozen. ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the 12-volt vehicle battery is jump started. Always keep fire, sparks, naked flames and lit cigarettes away from the 12-volt vehicle battery. Never use a mobile telephone when the jump leads are being connected or disconnected. ● Position the jump leads so that they never come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. ● Never confuse the negative and positive terminals or connect the jump leads incorrectly. ● Observe the jump lead manufacturer's instructions. NOTICE Please note the following in order to avoid considerable damage to the vehicle electrical system: ● A short circuit can be caused if the jump leads are wrongly connected. ● Use only jump leads with fully insulated terminal clamps. ● The vehicles must not touch each other, as any contact could mean that electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. NOTICE Tow-starting the vehicle can cause damage. Jump-start connection point (earth connection) Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: jump-start connection point (earth connection).
- Page 410 Jump starting the vehicle Fig. 1 How to connect the jump leads. 1 Vehicle with discharged 12-volt vehicle battery that is being jump-started. 2 Vehicle with 12-volt vehicle battery that is supplying power and jump-starting the other vehicle. 3 Suitable earth connection: preferably the jump lead connection point ( earth connection), a solid metal part which is securely bolted onto the cylinder block, or the cylinder block itself. The discharged 12-volt vehicle battery must be properly connected to the vehicle electrical system. The vehicles must not be touching each other. Otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. Ensure that the battery clamps have good metal-to-metal contact with the battery terminals. If the engine does not start immediately, pause the jump starting process after 10 seconds and try again after about a minute. If the engine still does not start, seek expert assistance. Attaching the jump leads → Fig. 1 The jump leads should be connected only in the order A – B – C – D The black jump lead should never be connected to the negative terminal – on the 12-volt vehicle battery. Connecting the lead to the negative terminal can cause incorrect condition evaluation of the 12-volt vehicle battery in the vehicle electronics. —Switch off the ignition in both vehicles . (→ 12-volt vehicle battery) —Open the cover on the 12-volt vehicle battery in the engine compartment, if a cover is installed —Connect one end of the red jump lead A to the positive terminal + of the battery on the vehicle with the discharged 12-volt → Fig. 1 → Jump starting the vehicle vehicle battery —Connect the other end of the red jump lead B to the positive terminal + of the vehicle battery providing assistance → Fig. 1 —Connect one end of the black jump lead C preferably to a suitable jump start connection point ( earth connection) or otherwise to a solid metal part that is securely bolted onto the cylinder block, or to the cylinder block itself of the vehicle...
- Page 411 Starting the engine —Start the engine of the vehicle providing assistance and let it run at idle. —Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged 12-volt vehicle battery and wait two or three minutes until the engine is running “smoothly”. Removing the jump leads —Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on. —Turn on the blower of the air conditioning system or the heating and fresh air system and the rear window heating in the vehicle with the discharged 12-volt vehicle battery. This helps to minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected. → Fig. 1 —When the engines are running, the jump leads should be removed only in the order D – C – B – A —Close the battery cover as required. —Go to a qualified workshop and have the 12-volt vehicle battery checked. WARNING Jump starting the vehicle incorrectly can cause the 12-volt vehicle battery to explode, which can lead to serious injuries. Please note the following in order to reduce the risk of the 12-volt vehicle battery exploding: ● All work on the 12-volt vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause serious chemical burns, fire or electric shocks. Always read the warnings and safety information before carrying out any kind of work on the 12-volt vehicle battery (→ 12-volt vehicle battery) ● Always wear suitable eye protection and gloves and never lean over the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Attach the connecting cables in the correct order – the positive cable first, followed by the negative cable. ● Never connect the negative cable to parts of the fuel system or to the brake lines. ● The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch each other. The jump lead attached to the positive terminal on the 12-volt vehicle battery must not touch electrically conductive parts of the vehicle. ● Check the battery window on the 12-volt vehicle battery, using a torch if necessary. If it is light yellow or colourless, do not jump start the vehicle. Seek expert assistance. ● Avoid electrostatic discharge in the vicinity of the 12-volt vehicle battery. The explosive gas emitted from the 12-volt vehicle battery could be ignited by sparks. ● Do not use jump leads if the 12-volt vehicle battery is damaged or if it is frozen or has been frozen. NOTICE Once the vehicle has been successfully jump-started, go to a qualified workshop and have the 12-volt vehicle battery checked.
- Page 412 Tow-rope, tow-bar It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. Use a tow-rope only if you do not have a tow-bar. The tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the strain on both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic material. Towing with a breakdown truck If one of your vehicle’s axles is to be raised for towing, then which axle depends on the gearbox and drive combination. Only the following axles must be used: Front-wheel drive: Manual gearbox Front or rear axle Automatic gearbox Front axle All-wheel drive (4Motion): Manual gearbox Front axle Automatic gearbox Front axle R models: the vehicle must not be towed with a raised axle and must be transported standing on all four wheels on a recovery vehicle in case of damage → WARNING If a vehicle is being towed, the vehicle handling and braking efficiency will change significantly. WARNING Never tow a vehicle that has no power supply. ● Never remove the vehicle key from the ignition or switch off the ignition using the starter button during towing. This could cause the mechanical steering column lock (steering lock) or the electronic steering column lock to engage suddenly. You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle. This can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. ● If the power supply of the towed vehicle fails, stop towing immediately and seek expert assistance. NOTICE Towing with a tow-rope or tow-bar can damage the vehicle. ● Tow the vehicle carefully with a tow-rope or tow-bar. ● If possible, have the broken-down vehicle towed by a breakdown truck. NOTICE Towing vehicles with all-wheel drive (4Motion) and sport differential with a raised axle can damage the vehicle. ● Have the broken-down vehicle transported only on a recovery vehicle standing on all four wheels. NOTICE When pushing the vehicle by hand, the tail light clusters, side spoilers on the rear window and large panels can be damaged and the rear spoiler may become detached.
- Page 413 and the rear spoiler. NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged, e.g. the vehicle paintwork, when removing and fitting the cover and towing eye. ● Remove and install the cover and the towing eye carefully so as to avoid damage to the vehicle. NOTICE Use of a towing eye that is not suitable for the vehicle can damage the vehicle. ● Always use the towing eye supplied in the vehicle toolkit of your vehicle or a towing eye that is suitable for the vehicle for towing. Notes on towing It is still possible to activate the turn signals in a vehicle that is being towed, even if the hazard warning lights are switched on. To do this, operate the turn signal and main beam lever in the required direction while the ignition is switched on. The hazard warning lights will not flash while the turn signal is being used. The hazard warning lights will start flashing again automatically as soon as the turn signal and main beam lever is moved back to the neutral position. In which situations may the vehicle not be towed? Do not have the vehicle towed in the following situations: —The vehicle's gearbox is damaged or does not contain any lubricant. —The 12-volt vehicle battery is discharged. In vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system K eyless Access if the vehicle battery is flat, the steering then remains locked and the parking brake and steering column lock cannot be disengaged. —The distance to be towed is further than 50 km (30 miles). —If the steering function or the operating clearance of the wheels cannot be ensured after an accident. If the vehicle cannot be towed on its own wheels due to one of the above conditions, seek expert assistance and have the vehicle transported on a recovery vehicle if necessary.
- Page 414 Towing Preparations (→ Tow-starting or towing) —Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the mounting points provided —Make sure that the tow-rope is not twisted. Otherwise a towing eye can become unscrewed during towing. —Switch on the ignition and hazard warning lights on both vehicles. However, observe any regulations to the contrary. —Observe the instructions for towing in the vehicle wallet of the other vehicle. Pulling vehicle (front) —The tow-rope must be taut before you drive off properly. —Accelerate with particular care. —Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: —Engage the clutch particularly gently when driving off. Pulled vehicle (rear) —Make sure that the ignition is switched on so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that you can indicate, sound the horn and operate the wipers if necessary. —The brake servo and power steering function only when the engine is running. Otherwise you must press the brake pedal with significantly more force and also use more effort for steering. —Release the electronic parking brake. —Make sure that the tow-rope is always taut. —Put the gearbox in neutral or select the selector lever position N. NOTICE The vehicle can be towed only if the 12-volt vehicle battery is adequately charged, so that the electronic parking brake and the steering column lock can be released. If the power supply fails or if there are faults in the electrical system, you may need to use jump leads to start the engine in order to release the electronic parking brake and the steering column lock.
- Page 415 Fitting the front towing eye (version 1) Fig. 1 In the front bumper on the right: removing the cover. Fig. 2 In the front bumper on the right: removing the cover. NOTICE Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mounting for the towing eye is located behind the cover. Before towing, check whether the mounting with screw thread is available for the towing eye. If this is not the case, obtain technical assistance and have the vehicle transported on a recovery vehicle if necessary. The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle. (→ Tow-starting or towing) Comply with the notes on towing Fitting the towing eye at front (→ Vehicle toolkit) —Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment → Fig. 1 —Press at the side of the cover (arrow) to release the cover —Pull the cover forwards to remove it and leave it to hang from the vehicle. → Fig. 2 → and tighten as far as it will go . Use a suitable object to —Turn the towing eye clockwise into the mounting screw the towing eye fully and securely into the mounting. —After you have finished towing, remove the towing eye by unscrewing it a nticlockwise. —Insert the cap in the respective recess and press in until it engages. —Clean the towing eye if necessary and place it back in the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment. NOTICE...
- Page 416 The towing eye must always be screwed fully and securely into the mounting. Otherwise, the towing eye can be wrenched out of the mounting when the vehicle is being tow-started or towed. Fitting the front towing eye (version 2) Fig. 1 In the front bumper on the right: removing the cover. Fig. 2 In the front bumper on the right: screwing in the towing eye. NOTICE Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mounting for the towing eye is located behind the cover. Before towing, check whether the mounting with screw thread is available for the towing eye. If this is not the case, obtain technical assistance and have the vehicle transported on a recovery vehicle if necessary. The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle. (→ Tow-starting or towing) Comply with the notes on towing Fitting the towing eye at front (→ Vehicle toolkit) —Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment → Fig. 1 —Press at the bottom of the cover (arrow) to release the cover —Pull the cover forwards to remove it and leave it to hang from the vehicle. → Fig. 2 → and tighten as far as it will go . Use a suitable object to —Turn the towing eye clockwise into the mounting screw the towing eye fully and securely into the mounting. —After you have finished towing, remove the towing eye by unscrewing it a nticlockwise. —Insert the cap in the respective recess and press in until it engages. —Clean the towing eye if necessary and place it back in the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment. NOTICE The towing eye must always be screwed fully and securely into the mounting. Otherwise, the towing eye can be wrenched out of the mounting when the vehicle is being tow-started or towed.
- Page 417 Fitting the rear towing eye (version 2) Fig. 1 On the right-hand side of the rear bumper: removing the cover. Fig. 2 On the right-hand side of the rear bumper: screwed-in towing eye. NOTICE Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mounting for the towing eye is located behind the cover. Before towing, check whether the mounting with screw thread is available for the towing eye. If this is not the case, obtain technical assistance and have the vehicle transported on a recovery vehicle if necessary. The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle. In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket there is no mounting for the screw-in towing eye behind the cover. In order to tow the vehicle, use the ball coupling. You will first have to swivel it out or fit it . (→ Tow-starting or towing) Comply with the notes on towing Fitting the rear towing eye (→ Vehicle toolkit) —Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment → Fig. 1 —Push the upper part of the cover in the direction of the arrow to release the cover —Remove the cover and leave it hanging from the vehicle. → Fig. 2 → . Use a suitable object to —Turn the towing eye clockwise into the mounting and tighten as far as it will go screw the towing eye fully and securely into the mounting. —After you have finished towing, remove the towing eye by unscrewing it a nticlockwise. —Insert the cap in the respective recess and press in until it engages. —Clean the towing eye if necessary and place it back in the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment. NOTICE ● The towing eye must always be screwed fully and securely into the mounting. Otherwise, the towing eye can be wrenched out of the mounting when the vehicle is being tow-started or towed. ● Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket can be used to tow other vehicles only with a tow-bar that is specially designed to be fitted to a ball coupling. If you use an unsuitable tow-bar, the ball coupling and the vehicle could be damaged. You should use a tow-rope instead.
- Page 418 Fitting the rear towing eye (version 1) Fig. 1 On the right-hand side of the rear bumper: removing the cover. Fig. 2 On the right-hand side of the rear bumper: screwed-in towing eye. NOTICE Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mounting for the towing eye is located behind the cover. Before towing, check whether the mounting with screw thread is available for the towing eye. If this is not the case, obtain technical assistance and have the vehicle transported on a recovery vehicle if necessary. The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle. In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket there is no mounting for the screw-in towing eye behind the cover. In order to tow the vehicle, use the ball coupling. You will first have to swivel it out or fit it . (→ Tow-starting or towing) Comply with the notes on towing Fitting the rear towing eye (→ Vehicle toolkit) —Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment → Fig. 1 —Push the side area of the cover in the direction of the arrow to release the cover —Remove the cover and leave it hanging from the vehicle. → Fig. 2 → . Use a suitable object to —Turn the towing eye clockwise into the mounting and tighten as far as it will go screw the towing eye fully and securely into the mounting. —After you have finished towing, remove the towing eye by unscrewing it a nticlockwise. —Insert the cap in the respective recess and press in until it engages. —Clean the towing eye if necessary and place it back in the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment.
- Page 419 NOTICE ● The towing eye must always be screwed fully and securely into the mounting. Otherwise, the towing eye can be wrenched out of the mounting when the vehicle is being tow-started or towed. ● Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket can be used to tow other vehicles only with a tow-bar that is specially designed to be fitted to a ball coupling. If you use an unsuitable tow-bar, the ball coupling and the vehicle could be damaged. You should use a tow-rope instead. Safety notes for working in the engine compartment The engine compartment of a motor vehicle is a hazardous area. You should only carry out work in the engine compartment if you know exactly how to perform the required tasks, are aware of the general safety procedures and have access to the → Safety correct equipment, service fluids and suitable tools. Failing to carry out work correctly can cause serious injuries notes for working in the engine compartment . The work should be carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Always park the vehicle on a level and stable surface before carrying out any work in the engine compartment. WARNING Unintentional vehicle movements during service work can cause serious injury. ● Never work underneath a vehicle if it is not secured against rolling away. If you are working underneath the vehicle while the wheels are on the ground, the vehicle must be on flat ground, the wheels must be chocked and if necessary the vehicle key must be removed from the ignition lock. ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, use suitable stands to provide extra support for the vehicle. The jack is not sufficient for this task and can fail, which can lead to serious injuries. ● The start/stop system must be manually deactivated. WARNING The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area. Serious injuries can be sustained here. ● The utmost care and attention must be paid when carrying out any work and you must follow the general safety rules. Never take any risks. ● Never perform any work in the engine compartment unless you know exactly how to carry it out. If you are uncertain of what to do, the work should be carried out by a qualified workshop. Serious injuries can result from work that has not been carried out properly. ● Never open or close the bonnet if you see steam or coolant escaping from the bonnet space. Hot steam or hot coolant can cause serious burns. Always wait until you can no longer see or hear steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment.
- Page 420 ● Never touch the electrical wiring and connections of gas discharge bulbs. WARNING There are rotating components in the engine compartment that can cause serious injury. ● Never reach into the radiator fan or into the area of the radiator fan. Touching the rotor blades can result in serious injuries. The fan is temperature-controlled and can start automatically, even when the ignition has been switched off or the vehicle key has been removed from the ignition lock. ● If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the poly V-belt, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. Always be particularly careful. ● Always ensure that no body parts, jewellery, ties, loose items of clothing or long hair can be caught up in rotating engine components. Before starting work, remove any jewellery and ties, tie up long hair and pull clothes in tightly to avoid them getting caught in engine parts. ● Always take due care and attention when depressing the accelerator. The vehicle could start moving even if the electronic parking brake is switched on. ● Always ensure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment. Any forgotten items can cause malfunctions, engine damage and fires. WARNING Additional insulating materials such as blankets in the engine compartment could disrupt the operation of the engine, start fires and lead to severe injuries. ● Never cover the engine with blankets or other insulating materials. WARNING Service fluids and some materials in the engine compartment are highly flammable and can cause fires and serious injuries! ● Never smoke in the vicinity of the engine compartment. ● Never work near naked flames or sparks. ● Never spill service fluids onto the engine. They could ignite on hot engine components and thus cause injuries. ● Please note the following when carrying out any work on the fuel system or the electrical system: ● Always disconnect the 12-volt vehicle battery. Ensure that the vehicle is unlocked when the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected as otherwise the anti-theft alarm will be activated. ●...
- Page 421 8. Always keep other persons away from the engine compartment. 9. Secure the vehicle against rolling away. WARNING Ignoring any of the items on this important safety checklist can lead to severe injuries. ● Always follow the instructions in the checklist and observe the general safety procedures. Opening and closing the bonnet Fig. 1 In the footwell on the driver side: bonnet release lever (schematic diagram). Fig. 2 Above the radiator grille: bonnet control lever. Fig. 3 In the engine compartment: bonnet stay in the holder.
- Page 422 Fig. 4 On the bonnet: holder for bonnet stay (schematic diagram). Opening the bonnet → Fig. 1 . The bonnet is released from the lock —Open the driver door and pull the release lever in the direction of arrow → Opening and closing the bonnet carrier catch by spring force → Fig. 2 to fully open the —Raise the bonnet slightly and at the same time press the control lever in the direction of arrow bonnet. → Fig. 3 → Fig. 4 and push it into the opening —Take the bonnet stay in the direction of arrow out of its holder Closing the bonnet —Lift the bonnet slightly and hold. → Fig. 3 and push it into its holder → Fig. 2 —Unhook the bonnet stay from the opening —Let the bonnet drop into the catch from a height of about 20 cm ( 8 in) – do not press it down! If the bonnet has not closed properly, open it once more and then close it again. → The bonnet is flush with the body parts around it when it is closed properly The bonnet is no longer highlighted in the instrument cluster display (→ In the engine compartment) or the display goes out. WARNING If the bonnet is not closed properly, it can open suddenly while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● After closing bonnet, always check that the catch is properly engaged in the lock carrier. ●...
- Page 423 Display Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: the bonnet is open or not closed properly (illustration). → Fig. 1 A symbol on the instrument cluster display indicates if the bonnet is open or is not closed properly Do not drive on! If necessary, lift the bonnet and then close it again. This symbol is also visible when the ignition is switched off and will go out a few seconds after the vehicle has been locked when all doors are closed. WARNING Failure to observe warnings can cause your vehicle to break down in traffic, which can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Never ignore any warnings. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. The symbol can differ depending on the version of the instrument cluster.
- Page 424 Service fluids and consumables All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant and batteries, are being constantly developed. This also applies to engine oils in the case of combustion engines. For this reason, service fluids and consumables should be replaced at a qualified workshop. Volkswagen dealerships are kept up to date on all changes. WARNING Unsuitable service fluids and consumables, and the incorrect use of these fluids and consumables, can cause accidents, serious injuries, burns or poisoning. ● Service fluids must be kept in their original sealed container. ● Never store service fluids in empty food containers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers could drink them. ● Keep children away from all service fluids and consumables. ● Always read and follow the information and warnings on the service fluid packaging. ● When using products that give off harmful fumes, always work outdoors or in a well-ventilated area. NOTICE ● Only use suitable service fluids for refilling. Never use the wrong service fluid. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious malfunctions and engine damage. Leaking service fluids can pollute the environment. Spilt service fluids must be collected in suitable containers and disposed of properly and in an environmentally responsible way.
- Page 425 Washer fluid Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: cap of washer fluid reservoir. The washer fluid level should be checked regularly and refilled as necessary. There is a strainer in the filler throat of the washer fluid reservoir. The strainer keeps large dirt particles away from the washer jets when refilling. The strainer should only be removed for cleaning. If the strainer is damaged or is not present when refilling, dirt particles can enter the system and block the washer jets. (→ In the engine compartment) —Open the bonnet → Fig. 1 —The washer fluid reservoir is identified by the symbol on the cap —Check whether there is enough washer fluid in the reservoir. → —To top up, mix clean water ( not distilled water) with a commercially available washer fluid . Observe the mixture instructions on the packaging. → —At low outside temperatures, add a special anti-freeze agent so that the fluid cannot freeze The filling quantity of the washer fluid reservoir is approx. 3.0–7.5 litres (3.1–7.9 quarts) depending on the vehicle and equipment. WARNING Never mix coolant additive or other unsuitable additives into the windscreen washer fluid. These may leave an oily film on the window, considerably restricting the field of vision. NOTICE ● Never mix suitable cleaning agents with other cleaning agents. This can cause the ingredients to separate and block the washer jets.
- Page 426 Introduction to the topic Engine oils are matched to the requirements of the engines, exhaust purification systems and fuel quality. Due to the way in which a combustion engine works, engine oil always comes into contact with combustion residues and fuel, which has an effect on the ageing process of the oil. The correct engine oil is important for the function and service life of the engine. A special multigrade high-lubricity oil has been filled at the factory and this can normally be used as an all-season oil. Volkswagen recommends having engine oil changes carried out by a Volkswagen dealership. Information on warning and indicator lamps that light up can be found in the troubleshooting sections at the end of the chapter (→ Engine oil) WARNING Incorrect handling of engine oil can cause serious burns and other injuries. ● Always wear eye protection when handling engine oil. ● Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of the reach of children. ● Engine oil must be kept closed in its original container. This also applies to used oil until it is disposed of. ● Regular contact with engine oil can damage the skin. Skin that has been in contact with engine oil should be washed thoroughly with water and soap. ● Engine oil becomes extremely hot when the engine is running and can scald skin severely. Always allow the engine to cool down. Leaking or spilt engine oil can pollute the environment. Spilt service fluids must be collected and disposed of properly and with respect for the environment.
- Page 427 Engine oil standards Ask a qualified workshop which engine oil is suitable for your vehicle. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Another engine oil can be used in an emergency if the engine oil recommended by the qualified workshop is not available. To avoid damaging the engine, a maximum quantity of 0.5 litres of the following engine oil may be used until the next oil change: —Petrol engines without particulate filter: standards VW 502 00 and ACEA A3/B4 or API SN (API SM) —Petrol engines with particulate filter: standards VW 504 00, VW 508 00 and ACEA C3 or API CJ-4 —Diesel engines without particulate filter: standards VW 505 01 and ACEA A3/B4 or API CJ-4. —Diesel engines with particulate filter: standards VW 507 00, VW 509 00 and ACEA C3 or API CJ-4 Check with a qualified workshop if you are unsure whether your vehicle is equipped with a particulate filter. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Volkswagen recommends Volkswagen genuine oil. NOTICE ● Do not add any additional lubricants to the engine oil. Any damage caused by the use of such additives is not covered by the warranty. ● Volkswagen recommends the use of approved engine oils in accordance with the respectively relevant VW standard. If engine oils that do not meet these quality requirements are used, it can cause engine damage. NOTICE If the vehicle has been filled with engine oils in accordance with the standards VW 502 00, VW 504 00, VW 505 01, VW 507 00, VW 508 00 or VW 509 00, refill with engine oil of the same standard where possible. Failure to do so may result in engine damage.
- Page 428 Changing engine oil (→ Service) The engine oil must be changed on a regular basis. Always observe the service intervals applicable to your vehicle Oil and filter changes require special tools, expert knowledge and correct disposal of old oil. You should therefore always have the engine oil and filter changes performed by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. (→ Service) More details on the service intervals can be found in the chapter on service Additives in the engine oil can cause new engine oil to discolour quickly. This is normal and does not mean that the engine oil should be changed more frequently. WARNING If, in exceptional cases, you have to carry out an oil change yourself, please note the following: ● Always wear eye protection. ● Always allow the engine to cool down completely to avoid burns. ● Keep your arms horizontal when removing the oil drain plug with your fingers to help prevent oil from running down your arm. ● Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be at least large enough to hold the entire quantity of engine oil required for refilling. ● Never store engine oil in empty food containers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers may not know that they contain engine oil. ● Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of the reach of children. Before changing the engine oil, first find out where old oil can be disposed of properly near you. Used oil must be disposed of in an environmentally responsible way. Never dispose of old oil in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and bodies of water.
- Page 429 Engine oil consumption Engine oil consumption can vary from engine to engine and can change during the working life of an engine. Depending on driving style and operating conditions, engine oil consumption can be up to 1 l ( 1 quart) per 2,000 kilometres (1,200 miles). In new vehicles, it is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 kilometres (3,100 miles). The engine oil level must therefore be checked at regular intervals, preferably when refuelling and before long journeys. When the engine is working hard, the engine oil level should be kept within the upper permissible area, for instance during (→ Engine oil) extended motorway trips in summer or when climbing mountain passes...
- Page 430 Checking the engine oil level and refilling engine oil Fig. 1 Engine oil level markings on the oil dipstick (variants). A Engine oil level too high – observe the messages on the instrument cluster display or contact a qualified workshop, if necessary. B Engine oil level OK. C Engine oil level too low – observe any messages on the instrument cluster display and add engine oil if necessary. Fig. 2 In the engine compartment: engine oil filler cap (illustration). Checklist → Carry out the steps in the specified order 1. With the engine at operating temperature, park the vehicle on a level surface to ensure that the engine oil reading is correct. 2. Switch off the engine and wait for at least 5 minutes for the engine oil to flow back into the sump. 3. Open the bonnet (→ In the engine compartment) 4. Identify the engine oil filler cap and oil dipstick. The engine oil filler opening can be recognised by the symbol on the cap → Fig. 2 , and the oil dipstick has a coloured handle → Fig. 1 . If you cannot find the cap and oil dipstick, please contact a qualified workshop. 5. Pull the oil dipstick out of the guide tube and wipe it off with a clean cloth.
- Page 431 7. Pull out the oil dipstick again and read the engine oil level on the dipstick as follows → Fig. 1 Engine oil level is too high. Follow any messages that are shown on the instrument cluster display and go to a qualified workshop. Engine oil level OK. The engine oil can be refilled to the upper limit of this area, e.g. if the engine is operated at high → → loads. Continue with step 8 or 16 → → Engine oil level too low. It is essential to fill engine oil. Continue with step 8 8. After reading off the oil level, push the oil dipstick back into the guide tube as far as it will go. → Fig. 2 9. Unscrew the engine oil filler opening cap 10. Fill engine oil gradually in small quantities (not more than 0.5 l / 0.5 quart). Volkswagen recommends the use of (→ Engine oil) approved engine oils in accordance with the relevant VW standard 11. In order to avoid overfilling, wait for at least one minute after each refill step to allow the engine oil to flow into the sump up to the marking on the engine oil dipstick. 12. Check the engine oil level on the dipstick again before refilling with a further small quantity of engine oil. Never overfill → with engine oil → Fig. 1 13. After filling, the engine oil level should be in the middle of the area . The engine oil level must not be in area → Fig. 1 → Fig. 1 14. If too much engine oil has been added unintentionally and the engine oil level is in area , do not start the engine. Notify a qualified workshop and seek expert assistance if necessary.
- Page 432 —Check the engine oil level and Fault in engine oil system The central warning lamp lights up yellow and the text message O il sensor: please visit workshop. is displayed. Fault in the engine oil system. —Go to a qualified workshop. —Have the engine oil system checked. and Engine oil level too high The central warning lamp lights up yellow and the text message P lease reduce oil level. is displayed. Engine oil level is too high. —Switch off the engine. (→ Engine oil) —Check the engine oil level —Seek expert assistance. Introduction to the topic Do not work on the cooling system unless you are familiar with the task, aware of the general safety procedures and have the correct equipment, service fluids and suitable tools. Failing to carry out work correctly can cause serious injuries → Introduction to the topic . The work should be carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. WARNING Coolant is toxic. ● Coolant should only be kept in sealed original containers in a safe place. ● Never store coolant in empty food containers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers may then drink the coolant. ● Coolant must be stored out of the reach of children. ● The amount of correct coolant additive used must be sufficient for the lowest ambient temperature that you expect the vehicle to be exposed to. ● Coolant can freeze at extremely cold outside temperatures, causing the vehicle to break down. Vehicle occupants with inadequate winter clothing could then freeze to death as the heating will also no longer function.
- Page 433 Coolant and coolant additives can pollute the environment. Spilt service fluids must be collected and disposed of properly and in an environmentally responsible way. Coolant specification The cooling system is filled at the factory with a mixture of specially prepared water and at least 40% coolant additive. Inform yourself at a qualified workshop about which coolant is suitable for your vehicle. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. The proportion of coolant additive must always be at least 40% to protect the cooling system. If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of anti-freeze additive can be increased. However, the percentage of coolant additive should not exceed 55 %, as this would reduce the frost protection and the cooling effect. The coolant additive is dyed purple. The mixture of water and a coolant additive offers anti-freeze protection down to -25°C (- 13°F), protects the alloy parts in the cooling system against corrosion, prevents limescale deposits and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant. When refilling the coolant, a mixture of distilled water and at least 40% of the suitable coolant additive must be used in order → Coolant specification to obtain the optimum corrosion protection WARNING Insufficient anti-freeze in the cooling system can cause the engine to break down and cause serious injuries. ● The amount of correct coolant additive used must be sufficient for the lowest ambient temperature that you expect the vehicle to be exposed to. ● Coolant can freeze at extremely cold outside temperatures, causing the vehicle to break down. Vehicle occupants with inadequate winter clothing could then freeze to death as the heating will also no longer function. NOTICE Never mix genuine coolant additives with other coolants that have not been approved by Volkswagen. ● If the liquid in the coolant expansion tank is not pink (colouring results from mixing the purple coolant additive with distilled water) but for example brown instead of purple, the suitable coolant has been mixed with an unsuitable coolant additive. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious malfunctions or damage to the engine and cooling system. Coolant and coolant additives can pollute the environment. Spilt service fluids must be collected and disposed of properly and with respect for the environment.
- Page 434 Checking the coolant level and refilling coolant Preparations 1. Park the vehicle on a firm and level surface. → 2. Allow the engine to cool down 3. Open the bonnet (→ In the engine compartment) → Fig. 1 4. The coolant expansion tank is identified by the red symbol on the cap Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: coolant expansion tank cap (illustration). WARNING Hot steam and hot coolant can cause serious burns. ● Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant coming out of the engine compartment. Always wait until no escaping steam or coolant can be seen or heard. Hot components can burn the skin. ● The cooling system is under pressure when the engine is hot. Never open the cap of the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. Coolant may spray out and cause serious burns and other injuries. ● Turn the cap slowly and very carefully anticlockwise while exerting some downwards pressure on the cap. ● Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam by placing a large and thick cloth on the cap of the coolant expansion tank. Warning lamp The warning lamp for the coolant will light up if the coolant level is too low. Do not drive on! Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. Seek expert assistance immediately. Check coolant level and add coolant if the coolant level is too low and there is no qualified workshop in the near vicinity. Checking the coolant level Fig. 2 In the engine compartment: markings on the coolant...
- Page 435 → Fig. 2 . The coolant —When the engine is cold, check the coolant level at the side markings of the coolant expansion tank level must be between the marks. —Add coolant if the fluid level in the coolant expansion tank is below the minimum marking “min”. When the engine is warm, the engine coolant level may be slightly above the upper mark. → Checking the coolant level and —Do not add coolant if there is no longer any coolant visible in the coolant expansion tank refilling coolant Adding coolant → → Checking the coolant level and refilling coolant —Unscrew the cap carefully (→ Coolant) —Refill only new coolant according to the Volkswagen specification —Add coolant up to the upper level marking. → Fig. 2 —After adding the coolant, the coolant level must be between the markings on the coolant expansion tank —Screw the cap closed tightly. —Check the coolant level after one day. If the level drops below the minimum marking “min” again, please visit a qualified workshop and have the cooling system checked. —If in an emergency you do not have access to coolant with the required specification, do not use any other coolant additive → Checking the coolant level and refilling coolant NOTICE ● Do not fill coolant above the upper edge of the marked area Excess coolant will otherwise be forced out of the cooling system when it is heated, and this can lead to damage. ● If in an emergency you do not have access to coolant in the required specification, initially add only d istilled water. Then have the correct mixture ratio with the coolant additive restored by a qualified workshop as soon as possible. ● Refill only with distilled water. All other types of water can cause corrosion in the engine due to the chemical components contained in the water. This can also lead to engine failure. If any other type of water is refilled, the fluid in the cooling system should be completely replaced immediately by a qualified workshop.
- Page 436 → Brake Your own safety and that of other road users depends on having a brake system that functions properly at all times fluid Brake fluid specification Volkswagen has developed a brake fluid that has been optimised for the brake system in the vehicle. To ensure the best possible operation of the brake system, Volkswagen expressly recommends the use of brake fluid compliant with VW standard 501 14. Before using a particular brake fluid, check that the specifications printed on the container correspond to the vehicle requirements. Brake fluid that is compliant with VW standard 501 14 is available from Volkswagen dealerships. If this brake fluid is not available and it is necessary to use another high-quality brake fluid instead, brake fluid that is compliant with DIN ISO 4925 or US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6 can be used. Not all brake fluids that are compliant with DIN ISO 4925 or US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6 have the same chemical composition. Some of these brake fluids may contain chemicals that can damage or destroy brake system components over time. Volkswagen therefore recommends the use of brake fluid that is compliant with V W standard 501 14 to ensure sustained optimal operation of the brake system. Brake fluid that is compliant with VW standard 501 14 fulfils the requirements of DIN ISO 4925 or US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6. Brake fluid level → Brake fluid The brake fluid level must always be between the MIN and MAX markings on the brake fluid reservoir The brake fluid level cannot be checked accurately in all models as a flap or engine components may partially conceal the brake fluid container. If the brake fluid level cannot be read exactly, please go to a qualified workshop. The brake fluid level drops slightly during vehicle operation as the brake pads wear and the brakes are automatically adjusted. Brake fluid level The indicator lamp lights up red. Brake fluid level is too low. — Do not drive on! —Check the brake fluid level. If the brake fluid level is too low: —Inform a qualified workshop. —Have the brake system checked.
- Page 437 ● If a brake fluid compliant with VW standard 501 14 is not available, use a high-quality brake fluid compliant with DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 6 or the US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4, but only in exceptional circumstances. ● The refilled brake fluid must be new. WARNING Brake fluid is toxic. ● In order to reduce the risk of poisoning, never use bottles or other containers to store brake fluid. There is always a risk of someone drinking from such containers, even if they are labelled appropriately. ● Brake fluid must always be stored in its original sealed container and kept out of the reach of children. NOTICE Brake fluid that has leaked or been spilt can damage the vehicle paintwork, plastic parts and tyres. Wipe off brake fluid that has leaked or been spilled immediately from all parts of the vehicle. Brake fluid can pollute the environment. Any spilt service fluids must be cleaned up and disposed of properly. Introduction to the topic The 12-volt vehicle battery is a component of the electrical system and supplies the safety-relevant systems of the vehicle with energy. In the scope of maintenance work, the 12-volt vehicle battery is checked and where required, replaced. You should only carry out work on the electrical system if you know exactly how to perform the required tasks, are aware of the general safety procedures and have access to the correct equipment, service fluids and suitable tools. Failing to carry out → work correctly can cause serious injuries . All work should be carried out by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Information on warning and indicator lamps that light up can be found in the troubleshooting sections at the end of the (→ 12-volt vehicle battery) chapter Location of 12-volt vehicle battery The 12-volt vehicle battery is located in the engine compartment. Explanation of the warnings on the 12-volt vehicle battery Always wear eye protection! Electrolyte is very corrosive and caustic. Always wear protective gloves and eye protection! No fire, sparks, naked lights or smoking! A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the 12-volt vehicle battery is charging! Always keep children away from electrolyte and the 12-volt vehicle battery! Always observe the owner's manual! WARNING Any work on the 12-volt vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause serious chemical burns, fire or electric shocks. Always read the following warnings and safety information before carrying out any kind of work:...
- Page 438 ● Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers before carrying out any work on the 12-volt vehicle battery and also disconnect the negative cable from the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Children should always be kept away from electrolyte and the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Always wear eye protection and protective gloves. ● Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the skin and can cause blindness. When working with the 12-volt vehicle battery, ensure that your hands, arms and face in particular are protected from acid spillage. ● Do not smoke during the work, and never work near naked flames or sparks. ● When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid generating sparks and electrostatic charge. ● Never short circuit the battery terminals. ● Never use a damaged 12-volt vehicle battery. It can explode. Damaged 12-volt vehicle batteries must be replaced as soon as possible. ● Never use a frozen 12-volt vehicle battery. Discharged 12-volt vehicle batteries can already freeze at temperatures of around 0°C (+32°F). Frozen 12-volt vehicle batteries must be replaced immediately. NOTICE Do not expose the 12-volt vehicle battery to direct daylight for an extended time. ● The ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing. NOTICE Protect the 12-volt vehicle battery against frost if the vehicle is left standing for extended periods. ● The 12-volt battery can freeze and be destroyed as a result. When you start the engine after the 12-volt battery has been totally discharged or after jump starting, you may find that system settings (time, date, personal convenience settings and programming) have been changed or deleted. Check and correct the settings as necessary once the 12-volt vehicle battery has been sufficiently charged. Checking the electrolyte level of the 12-volt vehicle battery Fig. 1 Battery window on the top of the 12-volt vehicle battery (illustration). The electrolyte level of the 12-volt vehicle battery should be checked regularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older 12-volt vehicle batteries. The 12-volt vehicle battery is otherwise maintenance-free. The electrolyte level of 12-volt vehicle batteries that are marked as cannot be checked for technical reasons. Go to a qualified workshop to have the 12-volt vehicle battery checked.
- Page 439 WARNING Any work on the 12-volt vehicle battery can cause serious chemical burns, explosions and electric shocks. ● Always wear eye protection and protective gloves. ● Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the skin and can cause blindness. When working with the 12-volt vehicle battery, ensure that your hands, arms and face in particular are protected from acid spillage. ● Never tilt the 12-volt vehicle battery. Electrolyte may spill out of the battery vents and cause chemical burns. ● Never open a 12-volt vehicle battery. ● If acid is spilt in your eye or on your skin, rinse immediately for several minutes with cold water. Then consult a doctor immediately. ● If electrolyte is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately. Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connecting the 12-volt vehicle battery If you suspect that the 12-volt vehicle battery is damaged or faulty, go to a qualified workshop and have the 12-volt vehicle battery checked. Charging the 12-volt vehicle battery The 12-volt vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop, as the technology used in factory-fitted 12-volt vehicle batteries requires voltage-limited charging → . Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Replacing the 12-volt vehicle battery The 12-volt vehicle battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its installation location and has special safety features. If a 12-volt vehicle battery has to be replaced, discuss the electromagnetic compatibility, size and necessary servicing, output and safety requirements for the new 12-volt vehicle battery with a Volkswagen dealership before purchase. The ventilation opening of the 12-volt vehicle battery must always be on the negative terminal side: the ventilation opening on the positive terminal side must always be sealed. Only maintenance-free 12-volt vehicle batteries compliant with the standards TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 should be used. These standards must be dated October 2014 or later. Always have the 12-volt vehicle battery replaced by a qualified workshop, as the vehicle electronics must be adapted as part of the replacement process. Only qualified workshops have the technology required to carry out this adjustment correctly. Volkswagen recommends that the 12-volt vehicle battery is replaced by a Volkswagen dealership. Disconnecting the 12-volt vehicle battery Please observe the following if the 12-volt vehicle battery has to be disconnected from the electrical system in the vehicle: —Switch off all electrical consumers and the ignition. —Unlock the vehicle before disconnecting the battery in order to avoid triggering the anti-theft alarm.
- Page 440 → —First disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable Connecting the 12-volt vehicle battery —Switch off all electrical consumers and the ignition before reconnecting the 12-volt vehicle battery. → —First reconnect the positive cable and then the negative cable Various indicator lamps may light up after the 12-volt vehicle battery has been connected and the ignition is switched on. They will go out if you drive a short distance at a speed of approximately 15–20 km/h (10–12 mph). If the indicator lamps remain lit up, the vehicle should be checked by a qualified workshop. If the 12-volt vehicle battery was disconnected for an extended period, the system may not able to calculate or correctly display the time when the next service is due . Observe the maximum permissible service intervals . Vehicles with Keyless Access: : if the ignition cannot be switched on after connecting the 12-volt vehicle battery, lock and unlock the vehicle from the outside. Then try to switch on the ignition again. Please seek expert assistance if the ignition cannot be switched on. Automatic switch-off for electrical consumers The intelligent vehicle electrical system automatically implements a range of measures to prevent the 12-volt vehicle battery from discharging under high loads: —The idling speed is increased so that the alternator provides more electricity. —The performance of large electrical consumers may be reduced or they may be switched off completely. —The power supply to the 12-volt socket and the cigarette lighter may be interrupted temporarily while the engine is being started. The vehicle electrical system cannot always prevent the 12-volt vehicle battery from discharging. For example when the ignition is switched on for an extended period with the engine off, or when the side or parking lights are on when the vehicle is parked for an extended period. 12-volt vehicle battery is discharged —By long standing periods without running the engine, especially if the ignition is switched on. —Through use of electrical consumers when the engine is switched off. —When the auxiliary heater is being used . WARNING Incorrectly securing the battery and using incorrect 12-volt vehicle batteries can cause short circuits, fire and serious injuries. ● Always use maintenance-free and leak-proof 12-volt vehicle batteries that have the same properties, specifications and dimensions as the factory-fitted 12-volt vehicle battery. WARNING A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the 12-volt vehicle battery is being charged. ● 12-volt vehicle batteries should only be charged in well-ventilated spaces. ● Never charge a 12-volt vehicle battery which is frozen or has been frozen. Discharged 12-volt vehicle batteries can already freeze at temperatures of around 0°C (+32°F).
- Page 441 to the cigarette lighter to charge the 12-volt vehicle battery. This can damage the vehicle electrical system. 12-volt vehicle batteries may contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. Dispose of the 12-volt vehicle battery in accordance with the relevant regulations. Electrolyte can pollute the environment. Clean up any service fluid leakages and dispose of them properly. Troubleshooting and Alternator fault The central warning lamp lights up red. The following text message will be displayed: —12 V battery not charging. Stop vehicle. The 12-volt vehicle battery is not charged by the alternator while the vehicle is in motion. —Switch off any electrical consumers that are not required. —Inform a qualified workshop. —Have the electrical system checked. The start/stop system cannot start the engine . and Alternator The central warning lamp lights up yellow. The following text message will be displayed: —12-volt battery weak. Charge by driving. The charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is insufficient. —Charge the 12-volt vehicle battery by driving the vehicle for an extended time. The start/stop system cannot start the engine . and Alternator The central warning lamp lights up yellow. The following text message will be displayed: —Error: Replace 12V battery. Please visit workshop. The 12-volt vehicle battery condition is not OK. —Go to a qualified workshop. —Have the battery checked and replaced if necessary. The start/stop system cannot start the engine .
- Page 442 The following tyre monitoring systems are available for this vehicle: Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator —Monitors various parameters (including rolling circumference) of all four tyres while driving using ABS sensors (indirect measurement). The reference pressure for the tyre monitoring system is the recommended tyre pressure for cold factory-fitted tyres at (→ Tyre pressure) maximum load. The reference pressure corresponds to the information on the tyre pressure sticker If the tyre pressure of all four tyres has been adjusted correctly, the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator must be re-synchronised (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) . This adjusts the reference pressure to the current tyre pressure. WARNING The intelligent tyre monitoring system technology cannot overcome the laws of physics, and functions only within the limits of the system. Incorrect handling of the wheels and tyres can lead to a sudden loss of pressure in the tyres, tread separation and even tyre blow-out. (→ Tyre pressure) ● Check tyre pressures regularly and always maintain the specified tyre pressure value . If the tyre pressure is too low, it is possible that the tyre temperature will increase to such an extent that the tread peels off and the tyre bursts. (→ Tyre pressure) ● Always maintain the correct cold tyre pressure as specified on the tyre pressure sticker ● Check the tyre pressure regularly when the tyres are cold. If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure in the cold tyre to the (→ Tyre pressure) recommended tyre pressure for the tyres installed on your vehicle ● Check your tyres regularly for signs of wear or damage. ● Never exceed the top speed and load permitted for the fitted tyres. If the tyre pressure is too low, this will increase fuel consumption and tyre wear. When new tyres are driven at high speeds for the first time, they can expand slightly and trigger a one-off pressure warning. Old tyres should only be replaced by tyres that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle type. Do not rely solely on the tyre monitoring system. Check your tyres regularly to ensure that they are properly inflated and have no signs of damage, such as punctures, cuts, cracks, and blisters. Remove any objects that become embedded in the tyre tread but have not penetrated into the body of the tyre itself.
- Page 443 Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Functional description The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator uses data from the ABS sensors and other functions to check the speed of rotation and the rolling circumference of the individual wheels. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator does not work if there is a fault in the or ABS (→ Brake support systems) The rolling circumference can change: —If the tyre pressure has been changed. —If the tyre pressure is too low. —If the tyre has structural damage. —If the vehicle is loaded more heavily on one side. —If snow chains have been fitted. —If a temporary spare wheel has been fitted. —If one wheel per axle has been changed. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator may react with a delay or not display anything at all in the event of a sporty driving style, when driving on snow-covered or icy roads or unpaved roads or when driving with snow chains. The tyre monitoring system indicates a change in rolling circumference of the tyres with the warning lamp in the instrument cluster. The recommended tyre pressure for the factory-fitted tyres is indicated on the tyre pressure sticker on the driver's door pillar (→ Tyre pressure) The tyre pressure of all tyres must be checked monthly on the cold tyres and correspond to the vehicle manufacturer's specifications on the tyre pressure sticker. This also applies to the tyre pressure of the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel. If the tyre size of the mounted tyres differs from the specifications on the type plate or tyre pressure sticker, the correct tyre pressure must be determined. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator does not remove the need for regular maintenance and inspection of tyres. The driver is responsible for ensuring the correct tyre pressure is maintained at all times, even if the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator does not give any warning that the tyre pressure is too low. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator can also display a malfunction in conjunction with the warning lamp. If the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator is malfunctioning, the warning lamp lights up for about a minute after the ignition was switched on and then stays continuously lit. If the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator shows a malfunction, tyre pressure cannot be monitored correctly. The malfunctioning of the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator can have various causes, e.g. due to replacing a wheel or tyre. When a wheel or tyre has been replaced, check whether the warning lamp is indicating a system malfunction to ensure that the Tyre Pressure Loss (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) Indicator is functioning properly Synchronising the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator...
- Page 444 After a warning about the tyre pressure being too low, switch the ignition off and then back on again. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator can only then be re-synchronised. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Depending on the version, press the (→ Infotainment system controls and displays) button or function button and open the Vehicle menu in the Infotainment system. OR: press the button or function button, depending on the version. 3. Depending on version, tap the Settings function button. 4. Tap the Tyres function button. 5. Tap the SET function button. 6. When all four tyre pressures correspond to the required values, tap the Confirm function button. OR: to cancel the operation, tap the Cancel function button. The current tyre pressure is not saved and the system will not be re-synchronised. After an extended driving time (at least 20 minutes) with driving at different speeds, the system will automatically learn the new values and monitor them. Troubleshooting for Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Low tyre pressure The indicator lamp lights up yellow. There is a loss of pressure in one or more tyres or the tyre is structurally damaged. — Do not drive on! (→ Tyre pressure) —Check and adjust all tyre pressures —Damaged tyres should be replaced. (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) —Re-synchronise the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator —If the fault persists, go to a qualified workshop. Fault in the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator The indicator lamp flashes for about a minute and then remains lit up in yellow.
- Page 445 ● Always inflate all tyres to the correct tyre pressure before every journey (→ Tyre pressure) ● If the vehicle is driven with insufficient tyre pressure, this results in greater tyre flexing. This could warm up the tyre to such an extent that the tread may separate and the tyre could burst. This could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ● High speeds and overloading of the vehicle may cause the tyres to heat up to such an extent that the tyre bursts, leading you to lose control of the vehicle. ● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehicle will not handle well. ● If the tyre is not flat and it is not necessary to change the wheel immediately, drive at low speed to the nearest qualified workshop and check and correct the tyre pressure (→ Tyre pressure) ● The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator must always be correctly calibrated. Driving on unpaved roads for long periods or a sporty driving style can temporarily deactivate the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator. In the event of a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for about a minute and then light up continuously. However, the indicator lamp will go out when the road conditions or driving style change. Introduction to the topic The tyres are the most heavily loaded and most underestimated parts of a vehicle. Tyres are very important as the narrow tyre surfaces are the only contact between the vehicle and the road. The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style, handling and correct fitting. WARNING New tyres or tyres which are old, worn down or damaged cannot provide full levels of vehicle control and braking efficiency. ● Incorrect handling of wheels and tyres can reduce vehicle safety and cause accidents and serious injuries. ● All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size ( rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern. ● New tyres will have to be run in as they will initially have reduced grip and braking effect. Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km (370 miles) in order to prevent accidents and serious injury. ● Check tyre pressures regularly when the tyres are cold, and always keep to the specified value. If the tyre pressure is too low, it is possible that the tyre temperature will increase to such an extent when driving that the tread peels off and the tyre bursts. ●...
- Page 446 Handling wheels and tyres Fig. 1 Illustration: diagram showing how to swap wheels. The wheels and tyres approved by Volkswagen have been carefully selected. Rotating wheels → Fig. 1 Regularly rotating the wheels as shown in the illustration is recommended to help ensure that tyres wear evenly. All the tyres will then last for about the same time. Volkswagen recommends having the wheels changed by a qualified workshop. Avoiding damage to the wheel rims and tyres —Drive over kerbs and other low obstacles slowly and at right angles so that the two front wheels come into contact with the obstacle at the same time. —Check the tyre pressure regularly. —Regularly check tyres for damage, e.g. holes, slits, punctures or blisters. (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) —Never exceed the maximum speed and load permitted for the tyres that are fitted —Damaged or worn tyres must be replaced immediately . → —Protect the tyres from contact with aggressive substances, including grease, oil, petrol and brake fluid —Replace missing dust caps on the valves immediately. —Remove foreign bodies that have not yet penetrated to the inside of the tyre . (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) —Observe all warnings of the tyre monitoring system Tyres that are more than six years old Tyres age through physical and chemical processes that can impair their function. Tyres that have been stored unused for an extended period of time age more quickly than tyres that are used all the time. Volkswagen recommends replacing tyres that are more than six years old with new tyres. This also applies to tyres which appear to still be in good condition and whose tread depth has not yet reached the minimum value stipulated by legislation → Winter and all-season tyres also largely lose their effectiveness through a geing – regardless of the remaining tread depth. (→ Tyre pressure) The age of each tyre can be determined on the basis of the manufacturing date Storing tyres —Always store tyres in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Do not store tyres mounted on the rim vertically. —Any tyres not fitted on rims should be kept in suitable sleeves to protect against dirt and should be stored vertically...
- Page 447 (standing on the tread). New tyres —Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km (370 miles) with new tyres as the tyres have to be run in . Tyres that have not → → been run in have reduced grip and braking efficiency —All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size, and the same tread pattern. Volkswagen Genuine tyres The vehicle may be fitted with Volkswagen Genuine tyres at the factory. These tyres are marked with the symbol and have been especially matched to this vehicle. When used correctly Volkswagen Genuine tyres meet the highest standards with respect to safety and vehicle handling. Replacing tyres —The vehicle may be fitted with optimised rolling resistance tyres at the factory. Only with these tyres can the indicated fuel (→ Driving consumption values be achieved. Make sure that any new tyres purchased have optimised rolling resistance economically) —Seek advice at a qualified workshop before purchasing new low rolling resistance tyres. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. → —Always replace tyres at least on an axle-by-axle basis —Old tyres should only be replaced by tyres that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle type. —Never use tyres with an effective size that is larger than Volkswagen-approved tyres. Re-synchronising the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator must be re-synchronised each time one or more wheels is changed. This also applies if the (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) wheels have been swapped, e.g. from the front to the rear WARNING Corrosive liquids and other substances can cause visible and invisible damage to the tyres, which can cause the tyre to burst. ● Always keep chemicals, oils, lubricants, fuel, brake fluid and other corrosive substances away from the tyres. WARNING Even if they have not been used, old tyres can suddenly lose pressure or burst, especially at high speeds, and thus cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Avoid using tyres that are more than six years old. If you have no alternative, drive slowly and with extra care at all times. WARNING New tyres will have to be run in as they will initially have reduced grip and braking effect.
- Page 448 Do not damage the valves when fitting different tyres. Never drive without valve caps. This could cause damage to the valves. Old tyres should be disposed of properly and as required by legislation. If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the car - for example in the case of winter tyres or a temporary spare wheel - only use the spare tyre in the event of a breakdown for a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible. Volkswagen-approved tyres are guaranteed to have the dimensions that are suitable for the vehicle. In the case of other tyres, the tyre seller must provide a certificate from the tyre manufacturer stating that the tyre is also suitable for the vehicle. This certificate must be stored in a safe place in the vehicle. Wheel rims and wheel bolts Wheel rims, tyres and wheel bolts are matched to the vehicle type. If different wheel rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the correct length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that the brakes work properly and that the vehicle drives quietly and safely. For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheel rims from other vehicles. This can also apply to wheel rims of the same vehicle type. The tightening torque of the wheel bolts must be checked regularly with a properly functioning torque wrench. (→ Wheel bolts) Wheel bolts The correct wheel bolts must be used for all vehicle types; these bolts must always be tightened with the correct tightening torque (→ Wheel bolts) Wheel rims with bolted rim rings or trim elements Rims with bolted-on rings or trim elements consist of several components. These components are joined together using special bolts. Damaged wheel rims must be replaced and must always be repaired only by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen → recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose Wheel rim identification In some countries, new wheel rims must contain information on certain properties. The following information may be provided on the wheel rim: —Seal of conformity. —Rim size. —Name of manufacturer or brand name. —Date manufactured (month/year). —Country of origin. —Production number. —Raw materials batch number. —Product code. WARNING The use of unsuitable or damaged wheel rims can impair vehicle safety and cause accidents and serious injury.
- Page 449 ● Never loosen the bolts on wheel rims with bolted-on rings. ● All work on wheel rims with bolted-on rings must be carried out by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Tyre pressure Fig. 1 Symbols on the tyre pressure sticker. A Tyre pressure for the tyres on the front axle. B Tyre pressure for the tyres on the rear axle. 1 Note: check the tyre pressure when the tyres are cold. 2 Tyre pressure for partial load. 3 Vehicle-dependent: comfort tyre pressure for partial load. 4 Tyre pressure for full load. 5 Tyre pressure level for the spare wheel, collapsible spare wheel or temporary spare wheel. Fig. 2 On the driver door pillar: tyre pressure sticker (alternatively on the inside of the fuel flap). → Fig. 2 The sticker provides the correct tyre pressure for approved tyres and is located either on the driver door pillar inside the tank flap. The appearance of the sticker may differ between vehicles. It may include additional tyre sizes. The wrong tyre pressure will have a negative effect on the vehicle's response and lead to high levels of wear or even a burst → tyre . The correct tyre pressure is particularly important at high speeds. Comfort tyre pressure → Fig. 1 Depending on the vehicle, the tyre pressure sticker may show details of a comfort tyre pressure . The comfort tyre pressure allows increased driving comfort. Fuel consumption may increase when driving with comfort tyre pressure.
- Page 450 Checking the tyre pressure —Check the tyre pressure at least once a month. —Always check the tyre pressure when the tyres are cold. The specified tyre pressure applies to cold tyres. Tyre pressure is always higher in warm tyres than it is in cold tyres. For this reason, never reduce the pressure in warm tyres to adjust the tyre pressure. → Fig. 1 —Always adjust the tyre pressure to the load level —After adjusting the tyre pressures, always screw the caps onto the valves and observe the information on the tyre monitoring system. —Always use the tyre pressure specified on the sticker. Never exceed the maximum tyre pressure which is given on the sidewall of the tyre WARNING Incorrect tyre pressure may cause the tyre to suddenly lose pressure or burst while the vehicle is in motion. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● If the tyre pressure is too low, it is possible that the tyre temperature will increase to such an extent when driving that the tread detaches and the tyre bursts. ● Excessive speeds and overloading of the vehicle can cause overheating, sudden tyre damage including tyre bursts and detachment of the tread surface, and thus to a loss of control of the vehicle. ● If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres will wear prematurely and the car will not handle well. ● Check tyre pressures regularly, at least once a month, and before every long journey. ● All tyres must have the correct tyre pressure to suit the vehicle load. ● Never reduce excess pressure when the tyres are warm. NOTICE ● When attaching the tyre pressure gauge, ensure that you do not position it at an angle to the valve stem. This can damage the tyre valve. ● Always make sure the valve caps are completely screwed on while driving. Underinflated tyres will result in increased fuel consumption. Tread depth and tread wear indicators Fig. 1 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators. Tread depth Most driving situations require the highest possible tread depth. All tyres should have an even tread depth on at least one axle. This is especially true in wet or wintry road conditions.
- Page 451 ● Worn tyres have considerably less grip, particularly on wet roads, which can cause the vehicle to “float” along the road surface (aquaplaning). ● Worn tyres reduce the possibility of controlling the vehicle well in normal and difficult driving situations and increase braking distance and the risk of skidding. Tyre damage → Damage to tyres and wheel rims is often hidden —If you suspect that a wheel is damaged, slow down immediately and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. —Check the tyres and wheel rims for damage. —Do not drive on if a tyre is damaged. (→ Changing a wheel) . Seek expert assistance for this if necessary. —Changing a damaged wheel (→ Breakdown set) Or: seal damaged wheel with the breakdown set and inflate —If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and cautiously to the next qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Embedded foreign bodies in the tyres —Leave the foreign body in the tyre if it has entered the inner tyre. Foreign bodies that are stuck between the tyre tread blocks can be removed. (→ Changing a wheel) . Seek expert assistance for this if necessary. —Changing a damaged wheel (→ Breakdown set) Or: seal damaged wheel with the breakdown set and inflate —Check and adjust the tyre pressure. —Go to a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Tyre wear The tyre wear is affected by several factors: —Style of driving. —How well the tyres are balanced. —Adjustments made to the running gear. Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear. Wheel imbalance may develop when the vehicle is driven; you will notice this by the nervous steering response. Unbalanced wheels will affect the level of tyre wear. In this case the wheels should be balanced again. Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. The wheel alignment should be checked by a qualified workshop if tyres show excessive wear. WARNING If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side while the vehicle is in motion, this may indicate that one of the...
- Page 452 tyres is damaged. ● Reduce speed immediately and park the vehicle without obstructing traffic. ● Check the tyres and wheel rims for damage. ● Never drive on if tyres or wheel rims are damaged. Seek expert assistance instead. ● If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and cautiously to the next qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Tyre lettering and tyre type Fig. 1 International tyre lettering. → Fig. 1 Tyre lettering (example), meaning Individual tyre designation of the manufacturer. Product name The tyre complies with the legal requirements of the USA Department of Transportation, responsible for tyre safety standards. Tyre identification number (TIN – may be only on the inner side of the wheel) and date of manufacture: JHCO CHWS 2213 Identifier of producing plant and specifications JHCO CHWS of the tyre manufacturer on size and characteristics. 2213 Date of manufacture: 22nd week in 2013. Information for the end user concerning comparative values for specified basic tyres ( standardised test procedure) : Relative life expectancy for the tyre, with reference to a US-specific standard test. Tyres with the specification 280 wear at a rate of 2.8 times more slowly than standard TREADWEAR 280 tyres that have a treadwear value of 100. The performance of tyres is determined by how they are used and can significantly deviate from standard values due to driving style, maintenance, road surface and climatic conditions.
- Page 453 350 KPA (51 psi/3.51 bar) Denotes winter tyres (mud and snow tyres) (→ Winter tyres) . Studded snow tyres are M+S or M/S or labelled with an E after the S . (→ Tread depth and tread wear Indicates the position of the tread wear indicator indicators) Brand name , logo Manufacturer. (→ Handling wheels and tyres) Marking for Volkswagen Genuine tyres Country of manufacture. Made in Germany Country-specific identification for China (China Compulsory Certification). Country-specific identification for Brazil. 023 Indicates conformity with international regulations with the number of the country that granted approval. Approved tyres which comply with ECE regulations are E4 e4 0200477-b identified with E , tyres which comply with EC regulations are identified with e . This is followed by the multiple-digit approval number. Tubeless radial tyre. RADIAL TUBELESS Size designation: Identification for passenger vehicle.
- Page 454 → Fig. 1 Tyre lettering (example), meaning TREAD 4 PLIES Details of the tread components: 1 RAYON + In the example there are 4 plies under the tread surface: 1 ply of rayon ( artificial silk), 2 STEEL + 2 steel belt plies and 1 nylon ply. 1 NYLON The tyre lettering is located on both sides. Certain labels may only be found on one side of the tyre, e.g. tyre identification number and manufacturing date. Any further numbers and letters are internal codes used by the tyre manufacturer or country-specific codes. Low-profile tyres Low-profile tyres have a wider tread surface, larger rim diameter and lower sidewalls than conventional wheel/tyre (→ Handling wheels and tyres) combinations . Low-profile tyres can improve the vehicle's handling and precision. They may however result in a less comfortable ride on uneven road surfaces and tracks. Tyres with directional tread pattern An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. The direction of rotation must be observed in all cases. This guarantees the best possible running characteristics. If, however, the tyre is fitted in the opposite direction to the tread pattern, you must take more care when driving as the tyre is now no longer being used according to its designation. The tyres must be replaced as quickly as possible or be fitted with the tread in the correct direction. Asymmetrical tyres Asymmetrical tyres take into account the differing behaviour of the inner and outer areas of the tread pattern. The sidewalls of asymmetrical tyres are marked to indicate "inside" or "outside". Always observe the correct tyre position on the wheel rim. Tyre load The load index indicates the maximum load capacity of an individual tyre in kilograms (tyre load). Examples: 425 kg 462 kg 487 kg 515 kg 545 kg...
- Page 455 560 kg 615 kg 630 kg 650 kg 690 kg 730 kg 775 kg 800 kg 825 kg 850 kg 875 kg 900 kg Speed index The speed index indicates the maximum permitted speed that may be driven with the tyre. max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
- Page 456 Some tyre manufacturers use the code “ZR” for tyres with a maximum permitted speed of over 240 km/h (149 mph). Maximum load and speed range for tyres Vehicles in the EU and the so-called EU user states are issued an EC Certificate of Conformity. This details the size, diameter and speed range of all tyres approved by Volkswagen for the relevant vehicle type. The type plate shows whether there is an EC Certificate of Conformity for this particular vehicle . —If the type plate has a row marked “Permit” then the vehicle has an EC Certificate of Conformity. —If there is no type plate, or no row marked “Permit” the vehicle does not have an EC Certificate of Conformity.
- Page 457 —Use winter tyres on all four wheels at the same time. —Only use in winter road conditions. —Only use the sizes of tyre that have been approved for the vehicle. —Winter tyres must have the same belt type, size and the same tread pattern. → Winter tyres —Observe the maximum speed permitted by the speed index Speed limitation Winter tyres have a speed limit depending on the speed index (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) You can set a speed warning using the V ehicle settings and the Tyres menus in the Infotainment system. If you use V-rated winter tyres, the speed limits and required tyre pressure are determined by the engine size. You must ask a Volkswagen dealership about the maximum permitted speed and required tyre pressure. All-wheel drive (4MOTION) Thanks to its all-wheel drive, the vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, Volkswagen still recommends that winter tyres or all-year tyres should be fitted on all four wheels in winter, above all because this will give improved braking efficiency . (→ Snow chains) Observe information on snow chains WARNING The improved winter driving characteristics afforded by the winter tyres should not encourage you to take any risks. Exceeding the speed limitation of winter tyres can cause the tyres to fail suddenly and the vehicle to lose control. ● Never disregard the speed limitation of the winter tyres fitted, even if the permissible top speed of the vehicle is higher. ● Never exceed the maximum load capacity of the winter tyres that are fitted. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather and road or traffic conditions. The vehicle handling is better if summer tyres are fitted at temperatures above +7°C (+45°F). The rolling noise is quieter, the tyre wear lower and the energy efficiency higher in this case. (→ Tyre In vehicles with a Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator, the system has to re-synchronise after wheels are changed Pressure Loss Indicator) Volkswagen dealerships can provide details on permissible winter tyre sizes.
- Page 458 Snow chains Please observe legislation and also the maximum permitted speed when driving your vehicle with snow chains. On icy or snow-covered roads, snow chains will improve traction and braking response. Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. They may be fitted only to the following tyre and wheel combinations: T-Roc Tyre size Wheel rim Type of snow chains to use 205/60 R16 6 J x 16 ET 43 Only fine-linked snow chains that add no more than about 1 3.5 mm. T-Roc R Tyre size Wheel rim Type of snow chains to use 215/55 R17 6 J x 17 ET 48 Only fine-linked snow chains that add no more than about 7 mm. Volkswagen recommends that you ask your Volkswagen dealership for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size. → Remove centre wheel trims and rim trim rings before fitting snow chains . For safety reasons, cover caps must then be fitted over the wheel bolts. Caps are available from Volkswagen dealerships. Using snow chains with fitted temporary spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel (→ Spare wheel For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel and temporary spare wheel) —In event of a flat tyre on one of the front wheels, fit the temporary spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel on the rear axle. —Replace the damaged front wheel with the removed rear wheel. Observe the direction of rotation. Volkswagen recommends fitting the snow chains before fitting the wheel. WARNING The use of snow chains that are unsuitable for your vehicle or the incorrect installation of snow chains can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Always use the correct snow chains.
- Page 459 Centre wheel trim Fig. 1 Removing the centre wheel trim by pulling off. The centre wheel trim protects the wheel bolts and must be fitted again after changing the wheel. — To remove: take the puller from the vehicle toolkit (→ Vehicle toolkit) and insert it into a hole (alloy wheel) or fit it on the → Fig. 1 edge (steel wheel) of the trim —Pull off the cover in the direction of the arrow. — To fit: press the centre wheel trim against the rim until you feel it engage. Fig. 2 Removing the centre wheel trim by turning. — To remove: turn the centre wheel trim clockwise or anticlockwise until it is released from the rim. —Reach behind one of the ribs and pull off the centre wheel trim. — To fit: place the centre wheel trim centrally on the rim. —Press the centre wheel trim against the rim until you feel it engage. WARNING Using unsuitable hubcaps, or fitting them incorrectly, can cause accidents and serious injuries. Incorrectly fitted hubcaps can become loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger other road users. ● Do not use damaged hubcaps. ● Always ensure that the airflow to cool the brakes is not restricted or reduced. This also applies if hubcaps are retrofitted. If the airflow is not sufficient, the braking distance could increase significantly.
- Page 460 Wheel cover Removing wheel covers Fig. 1 Removing the wheel cover. The wheel cover protects the wheel bolts and must be fitted again after changing the wheel. (→ Vehicle toolkit) —Take the puller from the vehicle toolkit —Insert the puller into one of the holes in the wheel cover. → Fig. 1 —Use the puller to pull off the wheel cover in the direction of the arrow. If necessary, use a box spanner to do this Fitting wheel covers (→ Wheel bolts) —Check the correct position of the anti-theft wheel bolt —Press the wheel cover onto the wheel rim so that the valve hole is located over the tyre valve. Please ensure the cover engages securely all the way round. WARNING Using unsuitable hubcaps, or fitting them incorrectly, can cause accidents and serious injuries. Incorrectly fitted hubcaps can become loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger other road users. ● Do not use damaged hubcaps. ● Always make sure that the air flow to cool the brakes is not restricted or reduced. This also applies if hubcaps are retrofitted. If the airflow is not sufficient, the braking distance could increase significantly. NOTICE The wheel cover can be firmly fixed and should not be removed using force.
- Page 461 Wheel bolt caps Fig. 1 Removing the wheel bolt caps. The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be fitted fully back in position after changing the wheel. Removing and fitting the caps — Removing: take the puller from the vehicle toolkit (→ Vehicle toolkit) → Fig. 1 and pull off in the direction of the arrow. —Insert the puller through the opening in the cap — Fitting : press the caps onto the bolts as far as they will go. The anti-theft wheel bolt has a separate cap. It only fits onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and not onto the conventional wheel bolts.
- Page 462 Introduction to the topic You should carry out a wheel change yourself only when the vehicle is parked safely, you are familiar with the safety procedures and have access to the correct equipment. Some models are delivered from the factory without a jack or box spanner. If this is the case, wheels should be changed by a qualified workshop. The jack supplied with the vehicle is only designed for changing a wheel when one vehicle tyre is damaged and has to be replaced. If both tyres on one side of the vehicle, both tyres on one axle, or all tyres are damaged, seek expert assistance. WARNING Changing a wheel can be dangerous, especially when carried out at the side of a road. Please note the following steps in order to reduce the risk of serious injuries: ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. Park the vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic in order to carry out the wheel change. ● All passengers and children in particular must be at a safe distance and away from the area of work during the wheel change. ● Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users. ● Check that the surface the vehicle is parked on is level and firm. If necessary, use a large, strong board or similar support for the jack. ● Only change the wheel yourself when you feel confident with carrying out the procedure. If not, seek expert assistance. ● Always use suitable and undamaged tools to change the wheel. ● Always switch off the engine and move the selector lever to position P in order to reduce the risk of unintended vehicle movement. ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, always switch off the engine and select a gear in order to reduce the risk of unintended vehicle movement. ● Switch on the electronic parking brake. ● The wheel bolt tightening torque should be checked with a correctly functioning torque wrench immediately after changing a wheel. ● In the case of vehicles with a Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator, the system must be re-synchronised immediately after a wheel (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) change...
- Page 463 Preparations for changing a wheel Checklist The following actions must always be carried out in the given order in preparation for changing the wheel → 1. If your vehicle has a flat tyre, park the vehicle on a firm and level surface at a safe distance from moving traffic. 2. Switch on the electronic parking brake. 3. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever to position P . 4. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition. 5. Manual gearbox: select a gear. 6. Ask all vehicle occupants to leave the vehicle and stand at a safe distance away from moving traffic. 7. Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle (→ In an emergency) . Observe any legal requirements. 8. Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being worked on with a stone, collapsible chocks or another suitable object. 9. When towing a trailer: unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly . 10. Remove any items of luggage from the luggage compartment. 11. Remove the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel and the vehicle toolkit from the luggage compartment. 12. Remove the hubcaps . WARNING Ignoring any of the items on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and severe injuries. ● Follow the actions in the checklist and observe the general safety procedures.
- Page 464 Wheel bolts Fig. 1 Changing a wheel: loosening the wheel bolts. Use a suitable box spanner to loosen the wheel bolts. Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximately one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. If one of the wheel bolts is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down the end of the box spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and ensure that you have a secure footing. Loosening wheel bolts → Fig. 1 —Fit the box spanner over the wheel bolt as far as it will go → —Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt around one turn anticlockwise Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt Fig. 2 Changing a wheel: tyre valve 1 and locations of the anti-theft wheel bolt 2 or 3 . —Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolt out of the vehicle toolkit. —Insert the adapter into the anti-theft wheel bolt as far as it will go. —Push the box spanner onto the adapter as far as it will go. → —Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt around one turn anticlockwise Screwing in the anti-theft wheel bolt (wheel cover) → Fig. 2 or according to the position of —On wheels with a wheel cover, screw the anti-theft wheel bolt in at position the tyre valve . The wheel cover can otherwise not be fitted.
- Page 465 Tightening torque for wheel bolts Specified tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel or alloy wheel rims: —140 Nm (103 ft-lbs). If the wheel bolts are corroded and stiff, they must be renewed and the wheel hub threads cleaned before the tightening torque is checked. Never grease or oil the wheel bolts or the threads of the wheel hubs. The tightening torque should be checked with a properly functioning torque wrench immediately after changing a wheel. WARNING Incorrectly tightened wheel bolts can loosen while the vehicle is in motion and cause accidents, serious injury, and loss of control of the vehicle. ● The wheel bolts and threads of the wheel hubs must be clean, free from oil and grease, and turn easily. ● Always use the box spanner placed in the vehicle at the factory to loosen and tighten the wheel bolts. ● Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximately one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. ● Never grease or oil the wheel bolts or the threads of the wheel hubs. This could cause them to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if the required torque setting is used. ● Never loosen the bolts on wheel rims with bolted-on rings. ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, the wheel bolts and rims can loosen while the vehicle is in motion. The wheel bolts and the threads could be damaged if the tightening torque is too high. Check the tightening torque regularly using a torque wrench. WARNING The wrong wheel bolts can loosen while the vehicle is in motion and cause accidents, serious injury, and loss of control of the vehicle. ● Only use wheel bolts that belong to the respective wheel rim. ● Never use different wheel bolts. ● On vehicles with two-piece wheel bolts: use only two-piece wheel bolts. Subwoofer The subwoofer must be removed before the spare wheel can be taken out. Removing the subwoofer (type 1) Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: removing subwoofer (type 1. Fold up or remove the variable luggage compartment floor . → Fig. 1 → Fig. 1 2. To release the connector...
- Page 466 → Fig. 1 3. Pull off the connector as shown by the arrow, and place the disconnected electrical cable to one side. 4. Unscrew handwheel → Fig. 1 in the direction of the arrow. 5. Lift out the subwoofer carefully. Installing the subwoofer (type 1) 1. Place the subwoofer carefully in the rim base. The tip of the arrow symbol “FRONT” on the subwoofer must face forwards. → Fig. 1 2. Plug in the connector until it audibly engages. → Fig. 1 3. Screw the handwheel onto the threaded pin in the direction of the arrow until the subwoofer is secured in place. 4. Place the variable luggage compartment floor on the floor covering. Removing the subwoofer (type 2) Fig. 2 In the luggage compartment: removing subwoofer (type 1. Lift up the variable luggage compartment floor until it is held in position by the side restraints. → Fig. 2 2. Unscrew handwheel in the direction of the arrow. → Fig. 2 3. To release the connector, press the catch on the end of the plug 4. Pull off the connector as shown by the arrow, and place the disconnected electrical cable to one side. 5. Lift out the subwoofer carefully. Installing the subwoofer (type 2) →...
- Page 467 Spare wheel or temporary spare wheel Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: : handwheel for securing spare wheel, : handwheel for securing temporary spare wheel. Removing the spare wheel, collapsible spare wheel or temporary spare wheel —Open the boot lid. (→ Luggage compartment floor) —Fold up or remove the luggage compartment floor —If necessary, lift up the floor covering and remove. —Remove the vehicle toolkit with the container. → Fig. 1 or temporary spare wheel anticlockwise. —Fully unscrew the handwheel in the middle of the spare wheel —Remove the spare wheel, collapsible spare wheel or temporary spare wheel. Stowing the removed wheel —Open the boot lid. (→ Luggage compartment floor) —Fold up or remove the luggage compartment floor —If necessary, lift up the floor covering and remove. —Place the removed wheel into the spare wheel well with the rim facing downwards so that the centre hole in the rim is positioned exactly above the hole or threaded pin. —Screw the handwheel clockwise onto the threaded pin until the replaced wheel is firmly secured. —Return the vehicle toolkit to the container and stow the container in the luggage compartment. —Place the floor covering in the luggage compartment if necessary. (→ Luggage compartment floor) —Replace the luggage compartment floor —Close the boot lid. If the spare wheel tyre is not the same as the tyres on the vehicle If the spare wheel tyre differs from the other tyres on the vehicle, the spare wheel must be used only in the event of a tyre failure and for a short time → Observe these driving guidelines: —Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). —Avoid full acceleration, sudden braking and fast driving through bends in the road. (→ Snow chains) —Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel (→ Tyre —The tyre pressure must be checked as soon as possible after fitting the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel pressure)
- Page 468 Incorrect use of the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle, collisions or other accidents and cause serious injuries. ● Never use a spare wheel or temporary spare wheel if it is damaged or worn down to the tread wear indicators. ● Some vehicles may be equipped with a temporary spare wheel instead of a spare wheel. The temporary spare wheel can be recognised by a sticker and the text “80 km/h” or “50 mph”. This is the maximum speed at which you are permitted to drive with this tyre. The sticker must not be covered during use of the wheel. ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Do not accelerate quickly, brake suddenly or drive at high speed through bends. ● Never drive further than 200 km (125 miles) with a temporary spare wheel if it is fitted to the drive axle. ● The temporary spare wheel should be exchanged for a normal wheel as soon as possible. The temporary spare wheel is designed for a short period of use only. ● The temporary spare wheel must always be secured with the factory-supplied wheel bolts. ● Never drive using more than one spare wheel that differs from the normal tyres. (→ Tyre pressure) ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, the tyre pressure must be checked as soon as possible ● Snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel. ● Do not fit a temporary spare wheel to the rear axle when towing a trailer . Lifting the vehicle with the jack Jacking points Fig. 1 Jacking points. The jack may be positioned only at the reinforcements on the underbody, which are located behind the markings on the body → Fig. 1 → . Always use the jacking point closest to the wheel you are working on Applying the jack Fig. 2 Correct alignment of the jack.
- Page 469 Fig. 3 Scissors jack applied at the rear on the left-side of the vehicle. Checklist → For your own safety, carry out the following points in the specified order 1. Choose a firm and level surface suitable for lifting the vehicle. 2. Adjust the steering wheel so that the wheels point straight forwards. 3. Switch off the engine. Select a gear on vehicles with a manual gearbox or move the selector lever to position P on vehicles with an automatic gearbox and switch on the electronic parking brake. 4. Chock the wheel diagonally opposite using collapsible chocks or other suitable objects. 5. When towing a trailer : unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly. 6. Loosen the wheel bolts (→ Wheel bolts) → Fig. 1 7. Find the jacking point under the vehicle which is closest to the wheel that is being changed. 8. Insert the hand crank into the opening on the jack ( depending on equipment). 9. Crank up the jack until it just fits under the jacking point of the vehicle. 10. Make sure that the entire surface of the foot of the jack is resting securely on the ground and that the foot of the jack is → Fig. 2 → Fig. 3 positioned vertically directly beneath the jacking point and 11. Position the jack and simultaneously continue to crank the claw up until it is in position around the jacking point → Fig. 3 underneath the vehicle 12. Crank the jack further until the wheel is just clear of the ground.
- Page 470 ● Only use vehicle jacks that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Other vehicle jacks could slip out of position – this includes vehicle jacks supplied with other Volkswagen models. ● The ground must be firm and level. Soft ground or surfaces at an incline under the vehicle jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. If necessary, use a large, strong board or similar support for the jack. ● On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles), use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping. ● Apply the jack only at the points described. The jack claw must grip the vertical rib under the side member securely → Fig. 3 ● Never place any part of your body (e.g. an arm or leg) underneath a vehicle which is only supported by the jack. ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, use suitable stands to provide extra support for the vehicle. ● Never jack up the vehicle when the engine is running, or if the vehicle is tilted to the side or on a gradient. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised on a jack. Engine vibrations can cause the vehicle to fall off the jack. WARNING Ignoring any of the items on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and severe injuries. ● Follow the actions in the checklist and observe the general safety procedures. Changing a wheel Removing the wheel Fig. 1 Wheel change: Unscrew the wheel bolts with the wheel wrench. (→ Changing a wheel) —Observe the checklist (→ Wheel bolts) —Loosen the wheel bolts (→ Jack) —Jack up the vehicle → Fig. 1 , completely unscrew loosened wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface. —Using the wheel wrench —Remove the wheel. Fitting the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) —Note the tyre direction of rotation —Put the wheel in place.
- Page 471 After changing a wheel —Clean the tools and place them back in the foam rubber holder in the luggage compartment. —Stow the changed wheel securely in the luggage compartment. (→ Wheel bolts) —Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked immediately —The damaged wheel should be replaced as soon as possible. WARNING Incorrect torque or incorrect use of wheel bolts can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Always keep all wheel bolts and threads in the wheel hubs clean and free from oil and grease. The wheel bolts must be easy to turn and be tightened to the specified torque. (→ Tyre After changing a wheel, the indicator lamp for the tyre monitoring system may indicate a fault in the system Pressure Loss Indicator) Introduction to the topic The breakdown set can be used to temporarily and reliably seal any tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or punctures (up to approx. 4 mm in diameter). Do not remove foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) from the tyre! Once the sealant has been added to the tyre, the tyre pressure must be checked and adjusted again after approximately 10 minutes of driving. Seek expert assistance if more than one of the vehicle's tyres is damaged. The breakdown set is designed to fill only one tyre. Use the breakdown set only when the vehicle has been safely parked and you are familiar with the work and safety precautions needed. Seek expert assistance if this is not the case. The tyre sealant must not be used: —If the wheel rim is damaged. —If the outside temperature is below -20°C ( -4°F). —If there are cuts or punctures in the tyre that are larger than 4mm. —If the vehicle was driven with very low tyre pressure or a flat tyre. —If the use-by date on the tyre filler bottle has expired. —If a foreign object has been removed from the tyre. WARNING Using the breakdown set can be dangerous, especially if the tyre is inflated at the roadside. Please note the following steps in order to reduce the risk of serious injuries: ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. Park the vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic in order (→ In an emergency) to fill the tyre ● Check that the surface the vehicle is parked on is level and firm. ●...
- Page 472 ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Avoid full acceleration, sudden braking and fast driving through bends in the road. ● Drive for just 10 minutes at no more than 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre. Dispose of used or out-of-date sealant in accordance with legal requirements. You can get a new tyre filler bottle from a Volkswagen dealership. Observe the separate instructions from the manufacturer of the breakdown set. Contents of the breakdown set The breakdown set is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment. Fig. 1 Illustration: components of the breakdown set. 1 Sticker with the maximum permitted speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”. 2 Tyre sealant tube with plug. 3 Tyre filler bottle. 4 Spare valve core. 5 Valve core extractor. → Fig. 1 There is a slot on the lower end of the valve core extractor for the valve core. This is required for extracting the valve core from the tyre valve and then screwing it back into the valve again. This also applies to the spare valve core...
- Page 473 Fig. 2 Illustration: compressor from the breakdown set. 1 12-volt plug. 2 ON/OFF switch. 3 Tyre pressure display. 4 Air bleed screw. 5 Tyre filler hose. 6 Air compressor. The air compressor from the breakdown set may be operated from the 12-volt socket, even if the power stated on the type plate of the air compressor exceeds the maximum power of the socket. There may also be a button in the compressor instead of the air bleed screw.
- Page 474 Preparations Checklist Always carry out the following actions in the given order → 1. If your vehicle has a flat tyre, park the vehicle on a firm and level surface at a safe distance from moving traffic. 2. Switch on the electronic parking brake. 3. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever to position P . 4. Switch off the engine. 5. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. 6. Manual gearbox: select a gear. 7. Ask all vehicle occupants to leave the vehicle and stand at a safe distance away from moving traffic. (→ In an emergency) 8. Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle . Observe any legal requirements. (→ Breakdown set) 9. Check whether the puncture can be repaired with the breakdown set 10. When towing a trailer: unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly . 11. Remove any items of luggage from the luggage compartment. 12. Take the breakdown set out of the luggage compartment. (→ Breakdown 13. Take the sticker from the breakdown set and stick it on the dash panel within the driver’s field of vision set) 14. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. WARNING Ignoring any of the items on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and severe injuries.
- Page 475 Sealing and inflating tyres Sealing a tyre —Unscrew the cap from the tyre valve. → Fig. 1 to screw the valve core out of the tyre valve. Place the core on a clean surface. —Use the valve core extractor → Fig. 1 vigorously several times. —Shake the tyre filler bottle → Fig. 1 tightly onto the tyre filler bottle in a clockwise direction. The seal on the top of the —Screw the tyre filler hose bottle is pierced when doing so. → Fig. 1 and place the open end fully on the tyre valve. —Remove the plug from the tyre filler hose —Hold the bottle upside down and fill the entire contents of the tyre filler bottle into the tyre. —Remove the empty tyre filler bottle from the valve. → Fig. 1 to screw the valve core back into the tyre valve. —Use the valve core extractor Inflating the tyre → Fig. 2 of the air compressor tightly onto the tyre valve. —Screw the tyre filler hose → Fig. 2 is closed. —Check that the bleed screw —Start the engine and let it run. → Fig. 2 (→ Sockets) into one of the vehicle's 12-volt sockets —Insert the 12-volt plug → Fig. 2 to switch on the air compressor. —Use the ON/OFF switch → —Run the air compressor until the tyre pressure has reached 2.0 – 2.5 bar ( 29 – 36 psi/200 – 250 kPa) . Maximum →...
- Page 476 ● Do not carry on driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa) or lower after driving for 10 minutes. ● Seek expert assistance. NOTICE Switch the air compressor off after a maximum of 8 minutes to avoid overheating. Let the air compressor cool down for a few minutes before switching it back on. Service work and digital service schedule The vehicle data stickers attached to the inside cover of this owner's manual help ensure that you can have the correct Volkswagen Genuine Parts installed in your vehicle whenever required. It also determines which type of servicing applies to ® your vehicle. The vehicle data sticker confirms when the vehicle was first registered or delivered, when the delivery inspection was carried out, and thus the date from which your vehicle is covered by our warranty. Recording the service work performed (“digital service schedule”) The service records are stored by your Volkswagen dealership or qualified workshop in a central system. This transparent documentation of the service history allows the service operations performed to be reproduced at any time. Each time you have your vehicle serviced, Volkswagen recommends asking for a printed service record, which contains all service work stored in the system. With every service, the printout of the previous service record is replaced by a current printout. The digital service schedule is not available in some markets. In this case, your Volkswagen dealership will inform you about the documentation process for service work. Service work The following information is documented in the digital service schedule by your Volkswagen dealership or qualified workshop: —When which service was carried out. —Whether any repairs are recommended, such as replacement of the brake pads in the near future. —Whether you had any special requests before or during the maintenance work. Your service advisor will note these on the order. —Which components and service fluids were changed. —When your next service is scheduled for. The LongLife mobility guarantee is valid until the next inspection is due. Documentation takes place at every due inspection. The type and scope of service work may differ from vehicle to vehicle. Information on specific work for your vehicle can be requested from a qualified workshop. WARNING Inadequate servicing, no servicing at all, or failure to adhere to service intervals can result in breakdowns, accidents and serious injury. ● Have service work carried out by an authorised Volkswagen dealership or workshop.
- Page 477 NOTICE Volkswagen is not responsible for any vehicle damage caused by inadequate service work or the lack of availability of parts. Regular servicing of your vehicle not only maintains its value, it also ensures that your vehicle remains roadworthy and in working order. You should therefore have your vehicle serviced according to the Volkswagen guidelines. Fixed service or flexible service Fig. 1 Vehicle data sticker with PR number for the relevant service (illustration). The service events differ according to oil change service and inspection. The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster serves as a reminder for the due date of the next service event. Your vehicle will receive either the fixed service or flexible service for the oil change service, depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine type and the operating conditions How do I know which type of service my vehicle needs? → Fig. 1 (arrow) . —From the PR number of the vehicle data sticker —From the table below. Service event PR No. Service type Service interval Every 5,000 km or 1 year Every 7,500 km or 1 year Fixed Oil change service Every 10,000 km or 1 year Every 15,000 km or 1 year Flexible According to service interval display. Inspection According to service interval display. Observe and follow the information on the motor oil specification according to the VW standard . Features of the flexible service With the flexible service, you need to have an oil change service carried out only if your vehicle requires one. To determine...
- Page 478 Service interval display Scheduled services at Volkswagen are displayed in the service interval display in the instrument cluster display (→ Service interval display) (→ Vehicle settings menu) and in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system . This service interval display provides information on services that include an oil change or inspection. When the respective service is due, additional work that is due can also be carried out, e.g. changing brake fluid and spark plugs. Information on operating conditions The service intervals and scope of service always apply to vehicles used under normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is operated under h eavy-duty conditions, some work will have to be performed before the next service is due or at shorter intervals than those specified. Heavy-duty conditions are, for example: —Fuel containing sulphur. —Frequent short-distance traffic. —Longer idling of the motor, e.g. taxi. —Use in areas with high levels of dust. —Frequent trailer operation. —Primarily stop-and-go mode, e.g. in the city. —Driving mainly in wintry conditions. This applies particularly to the following components (depending on the vehicle equipment): —Enhanced air filter with activated carbon —Air Care enhanced air filter with activated carbon. —Air filter. —Toothed belt. —Particulate filter. —Engine oil. The service advisor at your qualified workshop will be pleased to advise you on whether your vehicle requires more frequent work due to the conditions under which it is used. WARNING Inadequate servicing, no servicing at all, or failure to adhere to service intervals can result in breakdowns, accidents or serious injury. ● Have your service work carried out by an authorised Volkswagen dealership or workshop. NOTICE Volkswagen is not responsible for any vehicle damage caused by inadequate service work or the lack of availability of parts.
- Page 479 Scope of service The scope of service includes all maintenance work that is necessary in order to keep your vehicle roadworthy (depending on the operating conditions and vehicle equipment, e.g. engine, gearbox or service fluids). The maintenance work is divided into inspection work and servicing work . You can find out what work is required in detail for your vehicle: —at your Volkswagen dealership. —at your qualified workshop. (→ Repairs and technical modifications) —in the electronic repair and workshop information system erWin Inspection work Electrics —12-volt vehicle battery: check and replace if necessary, but at least every four years. —Lighting: check. —Horn: check. —Headlight setting: check. —Service interval display: reset. Engine and gearbox —Exhaust system: check. —Gearbox and final drive: check. —Poly V-belt: check. —Cooling system: check. —Engine and components in engine compartment: check. —Engine oil level: check. Running gear —Swivel joints and track rods: check. —Tyres: check. —Brake system: check. —Brake pads and brake discs: check. —Brake fluid level: check. —Boots: check. —Coupling rod and stabiliser bearings: check. —Pneumatic suspension: check. —Breakdown set: check. —Tyre pressure on all wheels: check. —Power steering: check. —Shock absorbers and coil springs: check. Body —Roof systems: check.
- Page 480 or only time or mileage . —Additives: change or top up. —Brake fluid: change. —Particulate filter: check. —Gearbox: change oil and also filter if applicable. —Final drive and differential: change oil. —Diesel fuel filter: change or drain. —Air filter: change. —Engine: change oil and also filter if applicable. —Active combi-filter: replace. —Air Care active combi-filter: replace. —Spark plugs: change. —Toothed belt and tensioning roller: check or change. It is also possible to have servicing work carried out in between the displayed scheduled service events. The scope of service is subject to change for technical reasons, e.g. continuous further development of components. Your Volkswagen dealership or qualified workshop always has the latest information about any changes. Notes on vehicle care Regular and expert care helps to maintain your vehicle's condition. The longer contamination or dirt is left on the surface of vehicle components, the more difficult it can become to clean and treat them. Extended exposure may mean that it is no longer possible to remove contamination or dirt. Volkswagen recommends using genuine care products designed especially for your vehicle. Consult a qualified workshop if you have any specific questions or if vehicle parts are not listed. WARNING Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can impair the safety features of the vehicle and cause serious injury. ● Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to the manufacturer's instructions. ● Always use approved or recommended cleaning products. ● Do not use cleaning agents that contain solvents. Solvents can cause irreparable damage to the airbag modules. ● Protect your hands and arms against parts with sharp edges, e.g. when cleaning the insides of the wheel housings. WARNING If the windscreen, door windows or rear window are dirty, iced up or affected by condensation, visibility will be reduced and the risk of accidents and severe injuries will increase. This could impair the safety equipment of the vehicle.
- Page 481 (→ Rain and light sensor) The windscreen wipers and the rain and light sensor are switched off. ✓ (→ Auto Hold function) ✓ The Auto Hold function is switched off. Further information: → —Please observe information of the car wash operator, especially where add-on parts such as spoilers are concerned —Preferably use textile car washes without brushes. —Do not select cleaning programmes with hot wax for vehicles with decorative and protective films. —Regularly have the bottom of the vehicle thoroughly cleaned to remove residue. NOTICE Car washes that scan the contours mechanically may damage the vehicle, e.g spoiler. High-pressure cleaner → —Observe information issued by the manufacturer and do not use rotating nozzles under any circumstances —Use water up to a maximum temperature of +60°C (+140°F) only. —Do not clean windows that are iced up or covered in snow with a high-pressure cleaner. —Move the jet of water uniformly so that the nozzle is at least 50 cm ( 20 inches) away from the vehicle components. —Do not apply the water jet to the same area for too long. —Do not direct the jet of water at rubber seals or other sensitive vehicle components such as side windows, glossy strips, tyres, sensors, camera lenses, decorative and protective film. Hand wash —Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a cleaning glove or a cleaning brush using only light pressure. Start with the roof and work from the top to the bottom → Use a shampoo for very stubborn dirt only. Waxing Waxing protects the paintwork. At the latest when water no longer clearly forms small drops and runs off the paintwork when the vehicle is clean , the vehicle should be protected again using a good preservative wax. Even if a preservative wax is applied regularly in the automatic car wash, Volkswagen recommends protecting the vehicle paintwork at least twice a year using Volkswagen Genuine Hard Wax (000 096 317).
- Page 482 Slight soiling such as grease stains or insect residue can be removed with a special cleaner for matt paint. NOTICE Painted parts and surfaces with a matt finish, unpainted plastic parts, headlight lenses and tail light clusters can be damaged if the vehicle is not washed correctly. ● Do not use hard or abrasive brushes. WARNING After a car wash, the braking action may be delayed and this may extend the braking distance as the brake discs and brake pads will be wet or iced up in winter. ● Dry and de-ice the brakes by performing careful braking manoeuvres. Do not endanger any other road users when doing this. NOTICE Improper vehicle cleaning can cause severe damage to the vehicle. ● Always follow the manufacturer's instructions. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. ● Never aim a water jet directly at doors or the boot lid in cold weather. The components could freeze up. Wash the vehicle in dedicated cleaning areas only. This prevents any waste water contaminated by oil from entering the sewage system. Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior → The following overview contains recommendations for cleaning and care of individual vehicle components Windows, glass surfaces Remove wax residue, e.g. from care products, using the Volkswagen Genuine Cleaning Cloth (000 096 166 A) or a suitable glass cleaner. Use a hand brush to remove snow and ice. If you use a plastic scraper, move it in one direction only. Use the Volkswagen Genuine De-icing Agent (000 096 322) to remove ice. Wiper blades: . Paint Always treat surfaces carefully in order to prevent damage to the paint coat. Use a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water or cleaning clay to remove any light dirt immediately, e.g. deposits, insect residue, or cosmetics. Repair minor paint damage with a touch-up pen. Refer to the vehicle data sticker for the paint code . Consult a qualified workshop in the event of damage to surfaces with matt paint. Further information: —Overflowing fuel or service fluids: clean immediately. —Flash rust deposits: moisten deposits with a soap solution. Then remove any deposits with cleaning clay.
- Page 483 —Corrosion: have removed by a qualified workshop. Plenum chamber, engine compartment Fig. 1 Between the engine compartment and the windscreen: plenum chamber (illustration). → Fig. 1 → Remove leaves and other loose objects with a vacuum cleaner or by hand . Cleaning of the engine compartment should always be performed by a qualified workshop → Water that has entered the plenum chamber via a manual process ( e.g. from a high-pressure cleaner) can cause considerable damage to the vehicle. Sensors, camera lenses Fig. 2 At the rear of the vehicle: rear view camera system in the Volkswagen badge (illustration).
- Page 484 Fig. 3 At the rear of the vehicle: rear view camera system on the handle button (illustration). Clean the area in front of the sensors or camera with a soft cloth and solvent-free cleaning agent. Check where they are installed . On vehicles with a rear view camera in the rear Volkswagen badge → Fig. 2 —Switch on the ignition. —Set the selector lever position R . —Switch on the electronic parking brake. —Clean the camera lens. Clean sensitive surfaces on the rain and light sensor and the camera window on the windscreen in the same way as windows and glass surfaces (depending on vehicle equipment). Remove snow with a hand brush. Do not use warm or hot water. Use the Volkswagen Genuine De-icing Agent (000 096 322) to remove ice. Decorative films, protective films Remove soiling the same way as for paint. Always use Volkswagen Genuine Plastic Cleaner (000 096 314) for matt decorative films. Treat the vehicle with liquid hard wax every three months after washing and removing dust. Only use clean, soft microfibre cloths to apply the wax. Do not use hot wax, even in car washes. Further information: —Stubborn dirt: remove carefully using white spirits, and then rinse with warm water. Trim parts made of chrome-plated plastic, aluminium or stainless steel and tailpipes Clean the surface with Volkswagen Genuine Chrome and Aluminium Care Product (000 096 319 D). Chrome-plated trim parts can be protected using Volkswagen Genuine Hard Wax (000 096 317). Headlights, tail light clusters Use a soft sponge soaked with a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. Do not use any cleaning agents that contain alcohol or solvents. Further information: —Stubborn dirt: remove with Volkswagen Genuine Chrome and Aluminium Care Product (000 096 319 D). Wheels...
- Page 485 Remove dirt and gritting salt deposits with plenty of water. Alloy wheels: treat dirty aluminium wheels with Volkswagen Genuine Wheel Cleaner (000 096 304). Volkswagen recommends treating the wheel rims with Volkswagen Genuine Hard Wax (000 096 317) every three months. Further information: —Damaged protective paint coating: repair immediately with a touch-up pen. If necessary go to qualified workshop. —Brake dust: use Volkswagen Genuine Wheel Rim Cleaner (000 096 304). Door lock cylinders Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine De-icing Agent (000 096 322) for de-icing. Do not use door lock de-icer containing degreasing substances. WARNING The engine compartment of the vehicle is a hazardous area. All work in the engine compartment carries the risk of injury, scalding, accidents and fire. ● Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, always observe the required procedures and safety precautions (→ In the engine compartment) ● Volkswagen recommends having the work carried out by a qualified workshop. NOTICE Incorrect cleaning and care may cause vehicle damage. ● Always follow the manufacturer's instructions. ● Do not use excessively hard, abrasive cleaning tools. NOTICE The drainage channels for the plenum chamber may become blocked by leaves and dirt. Water that fails to drain away can enter the vehicle interior. ● Have the area under the perforated cover cleaned regularly by a qualified workshop. The durability and colour of decorative and protective films may be affected by environmental influences, such as sunlight, moisture, polluted air, stone impacts, etc. Decorative films may show signs of wear and ageing after around one to three years, and protective films after two to three years. In very hot climates, decorative films may become faded within one year and protective films within two years. Vehicle interior cleaning and care → The following overview contains recommendations for cleaning and care of individual vehicle components Windows Clean with a glass cleaning agent and then wipe dry using a clean chamois cloth or a lint-free cloth. Textiles, microfibre cloth and leatherette Remove any dirt with Volkswagen Genuine Interior Cleaning Agent (000 096 301). Never treat materials with leather care agents, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar substances.
- Page 486 Natural leather Remove fresh contamination using a cotton cloth with a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. Do not allow fluids to seep into the seams. Treat any dried spots with Volkswagen Genuine Leather Cleaner (000 096 323). Apply leather care agent for seating furniture regularly and each time after the leather is cleaned. If the vehicle is parked outdoors for long periods, you should cover the leather to protect it from direct sunlight. Never treat leather with solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar. Further information: —For grease-based soiling, e.g. oil, remove fresh stains with an absorbent cloth. —Treat special soiling with Volkswagen Genuine Leather Cleaner (000 096 323), e.g. ballpoint pen ink, nail varnish and dried spots. Plastic parts Use a soft, moist cloth. If stubborn soiling cannot be removed with mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water, use a solvent-free plastic cleaning agent if necessary, e.g. Volkswagen Genuine Plastic Cleaner (000 096 314). Trim parts, trim strips made of chrome, aluminium or stainless steel Clean with a clean, soft cloth and mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water in a dust-free environment. Treat anodised surfaces with Volkswagen Genuine Chrome and Aluminium Care Product (000 096 319 D). Control elements Remove coarse dirt and other dirt that is difficult to reach using a soft brush. Then use a clean, soft cloth with some mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. Do not allow liquids to enter the controls. Displays and screens Use a Volkswagen Genuine Cleaning Cloth (000 096 166 A) with a little water, a suitable glass cleaner or LCD cleaner. Do not clean the instrument cluster display and Infotainment system screen with a dry cloth. Switch off the Infotainment system temporarily before cleaning. Rubber seals Clean with a soft and lint-free cloth as well as plenty of water. Treat with Volkswagen Genuine Rubber Care Agent (000 096 310) on a regular basis. Seat belts → Carefully pull the seat belt right out and leave it out . Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush. If necessary, clean the seat belt with a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. Leave the belt fabric to dry completely and then allow it to roll up. Wooden trims Clean with a soft cloth and some mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water.
- Page 487 Cleaning seat covers If clothing that is not sufficiently colour-fast, e.g. denim which leaves stains on the seat cushion, then this is not due to the cover fabric. The seat padding may contain components for the airbag system and electrical connections. Seat padding that is damaged, incorrectly cleaned or treated, or that becomes wet, may cause damage to the vehicle electrical system or trigger a → fault in the airbag system Depending on the vehicle equipment, seat cushions with seat heating have electrical components and connectors that may be damaged in the event of incorrect cleaning or treatment. This can also result in damage to other parts of the vehicle electrics. —Never use high-pressure cleaners, steam cleaners and coolant spray. —Do not switch on the seat heating to dry the seats. —Do not use washing paste or fine detergent solutions. —Avoid getting the seat wet. —In the event of uncertainty, contact a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Failure to clean the parts properly can cause damage to the seat belts, the fastenings and the belt retractor. ● Never try to modify or remove the seat belts for cleaning. ● Never clean the seat belts and their components with chemical agents. ● Do not use any caustic liquids, solvents or sharp objects. ● Protect the belt buckles against the ingress of liquids and foreign bodies. ● Let the cleaned seat belt to dry completely before allowing it to retract. WARNING Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can impair the safety features of the vehicle and cause serious injury. ● Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to the manufacturer's instructions. NOTICE Incorrect cleaning and care may cause vehicle damage. ● Do not use a steam cleaner, brushes or hard sponges etc. under any circumstances. ● Have stubborn stains removed by a qualified workshop. The signs of wear and soiling visible due to normal use are naturally more easily visible in the case of light-coloured materials in the vehicle interior. These signs of use cannot be prevented and also represent unavoidable ageing due to normal use. Please observe the corresponding care instructions. Accessories and parts Volkswagen recommends that you seek advice from a Volkswagen dealership before purchasing accessories, replacement parts or service fluids, for example if the vehicle is to be retrofitted with accessories or if parts have to be renewed.
- Page 488 ● Never secure or position objects, e.g. telephone holders, in the deployment zone of the airbags since these objects can cause serious or fatal injuries if the airbags are triggered. Repairs and technical modifications Repairs and technical modifications must always be carried out according to Volkswagen specifications → Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause faults. As the electronic components are linked together in networks, these faults may indirectly affect the working of other systems. This can seriously impair vehicle safety, lead to excessive wear of components and also invalidate the type approval for the vehicle. The Volkswagen dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by technical modifications and/or work performed incorrectly. The Volkswagen dealership is not responsible for damage caused by technical modifications and/or work performed incorrectly. Such damage is not covered by the Volkswagen guarantee. Volkswagen recommends that all repairs and technical modifications be performed by an authorised Volkswagen workshop using Volkswagen Genuine Parts ® Volkswagen repair information Volkswagen Service information and official Volkswagen repair information can be obtained for a fee. Customers in Europe, Asia, Australia, Africa, Central and South America: Please contact a Volkswagen dealership or qualified workshop or register on the e rWin online portal (electronic repair and workshop information): https://erwin.volkswagen.de Customers in North America and Canada: To order printed service information please contact: Volkswagen Technical Literature Ordering Center literature.vw.com You can also register online in the e rWin internet portal: https://erwin.vw.com Vehicles with special auxiliary equipment or body parts Auxiliary equipment and second stage manufacturers must ensure that the equipment and bodies (conversions) adhere to the stipulated environmental laws and regulations, particularly the EU directive 2000/53/EC concerning end-of-life vehicles and EU directive 2003/11/EC concerning the restriction on the marketing and use of certain dangerous substances and preparations. The vehicle owner must keep all assembly documentation for these conversions and pass it on to the scrapping company upon vehicle handover if the vehicle is scrapped. This is intended to facilitate environmentally responsible disposal for all vehicles, including refitted vehicles. Windscreen repairs To function properly, some items of equipment require an electrical or electronic module, which is located on the inside of the windscreen near the interior mirror. If the windscreen has been damaged in the viewing field of the electrical or electronic...
- Page 489 Repairs and structural modifications should be carried out by a qualified workshop. Further information: —Repainting and paint touch-ups in the area around the sensors may impair the function of the system in question. —On some vehicle models, the Volkswagen badge can impair the view of the radar sensor in the front area. You should therefore operate the vehicle only with the original Volkswagen badge or a badge approved by Volkswagen. Engine and transmission guard An engine and transmission guard can reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle's underbody and sump, for example when driving over kerbs, drive entrances or unsurfaced roads. Volkswagen recommends that you have this equipment retrofitted by your Volkswagen dealership. An engine and transmission guard may not be available in all countries. WARNING Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause functional problems and damage to the vehicle and impair the effectiveness of the driver assist systems. This can result in accidents and severe injuries. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a qualified workshop. WARNING Unsuitable spare parts and accessories, incorrectly carried out work, modifications and repairs can lead to damage to the vehicle and cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Volkswagen strongly recommends that you use only approved Volkswagen accessories and Volkswagen Genuine Parts ® These parts and accessories have been specially tested by Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and safety. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel. ● Never fit parts to your vehicle that differ in their design or characteristics from the factory-fitted parts. ● Never secure or position objects, e.g. telephone holders, in the deployment zone of the airbags since these objects can cause serious or fatal injuries if the airbags are triggered. ● Use only wheel rim/tyre combinations that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Repairs and faults in the airbag system → Repairs and technical modifications must always be carried out according to Volkswagen specifications Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, the doors, the front seats, the headliner, or the bodywork should be carried out by a qualified workshop. System components and airbag system sensors might be fitted on these vehicle components. If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.
- Page 490 WARNING Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause function problems and damage to the vehicle and impair the effectiveness of the airbag system. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a qualified workshop. ● Airbag modules cannot be repaired. They must be replaced. ● Never install recycled airbag components or components that have been taken from end-of-life vehicles in your vehicle. WARNING Modifications to the vehicle's suspension, including the use of unsuitable tyre/rim combinations, can cause the airbag system to work differently and increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. ● Never install components in the suspension system which do not have the same characteristics as the original factory- fitted components. ● Never use wheel rim/tyre combinations that have not been approved by Volkswagen. Mobile communication in the vehicle Electromagnetic radiation If a mobile telephone or radio device is used without being connected to the external aerial, the electromagnetic radiation will not be optimally directed to the outside of the vehicle. Increased levels of radiation in the vehicle interior may occur in areas → with poor signal in particular, for instance in rural areas. This could constitute a health hazard Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, a suitable mobile phone interface can be used to connect the mobile telephone to the external aerial. The connection quality is improved and the range is increased. Using the telephone Many countries require a hands-free system to be used when using a telephone inside the vehicle, e.g. via a Bluetooth ® connection. Before use, secure the mobile telephone to a suitable bracket → or stow it in a storage compartment so that it cannot slip around, e.g. in the centre console. Two-way radios Observe legal requirements and the manufacturer's operating instructions for operating two-way radios. The retrofitting of two-way radios requires authorisation. Contact your Volkswagen dealership for further information on installing a two-way radio. WARNING Mobile telephones which are loosely placed in the vehicle or not properly secured could be flung through the interior and cause injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident.
- Page 491 Volkswagen dealership warranty Volkswagen dealerships guarantee that the vehicles they sell are free from defects. The dealerships are also responsible for handling warranty claims. Please refer to your sales contract or contact your Volkswagen dealership for details of the warranty and guarantee conditions.
- Page 492 Warranty for the paintwork and body Volkswagen dealerships provide a warranty on the paintwork and body of all vehicles purchased from them. In addition to the warranty conditions for factory-new Volkswagen vehicles (as detailed in the purchase contract), the Volkswagen dealer guarantees that the body of any vehicles it sells will not be affected by paint imperfections or corrosion perforation for a specified period: —a three-year warranty on paint imperfections and —a twelve-year corrosion perforation warranty. Here, corrosion perforation refers to rust forming on the inside ( cavity) of the body and causing holes in the sheet metal. —Applies only to the USA: a seven-year corrosion perforation warranty. Here, corrosion perforation refers to rust forming on the inside (cavity) of the body and causing holes in the sheet metal. If such damage occurs nevertheless, it will be repaired free of charge for parts and labour by any Volkswagen dealership. The warranty does not cover the following: —Damage caused by external influence or insufficient care. —Imperfections on the body or paintwork which are not repaired promptly according to manufacturer specifications. —Corrosion perforation that is directly related to body repairs not being carried out according to manufacturer specifications. If the body is repaired or painted, your Volkswagen dealership will confirm your warranty against corrosion perforation for the repaired area.
- Page 493 LongLife mobility guarantee In many European markets, Volkswagen dealerships offer a comprehensive LongLife mobility guarantee for new vehicles. It applies from vehicle delivery until the first scheduled inspection. If you purchase your new vehicle directly from Volkswagen AG, Volkswagen AG will issue the LongLife mobility guarantee from the time of delivery until the first due inspection. Your Volkswagen service partner will extend the LongLife mobility guarantee until the following inspection if the due inspection is carried out at that workshop. The service costs include the entire guarantee package. Please ask your Volkswagen dealership for details of services, conditions and time limits relating to the LongLife mobility guarantee.
- Page 494 Data storage and services Valid in EU countries where the General Data Protection Regulation of the European Union is effective: Data processing in the vehicle Your vehicle is fitted with electronic control units. Control units process data that they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange with each other, for example. Some control units are required for the safe functioning of your vehicle, others support you when driving (driver assist systems), others enable convenience or additional functions of the Infotainment system. Personal reference Each vehicle is given a unique vehicle identification number. In Germany, for example, this vehicle identification number can be traced back to the current and former owners of the vehicle using information provided by the Federal Motor Transport Authority (Kraftfahrtbundesamt ). There are also other ways of tracing the vehicle to the owner or driver, via data collected for the vehicle e.g. the registration number. The data generated or processed by control units may therefore be personal data or under certain conditions is personal data. Depending on the vehicle data available, it may be possible to draw conclusions, e.g. about your driving behaviour, your location or your route or your usage behaviour. Your rights regarding data protection In accordance with applicable data protection law, you have certain rights vis-à-vis Volkswagen when your personal data is processed. Accordingly, you are entitled to receive comprehensive information free of charge from Volkswagen and third parties, e.g. breakdown services or workshops used and providers of online services in the vehicle if they have stored your personal data. You are entitled to request information concerning what personal data and for what purpose it is stored as well as where the data originates from. Your right to information also includes the transfer of data to other bodies. Further information on your legal rights, e.g. your right to have your data deleted or corrected, can be found in the applicable data protection information on the Volkswagen website including the contact details and a reference to the data protection officer. Data that is only stored locally in the vehicle can be read out for a fee with expert assistance, e.g. in a workshop. Legal requirements for the disclosure of data If legal requirements exist, Volkswagen is obliged to disclose data stored at Volkswagen to the extent required to government agencies in individual cases, e.g. as part of a police investigation of a criminal offence. Within the framework of applicable law, government agencies are also authorised to read data from vehicles themselves in individual cases. In the event of an accident, information can be read from the airbag control unit to help clarify the situation. Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data to operate the vehicle. These include, for example: —Vehicle status information, e.g. speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions and display of closed seat belts. —Ambient conditions, e.g. temperature, rain and light sensor, adaptive cruise control. As a rule, this data is volatile and is not stored beyond the operating time and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data storage devices. These are used to document information regarding the vehicle status, component load levels, maintenance requirements, technical events and faults on a temporary or permanent basis.
- Page 495 —Faults or malfunctions in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes. —System reactions to specific driving situations, e.g. triggering of an airbag, intervention of the stability control systems. —Information on events which damaged the vehicle. In special cases, e.g. when the vehicle has detected a malfunction, it may be necessary to store data that would normally only be volatile. If you make use of services, e.g. repairs or maintenance work, the stored operating data can, if necessary, be read and used together with the vehicle identification number. The data can be read from the vehicle by employees of the service network, e.g. workshops, or third parties, e.g. breakdown services. The same applies to warranty cases and quality assurance measures. The data is read via the legally prescribed OBD → connection (“on-board diagnosis”) in the vehicle . The operating data that is read documents the technical status of the vehicle or individual components thereof and provides support with fault diagnosis, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. This data, in particular information on component load-levels, technical events, operating errors and other faults, is transmitted to Volkswagen together with the vehicle identification number if necessary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is liable for the product. Here too, Volkswagen uses operating data from vehicles for product recalls, for example. This data can also be used to check the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by an authorised workshop or at your request as part of repair or service work. The event memory should only be read and reset by a qualified workshop. Additional information on the stored data is available from qualified workshops. After a fault has been rectified, the information in the memory relating to the fault is deleted. Other memory content is overwritten on an ongoing basis. Reprogramming control units All data for the control of components is stored in the control units. Some convenience functions, such as convenience turn signal, single door unlocking and displays, can be reprogrammed using special workshop equipment. If the convenience functions are reprogrammed, the specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual will no longer match the original functions. Volkswagen recommends having any reprogramming entered into the digital service schedule by a Volkswagen dealership or qualified workshop. Information about possible reprogramming can be obtained from the Volkswagen dealership. Convenience functions You can store convenience settings (personalisation) in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, this includes, for example: —Settings of the seat and steering wheel positions. —Running gear and air conditioning settings. —Personalised settings such as mirror adjustment or background lighting. Infotainment system Depending on the equipment installed, you may be able to store your own data in the vehicle's Infotainment system. Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, this includes, for example: —Media files for playback of music, films or photos in an Infotainment system. —Address book data for use with a hands-free system or navigation system.
- Page 496 This enables selected apps on the mobile device to be used in the vehicle, e.g. navigation or music player. The mobile device and vehicle do not interact in any other ways than those described here, in particular the device does not actively access vehicle data. The type of further data processing depends on the app provider. The settings that you can adjust here depend on the app in question and the operating system on your mobile device. Online services If your vehicle is equipped with a connection to a mobile network, your vehicle will be able to exchange data with other systems. The vehicle can be connected to a mobile network using a transmitter and receiver unit in the vehicle or using your own mobile device. This mobile network connection enables you to use online functions. This includes online services and apps provided by Volkswagen or other third-party providers. Manufacturer services In the case of Volkswagen online services, Volkswagen describes the respective functions in a suitable place, e.g. in a separate service description or on an Internet page, and the associated privacy information is provided. Personal data may be required in order to provide online services. For this, data is exchanged over a secure connection, e.g. using the designated IT systems of the manufacturer. Any collection, processing and use of personal data that goes beyond the provision of the service takes place exclusively according to legal regulations, contractual agreements or the necessary permission. You can activate and deactivate the services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee and in some cases also disable the vehicle's entire data connection. This does not apply to any functions and services required by law, e.g. emergency call systems. Third-party services If you are able to use online services provided by a party other than the manufacturer, these services are the sole responsibility of the provider in question and are subject to this provider's data protection policy and terms and conditions of use. Volkswagen has no influence over the content exchanged as part of these services. Please refer to the provider in question for information about the type, scope and purpose of the collection and use of personal data related to third-party services. WARNING Incorrect use of the diagnostic interface can cause malfunctions, which can result in accidents and serious injuries. ● Never read the event memory yourself using the diagnostic interface. ● The event memory should be read only by a qualified workshop using the diagnostic interface. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership for this purpose. Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main task of an event data recorder is to record data in particular accident scenarios or situations which are similar to an accident, e.g. when the airbags are triggered or when there is a collision with an obstacle on the road. These data help in analysis of how a vehicle system behaved in these situations. The event data recorder records data relating to driving dynamics and the restraint system for a short period of ten seconds or less. This information includes, for example: —how various systems in your vehicle have functioned. —whether the seat belts of the driver and front passenger were fastened. —the extent to which the driver pressed the brake or accelerator pedal.
- Page 497 —how fast the vehicle was travelling. These data help to obtain a better understanding of the circumstances in the situations where accidents and injuries have occurred. Data from driver assist systems are also recorded. In addition to information about whether the systems were switched on or off, available only to a restricted extent or inactive, it is also possible to determine whether these functions steered, accelerated or braked the vehicle in the above-described situations. Depending on the vehicle equipment, these systems include the following: —adaptive cruise control. —lane keeping system. —Park Assist. —emergency braking function. The data of the event data recorder are recorded only if a particular situation occurs which is similar to an accident. No recordings occur under normal driving conditions. Audio or video data from the vehicle interior or vehicle surroundings are not stored. Personal data such as name, gender, age or accident location are also not recorded at any time. However, third parties such as law enforcement agencies can use appropriate means to link the content of the event data recorder with other sources of data and thus establish a reference to persons as part of an accident investigation. In order to read the data in the event data recorder you need the necessary special equipment, a connection to the legally required diagnostic interface (on-board diagnosis) and the ignition must be switched on. Volkswagen will not access, read or process data from the event data recorder unless the vehicle owner ( or lessee in the case of leasing) grants their permission. Exceptions to this are contractual or legal provisions. Due to its legal product monitoring obligations, Volkswagen is entitled to use the data for field monitoring and also for research purposes and quality improvements. For research purposes, Volkswagen makes the data available to third parties in anonymous form, in other words without any reference to the individual vehicle, vehicle owner or lessee. Information stickers and plates Stickers and plates showing important information for vehicle operation are factory-fitted in the engine compartment and on certain vehicle parts. —Never remove stickers and plates or render them illegible. —If vehicle parts bearing stickers or plates are removed from the vehicle, replacement stickers or plates with the same information must be applied properly to the new parts by the qualified workshop. Safety certificate There is a safety certificate on the door pillar of the driver door which states that all necessary safety standards and specifications from the transport safety authorities of the particular country were met at the time of production. The month and year of production and the vehicle identification number may also be listed. Observe notes in the owner's manual. WARNING Handling the vehicle incorrectly will increase the risk of accident and injuries. ● Observe legal requirements. ● Observe the owner's manual.
- Page 498 Fluids in the air conditioning system Refrigerant in the air conditioning system The sticker in the engine compartment contains information regarding the type and quantity of refrigerant used in the vehicle's air conditioning system. The sticker is located at the front of the engine compartment, close to the coolant filler neck. Warning: the air conditioning system must always be serviced by trained specialists. Type of refrigerant. Type of refrigerant oil. See workshop information (available only for Volkswagen dealerships). The air conditioning system must always be serviced by trained specialists. Flammable refrigerant. Make sure you dispose of all components correctly and never install components taken from older vehicles or recycling facilities into the vehicle. Refrigerant oil in the air conditioning system The air conditioning system is filled with a refrigerant oil. The label on the air conditioning compressor states the type and (→ Repairs and technical modifications) amount of refrigerant oil used WARNING In order to ensure safe and risk-free operation, always have the air conditioning system serviced by trained specialists. NOTICE ● Never repair the air conditioning system's evaporator using spare parts taken from older vehicles or recycling facilities, or other such spare parts. ● USA and Canada: Spare parts for the evaporator of the air-conditioning system must be certified and marked in accordance with SAE standards J2842 HFO-1234y and R744.
- Page 499 Infotainment system and antennas The aerials for the Infotainment system are installed at different points in the vehicle: —On the inside of the rear window. —On the inside of the rear side windows. —On the inside of the windscreen. —On the roof of the vehicle. Aerials on the interior of the windows can be identified as thin wires. NOTICE Aerials located on the inside of the windows could be damaged by corrosive or acidic substances or if hard objects rub against the window. ● Do not affix any stickers over metal wires, e.g. in the area of the rear window. ● Never clean the aerials with corrosive or acidic agents. NOTICE A retrofitted Infotainment system must be compatible with the aerial amplifier fitted as standard in the vehicle. The aerial amplifier could otherwise be damaged.
- Page 500 Component protection Some electronic components and control units are fitted with component protection as standard, e.g. the Infotainment system. The component protection permits a qualified workshop to legitimately install or replace components and control units. The component protection prevents the full operation of factory-supplied components outside the vehicle in the following situations: —Installation in other vehicles, e.g. after theft. —Operation of components outside the vehicle. If a text message about component protection appears in the display of the instrument cluster or the screen of the Infotainment system, go to a qualified workshop.
- Page 501 Information in accordance with the EU Chemicals Regulation REACH In accordance with the European regulations on chemicals, known as R EACH, Volkswagen would like to inform you about the substances that may be found in your vehicle. You can access this information online using your vehicle identification number : https://reachinfo.volkswagen.com...
- Page 502 Disposal of used batteries and electronic devices Used batteries Like electrical devices, used batteries must also be collected separately and recycled by the end user. This is indicated by the symbol with the crossed-through waste bin . As the end user, you are subject to the legal obligation to return used batteries. Batteries that contain heavy metals are marked with the chemical symbols Hg (mercury), Cd (cadmium) and/or Pb (lead). Heavy metals can damage the health of human beings and animals and can accumulate in the environment. In order to avoid these consequences, you must ensure separate collection and proper return of used batteries. —Used batteries can be returned to the Volkswagen dealership in EU member states and other countries. —Further information on return and recycling can be obtained from your Volkswagen dealership. Old electrical/electronic devices Your vehicle contains electrical and electronic devices such as the SD card of the navigation system or remote controls. These devices are marked with a symbol showing a crossed-through waste bin . The corresponding legal regulations stipulate that old devices with this marking must be collected and disposed of separately from normal household waste. You can hand in these devices at local disposal centres or any nationally authorised return systems. Batteries or rechargeable batteries contained in the devices that are not a fixed part of the device in question must be removed first and disposed of separately as batteries. —You are responsible for deleting any personal data that is stored on the old devices. —Further information on return and recycling can be obtained from your Volkswagen dealership. USA and Canada: Batteries for vehicle keys and remote controls can contain perchlorate. For correct handling of this substance, observe the information on the website http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Observe all legal requirements for handling and disposal of batteries. Volkswagen recommends having replacement and disposal of these batteries performed by a Volkswagen dealership or a qualified workshop.
- Page 503 Declaration of conformity The respective manufacturers declare herewith that the following products conform, at the time of vehicle production, with the basic requirements and other relevant laws and regulations, including FCC Part 15.19, FCC Part 15.21 and RSS-Gen Issue 1: Radio-based equipment —Electronic immobiliser. —Vehicle key. —Remote control for the auxiliary heater —Keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access. —Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). —Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) incl. City Emergency Braking System. —Blind Spot Monitor including Rear Traffic Alert —Pedestrian Monitoring. Electrical equipment —12-volt socket. (→ Sockets) —Depending on the vehicle equipment and country, additional sockets with a voltage of 100 to 230 volts...
- Page 504 Third party copyright law information http://www.volkswagen.com/softwareinfo Some of the products installed in the vehicle contain software components for which Open Source licences are required. A list of the Open Source software components used including information on copyright laws as well as the respective Open Source licence conditions and the corresponding licence text is available via the aforementioned website. The source code of certain Open Source software components can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle. The manufacturer will provide you with the source code according to the respective licence conditions, whereby you will only be charged with the cost of making it available (for example, costs for the data storage device and postage and packing). You can find the required information at the aforementioned website.
- Page 505 Returning and scrapping end-of-life vehicles Returning end-of-life vehicles At the end of its life, your vehicle must be recycled and disposed of in an environmentally appropriate way. For this reason, the last owners of vehicles in the EU and many other countries are legally obliged to take their vehicle to an approved recycling facility. Volkswagen has already made the corresponding preparations for this: a comprehensive network of vehicle return centres is available in all EU countries and many other countries, where you can hand over your vehicle. Return of the vehicle in this way is free of charge within the EU if the national regulations are complied with (vehicle is complete, does not contain any waste etc.). You can obtain information about vehicle return centres from your Volkswagen dealership. Scrapping The relevant safety requirements must be observed when scrapping the vehicle or its individual components, e.g. the airbag system and belt tensioners. Qualified workshops are familiar with these requirements.
- Page 506 Information about vehicles with N1 approval (light commercial vehicle) Please observe the following for vehicles used to transport goods with a maximum permitted weight of up to 3.5 t (N1 approval in Europe): Variants and number of seats There are a number of designs for N1 vehicles based on a Volkswagen passenger car. The number of seats may be restricted to two or four. Vehicles with two seats: there is no floor covering in the rear of the vehicle interior because there is no rear bench seat → Vehicles with four seats: the centre seat on the rear bench seat c annot be used → Transporting children safely As in vehicles with passenger car approval (M1), approved child restraint systems can be used on the seats . Trailer towing If the vehicle is approved for towing a trailer, observe any local regulations for driving with a trailer and using a towing bracket. If the vehicle exceeds the gross vehicle weight rating or the rear axle load, the vehicle speed must not exceed 80 km/h when towing a trailer. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are permitted. Observe local speed limits. These may be lower for vehicles with trailers than for vehicles without trailers. Any permitted excess loads for the vehicle are entered in the vehicle documents. If no excess load has been entered, it is possible to drive up to 100 km/h, although local regulations must be observed. Technical data Technical data can be found in the vehicle documents. WARNING Risk of injury and electric shock from exposed wires. ● Ensure the luggage compartment trim is installed upon or before delivery, so that the cables in the rear of the vehicle are covered up when using the vehicle. WARNING Risk of severe injuries due to persons being transported incorrectly. ● Never transport adults or children in the middle of the rear bench seat. ● The lack of restraint systems such as seat belt and head restraint can result in serious or fatal injury in the event of an accident. WARNING Risk of severe and fatal injuries.
- Page 507 Simplified declaration of conformity Your vehicle is equipped with various radio systems. The manufacturers of these radio systems declare that this equipment complies with Directive 2014/53/EU where required by law. The complete text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo Ukraine Your vehicle is equipped with various radio systems. The manufacturers of these radio systems declare that this equipment complies with Directive TR-355 where required by law. The complete text of the declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo...
- Page 508 Manufacturers' addresses For components that, due to their size or nature, cannot be provided with a sticker, the respective manufacturers' addresses as required by law are listed here: Door handle with NFC radio technology HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA Rixbecker Straße 75 59552 Lippstadt GERMANY WITTE VELBERT GMBH & CO. KG Hoeferstrasse 3-15 42551 Velbert GERMANY Radio remote control (auxiliary heater), auxiliary heating (transmitter/receiver unit) Digades GmbH Äußere Weberstr. 20 02763 Zittau GERMANY Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE Friedrichshafener Str. 9 82205 Gilching GERMANY Tyre pressure sensors HUF Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH Gewerbestraße 40 75015 Bretten GERMANY ID. Cockpit LG Electronics European Shared Service Center B.V. Krijgsman 1 1186 DM Amstelveen The Netherlands...
- Page 509 ADHL5D, BNF_HL, BNF_LL, DTCO 1381, DoC 0001 mobile key_DFR, EFAS-4.10, EHL2, eNSF, EZS-VW-Touareg, FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS12PM, FS14, FS19, FS125C, FS1744, FS1744M, FS94, G09CO4 Key, Instrument cluster 1, Instrument cluster 2, Instrument cluster 3, Kessy MQB-A, MQB-B B, MQB-B H, Kessy PQ35, Kessy PQ35GP, Kessy MQB37W, LCW05-VWE1, LCW05- VWE5, LCW05-SEE5, LCW05-SEE6, NSF_HL, NSF_LL1, NSF_LL3, RSB19, VK2, VWTOUA PKETOUA, VWTOUA RKETOUA, 2017- 02-EU-LF_IC_IM, Immobilizer integrated in dashboard module instrument cluster, 17101001, 17101002, 17101010, 17101021, 17101022, 17101023, 17101031, 17101032, 17101033, 17101034, 17101041, 17101042, 17101043, 17101051, 17101052, 17101053, 17101054, 17101055, 17101056, 17101057, 17101071,. 17101072, 18020501, 18020531, 18020532, 18020533, 18020534, 2017-02-EULF_IC_IM, 3G0.837.205, 5ZA 010 176. Air conditioning This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Radio remote control (auxiliary heater), auxiliary heater (transmitter/receiver unit) . EasyStart R, STH VW - 50000884, STH VW - 50001219, Sender STH VW - 50000886, Sender STH VW - 50001194, Telestart, 50000864 D208L VW, 9019510C / Receiver of aux heater 869 MHz, 9019747B / Remote control of aux heater 868 MHz, Tyres This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Tyre inflation pressure sensors . AG2FW4, TSSRE4Dg, TSSRE4Uf, TSSSG4G5, TSSSG4G5b. Control unit This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Central control unit, door control unit, door handle with NFC radio technology, valet keycard, wireless charging function . BC-Module, BCM PQ26 ROW (502N1xFOx), BCMevo, BCMevoC, BCMevo5, BCM2, BCM2R, BR11, DHA20, HUF71110, KGF-Max, Mobile Key 4K0.959.754.xx , NFCTGS, RXI-35-433-DC, WCH-185, WCH-186, 3G0.837.205, 3G0.837.206, 5WK50248, 5WK50254, 5WK50474. Driver assist systems This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Radar sensors for assistance systems, Car2X communication . ARS4-B, ARS5-B, BSD 3.0, FR5CPEC, LCA 2.0A, LRR3, LRR3 Master & Slave, LRR4, LRR4R, MRRe14FCR, MRRevo14F, MRR1Plus, MRR1Rear, RSB19, RS4, R3TR. Infotainment and online communication This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Infotainment system, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi hotspot, mobile phone interface, OCU, Volkswagen Car-Net “Security & Service”,...
- Page 510 Volkswagen Car-Net “e-Remote”. ALPS UGZZF-102B, ALPS UGZZF-202B, A109, A473/A476/A750, A475/A754, A486/A449/A493/183,A580/A270, DataPlug, HT- 5, HT-6, HT-6d, HT-6e, L40VW2, L53VW2, L56VW2, L62VW2, L69VW2, L73VW2, L77VW2, MEB ICAS3, MIB Global Entry/Standard, MIB Global Entry/Standard, MIB Standard 2 – PQ +/NAV with BT, MIB Standard 2 – PQ +/NAV with BT and WLAN, MIB Standard 2 – ZR with BT, MIB Standard 2 – ZR +/Nav with BT, MIB Standard 2 – ZR +/Nav mit BT and WLAN, MIB2 Entry, MIB2 Main-Unit, MIB2STD, MIB2STD Nav, MIB 2 Standard PQ, MIB 2 Standard ZR, MIB3 OI, MIB3E_MQB_BT, MIB3E_MQB_BTWIFI, MMI3G, MMI3G RU, New Radio Ultra Low SBB, New Radio Ultra Low SBB DAB, New Radio Ultra Low SBT, Radio Ultra Low Touch, RRVW401*, RRVW402*, RRVW402B, TLAHW3IU-E, TLAHW3IU-W, TLVHM3IU-E, TLVHM3IU-W, TLVHW3IU-E, TLVHW3IU-W, TLVLM3IU-E, TLVLM3IU-R, TLVLW3IU-R, TUVM02IU-C, TUVM02IU-E, TUVM03IU-C, TUVM03IU-E, TLVHE4IU-E, TLVHE4IU-R, 7C0.035.153, 7C0.035.153.A, 7LA.035.153.A. Aerials This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Aerials, aerial amplifier, connection to the external aerial. DSRC CAN Module / EFAS-4 DU(200046-8) CSA-1, LTE-MBC-EU, LTE-MBC-EU2, MIB IW G2 AM/FM/TV, MIB IW G2 FM/DAB, UMTS/GSM-MMC, UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2, UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG3, 3789.01, 920 301 A, 920 611 A 1K8.035.552, 1K8.035.552.C, 1K8.035.552.F, 1S0.035.577.A, 10A.035.577.A, 10A.035.577.B, 10A.035.577.C, 10A.035.577.D, 11A.035.577.A, 11A.035.577.B, 11A.035.577.C, 11A.035.577.D, 11A.035.577.F, 11A.035.577.M, 11E.035.577.A, 11E.035.577.B, 11E.035.577.C, 11E.035.577.D, 2GA.035.577, 2GA.035.577.A, 2GA.035.577.B, 2GC.035.577, 2GC.035.577.A, 2GC.035.577.S, 2GM.035.577.A, 2G0.035.577.A, 2K5.035.525.AB, 2K5.035.525.AC, 2K5.035.525.AD, 2K5.035.525.AE, 2K5.035.525.L, 2K5.035.525.M, 2K5.035.525.Q, 2K5.035.525.T, 2K5.035.526.AA, 2K5.035.526.AB, 2K5.035.526.AC, 2K5.035.526.AD, 2K5.035.526.AE, 2K5.035.526.AF, 2K5.035.526.L, 2K5.035.526.M, 2K5.035.526.Q, 2K5.035.526.T, 2K5.035.532.Q, 2K5.035.532.R, 2K5.035.532.S, 2K5.035.540.A, 3C0.035.507.AA, 3C0.035.507.N, 3C0.035.507.P, 3G0.980.611, 3G5.035.577, 3G5.035.577.A, 3G5.035.577.B, 3G5.035.577.G, 3G5.035.577.H, 3G5.035.577.J, 3G5.035.577.K, 3G7.035.577.A, 3G7.035.577.D, 3G8.035.577, 3G8.035.577.A, 3G8.035.577.B, 3G8.035.577.E, 3G8.035.577.F, 3G8.035.577.G, 3G8.035.577.H, 3G8.035.577.J, 3G8.035.577.K, 3G9.035.577, 3G9.035.577.A, 3G9.035.577.B, 3G9.035.577.G, 3G9.035.577.H, 3G9.035.577.J, 3G9.035.577.K, 3V5.035.577, 3V5.035.577.A, 3V5.035.577.B, 3V5.035.577.F, 3789.01, 4G5.035.225.B, 4G8.035.225.B, 4G9.035.225.B, 4N0.035.503.AB, 4N0.035.503.AC, 4N0.035.503.AG, 4N0.035.503.AF, 4N0.035.503.E, 4N0.035.503.F, 4N0.035.503.J, 4N0.035.503.L, 4N0.035.503.M, 4N0.035.503.Q, 4S0.035.225.A, 4S0.035.225.D. 5C3.035.552, 5C3.035.552.A, 5C3.035.552.B, 5C5.035.552, 5C5.035.552.A, 5C5.035.552.B, 5E5.035.577.A, 5E5.035.577.B, 5E6.035.577, 5E6.035.577.A, 5E6.035.577.B, 5E7.035.577, 5E7.035.577.A, 5E7.035.577.B, 5F4.035.225, 5F4.035.225.A, 5F4.035.225.B, 5G6.035.577, 5G6.035.577.A, 5G6.035.577.B, 5G6.035.577.E, 5G6.035.577.F, 5G9.035.577, 5G9.035.577.A, 5G9.035.577.B, 5G9.035.577.G, 5G9.035.577.H, 5G9.035.577.J, 5G9.035.577.K, 5H0.035.510, 5H6.035.577, 5H6.035.577.A, 5H6.035.577.B, 5H6.035.577.T, 5L0.035.501.A, 5LE.035.577.A, 5LG.035.577.A, 5NA.035.577, 5NA.035.577.A, 5NA.035.577.B, 5NA.035.577.E, 5NA.035.577.F, 5QD.035.507.AG, 5QD.035.507.AH, 5QG.035.507.AG, 5QG.035.507.AH, 5Q0.035.507.A, 5Q0.035.507.AG, 5Q0.035.507.AH, 5Q0.035.507.B, 5Q0.035.507.C, 5Q0.035.507.P, 5Q0.035.507.Q, 5Q0.035.507.S, 5TA.035.577, 5TA.035.577.A, 5TA.035.577.B, 5WA.035.507.A, 5WA.035.507.B, 5WA.035.507.E, 5WA.035.507.F, 5WA.035.507.T, 5WD.035.507.A, 5WD.035.507.B, 5WG.035.507.A, 5WG.035.507.B, 510.035.577, 510.035.577.A, 510.035.577.B, 565.035.577, 565.035.577.A, 565.035.577.C, 575.035.225, 575.035.225.A, 575.035.225.B.
- Page 511 920 417 010, 920 437 003, 920 437 023, 920 437 035, 920 437 303, 920 437 323, 920 437 335, 920 460 003, 920 460 009, 920 460 018, 920 460 025, 920 460 028, 920 460 042, 920 460 047, 920 460 069, 920 460 303, 920 460 318, 920 460 325, 920 460 328, 920 460 342, 920 460 347, 920 460 369, 920 461 001, 920 461 002, 920 461 003, 920 461 004, 920 461 005, 920 481 002, 920 481 003, 920 481 004, 920 481 012, 920 481 013, 920 481 014, 920 554 001, 920 554 002, 920 554 003, 920 554 004, 920 611 001, 920 611 002, 920 611 011, 920 611 012, 920 615 001, 920 615 002, 920 627 003, 920 627 007, 920 627 023, 920 627 024, 920 627 048, 920 627 049, 920 639 001, 920 639 002, 920 639 003, 920 639 011. Radio equipment, frequency band, maximum transmit power If not otherwise stated, the specifications apply to all Volkswagen models or to vehicles that are equipped with the respective radio system . Deviations are marked by footnotes. µW = Microwatt, mW = Milliwatt, W = Watt. Radar sensors for assist systems Frequency band, maximum transmit power 6.0 – 8.5 GHz (6.52 GHz, 7.04 GHz, 7.56 GHz) -6,2 dBm EIRP Front: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz 0.1 W 76 – 77 GHz 0.66 W 76 – 77 GHz 3.16 W 76 – 77 GHz 2 W EIRP 76 – 77 GHz 33 dBm EIRP 76 – 77 GHz 0.59 W side: 77 – 81 GHz 0.22 W rear: 76 – 77 GHz 24.05 - 24.25 GHz 0.1 W EIRP Keyless Access 125 kHz 22.7 dBμA/m 434.42 MHz 32 µW 868.000 – 868.600 MHz...
- Page 512 ID. Cockpit 125 kHz 5.4 dBuA/m Electronic immobiliser 125 kHz +/- 10 kHz 5.4 dBμA/m Remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7 – 869.2 MHz 25 mW 869.0 MHz 868.0 – 868.6 MHz 3.1 mW 868.3 MHz Auxiliary heater (Transmitter / Receiver unit) 868.0 – 868.6 MHz 23.5 mW 868.3 MHz 868.7 – 869.2 MHz 23.5 mW 869.0 MHz 868.0 – 868.6 MHz 10 mW 868.525 MHz Remote control key (vehicle) 433.05 – 434.78 MHz, 10 mW 433.05 – 434.79 MHz 59 µW 868.0 – 868.6 MHz 25 mW 434.42 MHz 0.5 mW Bluetooth 2402 – 2480 MHz 6.1 mW 2402 – 2480 MHz 0.05 W 2400 – 2483.5 MHz 10 mW 2,408 – 2,480 MHz Outside door handle with NFC radio technology 13.56 MHz 0.67 mW...
- Page 513 Wireless charging function 105 – 115 kHz 111 kHz 42dBμA/m Car2X auxiliary antenna 5855 – 5925 MHz 2 W EIRP Wi-Fi hotspot 2400 – 2484 MHz 100 mW 2400 – 2483.5 MHz 24 mW 5150 – 5250 MHz 25 mW 5725 – 5845 MHz 25 mW 5725 – 5850 MHz 6.1 mW Garage door opener 868.00 – 868.60 MHz 25 mW 868.70 – 869.20 MHz 433.05 – 434.79 MHz 10 mW 40.660 – 40.700 MHz 26.957 – 27.293 MHz Compensator GSM 900 (uplink: 880 – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 – 960 MHz) GSM 1800 (uplink: 1,710 – 1,785 MHz / downlink: 1,805 – 1,880 MHz) WCDMA FDDI (uplink: 1,920 – 1,980 MHz / downlink: 2,110 – 2,170 MHz) 0.125 W WCDMA FDDIII (uplink: 1710 – 1785 MHz / downlink: 1805 – 1880 MHz) 0.125 W WCDMA FDDV (uplink: 880 – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 – 960 MHz) 0.125 W LTE FDD1 (uplink: 1,920 – 1,980 MHz / downlink: 2,110 – 2,170 MHz) 0.2 W LTE FDD3 (uplink: 1,710 – 1,785 MHz / downlink: 1,805 – 1,880 MHz) 0.2 W LTE FDD7 (uplink: 2,500 – 2,570 MHz / downlink: 2,620 – 2,690 MHz) 0.2 W LTE FDD8 (uplink: 880 – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 – 960 MHz) 0.2 W...
- Page 514 GSM 850: 824–849 MHz GSM 900: 880–915 MHz GSM 1800: 1,710–1,785 MHz GSM 1900: 1,850 – 1,910 MHz WCDMA FDDI: 1,920 – 1,980 MHz 0.25 W WCDMA FDDV: 824 – 849 MHz We Connect GSM 900: 880 – 915 MHz GSM 1800: 1,710 – 1,785 MHz WCDMA band 1: 1,920 – 1,980 MHz 0.25 W WCDMA band 3: 1710 – 1785 MHz WCDMA band 8: 880 – 915 MHz FDD LTE band 1: 1,920 – 1,980 MHz 0.2 W FDD LTE band 3: 1,710 – 1,785 MHz FDD LTE band 7: 2,500 – 2,570 MHz FDD LTE band 8: 880 – 915 MHz FDD LTE band 20: 832 – 862 MHz FDD LTE band 28A: 703 – 733 MHz Car-Net Security & Service GSM 900 (880.2 – 959.8 MHz) GSM 1800 (1710.2 – 1879.8 MHz) UMTS B1 (1,920 – 2,170 MHz) 0.25 W UMTS B8 (880–960 MHz) GPS (1,575.42 MHz) Car-Net e-Remote GSM 850 (824 – 849 MHz) GSM 900 (880 – 915 MHz) GSM 1800 (1,710 – 1,785 MHz) GSM 1900 (1,850 – 1,910 MHz) EGPRS 850 (824 – 849 MHz) 0.5 W EGPRS 900 (880 – 915 MHz) EGPRS 1800 (1,710 – 1,785 MHz) 0.4 W EGPRS 1900 (1,850 – 1,910 MHz) UMTS I (1,920 – 1,980 MHz) 0.25 W UMTS II (1,850 – 1,910 MHz) UMTS III (IX) (1,710 – 1,785 MHz)
- Page 515 GSM 900: 880 – 915 MHz GSM 1800: 1,710 – 1,785 MHz WCDMA FDDI: 1,920 – 1,980 MHz / GPS (1.57542 GHz) 0.25 W Egypt General information on the data TAC.07021815923.WIR, TAC.24061918671.WIR, TAC.24061918672.WIR Algeria 31.AF/528/DT/DG/ARPT/18 Argentina C-17908, C-18053, C-21797, C-22292, C-22394. H-17562, H-17568, H-20369, H-20370, H-20731, H-20732, H-20733, H-21796, H-21901, H-21902, H-21961, H-21962, H-22190, H-22191, H-22192, H-22240, H-22301, H-22362, H-22363, H-22364, H-22377, H-22378, H-22379, H-22380, H-22381, H-22382, H-22383, H-22524, H-22793, H-22794, H-22855, H–22856, H-22961, H-23480, H-23481, H-24442, H-24559, H-24598, H-24931. Australia ACN/ARBN 004 528 778 / 58004528778, ABN 81 145 810 206, N11042, RCMA020050903, 2150-01, 2152-01 Bahrain 3002, 3003, DLM / 1405 Botswana BOCRA/TA/REGISTERED No: 3372, 2018/2026, 2018/3012, 2018/3991, 2018/3992, 2018/4129, 2018/4130, 2018/4131, 2018/4132, 2018/4133, 2018/4134, 2018/4135, 2018/4136, 2018/4193, 2018/4194, 2018/4195, 2018/4196, 2019/4311, 2019/4997, 2019/4998, 2019/5045, 2019/5046, 2020/3991, 2020/3992, 2020/5158, 2020/5159, 2020/5191, 2020/5470 Brazil 03323-18-02930, 05531-16-02149, 05674-15-06830, 05674-16-06830, 07084-18-03745. 0850-13-3745, 0939-14-2856, 0940-14-2856, 1140-12-2856, 1140-14-2856, 1711-12-5364, 3002-09-3745, 3557-15- 5364, 4057-14-6068. Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
- Page 516 00939-19-06673, 01812-19-05364, 01813-19-05364, 01814-19-05364, 02450-17-02010, 02452-17-02010, 02992-14- 06673, 03563-17-05364, 03764-17-05386, 03833-18-06353, 03834-18-06353, 04057-14-06068, 04282-19-01925, 04383-18-06673, 04998-19-02405, 04999-19-02405, 05273-18-02496, 05292-18-06353, 05293-18-06353, 05296-18- 06353, 05297-18-06353, 05505-18-06353, 05506-18-06353, 05507-18-06353, 05508-18-06353, 05509-18-06353, 05511-18-06353, 05512-18-06353, 06215-16-03430, 06763-18-06353, 06962-18-06353, 0716-15-3745, 07183-18- 06353, 07184-18-06353, 07185-18-06353, 07186-18-06353, 07189-18-06353, 07188-18-06353, 07189-18-06353, 07191-18-06353, 09275-19-06353. Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados. Para maiores informações, consulte o site da ANATEL - w ww.anatel.gov.br. Brunei AA-000081, DTA-001794, DTA-001977, DTA-001978, DTA-001983, DTA-001985, DTA-001986, DTA-002302, DTA- 002306, DTA-002307, DTA-004928, DTA-004929, DTA-005273, DTA-005532 DRQ-D-MAJU-02-2011-111083: DTA-001793, DTA-001981, DTA-001982, DTA-002433, DTA-003220, DTA-005975 LPD-37256 Chile 3458/DO Nº45141/f26, 12190/DO Nº 48994/F26 58798, 58799 Dominican Republic DE-0000320-Cc-17445, DE-0001203-19, DE-0001204-19, 183507 Europe and countries that approve radio equipment according to European Directives: See EU Declarations of Conformities at www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo. Ghana BR3-1M-GE2: 087, 088, 089, 0AF, 0BA, 0BB, 0BC, 0B0, 0B3, 0B4, 0B7, 0D2, 0BA, 0BC, 0EC, 0ED, 0EE, 10A, 10B, 130. 1R3-1M-7E1-160, 1R3-1M-7E1-0B7, 2R9-1H-7E0-0DA, 3R8-8M-7DF-2AA, 6X6-4H-7EO-OF3. EX6-6M-GE2-17B, ZRO-M8-7E3-X90, ZRO-M8-7E3-X92, ZR0-M8-7E3-20B, ZRO-M8-7E3-27B, ZRO-1H-7E3-14E. Hong Kong US0031800001, HK0011902060, HK0011902061, HK0022000048 India Vehicle identification number...
- Page 517 ETA-1609/17-RLO(NE), ETA-SD-20190500531, ETA-SD-20190500547, ETA-SD-20190702496, ETA-SD-20190702597, ETA-SD-20190702602, NR-ETA/7218-RLO(NR), NR-ETA/7219-RLO(NR), NR-ETA/7220-RLO(NR). Indonesia Certificates are available at the following Internet address www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo. 33651/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 2181, 33652/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 218134539/I/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 4211, 38132/I/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 2130, 47817/SDPPI/2016, PLG ID: 6094, 50459/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 6051, 53856/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 4211, 55438/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 6051, 55776/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7205, 56625/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 57406/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 57647/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 57687/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 58206/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 5834, 62361/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 8837 PLG ID: 4334: 58849/SDPPI/2018, 60924/SDPPI/2019, 61642/SDPPI/2019, 62637/SDPPI/2019, 62638/SDPPI/2019, 62825/SDPPI/2019, 62826/SDPPI/2019, 62827/SDPPI/2019, 62828/SDPPI/2019, 63076/SDPPI/2019, 63077/SDPPI/2019, 63078/SDPPI/2019, 63079/SDPPI/2019, 63080/SDPPI/2019, 63081/SDPPI/2019, 63082/SDPPI/2019, 63128/SDPPI/2019, 63129/SDPPI/2019, 63130/SDPPI/2019, 63131/SDPPI/2019, 63132/SDPPI/2019, 63133/SDPPI/2019, 63134/SDPPI/2019, 63135/SDPPI/2019, 63136/SDPPI/2019, 63137/SDPPI/2019, 63138/SDPPI/2019, 63139/SDPPI/2019, 63140/SDPPI/2019, 63147/SDPPI/2019, 63160/SDPPI/2019, 63161/SDPPI/2019, 63162/SDPPI/2019, 63577/SDPPI/2019, 63578/SDPPI/2019, 63579/SDPPI/2019, 63580/SDPPI/2019, 63581/SDPPI/2019, 63582/SDPPI/2019, 63583/SDPPI/2019, 64639/SDPPI/2019, 64640/SDPPI/2019, 66074/SDPPI/2020, 67149/SDPPI/2020, 67154/SDPPI/2020, 67359/SDPPI/2020, 67495/SDPPI/2020, 67512/SDPPI/2020. Iran Iran_Kombiinstrument_MDE_VIS_1710 Israel 51-63653, 51-69416, 51-69417, 63-63304, 63-66687. Jordan TRC/LPD/: 2014/248, 2016/538, 2016/584, 2017/63, 2017/254, 2018/1, 2018/381, 2019/153, 2019/233, 2019/234. TRC No.: T/4/11/11/3680, T/4/11/11/3681, T/4/11/11/4387 , T/4/11/11/9851 Columbia 2018300044, 2019802791, 2019802792 Kuwait Ref 2410, 3399, 3421. Lebanon...
- Page 518 2665/E&M/2018, 11372 Malaysia CIDF15000490, CIDF15000578, CIDF17000143, HIDF1500019, MRR14F, ARS4-B RAAU/05C/0415/S(14-3022), RAAY/84A/0618/S(18-2241), RAAY/85A/0618/S(18-2242), RAAY/86A/0618/S(18-2378), RAAY/87A/0718/S(18-2596), RAAY/89A/0718/S(18-3107), RAAY/92A/1218/S(18-4731), RALM/69A/1018/S(18-3829), RCFL/22A/0818/S(18-3109), RCFL/24A/0818/S(18-3152), RDDC/72A/0518/S(18-1697), RDDK/22A/1016/S(16-3306, RFC/21A/0718/S(18-2717), RFC/23A/0818/S(18-3153), RFCL/09A/0218/S(18-0609), RFCL/13A/0618/S(18-2379), RFCL/14A/0618/S(18-2543), RFCL/15A/0718/S(18-2544), RFCL/18A/0718/S(18-2529), RFCL/19A/0718/S(18-2545), RFCL/20A/0718/S(18-2718), RCFL/22A/0818/S(18-3109), RCFL/24A/0818/S(18-3152), RFCL/26A/0918/S(18-3810), RFCL/27A/0918/S(18-3812), RFCL/28A/1018/S(18-3977), RFCL/29A/1018/S(18-4127), RFCL/30A/1018/S(18-4129), RFCL/31A/1018/S(18-3976), RFCL/33A/0619/S(19-2422), RFCL/35A/0719/S(19-2874), RFCL/34A/0619/S(19-2421), RFCL/36A/0719/S(19-2875), RFCL/41A/0220/S(20-0390), RFCL/42A/0220/S(20-0391), RFCL/44A/0320/S(20-1385) Morocco AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC : Numéro d’agrément, Date d’agrément MR 9778 ANRT 2014, 11/11/2014, MR 12123 ANRT 2016, 22/06/2016, MR 12623 ANRT 2016, 11/10/2016, MR 13255 ANRT 2017, 09/02/2017, MR 13900 ANRT 2017, 04/05/2017, MR 15669 ANRT 2018, 31/01/2018, MR 15674 ANRT 2018, 31/01/2018, MR 15675 ANRT 2018, 31/01/2018, MR 16606 ANRT 2018, 17.05.2018, MR 16657 ANRT 2018, 23.05.2018, MR 16860 ANRT 2018, 18.06.2018, MR 16861 ANRT 2018, 18.06.2018, MR 16905 ANRT 2018, 21.06.2018, MR 16906 ANRT 2018, 21.06.2018, MR 16907 ANRT 2018, 21.06.2018, MR 16908 ANRT 2018, 21.06.2018, MR 17015 ANRT 2018, 03.07.2018, MR 17016 ANRT 2018, 03.07.2018, MR 17079 ANRT 2018, 11.07.2018, MR 17080 ANRT 2018, 11.07.2018, MR 17201 ANRT 2018, 06.08.2018, MR 17202 ANRT 2018, 06.08.2018, MR 17203 ANRT 2018, 06.08.2018, MR 17204 ANRT 2018, 06.08.2018, MR 17505 ANRT 2018, 2018/09/14, MR 17528 ANRT 2018, 19/09/2018, MR 17576 ANRT 2018, 26/09/2018, MR 17678 ANRT 2018, 11.10.2018, MR 17679 ANRT 2018, 11.10.2018, MR 18103 ANRT 2018, 30.11.2018 MR 19106 ANRT 2019, 04.03.2019, MR 19108 ANRT 2019, 14.03.2019, MR 19338 ANRT 2019, 09.04.2019, MR 19339 ANRT 2019, 09.04.2019, MR 19768 ANRT 2019, 15.05.2019, MR 19769 ANRT 2019, 15.05.2019, MR 20859 ANRT 2019, 11.09.2019, MR 21807 ANRT 2019, 23.12.2019, MR 23231 ANRT 2020, 26.05.2020 Mauritius TA/2018/0084, TA/2019/0509, TA/2019/0510 Mexico IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/0311/2018 RCPAPR318-2005, RCPBOFR18-1885, RCPBOLR09-0828, RCPBOLR16-0518, RCPBOMR12-1538, RCPCOAR18-1800, RTIVWCO19-1185, RLVCO1820-0821, RLVCOAR15-0008, RLVCOBC16-1823, RLVHE0119-0720, RLVDER316-1666, RLVDER316-2005, RLVHEBC15-0293, RLVHEFS19-1298, RLVHERS17-0286, RLVMABN18-1512, RLVMABN18-1512-A1, RLVVIKO18-0155, RLVVIME19-1022, RLVVIME19-1023. RLVVW1718-1092, RLVVW1718-1169, RLVVW1718-1170, RLVVW1718-1171, RLVVW1718-1314, RLVVW1718-1315, RLVVW1718-1316, RLVVW1718-1317, RLVVW1718-1507, RLVVW1718-1508, RLVVW1718-1509, RLVVW1718-1517, RLVVW1718-1518, RLVVW1718-1519, RLVVW1718-1567, RLVVW1718-1568, RLVVW1718-1789, RLVVW1718-1790, RLVVW1718-1928, RLVVW1718-1929, RLVVW1719-1795, RLVVW1818-1248, RLVVW1818-1249, RLVVW1818-1258, RLVVW1819-0009, RLVVW1819-0023.
- Page 519 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Moldavia 024, 1014, 1024, 8526, MD OC TIP 024 A674-19, MD OC TIP 024 A675-19 Mozambique 450/DECH/DRI/INCM/2020 New Zealand R-NZ ABN 81 145 810 206, 2151-01, 2153-01 Nigeria Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission. NCC/TSNi/WN/TA/CERT/: 3137/2019, 3138/2019 Oman R/3370/16, R/5130/18_23/01/2018, R/6132/18_D172249, R/6696/18, R/7704/19, R/7752/19, R/8052/19_D090024, R/8056/19_D090024, R/8649/19_D090024, R/8749/19, R/9347/20_D172338. D080134: R/1733/14, R/2210/14, R/3621/16, R/3848/17, R/3957/17. D100428: R/5725/18, R/5772/18, R/5774/18, R/5819/18, R/5820/18, R/5884/18, R/5885/18, R/5886/18, R/5887/18, R/6021/18, R/6022/18, R/6023/18, R/6024/18, R/6166/18, R/6366/18, R/6372/18, R/6535/18, R/6616/18, R/6695/18, R/7383/19, R/7384/19, R/8171/19. Pakistan Pakistan Telecom Authority 9.1048/2018, Approved by PTA., Approved by PTA (2018). Paraguay Type plate...
- Page 520 216-11-I-000311, 2016-7-I-000186, 2018-06-I-000212, 2018-10-I-000480, 2018-10-I-000481, 2018-11-I-000612, 2019-01-I-000071, 2019-05-I-000243, 2019-07-I-0353 1297/2019, 1298/2019. Este vehiculo posee el siguiente componente de radiofrecuencias, homologado por la CONATEL – Paraguay. Philippines ESD-1816419C, ESD-1818098C, ESD-1919803C, ESD-1919804C Qatar CRA/SA/2016/R-5808, CRA/SA/2018/R-6820, CRA/SM/2018/R-7447, CRA/SM/2019/R-8053, CRA/SM/2019/R-8054 Zambia ZMB/ZICTA/TA/: 2018/8/38, 2018/8/39, 2018/8/40, 2018/8/41, 2018/10/10, 2018/10/15, 2018/10/17, 2018/10/18, 2018/10/19, 2018/10/20, 2018/10/21, 2018/10/24, 2018/10/25, 2018/10/26, 2018/10/27, 2018/12/16, 2019/7/7, 2020/2/35 Saudi Arabia 29563, 2019-1205, 2019-1221 Serbia P1617197200, P1619073700, P1619073800, P1619095800, P1620069300, И005 12, И005 17, И005 18, И005 19, И005 20, И011 14, И011 15 И011 17, И011 18, И011 19, 34540-768/18-5, 34540-1313/16-3. Singapore Complies with IMDA Standards: 103238, DA103787, DA104682, DA104682 (N0688-15), DA105282, DA107974 DB103858, DB106879, DB106879 (N3083-18) G1594-19, N2152-20, N2404-19, N2405-19, N3688-18, N4975-17. South Africa TA-2009/464, TA2012/1747, TA-2013/2465, TA-2014/1783, TA-2016/501, TA-2016/820, TA-2016/2759, TA-2016-3407, TA-2016/3539, TA-2017/2824, TA-2018/998, TA-2018/2868, TA-2018/5159, TA-2019/115, TA-2019/582, TA-2019/583, TA-2019/5101, TA-2019/5116, TA-2019/5167. Thailand Class A NBTC ID: 5700619-XXXXMRRe14FCR, NBTC ID: A57004-17-xxxx, NBTC ID: A57019-16-xxxx, RT 1751, RT 1752, 255.A.2560, FPK8IMMO5D 1) เค องโทรคมนาคมและ ปกร ความสอดค องตามมาตรฐานห อ อ าหนดของกสทช.
- Page 521 2) เค อง ท คมนาคม ระ บการแ ค นแ เห กไฟ าสอดค องตามมาตรฐานความปลอด ย อ ขภาพของม ษ จากการใช ้เค อง ท คมนาคม คณะกรรมการ จการโทรคมนาคมแ งชา ประกาศ าหนด เค องโทรคมนาคมและ ปกร ความสอดค องตามมาตรฐานห อ อกาหนดทางเทค คของ กสทช. เค อง ท คมนาคม ระ บการแ ค นแ เห กไฟ าสอดค องตามมาตรฐานความปลอด ย อ ขภาพของม ษ จากการใ เค อง ท คมนาคม เค...
- Page 522 Чистий і шлях© Імпорт та експорт ТОВ компанії Десь Ave. 14 01004 Київ Україна BSD 3.0 24,05 - 24,25 GHz 20 dBm LCA 2.0 24,05 - 24,25 GHz 20 dBm 24,05 - 24,25 GHz 20 dBm 1APTV R3TR, 1BOSC0001, 1O094.007280-19, 0848, UA.R.TR.052.081-20 повний текст декларації про відповідність доступний на веб-сайті за такою адресою: www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo. ЛГ Електроникс Въєтнам Хай Фонг Ко., Лтд., Лот СН2, Транг Дъю Индастриал Парк, Лє Лой Комуна, Ан, Дуонг Дистрикт, Хай Фонг Сити, Въєтнам; Koppelantenne Gen.3, UA.TR.109.0009-18, UA.TR.109.R.0336-19, UA.TR.109.R.0337-19, UA.TR.109.R.0425-18, UA.TR.028, 1O094.007280-19 0754, 0781, 0816, 0826, 0848, 0849, 0869, 0870, 0871, 0872, 0874, 0880, 0911, 0912, 0942, 0978, 0992, 0993, 1004, 1033 справжнім (найменування виробника MANUFACTURER) заявляє, що тип радіообладнання (позначення типу радіообладнання DESIGNATION) відповідає Технічному регламенту радіообладнання. повний текст декларації про відповідність доступний на веб-сайті за такою адресою: www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo ЛГ Електроникс Въєтнам Хай Фонг Ко., Лтд., Лот СН2, Транг Дъю Индастриал Парк, Лє Лой Комуна, Ан, Дуонг Дистрикт, Хай Фонг Сити, Въєтнам; United Arab Emirates TRA, REGISTERED No, DEALER No ER49719/16, DA0062437/11, ER50430/16, ER53878/17, DA44932/15, ER54754/17, DA0043253/10, ER55421/17, DA36758/14, ER61136/18, DA40068, ER61137/18, DA0089862/12, ER66978/18, DA36758/14, ER68006/18, DA40068/15ER70009/19, DA44932, ER70046/19, DA44932, ER70554/19, DA0043253/10, ER70659/19, DA44932/15, ER71148/19, DA0043253/10, ER71413/19, DA0089862/12, ER71414/19. Vietnam B1189140520AF04A2, C00082015, C0118220519AF04A2, C0119220519AF04A2 Belarus BY/112 11.01.TP024 020 00007 BY/112 11.01.TP024 020 00008 BY/112 11.01.TP024 020 00047 BY/112 11.01.TP024 020 00059...
- Page 523 data in the official vehicle documents always take precedence. The vehicle data sticker and the official vehicle documents show which drive and which power output are installed in your vehicle. (→ N1 approval) Please observe the notes and information for vehicles with N1 approval Weight The values for the kerb weight in the following tables apply to the road-ready vehicle with driver ( 75 kg (165 lbs)), service fluids including fuel tank carrying 90% of its capacity and, where applicable, tools and spare tyre. Additional equipment and retrofitted accessories increase the stated kerb weight and reduce the maximum permitted load accordingly. The load comprises the weights of the following: —Passengers —All luggage —Add-on parts —Roof load —Drawbar load when towing a trailer The permitted gross vehicle weight rating and gross axle weight rating must never be exceeded. The permitted values are provided on the safety certificate (“safety compliance label”) on the B-pillar on the driver side (→ Safety certificate) Performance figures The performance figures were measured without equipment which may detrimentally affect performance, such as add-on parts. The power output and performance figures may differ for reasons of vehicle registration or vehicle taxation. The maximum speed may be limited and may therefore be lower for some engine versions in vehicles equipped with heavy- duty running gear. Gross combination weight The gross combination weight ratings listed apply only to altitudes up to 1,000 m (3000 ft) above sea level. The maximum gross combination weight rating must be reduced by approximately 10% for every further started 1,000 m (3000 ft) in altitude. Gradient angle The gradient angle is an indication of the vehicle’s gradeability and corresponds to the gradient that the vehicle can drive up under its own power. This depends on aspects such as the road surface, weather conditions and engine power. The values apply to a moving vehicle and not to driving off from standstill. The number of metres in height gained over a distance of 100 m (300 ft) (gradient) will be given as a percentage or degree value (100% = 45 degrees). Structure of the vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number VIN comprises 17 characters. These characters are categorised into seven groups. The basic structure is explained below using the example of the vehicle identification number WVWZZZCBZLE400953. This is an example. Group Position: Example...
- Page 524 Volkswagen Passenger Cars VW Touareg/Auto 5000 AMPV Volkswagen Group of America Inc., Volkswagen de México, S.A. de C.V Volkswagen de México, S.A. de C.V LLC Volkswagen Group Rus (Volkswagen/Skoda Kaluga) Garuda Matraman Motor (Indonesia) Filler characters: the filler characters may differ depending on manufacturer or contain information about the body or gearbox type. Vehicle class per model: Arteon Touran Polo T-Roc Cabriolet Golf Passat Atlas...
- Page 525 Depending on manufacturer, the places 7 to 9 can also contain information on the fuel type ( 7) and vehicle class (8 and 9). Filler or check character: the filler characters may differ depending on manufacturer. VIN index per model year: 2,019 2,020 2,021 2,022 Production location, manufacturing plant: Volkswagen Chattanooga Plant Volkswagen Bratislava Plant Volkswagen Emden Plant G, K Volkswagen Kaluga Plant Volkswagen Puebla Plant Volkswagen Zwickau Plant Volkswagen Pune Plant V, U Volkswagen Palmela Plant...
- Page 526 Volkswagen Wolfsburg Plant Volkswagen Pamplona Plant Sequential production number in a model year. Position of the vehicle identification number Fig. 1 In the windscreen: vehicle identification number. The vehicle identification number can be read from outside the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. The viewer is located in the lower corner of the windscreen. For some models, depending on the Infotainment system version, the vehicle identification number can be displayed in the Service menu or in the vehicle settings. The vehicle identification number can also be found on the type plate. Depending on model, market and engine, the vehicle identification number may also be stamped at one of the following locations: —In the engine compartment in the right water drainage channel. —In the engine compartment on the right suspension turret. —In the engine compartment close to the bonnet hinge on the right side of the vehicle. —Behind the right front seat under the floor covering. Fig. 1 Type plate (illustration). Depending on country, the number of the type approval, e.g. EC type approval number, may be specified. 1 Gross vehicle weight rating. 2 Gross combination weight rating (vehicle plus trailer). 3 Gross front axle weight rating. 4 Gross rear axle weight rating.
- Page 527 Depending on country and model, the type plate is visible in the lower area of the door pillar after opening the driver or front passenger door. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate. Safety certificate Fig. 1 Safety certificate (illustration). Fig. 2 Safety certificate (illustration). A safety certificate on the door pillar in the driver door shows the following information: —Vehicle type —Manufacturer —Date of manufacture —Country of manufacture —Vehicle identification number...
- Page 528 Vehicle data sticker Fig. 1 Illustration: vehicle data sticker 1 Vehicle identification number (chassis number). 2 Vehicle type, engine power, gearbox type. 3 Engine and gearbox codes, paint number, interior equipment. In the example, the engine code is CPTA. 4 Optional extras, PR numbers. The vehicle data sticker is located inside the front cover of the owner's manual and in the area of the luggage compartment. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle data sticker is affixed under the luggage compartment trim on the luggage compartment wall or luggage compartment floor, in the spare wheel well or on the cross panel. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine code may be displayed on the instrument cluster (→ Displays)
- Page 529 Dimensions Fig. 1 Illustration: dimensions. The data in the table applies to the German basic model with the basic specification. The specified values can vary due to different wheel rim and tyre sizes, additional equipment, different model versions or retrofitted accessories, and also for special vehicles and vehicles that have been manufactured for other countries. Key to Fig. 1 Value Width (from exterior mirror to exterior mirror) 1,992 mm Width 1,819 mm Front track 1,538 mm – 1,546 mm Rear track 1,533 mm – 1547 mm Height to the upper edge of the roof at kerb weight 1,531 mm Height at kerb weight 1,573 mm with navigation aerial Height to the roof railing at kerb weight 1,552 mm Length with fitted towing bracket (when supplied from factory) 4,348 mm Length (from bumper to bumper) 4,234 mm Wheelbase 2590 mm – 2593 mm Ground clearance when ready to drive 158 mm – 161 mm between the axles Height with open bonnet at kerb weight 1838 mm Height with open boot lid at kerb weight 2,089 mm Turning circle diameter Approx. 11.1 m...
- Page 530 Tank capacities The fuel tank has the following capacity: —approx. 50 l (13.2 gallons) —approx. 55 l (14.5 gallons) in vehicles with all-wheel drive The fuel tank capacity includes an unspecified reserve quantity which remains in the tank when the tank gauge indicates that the tank is empty. The reserve quantity is variable and cannot be reliably used to increase the remaining range.
- Page 531 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Power output 85 kW Engine code DLAA Maximum torque 200 Nm Gearbox ® → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Maximum speed km/h → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Kerb weight 1,294 → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Gross vehicle weight rating 1,790 Gross front axle weight → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW rating → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Gross rear axle weight rating → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Maximum trailer weight 1,300 braked, gradients up to → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Maximum trailer weight 1,500 braked, gradients up to 8% → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Maximum trailer weight unbraked → 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Maximum permitted gross 3,090 combination weight...
- Page 532 1.5 l, 4-cylinder TSI®, 110 kW Power output 110 kW Engine code DADA Maximum torque 250 Nm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,350 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,860 Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,500 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,700 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,360 combination weight...
- Page 533 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TSI® 4MOTION, 140 kW Power output 140 kW Engine code DKZA Maximum torque 320 Nm Gearbox 7 4MOTION ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,504 Gross vehicle weight rating 2,000 Gross front axle weight 1,060 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,700 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,900 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,700 combination weight...
- Page 534 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TSI®, 140 kW Power output 140 kW Engine code CZPB Maximum torque 320 Nm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,504 Gross vehicle weight rating 2,000 Gross front axle weight 1,060 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,700 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,900 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,700 combination weight...
- Page 535 1.5 l, 4-cylinder TSI®, 110 kW Power output 110 kW Engine code DPCA Maximum torque 250 Nm Gearbox 7 4MOTION ® ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,347 1,354 1,354 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,860 1,870 1,870 Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,500 1,500 1,500 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,700 1,700 1,700 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,360 3,370 3,370 combination weight...
- Page 536 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW Power output 85 kW Engine code DKRF Maximum torque 200 Nm Gearbox Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,297 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,790 Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,300 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,500 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,090 combination weight...
- Page 537 1.4 l, 4-cylinder TSI®, 110 kW Power output 110 kW Engine code DJKA Maximum torque 250 Nm Gearbox Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,350 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,850 Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,500 braked, gradients up to 12 Maximum trailer weight 1,700 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,350 combination weight...
- Page 538 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TSI® 4MOTION, 140 kW Power output 140 kW Engine code DNNA Maximum torque 320 Nm Gearbox 7 4MOTION ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,504 Gross vehicle weight rating 2,000 Gross front axle weight 1,060 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,700 braked, gradients up to 12 Maximum trailer weight 1,900 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,700 combination weight...
- Page 539 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TSI® 4MOTION, 221 kW Power output 221 kW Engine code DNUE Maximum torque 400 Nm Gearbox 7 4MOTION ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,572 Gross vehicle weight rating 2,080 Gross front axle weight 1,080 rating Gross rear axle weight 1,050 rating Maximum trailer weight 1,700 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,900 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,780 combination weight...
- Page 540 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 85 kW Power output 85 kW Engine code DTRD Maximum torque 300 Nm Gearbox → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 85 kW Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,414 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,920 Gross front axle weight 1,040 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,500 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,800 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,420 combination weight...
- Page 541 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 110 kW Power output 110 kW Engine code DTTC Maximum torque 360 Nm Gearbox ® → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 110 kW Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,552 Gross vehicle weight rating 2,060 Gross front axle weight 1,090 rating Gross rear axle weight 1,020 rating Maximum trailer weight 1,700 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,900 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,760 combination weight...
- Page 542 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 110 kW Power output 110 kW Engine code DTTA Maximum torque 340 Nm Gearbox → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 110 kW Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,411 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,920 Gross front axle weight 1,040 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,600 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,800 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,520 combination weight...
- Page 543 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Power output 147 kW Engine code DTUA Maximum torque 400 Nm Gearbox ® → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Maximum speed km/h → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Kerb weight → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Gross vehicle weight rating Gross front axle weight → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW rating → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Gross rear axle weight rating → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Maximum trailer weight braked, gradients up to → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Maximum trailer weight braked, gradients up to 8% → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Maximum trailer weight unbraked → 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 147 kW Maximum permitted gross combination weight...
- Page 544 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 105 kW Power output 105 kW Engine code CRVC Maximum torque 320 Nm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,421 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,920 Gross front axle weight 1,050 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,600 braked, gradients up to 12 Maximum trailer weight 1,800 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,520 combination weight...
- Page 545 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 110 kW Power output 110 kW Engine code DFFA Maximum torque 340 Nm Gearbox MG6 4MOTION 7 4MOTION ® ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,505 1,411 1,532 1,445 Gross vehicle weight rating 2,020 1,920 2,040 1,960 Gross front axle weight 1,060 1,040 1,080 1,070 rating Gross rear axle weight 1,010 1,010 rating Maximum trailer weight 1,700 1,600 1,700 1,600 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1,900 1,800...
- Page 546 1.6 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 85 kW Power output 85 kW Engine code DGTE Maximum torque 250 Nm Gearbox Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,391 Gross vehicle weight rating 1,890 Gross front axle weight 1,020 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weight 1,500 braked, gradients up to 12 Maximum trailer weight 1,800 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,390 combination weight...
- Page 547 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TDI®, 140 kW Power output 140 kW Engine code DFHA Maximum torque 400 Nm Gearbox 7 4MOTION ® Maximum speed km/h Kerb weight 1,556 Gross vehicle weight rating 2,070 Gross front axle weight 1,100 rating Gross rear axle weight 1,020 rating Maximum trailer weight 1,800 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 2,000 braked, gradients up to 8% Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permitted gross 3,870 combination weight...
Need help?
Do you have a question about the T-Roc and is the answer not in the manual?
Questions and answers